abrasives - KM Digital Design

IKOHE a trusted name in Jewelry Crafting Techniques offers you an
innovative line of Tools, Supplies and Equipment to transform your
visions into contemporary or traditional art forms. We are delighted to
present our comprehensive catalog with dedicated sections that feature a
concise listing of pictorially illustrated products. With years of experience,
we have become a primary supplier to the needs of metalsmiths in the
industry. To meet the challenges of modern day techniques our range of
selected professional tools covers all aspects of jewelry making, wax
carving, casting, raising, forming, sculpting, setting, finishing and
more.....
Over the years, we’ve built a reputation for on-time delivery, competitive
pricing and quality tested products to satisfy the demanding needs of
distributors and professional jewelers.
Today, we’re better prepared than ever to meet the growing needs of
global markets that have changed over the years. When
you think of quality with value - Think IKOHE.
Polishing
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Abrasives
Bench Accessories
Brushes
Buffs
Burs
Casting
Cleaners
Dapping
Diamond Tools & Supplies
Drawplates & Rolling Mills
Drills
Engraving
Ikohe Inc.
• 19 Industiral Ave • Mahwah
• NJ • 07430
&More.....
Finishing
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Files
Flexshafts
Gauges
Gravers
Hammers
Lamps & Loupes
Plating
Pliers & Shears
Polishing
Ring Tools
Safety
Saw Frames & Blades
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scales
Screwdrivers
Setting Tools
Soldering
Stamping
Surface Finishing
Tags
Testing
Torches
Tweezers
Vises
Watch Tools
Waxes
Books
™
ABRASIVES
1. India Combination Stone
Made from aluminum oxide, these stones provide a keen cutting edge on gravers and other tools.
Lubrication with a light oil is essential. Available as a combination-one side coarse and the other fine.
Color-Orange/Brown.
CODE
AT-026
AT-034
2.
®
SIZE
6” X 2” X 1”
8” X 2” X 1”
GRADE
COARSE/FINE
COARSE/FINE
India Oil Stone
Made from superior grade aluminum oxide. Enhances cutting edges on knives, chisels, gravers and
other precision tools. Lubrication with a light oil smear eliminates swarf build up during use.
CODE
AT-027
AT-028
AT-029
AT-033
SIZE
GRADE
FINE
4” X 1” X 1/2”
6” X 2” X 1”
FINE
8” X 2” X 1”
FINE
WOOD BOX FOR -AT-028/AT-031
CODE
AT-030
AT-031
AT-032
SIZE
4” X 1” X 1/2”
6” X 2” X 1”
8” X 2” X 1”
GRADE
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
3. Ruby Bench Stone
Made of pure synthetic ruby crystals, these stones have outstanding wear resistance and are
therefore specially suited for sharpening carbide gravers and tools. Use with or without light
oil lubrication.
CODE
AT-053
AT-054
AT-055
AT-056
SIZE
4” X 1” X 3/8”
4” X 1” X 3/8”
4” X 1” X 3/8”
4” X 1” X 3/8”
GRADE
FINE TWO SIDES
MED.TWO SIDES
FINE ONE SIDE
MED. ONE SIDE
CODE
AT-057
AT-058
SIZE
43/4” X 2” X 3/8”
43/4” X 2” X 3/8”
GRADE
FINE ONE SIDE
MED. ONE SIDE
4. 3M ® Diamond Whetstone
A superb flat surface coated with graded diamond particles. Achieve a mirror like finish on carbide
gravers for free cutting. Lubricate lightly with water.
CODE
AT-022
AT-023
AT-024
AT-025
SIZE
4” X 1”
4” X 1”
4” X 1”
4” X 1”
MICRON
125
74
40
20
GRIT
120
200
400
800
CODE
AT-025-01
AT-025-02
AT-025-03
AT-025-04
SIZE MICRON
6” X 2”
125
6” X 2”
74
6” X 2”
40
6” X 2”
20
GRIT
120
200
400
800
5. Graver Sharpening Stone
Diamond sharpening stones are designed to fine finish the edges of gravers, screwdrivers and tools.
A sharper stronger tool edge allows you to achieve cleaner lines and brighter cuts. Lubricate with
water. Size 6” X 2” X 1/4”.
CODE
AT-025-06
AT-025-07
2
GRIT
600
1200
GRADE
FINE
X-FINE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ABRASIVES
6. Original Arkansas Stones
Natural Arkansas stones are excellent for sharpening and final honing of gravers. Available in hard and ultra
hard grades. Hard grades are dense-grained and ideal for pre-sharpening. Ultra hard are close-grained for
final honing. Lubricate with a light oil for rapid cutting.
CODE
SIZE
GRADE
CODE
SIZE
GRADE
HARD
AT-004
4” X 2” X 1/2”
EX-HARD
AT-014
4” X 2” X 1/2”
AT-006
6” X 2” X 1/2”
HARD
EX-HARD
AT-016
6” X 2” X 1/2”
HARD
AT-008
8” X 2” X 1/2”
AT-018
8” X 2” X 1/2”
EX-HARD
Imported Arkansas
CODE
AT-020
AT-021
AT-021-01
AT-021-02
7.
SIZE
100 X 40 X 12mm
100 X 50 X 12mm
125 X 50 X 18mm
150 X 40 X 18mm
®
GRADE
HARD
HARD
HARD
HARD
CODE
AT-021-03
AT-021-04
AT-021-05
SIZE
150 X 50 X 18mm
175 X 50 X 18mm
200 X 50 X 18mm
GRADE
HARD
HARD
HARD
Oil
Specially formulated for use as a lubricant on sharpening stones. Avoids swarf build up and speeds up the
sharpening process.
CODE
CONTENTS
AT-036
41/2 oz
AT-037
8 oz
8. 3M ® Sanding Bands-Silicon Carbide(Sic) & Aluminum Oxide(Alo)
Ideal for deburring, smoothing, and finishing flat or contoured surfaces. These bands are ready to use,
slip-on type and easily mounted on drum arbors. Available in silicon carbide or aluminum oxide in grits from
coarse to fine. Suitable for pre-polish of gold, silver and alloys. Speed- max 30,000 rpm.
For arbors- page 9.
SiC
AT-147
AT-147-01
AT-147-02
AT-147-03
ALo
AT-147-10
AT-147-11
AT-147-12
AT-147-13
DIA. X L
/4” X 1/2”
1
/4” X 1/2”
1
/4” X 1/2”
1
/4” X 1/2”
1
GRIT
80
120
180
240
SiC
AT-147-05
AT-147-06
AT-147-07
AT-147-08
ALo
AT-147-15
AT-147-16
AT-147-17
AT-147-18
DIA. X L
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
GRIT
80
120
180
240
9. 3M ® Ceramic Bands
New ceramic wear resistant abrasive lasts three to four times longer than normal aluminum oxide.
Provides a fast cutting rate that will increase productivity and lower band cost. Lubricate with water.
Speed -15,000- max 25,000 rpm. Use with expandable drum arbors- page 9.
CODE
AT-480
AT-479
DIA. X L
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
GRIT
120
150
1
CODE
AT-482
AT-481
DIA. X L
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
GRIT
60
80
10. 3M ® Flex Diamond Bands
Coated with graded diamond abrasive in micron sizes, these bands are unsurpassed for inside ring mirror
finishing. Interspaced diamond nodes effectively smooth all surfaces withstanding any debris buildup.
Speed- 15,000- max 20,000 rpm. Use with expanding drum arbors- page 9.
CODE
AT-467
AT-468
AT-469
AT-470
AT-471
DIA. X L
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
Safety Instructions
Page 40
MICRON
250
125
74
40
20
CODE
AT-472
AT-473
AT-474
AT-475
AT-476
DIA. X L
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
MICRON
250
125
74
40
20
3
™
ABRASIVES
11. 3M ® Trizact Sanding Bands
Sanding bands of coated aluminum oxide with cutting points evenly spaced over the entire area.
Abrasion is gentle and smooth, reducing buffing or tumbling time. Bands may be used in lapidary and
metal work. Speed- max 10,000 rpm. Use with expanding drum arbors - page 9.
CODE
AT-450
AT-451
AT-452
AT-453
AT-454
AT-455
AT-456
DIA. X L
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
GRIT
200
220
280
400
600
1200
2500
GRADE
A100
A80
A65
A45
A30
A16
A6
CODE
AT-457
AT-458
AT-459
AT-460
AT-461
AT-462
AT-463
DIA. X L
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
GRIT
200
220
280
400
600
1200
2500
GRADE
A100
A80
A65
A45
A30
A16
A6
12. 3M ® Tri-mite Wet or Dry Coated Abrasive Sheets
These silicon carbide paper sheets may be used wet or dry to achieve a fine uniform surface finish.
Available in 9” x 11” sheets.
CODE
AT-275
AT-276
AT-277
AT-278
AT-279
AT-280
GRIT
180
220
320
400
600
800
CODE
AT-281
AT-282
AT-283
AT-284
AT-285
GRIT
1000
1200
1500
2000
2500
13. 3M ® Imperial Micro-Finishing Film Sheets
Micron graded aluminum oxide, bonded to a flexible backing, gives predictable surface finishes on all
materials. Film sheet backing is durable. Moisten with water as a lubricant. Satin-like finishes are possible.
Color coded for identification. Available in 81/2” x 11” sheets.
CODE
AT-296
AT-297
AT-298
AT-299
MICRON
80
60
40
30
GRIT
180
220
280
400
COLOR
BROWN
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
CODE
AT-300
AT-301
AT-302
MICRON
20
15
9
GRIT
500
600
1200
COLOR
RED
ORANGE
LT. BLUE
14. 3M ® Wet or Dry™ Polishing Paper
A more pliable, non-woven, lint free backing allows overall finishing of interiors, exteriors, and contours.
Soft particles of micron sized abrasive eliminate mars on the work surface. Color coded for easy
identification. May be used moist or dry. Available in 81/2” x 11” sheets.
CODE
AT-290
AT-291
AT-292
MICRON
30
15
9
GRIT
400
600
1200
COLOR
GREEN
GRAY
BLUE
CODE
AT-293
AT-294
AT-295
MICRON
3
2
1
GRIT
4000
6000
8000
COLOR
PINK
MINT
GREEN
15. 3M ® Platinum Fre-Cut Abrasive Sheet
Tri-m-ite, Fre-cut is silicon carbide abrasive paper for pre-surfacing platinum. This new abrasive is
well suited for use on platinum. Use dry only. Sheet size 9” x 11”.
CODE
AT-250
AT-251
AT-252
4
GRIT
360
400
500
GRADE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ABRASIVES
16. 3M ® PSA Diamond Lapping Discs
Consistently graded diamond particles on a pressure
sensitive disc, yields superior surface quality on precious
metals and platinum. Always use discs with water to
reduce heat build up and increase cutting capability.
Discs are all 6” in diameter. Use with a flat flange of 6”
diameter. Speed- max 3,000 rpm.
CODE
AT-254-14
AT-254-15
AT-254-16
MICRON
9
6
1
GRIT
1200
3000
8000
17. 3M ® PSA Sanding Discs
Pressure sensitive backed, these silicon carbide discs are suitable for pre-finishing lapidary and metal.
Use wet or dry. Must be used with a flat flange of 6” diameter. Speed- max 3,000 rpm.
CODE
AT-253
AT-253-01
AT-253-02
DIA.
6”
6”
6”
GRIT
240
400
600
18. 3M ® Micro-Finishing PSA Discs
Superior graded aluminum oxide. Pressure sensitive discs have applications in jewelry and lapidary work.
Consistent results are ensured by graded microns. May be used wet or dry. Speed- max 3,000 rpm.
Discs are all 6” diameter.
CODE
AT-254
AT-254-01
MICRON
60
30
GRADE
180
400
CODE
AT-254-02
AT-254-03
MICRON
15
9
GRADE
600
1200
19. 3M ® PSA-Flex Diamond Strips
Pressure sensitive adhesive backed flexible diamond strips are for custom tooling. These may be attached
to hand files or sanding sticks to sand, smooth and file any material. Available as strips of 1” width X 8” long
with uniform diamond surfaces in different grits.
CODE
AT-254-05
AT-254-06
AT-254-07
AT-254-08
MICRON
74
40
20
10
GRIT
200
400
800
1800
20. 3M ® Cartridge Rolls-Full Regular
A practical method for finishing insides and blind holes. A distinctive feature of the rolls is that no sooner
than the upper layer wears away, the layer beneath gets exposed, to continue the smoothing process.
Speed 15,000 -max 20,000 rpm. Use with cartridge mandrels - page 16
CODE
DIA. X L
SHANK
AT-487
AT-488
AT-489
AT-490
AT-491
AT-492
AT-493
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/2” X 3/4”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
GRIT
CODE
DIA. X L
SHANK
60
80
100
120
180
240
320
AT-494
AT-495
AT-496
AT-497
AT-498
AT-499
AT-500
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
GRIT
CODE
DIA. X L
SHANK
60
120
60
AT-504
AT-505
AT-506
1
/2” X 11/2”
1
/2” X 11/2”
1
/2” X 11/2”
1
21. 3M ® Cartridge Rolls-Full Tapered
CODE
DIA. X L
SHANK
AT-501
AT-502
AT-503
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 11/2”
1
Safety Instructions
Page 40
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
GRIT
60
80
100
120
180
240
320
GRIT
80
120
180
5
™
ABRASIVES
22.
#53
#54
#74
Small Rubber Bonded Wheels
All CRATEX products are made with the highest grades of raw materials. The perfect blend of soft but
durable chemical rubber and silicon carbide abrasive grains contribute to the assurance of receiving
reliable high quality products, time after time. Each Cratex product is color coded for easy selection.
Coarse(Green), Medium(Brown), Fine(Red) and Ex-Fine(Gray/Green). Depending on which color
grit used, Cratex can debur, smooth, clean, blend or polish without chance of gouging the work surface
(Precious Metals, Glass, Stone and plastic). All wheels have a 1/16” center and can be used with either a
3
/32” or 1/8” shank. Maximum speed 25,000 rpm. Use with 1/16” mandrel- page 16.
#80
#2
SHAPE
DIA. X THICK
STYLE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
EX-FINE
WHEEL
WHEEL
WHEEL
WHEEL
K/EDGE
K/EDGE
5
/8” X 3/32”
5
/8” X 1/8”
7
/8” X 1/8”
1” X 1/8”
5
/8” X 3/32”
1” X 1/8”
53
54
74
80
2
5
AC-001
AC-005
AC-009
AC-013
AC-017
AC-021
AC-002
AC-006
AC-010
AC-014
AC-018
AC-022
AC-003
AC-007
AC-011
AC-015
AC-019
AC-023
AC-004
AC-008
AC-012
AC-016
AC-020
AC-024
#5
23.
Cylinders & Points
For use with light pressure. Maximum safe speed 25,000 rpm. Use with 1/16” mandrel- page 16.
SHAPE
DIA. X THICK
STYLE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
EX-FINE
CYLINDER
BULLET
7
/8” X 1/4”
1” X 9/32”
6
8
AC-025
AC-029
AC-026
AC-030
AC-027
AC-031
AC-028
AC-032
24.
Large Wheel
For best performance operate below the maximum 5,250 rpm. Sold individually.
SHAPE
DIA. X T X H
STYLE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
EX-FINE
WHEEL
4” X 1/2” X 1/2”
408
AC-033
AC-034
AC-035
AC-036
25.
Assortment Kits
STYLE #777
Assortment contains 80 small wheels and points in
popular sizes and grits. Comes with four mandrels
and 5/8” to 1” sizes of wheels and points in clear
divided box.
STYLE #778
Assortment contains 64 points and cylinders,
2 each of all eight shapes in each of the 4 grits and
4 each 1/8” shank mandrel.
6
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AC-037
AC-038
80 PCS ASSORTMENT-#777
64 PCS ASSORTMENT-#778
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ABRASIVES
26. 3M ® Shop Rolls
A premium quality abrasive glue bonded to cloth and available in two widths and different grades.
Useful for in-house fabrication of flap wheels, sanding sticks and other shapes. Generates a smooth,
clean surface on all materials.
CODE
AT-342
AT-343
AT-344
AT-348
SIZE
1” X 50yds
1” X 50yds
1” X 50yds
1” X 50yds
GRIT
80
120
180
320
CODE
AT-360
AT-362
AT-363
AT-367
SIZE
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
GRIT
80
120
180
320
27. 3M ® Blue Grit Shop Rolls
Tough aluminum oxide bonded to cloth with 3M's Resinite. This technique extends the life four to five times
of conventional shop rolls. May be used for flap wheels or sanding sticks.
CODE
AT-350
AT-351
AT-352
AT-353
SIZE
1” X 50yds
1” X 50yds
1” X 50yds
1” X 50yds
GRIT
80
120
180
240
CODE
AT-370
AT-371
AT-372
AT-373
SIZE
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
GRIT
80
120
180
240
28. 3M ® Silicon Carbide Stikit Rolls-Platinum
Tri-M-ite Fre-cut, 414N paper open coat. Provides exceptional finishes and excellent conformability for contour sanding.
CODE
AT-180-02
AT-180-03
29.
SIZE
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
®
GRIT
80
100
CODE
AT-180-04
AT-180-05
SIZE
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
GRIT
120
150
Shop Rolls
Aluminum oxide, glue bonded to a cloth backing. Available in rolls of convenient widths. This makes it
suitable for use in numerous applications: making flaps, regular or tapered cones and split mandrels. May be
used for pre-finishing all materials.
CODE
AT-180-01
AT-180
AT-179
AT-178
AT-177
AT-176
AT-175
AT-174
30.
SIZE
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
11/2” X 50yds
®
GRIT
60
80
100
120
150
180
220
240
CODE
AT-203
AT-204
AT-205
AT-206
AT-208
Emery Cloth Sheets
Commercial emery, glue bonded to durable cloth backing in three
grades. Tougher than paper, these cloths are used for pre-finishing any
type of material. Sheet size 9” x 11”.
CODE
AT-266
AT-267
AT-268
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
SIZE
2” X 50yds
2” X 50yds
2” X 50yds
2” X 50yds
2” X 50yds
31.
GRIT
80
120
150
180
240
®
Emery Discs-PSA
Soft, adhesive backed emery discs, directly affix on felt wheel faces.
Economical to use either wet or dry.
CODE
AT-255
AT-256
AT-257
SIZE
6”
6”
6”
GRIT
80
100
120
7
™
ABRASIVES
32.
®
Emery Polishing Paper
Corundum grains are glue bonded to a paper back. Finely graded, these papers smooth surfaces to a
high degree of finish. Efficient for dry, satin smooth polishing. Sheet size 81/2” X 14”.
CODE
AT-167
AT-168
AT-169
33.
GRIT
4/0
3/0
2/0
®
GRADE
FINE
FINE
FINE
CODE
AT-170
AT-171
AT-172
AT-173
GRIT
0
#1
#2
#3
GRADE
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
COARSE
COARSE
No Fil Durite Paper
Sharp silicon carbide abrasive bonded onto light weight paper backing. These papers are flexible yet
durable. Excellent for finishing hard materials like platinum. Sheet size 9” X 11”.
CODE
AT-269
AT-269-01
AT-269-02
GRIT
80
120
150
CODE
AT-269-03
AT-269-04
GRIT
180
220
34. No-Lap Bands
Spiral construction avoids shadow marks and provides smooth, fast cutting action on all hard metals.
Achieve close tolerances when finishing curved, contoured and hard-to-reach areas.
For arbors page 9.
CODE
AT-148
AT-148-01
AT-148-02
DIA. X L
/8” X 1/2”
3
/8” X 1/2”
3
/8” X 1/2”
3
GRIT
120
80
60
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
CODE
AT-148-03
AT-148-04
AT-148-05
DIA. X L
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
GRIT
120
80
60
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
35. Cartridge Rolls
Most effective for flash removal, polishing or removing machine tool marks and edge breaking.
Reaches into corners where larger diameter tools cannot work. Available in Aluminum Oxide resin
bond. Use with cartridge roll mandrels- page 16
CODE
AT-150
AT-151
AT-152
DIA. X L
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
/2” X 1”
1
GRIT
180
120
80
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
CODE
AT-154
AT-155
AT-156
DIA. X L
/2” X 11/2”
1
/2” X 11/2”
1
/2” X 11/2”
1
GRIT
180
120
80
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
36. Flap Wheels
Use on flex shafts for blending flat or contoured surfaces. Maximum speed 15,000 rpm. Shank size 3/32”.
CODE
SIZE
GRIT
CODE
SIZE
GRIT
AT-149
AT-149-01
AT-149-02
AT-149-03
20 X 10mm
20 X 10mm
20 X 10mm
20 X 10mm
100
150
240
320
AT-149-04
AT-149-05
AT-149-06
AT-149-07
20 X 5mm
20 X 5mm
20 X 5mm
20 X 5mm
100
150
240
320
37. Ring Shell Mandrels
38. Emery Ring Shells
Made of seasoned wood, these mandrels provide a snug fit for emery ring
shells, either paper or cloth. A pre-drilled center enables direct fitment to
the arbor of the bench polisher.
Ring shells of emery, on paper or cloth backing fit closely on wooden
mandrels. These tapered cones are a great way to polish the inside of rings
of all sizes. Available in a set of grades from coarse to fine.
8
CODE
LENGTH
AT-182
AT-190
7”
6”
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AT-270
AT-271
AT-272
AT-273
PAPER SHELLS PKG. OF 12
PAPER SHELLS PKG. OF 6 & MANDREL
CLOTH SHELLS PKG. OF 12
CLOTH SHELLS PKG. OF 6 & MANDREL
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ABRASIVES
39. Emery Sticks
Various grades of emery paper, glued to flat wood handles 3/4” X 9”, provide a solution for sanding and
polishing all materials during manual finishing. Select from various grades.
CODE
AT-260
AT-261
AT-262
GRIT
4/0
3/0
2/0
GRADE
FINE
FINE
FINE
CODE
AT-263
AT-264
AT-265
GRIT
#1
#2
#3
GRADE
MEDIUM
COARSE
COARSE
40. Cone-Loc Drum Sander for Shop Rolls
Precision machined aluminum rubber lined drum used for metal finishing applications, such as contour
sanding and sprue removal. Unique split drum accepts a length of abrasive cloth strip, which when
worn away is easily replaceable. May be used on bench polishers with 1/2” arbor.
CODE
DC-030
DC-031
DIA. X T
6” X 11/2”
6” X 2”
41. Aluminum Back Plate for Split Lap
Aluminum flat back plate similar to a split lap, easy to use with various grades of 6” and 8” PSA
abrasive discs. These plates are used on split lap machine.
CODE
AT-258
AT-259
DIA. X HOLE
6” X 5/8”
8” X 5/8”
L
42. Expandable Drum Arbors
Steel arbors with a solid synthetic rubber drum expand evenly when tightened with a screw.
Secures sanding bands firmly and provides a cushioned support for uniform finishing.
CODE
AT-145
AT-145-01
AT-145-04
SHANK SIZE
/32”
3
/32”
3
/32”
3
DIA. X L
/4” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1”
1
CODE
AT-145-02
AT-145-03
AT-145-05
SHANK SIZE
/8”
1
/8”
1
/8”
1
Dia
DIA. X L
/4” X 1/2”
/2” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1”
1
1
43. High Speed Cut-off Wheels
Regular thickness aluminum oxide wheels in a rubber bond. Useful for free hand cutting or carving.
Arbor hole is 1/16”. Speed-max 20,000 rpm. Use with a mandrel.-page 16.
CODE
AT-186
AT-187
DIA. X T
11/2” X 0.025”
11/2” X 0.040”
0.025” 0.040”
44. Separating Discs
Small discs of silicon carbide and aluminum oxide in a flexible bond for cutting and grooving. These discs
are cut on both sides and easily part sprues in any material. Speed max 20,000 rpm.
Use with 1/16” mandrel.-page16
CODE
AT-189
AT-188
AT-191
DIA. X T
/8” X 0.006”
7
/8” X 0.009”
7
/8” X 0.015”
7
Safety Instructions
Page 40
TYPE
SUPER FLEX
SUPER THIN
EXTRA THIN
CODE
AT-192
AT-193
DIA. X T
/8” X 0.025”
15
/16” X 0.025”
7
TYPE
REGULAR
HIGH SPEED
AT-191
AT-193
0.006” 0.009” 0.015” 0.025”
9
™
ABRASIVES
45. Zirconia Pin Hole Sanding Discs
Zirconia sanding discs are superior to other conventional abrasives. Aggressively cuts and grinds
metals with uniform file-like finish. Prolong life by using water as a lubricant.
Speed max- 30,000 rpm. Packed 100 per box. Use with 1/16” mandrel- page 16.
CODE
AT-530
AT-531
AT-532
DIA.
/4”
3
/4”
3
/4”
3
GRADE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
CODE
AT-533
AT-534
AT-535
DIA.
/8”
7
/8”
7
/8”
GRADE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
7
46. Adalox Pin Hole Sanding Discs
These are thin paper backed discs with aluminum oxide glue bonded on one side. Specially for use in
sanding and smoothing gold jewelry. Speed max- 30,000 rpm. Use with screw mandrels.- page 16.
Packed 100 per box.
CODE
AT-209
AT-210
AT-211
AT-212
AT-213
DIA.
11/2”
11/2”
11/2”
11/2”
11/2”
GRADE
80
100
120
220
320
47. Snap-on Discs- Brass Center & Pinhole
These paper and plastic backed flexible discs come with a square arbor hole for use with a snap-on/off
mandrel. Moore’s discs are available in Adalox, Emery, Waterproof and Plastic.
Fine- Polishing smoothest surface. Medium- Less reduction, smoother finish
Coarse- Gross reduction and shaping. Speed max.-30,000 rpm.
Use brass center with snap-on mandrel and pin hole with screw type mandrel.- page 16
Brass Center: Packed 50 pcs per box. Pin Hole: Packed 100 pcs per box.
Adalox Paper: Aluminum oxide of premium quality is glue bonded to a paper backing.
TYPE
ADALOX
PAPER
DIA.
/8”
7
3
/4”
BRASS
PIN HOLE
BRASS
PIN HOLE
FINE
AT-225
AT-221
AT-228
AT-215
MEDIUM
AT-226
AT-222
AT-229
AT-216
COARSE
AT-227
AT-223
AT-230
AT-217
Emery Paper: Silicon Carbide fast cutting, premium quality is glue bonded to a paper backing.
TYPE
EMERY
PAPER
DIA.
/8”
7
3
/4”
BRASS
PIN HOLE
BRASS
PIN HOLE
FINE
AT-231
AT-218
AT-657
AT-666
MEDIUM
AT-232
AT-219
AT-658
AT-667
COARSE
AT-233
AT-220
AT-659
AT-668
Waterproof: Silicon carbide of premium quality is glue bonded to a paper backing.
TYPE
DIA.
/8”
7
WATERPROOF
3
/4”
BRASS
PIN HOLE
BRASS
PIN HOLE
FINE
AT-675
AT-669
AT-678
AT-672
MEDIUM
AT-676
AT-670
AT-679
AT-673
COARSE
AT-677
AT-671
AT-680
AT-674
Magnum & SandPlastic: Aluminum oxide electrostatically bonded to a reinforced plastic backing
increases cutting performance.
TYPE
DIA.
/8”
7
MAGNUM
3
/4”
/8”
7
SANDPLASTIC
3
10
/4”
BRASS
PIN HOLE
BRASS
PIN HOLE
BRASS
PIN HOLE
BRASS
PIN HOLE
FINE
AT-235
AT-238
AT-681
AT-687
AT-684
AT-690
MEDIUM
AT-236
AT-239
AT-682
AT-688
AT-685
AT-691
COARSE
AT-237
AT-240
AT-683
AT-689
AT-686
AT-692
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ABRASIVES
48. Silicone Mounted Points
Shank
Flexible open pore polishers, in a rubber bond, specially suited for extra fine mirror finishing.
Impregnated with microgrit polishing compounds for direct application.
Lubricate with water. Speed-5,000 max 10,000 rpm.
Shank
COLOR
K/EDGE
Ø 11 X 2.5mm
AT-080
AT-081
AT-082
AT-083
BLUE
BLACK
WHITE
PINK
POINT
Ø 5.5 X 15mm
AT-084
AT-085
AT-086
AT-087
SQ/EDGE
Ø 11 X 2.5mm
AT-088
AT-089
AT-090
AT-091
CYLINDER
Ø 14 X 12mm
AT-092
AT-093
AT-094
AT-095
Mandrel
49. Silicone Polishers for Precious Alloys
Silicone polishing wheels and points are flexible, work fast and efficient. Specially suited for blending and contouring precious alloys. Impregnated with
microgrit polishing compounds for direct applications. Lubricate with water. Speed 5,000- 12,000 rpm.
Black-Soft and flexible. White- Universal polisher. Pink- Super high luster. Blue- High luster finish. Dark Blue- High luster. Use screw mandrels- page 16.
COLOR
BLACK
WHITE
PINK
BLUE
DK-BLUE
SQ/EDGE
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-101
AT-107
AT-114
AT-121
AT-132
K/EDGE
Ø 22 X 4mm
AT-102
AT-108
AT-115
AT-122
AT-133
CYLINDER
Ø 7 X 20mm
AT-103
AT-111
AT-116
AT-125
AT-136
CYLINDER
Ø 9 X 20mm
AT-063-02
AT-063-03
AT-063-05
AT-063-04
AT-063-01
CYLINDER
Ø 12 X 20mm
AT-060
AT-061
AT-063
AT-062
AT-059
PT. CYL
Ø 6 X 24mm
AT-104
AT-112
AT-117
AT-126
AT-137
SQ/EDGE
Ø 17 X 2.5mm
AT-105
AT-109
AT-118
AT-123
AT-134
K/EDGE
Ø 18 X 3.5mm
AT-106
AT-110
AT-119
AT-124
AT-135
50. Silicone Unmounted Polishers
51. Silicone Inside Ring Polishers
These polishing wheels are wider and are used to blend exterior surfaces.
Lubricate with water. Speed 5,000- max 10,000 rpm.
Use screw mandrels- page 16.
Ring polishers fit and polish the inside of rings to a high degree of shine.
Lubricate with water. Cylinder Shape. Speed 1,000- max 8,000 rpm.
Use screw mandrels- page 16.
Ø
5mm
T
25mm
COLOR
DK-BLUE
BLACK
WHITE
BLUE
PINK
Ø 17 X 6 Tmm
AT-064-99
AT-065
AT-066
AT-067
AT-068
Ø 22 X 6 Tmm
AT-071
AT-072
AT-073
AT-074
AT-075
COLOR
DK-BLUE
BLACK
WHITE
BLUE
PINK
Ø 14 X 25 X 5mm
AT-075-99
AT-077
AT-078
AT-076
AT-079
14mm
52. Synthetic Rubber Polishing Pins
These small diameter polishing pins are useful in hard to reach areas. Lubricate with water.
Speed max. 15,000 rpm. Polishing pins must be held in pin chuck mandrels- page 16
COLOR
GRADE
BLUE
COARSE
AT-131-07
AT-131-01
Safety Instructions
Page 40
D.BROWN
MEDIUM
AT-131-04
AT-129
GREY
MEDIUM
AT-131-09
AT-131-02
RED-BROWN
FINE
AT-131-05
AT-130
GREEN
X-FINE
AT-131-06
AT-131
DIA. X L
2 X 20mm
3 X 23mm
11
™
ABRASIVES
53. Dedeco Rubberized Mounted Points
Microfine silicon and aluminum oxide, bonded with rubber in shapes to suit different profiles. Imparts excellent surface finish in the most difficult work areas, in
gold, silver and alloys. Impregnated abrasive eliminates the need for use of polishing compounds. Lubricate with water. Shank size 3/32”. Speed max. 20,000.
COLOR
GREEN
BLUE
WHITE
GRADE
MEDIUM
FINE
X-FINE
POINT
AT-305
AT-303
AT-310
BULLET
AT-306
AT-304
AT-311
WHEEL
AT-307
AT-304-01
AT-312
K/EDGE
AT-308
AT-304-02
AT-313
CYLINDER
AT-309
AT-304-03
AT-314
54. Dedeco Rubber Flexie Polishers
High purity abrasives in a flexible bond, that need to be run at high speeds for contour polishing of gold and silver. Lubricate with water.
Speed max 20,000 rpm. Use with screw mandrels.- page 16
COLOR
RED
GREEN
WHITE
GRADE
FINE
COARSE
FLEXIES
SQ/EDGE
Ø 7/8” X 1/8”
AT-316
AT-320
AT-333
K/EDGE
Ø 7/8”
AT-317
AT-321
AT-334
K/EDGE
Ø 5/8”
AT-318
AT-322
AT-335
CLASP
Ø 1/4” X 15/16”
AT-319
AT-323
AT-336
55. Airflex Polishing Wheels
These wheels have an advantage in that they have
fine air pockets for cooling during the polishing of
platinum and precious alloys.
Speed max 10,000 rpm. Lubricate with water.
Use with screw mandrels- page 16
DIA. X THICKNESS
22 X 3mm
17 X 4mm
LT. BLUE / COARSE
AT-070-04
AT-070-07
GREEN / MEDIUM
AT-070-05
AT-070-08
LT. BROWN / FINE
AT-070-06
AT-070-09
56. Airflex Polishing -Large Wheels
These polishing wheels have a distinct advantage
in that they have fine air pockets for cooling during
the polishing of platinum and precious alloys.
Speed max 3,000 rpm.
Dia.100 X Width 15 X Hole 12.7mm.
Safety Tip: Polishing wheels must always be
flanged.
CODE
AT-070
AT-070-01
AT-070-02
COLOR / GRADE
BLUE / COARSE
GRAY / MEDIUM
BROWN / FINE
CODE
AT-526
AT-527
AT-528
AT-529
COLOR / GRADE
WHITE / COARSE
BLACK / MEDIUM
LT. BLUE / FINE
PINK / X-FINE
57. Silicone Polishing- Large Wheels
These are abrasive impregnated wheels for
polishing precious alloys, without additional
polishing compounds. Lubricate with water.
Speed max 3,000 rpm.
Dia 100 X Width 15 X Hole 12.7mm.
Safety Tip: Polishing wheels must always be
flanged.
12
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ABRASIVES
58. Brightboy® Abrasives
COARSE: Suggested for scratch removal on harder metal surfaces. MEDIUM: Perfect for fast removal and polishing of hard surfaces. FINE: Excellent for
super finishing of precious metals. EX-FINE: Ultimate finishing and polishing on precious metals. FLEX: Denotes extra flexible bond perfect for delicate work.
ABRASIVE TYPE: A-Aluminum Oxide S-Silicon Carbide
SQ/EDGE WHITE FLEX WHEELS
Aluminum Oxide grain impregnated into our soft and flexible rubber binder. Ideal
for super finishing on gold. Arbor hole 1/16”. Use screw mandrels- page 16.
CODE
DIA. X T
GRIT
STYLE
AC-039
AC-040
5
/8” X 1/16”
7
/8” X 1/8”
EX-FINE -A
EX-FINE -A
#721
#722
K/EDGE WHEELS
Flexible and durable fine polishing on precious metals. Arbor hole 1/16”.
CODE
DIA. X T
COLOR
GRIT
AC-045
AC-046
5
/8” X 3/32”
7
/8” X 1/8”
RED FLEX
GREEN
FINE -S
#732
MEDIUM -S #752
STYLE
SQ/EDGE WHEELS 7/8” X 1/8”- Arbor hole 1/16”. Use screw mandrels- page 16.
CODE
COLOR
GRIT
STYLE
AC-041
RED FLEX
FINE -S
AC-042
GREEN
MEDIUM -S
AC-043
BLACK
COARSE -S
AC-044
BLUE
FINE S
MOUNTED BULLET POINTS- Shank size 3/32”
#723
#724
#725
#726
CODE
COLOR
GRIT
STYLE
AC-047
AC-048
AC-049
AC-050
AC-051
WHITE
RED
BLUE
GREEN
BLACK
FINE -A
EX-FINE -A
FINE -S
MEDIUM -S
COARSE -S
#761
#762
#763
#764
#765
59. Brightboy® Pumice Wheels
Brightboy® Pumice wheels are specially designed for fine finishing and
polishing on all precious metals. Very popular for prong polishing after stone
setting. The white color designates fine grit pumice and blue color extra fine grit
pumice. Arbor hole 1/16”. Use screw mandrels- page 16.
CODE
STYLE
SHAPE
DIA. X T
AC-052
AC-053
AC-054
AC-055
WR822-BLUE
WR888-BLUE
WR999-WHITE
WR999-BLUE
SQ/EDGE
SQ/EDGE
K/EDGE
K/EDGE
5
/8” X 5/32”
/8” X 1/8”
5
/8” X 5/32”
7
/8” X 1/8”
7
60. Diamond Polishers for Platinum
Special shapes for reducing, profiling, and contouring platinum for a super high
luster. Lubricate with water. Shank size 3/32”.
Speed max 10,000 rpm.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AS-110
SET OF 9 PCS.
61. Ceraton- Ceramic Glass Fiber Polishers
A unique, superb polishing innovation. It combines ceramic and glass fibers in a thermosetting resin. Available
in rods, color-coded for identification of grits from coarse to micro-fine. Use for platinum, gold, silver, copper,
and aluminum alloys. May be used on gems. Size Dia. X L (2.35 X 50mm).
Speed 10,000- max 20,000 rpm. Use pin chuck mandrels- Page 16.
CODE
AS-150
AS-151
AS-152
AS-153
AS-154
COLOR
RED
PINK
YELLOW
GREEN
LT. BLUE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
GRIT
1200
1000
700
500
400
CODE
AS-155
AS-156
AS-157
AS-158
AS-160
COLOR
GRIT
DK. BLUE
360
BLACK
280
ORANGE
250
BROWN
180
9 PCS. SET-ONE EACH
13
™
ABRASIVES
62. Shofu® Mounted Stones
These mounted stones are of high purity aluminum oxide free from carbon contamination. White stones are designed for finishing semi-precious stones.
Coral stones will finish chrome cobalt and nickel alloys. Pink stones are for pre-polishing of precious metals. Green stones are for super polishing gold,
silver and alloys. Speed- max 10,000 rpm. Mounted points have 3/32” shanks and unmounted wheel needs 1/16” screw mandrels- page 16.
COLOR
CORAL
PINK
WHITE
GREEN
TAPERED
AT-040
AT-045
AT-047
AT-052
WHEEL
AT-041
AT-045-01
AT-048
AT-052-01
BARREL
AT-042
AT-045-02
AT-049
AT-052-02
CONE
AT-043
AT-045-03
AT-050
AT-052-03
WHEEL UNMTD.
AT-044
AT-051
-
63. Shofu® Polishing Points & Wheels
High quality polishing abrasive in a silicone bond. Excellent to use for brilliant finishes in precious metals, gold, silver and alloys. Available in three grades,
brownie for pre-polish, greenie for polish and super greenie for super polish. Speed- max 20,000 rpm. Mounted points have 3/32” shanks and unmounted
wheels and cylinders need 1/16” screw mandrels- page 16
COLOR
BROWNIE
GREENIE
SUP-GREENIE
BULLET
AS-125
AS-130
AS-136
K/EDGE
AS-126
AS-131
AS-137
SQ/EDGE
AS-127
AS-132
AS-138
FLOPPY
AS-128
AS-133
AS-139
WHEEL UNMTD.
AS-129
AS-134
AS-140
CYL. UNMTD.
AS-121
AS-122
AS-123
64. Shofu® Gold Polishing Kit
Ultra fine abrasive in a rubber bond will give a high quality surface in super finishing.
Brownie-will generate a satin smoothness. Greenie- will impart a mirror bright finish.
Super greenie- will finish to a high luster. Items are also sold individually. Shank size 3/32”.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
AT-069
POLISHING KIT (12PCS.- BROWNIE-2 EA, GREENIE 1 EA. SUPER GREENIE 1 EA.)
COLOR
SQ/EDGE
AS-127
AS-132
AS-138
BROWNIE
GREENIE
SUP-GREENIE
K/EDGE
AS-126
AS-131
AS-137
BULLET
AS-125
AS-130
AS-136
65. Pumice Wheels
These special wheels combine pumice fines in a silicone binder that will generate a mirror finish on
bezels and other set stones. Lubricate with water. Speed 5,000- max 10,000 rpm.
Use with screw mandrels- page 16
SHAPE
SIZE
COLOR
GRADE
CODE
K/EDGE
Ø 22 X 3.5mm
LT.GREY
FINE
AT-097
SQ/EDGE
Ø 22 X 3mm
LT.GREY
FINE
AT-098
SQ/EDGE
Ø 22 X 3.5mm
YEL.GREEN
MEDIUM
AT-099
K/EDGE
Ø 22 X 3.5mm
YEL.GREEN
MEDIUM
AT-100
66. Mizzy Heatless Wheels
Silicon carbide resin bonded hard, coarse wheels
can be shaped with a file or dresser. Achieves
cutting without heat generation. Lubricate with
water. Speed max 20,000 rpm. Use with screw
mandrels- page 16. Packed 50 per box.
14
CODE
AT-162
AT-163
AT-164
AT-165
AT-161
DIA. X T
/4” X 3/16”
3
/4” X 1/8”
7
/8” X 3/16”
7
/8” X 1/8”
7
/8” X 3/32”
3
HOLE
/16”
1
/16”
1
/16”
1
/16”
1
/16”
1
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
67.
ABRASIVES
TopStar
Brown: for pre-polishing of gold, composite and
semi-precious alloys. Speed 20,000 rpm.
Green: for high-gloss polishing of all precious and
semi-precious alloys as well as composite.
Speed 10,000 rpm. Shank size 3/32”.
COLOR
BROWN
64
Ø 5 X 16mm
AT-064
AT-064-06
GREEN
68.
Ø 14.5 X 2mm
AT-064-02
AT-064-08
Ø 5.5 X 15.5mm
AT-064-03
AT-064-09
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-064-04
AT-064-10
Goldino
The ultimate polisher for all precious alloys in a 3-step system.
Green: for finishing. Speed 20,000 rpm.
Yellow: for pre-polish. Speed 15,000 rpm.
Pink: for high-gloss polish. Speed 10,000 rpm.
Arbor hole is 1/16”. Screw mandrels-page 16.
COLOR
GREEN
YELLOW
PINK
69.
Ø 15 X 2.5mm
AT-064-01
AT-064-07
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-064-12
AT-064-16
AT-064-21
Ø 6 X 22mm
AT-064-13
AT-064-18
AT-064-22
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-064-14
AT-064-19
AT-064-24
Ø 5.5 X 15.5mm
AT-064-15
AT-064-20
AT-064-25
Ocean
Blue line universal silicone rubber
polishers are for initial polishing of
semi-precious alloys, crome cobolt
and titanium. Speed 20,000 rpm.
Arbor hole is 1/16”.
Screw mandrels-page 16.
COLOR
BLUE
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-064-26
Ø 17 X 3mm
AT-064-27
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-064-28
Ø 17 X 3mm
AT-064-30
Ø 5.5 X 16.3mm Ø 5 X 16mm
AT-064-31
AT-064-32
Ø15 X 2.5mm
AT-064-33
70. Unmounted IKFlex Polishers
Premium quality polishers in a flexible bond that is better than silicone
rubber. Recommended for enhancing the surface quality of gold, silver
and platinum to a very high shine. Available in different shapes to suit all
applications. Speed 5,000- max 12,000 rpm. Arbor hole is 1/16”.
Use with screw mandrels-page 16.
COLOR
GRIT
BLUE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
X-FINE
BLACK
BROWN
GREEN
WHEEL
Ø 22 X 3mm
AT-138
AT-138-01
AT-138-02
AT-138-03
K/EDGE
Ø 22 X 4mm
AT-139
AT-139-01
AT-139-02
AT-139-03
CYLINDER
Ø 7 X 20mm
AT-140
AT-140-01
AT-140-02
AT-140-03
71. Mounted IKFlex Polishers
Unique flexible bonded polishing points that are advantageous for
mirror finishing complex designs on all precious metal. Points are
mounted on 3/32” shanks. Speed 5,000- max 10,000 rpm.
COLOR
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN
GREEN
Safety Instructions
Page 40
GRIT
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
X-FINE
POINT
Ø 5 X 16mm
AT-141
AT-141-01
AT-141-02
AT-141-03
K/EDGE
Ø 15 X 2mm
AT-142
AT-142-01
AT-142-02
AT-142-03
FLOPPY
Ø 19 X 1mm
AT-143
AT-143-01
AT-143-02
AT-143-03
CYLINDER
Ø 14 X 12mm
AT-144
AT-144-01
AT-144-02
AT-144-03
15
™
MANDRELS
72. Mandrels-Screw
REINFORCED
These mandrels are for holding felt wheels, bristle brushes, cutting discs and items having a maximum thickness of 3/16”. Thread ends are right handed. For use in hand pieces and grinders.
CODE
AT-199
AT-200
AT-200-01
AT-200-02
AT-200-05
FLANGED
STRAIGHT
73. Mandrels-Split
SHANK
/32”
3
/32”
1
/8”
1
/8”
3
/32”
3
HOLE
/16”
1
/16”
1
/8”
1
/4”
1
/16”
1
TYPE
REINFORCED
FLANGED
FLANGED
FLANGED
STRAIGHT
The slot in the mandrel is to grip abrasive paper strips in order to build up a suitable diameter for
inside finishing.
/64”
9
11
/64”
CODE
AT-184-01
AT-184
AT-185
SHANK
/32”
3
/32”
3
/32”
3
DIA.
/64”
11
/64”
3
/16”-3/32”
9
TYPE
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
TAPERED
74. Mandrels-Screw Taper
For felt buffs, wheels, cylinders and points that are resilient enough to allow the tapered screw to
form its threads into the material. Available in right hand threads only.
CODE
AT-197
AT-197-01
AT-197-02
AT-198
SHANK
/32”
1
/8”
3
/32”
1
/8”
3
TAPER
/16”-3/16”
1
/16”-3/16”
1
/16”-3/8”
1
/16”-3/8”
1
75. Mandrels-Pin Chuck
Chuck mandrel suitable for holding outer diameter of silicone pins. Pins can be held at various protrusions depending on the type of work. Thread ends are right handed.
CODE
AT-159
AT-160
SHANK
/32”
3
/32”
3
HOLE
2mm
3mm
76. Mandrels-Thread with Nut
Use only when there are through holes; mostly for wheels and cylinders. Thread ends are right
handed.
CODE
SHANK
THD.
3
3
/32”
/32”
AT-196
1
3
AT-196-01
/8”
/32”
77. Mandrel-Snap on
One piece construction with a snap-on end, has a square drive that is positive and avoids slippage.
CODE
AT-201
SHANK
/32”
3
TYPE
SQ/DRIVE
78. Mandrels-Cartridge Roll
Hardened steel mandrels for abrasive cartridge rolls. Pilot guides roll for absolute true running.
CODE
AT-157
AT-158
16
SHANK
PILOT/D X L
/32”
1
/8”
1
3
1
/8” X 3/4”
/8” X 1”
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BENCH ACCESSORIES
1. Utility Anvils
Engineered especially for the professional. Quick change over from steel to
nylon face for all bench tasks. Simply press out from base and reverse.
Hard neoprene non-slip base provides secure positioning and absorbs light
to heavy hammer action. Available in two sizes.
CODE
AN-390
AN-392
SIZE
2”
31/2”
2. Steel Bench Block
Flat back up steel base, for marking and lay out of designs.
Case hardened, ground and polished. Includes a hole for riveting.
CODE
AN-401
AN-402
AN-404
SIZE
4” X 6” X 1” (NO GROOVE)
21/4” X 21/4” X 1”
4” X 4” X 1”
3. Bench Horn Anvil-Standard
One piece solid steel. Includes both round and flat horns, with a hole on top
for riveting. Useful for flattening, shaping and forming. Size 41/2” L X 15/8” Ht.
CODE
AN-406
DESCRIPTION
BENCH HORN ANVIL
4. Bench Horn Anvil
Made in steel, with round and flat horns. Working surfaces are polish
finished. One horn includes a hole for riveting.
CODE
AN-407
DESCRIPTION
BENCH HORN ANVIL
5. Combination Bench Pin with Anvil
Easily clamps to the workbench. Has a flat polished anvil for layout work,
together with a replaceable hardwood bench pin for various other jobs.
CODE
AN-405
AN-415
DESCRIPTION
BENCH PIN WITH ANVIL
REPLACEMENT PIN
6. Bench Pin with Metal Holder
Fix with screws to a workbench. This convenient hardwood bench pin
supports work securely while sawing, filing and polishing.
CODE
AN-409
AN-412
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE
51/4” X 21/4” (BENCH PIN ONLY)
7. Wood Bench Pins
Assorted sizes made from quality, seasoned hardwood. Smooth finished all
over. The tongue fits all standard metal holders.
AN-416
18
AN-418
CODE
AN-412
AN-413
AN-414
AN-416
AN-418
DESCRIPTION
51/4” X 21/4”- SMALL
61/4” X 21/2” - MEDIUM
7” X 23/4” - LARGE
BENCH PIN -RIGHT
BENCH PIN -LEFT
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BENCH ACCESSORIES
8. Kirkland Ring Clamps
Precision aluminum construction with quick acting thumb screw grip. This hand fixture
is very practical for working on rings. Indispensable for stone setting and polishing.
CODE
RI-106
RI-107
DESCRIPTION
COMBINATION CLAMP
RING CLAMP-EXTERNAL
9. Ring Clamps
Seasoned hardwood with leather lined jaws, adjustable to fit most rings. This useful
tool enables a positive grip on rings during filing, polishing and general work.
CODE
RI-101
RI-102
RI-103
DESCRIPTION
WOOD-RUSSIAN TYPE
HARDWOOD DELUXE
PLASTIC RING CLAMP
RI-101
RI-102
RI-103
10. Inside Ring Holder
Holds large and small rings on the inside, with a strong grip. Enables free working on
the outside of the rings without leaving any scratch marks.
CODE
RI-108
DESCRIPTION
RING HOLDER WITH WING NUT
11. Setter’s Ring Clamp
This ring clamp has an extended lip of a unique design that provides extra support on
a workbench. Ideal for polishing and other detail work.
CODE
RI-104
DESCRIPTION
PLASTIC DELUXE- USA
12. Ring Gripper
Thumb screw clamp gives a firm grip on large or small rings. May be used while
buffing and polishing the outside of the rings.
CODE
RI-160
DESCRIPTION
RING GRIPPER
13. Outside Ring Holder
Holds large and small rings on the outside, in either of the two grooves. Enables easy
and free working on the inside of rings.
CODE
RI-165
DESCRIPTION
OUTSIDE RING HOLDER
Safety Instructions
Page 40
19
™
BENCH ACCESSORIES
14. V-Slot Bench Pin with Clamp
A portable bench pin for a quick set up. It clamps to almost all workbenches.
Ideal for sawing, filing and finishing.
CODE
AN-408
SIZE
71/4” X 21/4”
15. Tools for Filing -Hinges
A high quality steel holder with an adjustable grip for various sizes of hinges. Its
unique design eliminates wobble while filing.
CODE
HO-021
DESCRIPTION
HOLDER FOR HINGE
16. Burnisher-Tungsten Carbide
Micro-grained, super hard tungsten carbide will smooth and finish all metals
including platinum. Silver or gold will not adhere to this burnisher. Excellent for
closing and smoothing.
CODE
BS-405
DESCRIPTION
/8” TIP
7
17. Double-Ended Steel Tracer
An economical steel scribe, with precise sharpened points at both ends. Highly
accurate for marking layout work when designing.
CODE
EN-001
DESCRIPTION
/8” TIP
7
18. Agate Burnishers
Made of natural stone, straight or knife edged, this super polished surface
smoothes all marks or other imperfections on jewelry.
CODE
BR-725
BR-726
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT
KNIFE EDGE
19. Third Hand Round Base
20. Bracelet Mandrels
Heavy base with double joint positioning, makes for
hands free working while soldering. Includes straight
cross locking tweezers to hold the component.
These mandrels are adaptable for shaping, stretching, and forming bracelets.
Exterior surface is smoothly polished. Available in round and oval shapes.
15”
13/8” X 17/8”
3” X 31/2”
15”
13/4”
CODE
HO-010
HO-011
TW-477
20
DESCRIPTION
THIRD HAND W/TWEEZERS
BASE ONLY
TWEEZERS
31/2”
CODE
MD-025
MD-030
MD-031
SHAPE
OVAL
ROUND
ROUND WOODEN
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BENCH ACCESSORIES
21. Jump Ringer System- Round/Oval
Make jump rings fast, using this hand winder. Complete set
includes mandrel, blade with arbor, and holder to cut rings.
Needs the use of Foredom #30 handpiece (not provided) for
cutting. Oval system has special mandrels and a two sided oval coil
holder. A complete set includes five oval mandrels with a coil
holder. Mandrels are 3” long.
CODE
HO-410
HO-411
HO-412
DESCRIPTION
JUMP RING COMPLETE
BLADE ONLY
MANDREL SET- 16 PCS. (0.06”-0.46”)
22. Bracelet Holder
25. Pearl Holding Vise
All metal clamp, secures bracelet easily, eliminating the use of
shellac. A relief on the diameter provides a space to nest the clasp.
Center drill pearls accurately without any mar on the surface.
Quick clamp and release system. Thirteen cavities accommodate
pearls or beads size #2-10mm
CODE
HO-007
DESCRIPTION
DRILLING VISE
26. Centerline Pearl Drill Holder
A quality engineered drill jig, combines precision with accuracy for
making fine holes in pearls. Cushioned support eliminates any
misalignment.
CODE
HO-302
DIAMETER
31/2”
CODE
HO-006
DESCRIPTION
DRILL HOLDER
23. Miter Cutter Jig- France
Alloy tool steel, hardened for wear resistance and long life.Vise
holds thin sheet, round, square bar and tubing securely, for angle
cuts at 45° or 90°. Additional adjustable stop for precise cuts to
length. May be hand held or fixed in a bench vise.
CODE
HO-005
SIZE
2” X 21/2” X 3/8”
27. Peg Clamp Holder
Hand held holder with moveable pins to hold any odd shaped parts.
Remove handle to fit in a vise. Useful when engraving and setting.
CODE
HO-008
DESCRIPTION
PEG CLAMP
24. Swiss Victorinox Knife
The one and only all purpose stainless steel knife that finds use in
almost all applications. Select from two models that have different
features which include cutting blades, scissors, file, tweezers etc.
CODE
SH-742
SH-743
DESCRIPTION
SWISS ARMY KNIFE
SWISS ARMY KNIFE WITH 17 BLADES
Safety Instructions
Page 40
21
™
BENCH ACCESSORIES
28. Screwplates with Taps
SP-071
Three different ranges to form internal or external fine pitch
threads for nuts or screws. May also be used to rectify and
repair damaged threads.
SP-072
CODE
SP-071
SP-072
SP-073
SP-074
SP-074
29. Wood Handle Scribers
Economical steel scriber, has a sharpened point for layout work. Triangular
shaped hollow or solid form permits removal of burrs or other detail work.
CODE
BS-401
BS-402
DESCRIPTION
HOLLOW
SOLID
DESCRIPTION
0.6-2.0mm-Swiss
0.7-2.0mm-German
0.5-1.5mm-Japan
0.85-1.5mm-Deluxe
SP-073
31. Margin Rollers
Individually sized burnishing tool that effectively removes
porosity, pits or scratch marks on the inside of rings and
bracelets.
CODE
DI-110-99
DI-111
DI-112
DIAMETER
12mm
10mm
8mm
32. Magnetic Tool Holder
30. Hand Drill
Smooth operating drill with adjustable chuck capacity 1/32”-1/4”. Sturdy tool for
general purpose use.
CODE
PV-400
DESCRIPTION
HAND DRILL
An efficient organizer that instantly holds, yet releases quickly, all
your small tools and implements. Mounts conveniently near your
work bench.
CODE
HO-040
HO-041
LENGTH
12”
18”
33. Panavise
The universal vise is a perfect unit where all movements are
controlled by a single knob. Convenient positioning in all three
planes make it perfect for filing, sawing, carving and setting.
Jaws are of nylon, 21/2” wide and will not mar or scratch delicate
surfaces. A vacuum base model of the vise operates by suction
system and has additional adaptability to be mounted on any
smooth surface. Replacement jaws are available.
CODE
PV-416
PV-417
PV-418
22
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD VISE
VACUUM BASE VISE
REPLACEABLE JAW
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BENCH ACCESSORIES
34. GRS® BenchMate
A versatile work holding system, loaded with features
that instill confidence while stone setting and doing all
kinds of jewelry repair. All steel construction with
smooth teflon bearings contribute to a sturdy, rugged,
rotating device that quick locks in any required position. Select from two kits.
CODE
BE-019
BE-020
BE-029
BE-020
BE-032
BE-028
BE-026
BE-035
BE-036
BE-027
BE-022
DESCRIPTION
BENCH MATE- DELUXE
BENCH MATE -BASIC
BE-030
BE-023
BE-031
BE-034
BE-024
BE-025
BE-033
(Vise not included)
BenchMate Basic Kit: Includes basic BenchMate
holder, shellac pad, fixed mounting plate and
hardware.
BenchMate Deluxe Kit: Includes basic BenchMate
holder, shellac pad, narrow and wide solder fingers,
third hand attachment, bench pin kit, fixed mounting
plate and hardware.
Special Attachments: Convert your BenchMate to do various other
jobs like prong tipping, shank repair, ring sizing, soldering and jewelry
fabrication. Attachments need only a few seconds to change without
any extra tools.
CODE
BE-021
BE-022
BE-023
BE-024
BE-025
BE-026
BE-027
BE-028
DESCRIPTION
EXTRA MOUNTING PLATE
BENCH PIN KIT
OPTIONAL MOUNTING PLATE
FIXED MOUNTING PLATE
ADJUSTABLE HT. BRACKET
NARROW SOLDER FINGER
WIDE SOLDER FINGER
SHELLAC PAD
CODE
BE-029
BE-030
BE-031
BE-032
BE-033
BE-034
BE-035
BE-036
DESCRIPTION
PITCH CUP
INSULATED SOLDER CLAMP
EXTRA PLASTIC JAWS
THIRD HAND ATTACHMENT
ENGRAVING VISE SHELF
SOLDER STATION- 4”
SAWING PLATE RIGHT HAND
SAWING PLATE LEFT HAND
35. Millgrain Wheels-Individual
36. Millgrain Holder
Precision concave, equally shaped cavities may be formed with a hardened
wheel. Create decorative settings and edge beading on jewelry.
Use tools with a Millgrain wheel holder.
A hand tool having a hardwood palm grip, with a metal screw chuck to
secure the shank of Millgrain wheels.
.......................
.....................
...................
.................
................
...............
1
2
3
4
5
..............
6
7
.............
8
.............
9
............
............
10
............
12
...........
...........
13
..........
15
CODE
HO-202
11
DESCRIPTION
MUSHROOM HANDLE
37. Millgrain Tool Set
14
Two select sizes of Millgrain tools with a threaded chuck. Supplied in a polished wooden box.
Note : Patterns shown are not the actual size of the wheel structure.
CODE
MG-401
MG-402
MG-403
MG-404
MG-405
MG-406
MG-407
MG-408
SIZE
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
MG-409
MG-410
MG-411
MG-412
MG-413
MG-414
MG-415
SIZE
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
MG-426
CODE
MG-426
MG-428
MG-427
MG-428
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 6 (#10-15)
SET OF 12 (#1-12)
BOX ONLY
23
™
WORKBENCHES
BE-012
Single
BN-60
BE-013
Double
BN--60L
Sturdy woodbenches in a steel frame construction. Features include two pull-out
drawers. Lower drawer has a metal pan for
bench sweeps. Available in single or
double styles.
Single- 321/2” W X 161/4” D X 36” Ht.
Double- 65” W X 161/4” D X 36” Ht.
BE-010
MC-OLYMPIC
Hardwood constructed workbench, with a recessed metal
plate. Three storage drawers and two aluminum catch trays.
Includes a slide out work platter. Predrilled for mounting mandrels and a slot for bench pin.
361/2” W X 241/4” D X 38” Ht.
BE-016
MO-60
Standard work bench of seasoned hardwood with skirted legs. Three drawers for
storage of tools, one bottom drawer with
metal pan and a pull-out tray for mandrels.
Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot.
371/2” W X 181/2” D X 36” Ht.
BE-004
PW
Sturdy hardwood workbench with a
recessed metal anvil and railing on three
sides. Three storage drawers and two large
slide out catch trays. Predrilled holes for
mandrels. Left and right arm supports, with
a replaceable bench pin slot.
351/2” W X 211/2” D X 36” Ht.
BE-005
WM
A top quality work bench of seasoned hardwood with full
skirted sides and rear. Ample storage space with 15 spacious
drawers and a catch tray.
381/2” W X 20” D X 38” Ht.
BE-002
PN-100
Well crafted bench built to last. Seven side drawers, two top
drawers and two sliding trays. Comfortable foot rest. Right
and left arm rest with slot for bench pin. One layout shelf.
48” W X 22” D X 38” Ht.
BE-003
BN-260
Hardwood work bench full skirted for
rigidity. Consists of three drawers and a
pull out utility tray with two shelves.
Predrilled holes for mandrels. Left and
right arm supports, with a replaceable
bench pin slot.
391/4” W X 191/2” D X 38” Ht.
Fo
s
he
nc
Be
k
r
Wo e 80
ore Pag
rM
Note: For work benches some assembly is required.
All Benches will be shipped via Master Craft.
24
™
BRUSHES
1. Bench Duster Brush
Very handy for cleaning your work area.
Soft bristles, convenient wooden handle. Easy to use
in everyday work as a general purpose brush.
BU-031
BU-032
BU-030
LENGTH
9”
CODE
BU-031
BU-032
DESCRIPTION
BONE HANDLE
WOODEN HANDLE
CODE
BU-029
BU-030
DESCRIPTION
STEEL 4 ROWS
BRASS 4 ROWS
CODE
BU-034
BU-035
BU-038
DESCRIPTION
5 KNOT
7 KNOT
10 KNOT
2. Washout Brushes
Durable nylon bristles, set in rows, mounted in wood
or bone, for common cleansing of work parts.
BU-029
CODE
BU-033
3. Scratch Brushes
Firmly anchored bristles of either brass or steel.
Useful when cleaning work with or without solutions.
4. End Knot Bristle Brushes
A small diameter brush, with hard bristles. For use
with tapered spindles. Frequently used to clean and
polish with polishing compounds.
5. Crimped Brass Wire Brushes
Soft brass bristles, different row types, all with hardwood hubs that can be suitably mounted on tapered
spindles. Very gentle for scouring of metal. Leaves a matt finish. Wire size 0.10mm.
CODE
BU-008
BU-008-01
BU-008-02
DIA.
3”
3”
3”
ROWS
4
3
2
CODE
BU-009
BU-009-01
BU-009-02
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
ROWS
4
3
2
6. Crimped Steel Wire Brushes
Stiff steel bristles, all with hardwood hubs, provide firm scouring action on hard to clean areas in all
materials. Vigorous cleaning that leaves a slightly coarse finish. For use with tapered spindles.
Wire size 0.10mm.
CODE
BU-006
BU-006-01
BU-006-02
/4”
3
1”
DIA.
3”
3”
3”
ROWS
4
3
2
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
ROWS
4
3
2
7. Unmounted Wheel Bristle Brushes
These have different grades of bristle hardness.
Select according to individual application.
All with arbor hole 1/8”.
8. Mounted Bristle Brushes
These brushes are end mounted on 3/32” mandrels,
to fit hand pieces. Four textures for different
finishes are available.
26
CODE
BU-006-03
BU-006-04
BU-006-05
DIA. 3/4”
BU-115
BU-114
BU-113
BU-112
DIA. 1”
BU-111
BU-117
BU-118
BU-116
GRADE
EX-SOFT
SOFT
MEDIUM
STIFF
DIA. 3/4”
BU-110
BU-120
BU-121
BU-119
DIA.1”
BU-125
BU-123
BU-124
BU-122
GRADE
EX-SOFT
SOFT
MEDIUM
STIFF
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
9. Unmounted Wire Brushes
Small wire brushes for working fine detail areas in
jewelry. Choice of two materials, steel or brass.
Wheels may be used for gentle or vigorous working.
Both types with arbor hole 1/8”.
10. Unmounted Plastic Brushes
Small tightly packed bristle brush, has a plastic
center for extra support. A feature that contributes
to considerable stiffness for consistent finishes on
all surfaces.
11. End Bristle Brushes
Use these brushes to clean grooves, curves and in
between cleaves. End mounted on 3/32” shanks,
makes it easy to quick change on hand pieces.
Apply only light pressure at high speeds.
12. End Wire Mounted Brushes
Ideal for use to clean confined work areas.
Made of soft brass or hard steel and mounted on
3
/32” shanks. Size 3/16” X 1/4”
13. Bristle Cup Brushes
An inverted cone type brush for working over large
areas. Mounted on 3/32” shanks.
BRUSHES
BRASS
TYPE
CRIMPED
STRAIGHT
STEEL
TYPE
STRAIGHT
CRIMPED
DIA. 1”
BU-128
BU-128-01
DIA. 3/4”
BU-129
BU-129-01
DIA. 1”
BU-130
BU-130-01
DIA. 3/4”
BU-131
BU-131-01
CODE
BU-001
BU-002
BU-003
BU-004
BU-005
DIA. X TRIM. L
2” X 5/8”
2” X 5/8”
2” X 5/8”
2” X 5/8”
2” X 5/8”
GRADE
STIFF
MEDIUM
SOFT
BRASS
STEEL
CODE
BU-140
BU-141
BU-142
BU-143
DIA. X TRIM. L
/16” X 1/4”
3
/16” X 1/4”
3
/16” X 3/8”
3
/16” X 3/8”
GRADE
SOFT
STIFF
SOFT
STIFF
CODE
BU-144
BU-144-01
BU-144-02
BU-144-03
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT
CRIMPED
STRAIGHT
CRIMPED
TYPE
BRASS
BRASS
STEEL
STEEL
CODE
BU-100
BU-101
1
DIA.
/2”
1
/2”
GRADE
STIFF
SOFT
CODE
BU-107
BU-109
1
DIA.
/2”
1
/2”
TYPE
BRASS
STEEL
CODE
BU-132
BU-133
BU-133-01
BU-133-02
DIA.
1”
3
/4”
3
/4”
1”
TYPE
CRIMPED
CRIMPED
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
CODE
BU-134
BU-135
BU-136
BU-137
DIA.
1”
3
/4”
3
/4”
1”
TYPE
CRIMPED
CRIMPED
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
3
14. Metal Cup Brushes on Mandrel
Inverted cone type, choice of brass or steel straight
wire bristles, provides delicate or firm scouring on
work pieces. Mounted on 3/32” shanks.
15. Mounted Brass Brushes
Small diameter soft brass brushes, swaged and
evenly distributed on the periphery. Ideal for that soft
feel on external curves and shallow valleys.
Mounted on 3/32” shanks.
16. Mounted Steel Brushes
Small diameter firm steel brushes fixed in a steel
hub. Suitable for tough scouring. Works efficiently for
initial removal of high spots and blending surfaces.
Mounted on 3/32” shanks.
Safety Instructions
Page 40
27
™
BRUSHES
17. Unmounted Texturing Brushes
Calibrated wire diameters of these brushes
impart satin, matt or cross cut finish, depending
on the ingenuity of the craftsman.
Use on tapered spindles. Size 100 X 25mm.
CODE
AS-725
AS-726
AS-727
AS-728
THREAD Ø
0.20mm
0.30mm
0.45mm
0.60mm
GRADE
EX-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
18. Minimat Texturing Brushes
Achieve a finish like sand blasting with
different diameter. These brushes have the con- MiniMat -Mounted
venience of being used with standard flex shaft
THREAD Ø
handpieces. Steel wires of different diameters are CODE
0.30mm
attached on a plastic hub. All are mounted on 3/32” AS-730
AS-731
0.45mm
shanks. Maximum speed 8,000 rpm.
AS-732
0.60mm
TYPE
MOUNTED
MOUNTED
MOUNTED
MiniMat Pro -Unmounted
CODE
AS-733
AS-734
AS-735
AS-736
THREAD Ø
0.20mm
0.30mm
0.45mm
0.60mm
COLOR
BLUE
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
19. 3M ® Deburring Wheels
The #1 choice of jewelers, these wheels give excellent performance for blending sprues, removal of
oxidation and fire scale from castings.
CODE
BF-038
BF-039
BF-040
BF-041
3MCODE
2SFIN
7SFIN
9SFIN
8AMED
DXTXH
6” X 1” X 1”
6” X 1” X 1”
6” X 1” X 1”
6” X 1” X 1”
GRADE
X-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
20. 3M ® Cut & Polish Wheels
A subsequent operation wheel, improves the blending and polishing after the initial deburring.
Imparts a relative fineness to the smoothing, has a less aggressive action and does not clog.
CODE
BF-050
BF-051
BF-052
3MCODE
5AFIN
5AFIN
5AFIN
DXTXH
1” X 1” X 3/16”
3” X 3/4” X 1/4”
6” X 1” X 1”
GRADE
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
21. 3M ® General Purpose Wheels
An all purpose wheel, economical to use for light deburring, blending and smoothing operations.
CODE
BF-060
BF-061
BF-064
BF-067
BF-068
BF-069
28
3MCODE
5AFIN
5AFIN
7AVFIN
7AVFIN
3AVFIN
7AFIN
DXTXH
6” X 1” X 1”
3” X 3/4” X 1/4”
4” X 1/4” X 1/8”
4” X 1/2” X 1/8”
3
/4” X 1/4” X 1/16”
3
/4” X 1/4” X 1/16”
GRADE
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
FINE
FINE
V-FINE
MEDIUM
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BRUSHES
22. 3M ® Radial Bristle Brushes
A new concept for pre-polishing, texturing, and fine finishing with the added feature of complete flexibility. Numerous vanes of independent impeller like discs,
glide through fine detail grooves to give a consistent finish. Disc can be used individually or in multiples. Embedded fine abrasive eliminates the use of messy
compounds. Lubricate with water. Speed 10,000-max 15,000 rpm.
CODE
BF-115
BF-116
BF-117
BF-118
BF-119
BF-120
BF-110
BF-111
BF-112
BF-113
BF-123
BF-124
BF-125
BF-126
DIA./HOLE
/16” X 1/16”
9
/16” X 1/16”
9
/16” X 1/16”
9
/16” X 1/16”
9
/16” X 1/16”
9
/16” X 1/16”
3
/4” X 1/16”
3
/4” X 1/16”
3
/4” X 1/16”
3
/4” X 1/16”
1” X 1/8”
1” X 1/8”
1” X 1/8”
1” X 1/8”
GRIT
120
220
400
PUMICE
POLISH1
POLISH11
80
220
400
PUMICE
36
50
80
120
COLOR
WHITE
RED
BLUE
PINK
LT. GREEN
PEACH
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
PINK
BROWN
GREEN
YELLOW
WHITE
BF-130
BF-131
BF-132
BF-133
BF-134
BF-135
BF-136
BF-140
BF-141
BF-142
BF-143
BF-144
BF-145
BF-146
2” X 3/8”
2” X 3/8”
2” X 3/8”
2” X 3/8”
2” X 3/8”
2” X 3/8”
2” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
3” X 3/8”
80
120
220
400
PUMICE
6 MICRON
1 MICRON
80
120
220
400
PUMICE
6 MICRON
1 MICRON
YELLOW
WHITE
RED
BLUE
PINK
PEACH
LT. GREEN
YELLOW
WHITE
RED
BLUE
PINK
PEACH
LT. GREEN
9
23. Adapter Mounts
Bristle brushes up to 1” diameter are to be used with mandrels designed for
1
/16” or 1/8”. Bristle brushes of 2” & 3” diameters are to be used with an adapter mount.
CODE
BF-148
BF-149
DESCRIPTION
ADAPTER MOUNT-PLASTIC
ADAPTER MOUNT-ALUMINUM
24. 3M ® Unitized Wheels
A special type of unitized wheel for deburring and polishing titanium, special alloys,
composites and plastics. Wheels feature an open web construction which allows sufficient
flexibility during use and resist loading.
3MCODE
2SFIN
4SFIN
6AMED
8ACRS
3” X 1/2” X 1/4”
BF-010
BF-011
BF-012
BF-013
2” X 1/2” X 1/4”
BF-015
BF-016
BF-017
BF-018
11/2” X 1/4” X 1/8”
BF-019
BF-020
BF-021
BF-022
1” X 1/4” X 1/8”
BF-025
BF-026
BF-027
BF-028
GRADE
X-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
3MCODE
2SFIN
4SFIN
6AMED
8ACRS
3
/4” X 1/8” X 1/16”
BF-032
BF-032-02
BF-032-03
1
/2” X 1/4” X 1/16”
BF-030
BF-030-01
BF-030-02
BF-030-03
1
/2” X 1/2” X 1/16”
BF-031
BF-031-01
BF-031-02
BF-031-03
11/2” X 1/2” X 1/4”
BF-023
-
GRADE
X-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
29
™
BRUSHES
25. Bristle Brushes in Hardwood
Superior bristles set in seasoned hardwood hubs. Available in various rows for numerous applications.
Two types U-upright C-converging. All with arbor hole 1/4”.
CODE
BU-011
BU-012
BU-013
BU-014
BU-015
BU-016
a
STYLE
1A
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
HUB(a)
17/8”
17/8”
17/8”
17/8”
17/8”
17/8”
TRIM(b)
/8”
1
/2”
3
/8”
5
/8”
1
/2”
3
/8”
5
ROWS
1U
1U
1U
2C
2C
2C
b
CODE
BU-017
BU-018
BU-019
BU-023
BU-024
BU-026
BU-027
STYLE
4A
4B
4C
6A
6C
11A
11C
HUB(a)
17/8”
17/8”
17/8”
11/4”
11/4”
11/2”
11/2”
TRIM(b)
/8”
1
/2”
3
/8”
5
/8”
3
/8”
5
/8”
3
/8”
5
ROWS
4C
4C
4C
2C
2C
3C
3C
26. Red Sable Brushes
Choicest sable hair bristles, crimped in ferrules, mounted on convenient sized pencil grips. Extremely fine
points, in assorted sizes for art and design work. Size 3/0 is smallest and #7 is the largest.
CODE
BU-150
BU-151
BU-152
BU-153
BU-154
SIZE
3/0
2/0
0
1
2
CODE
BU-155
BU-156
BU-157
BU-158
BU-159
SIZE
3
4
5
6
7
27. Norton® Beartex Satin Wheels
Made of nylon fiber, impregnated with fine abrasives, these wheels find extensive use for imparting
background finishes of satin matt on work pieces. Coarse grades are used for removal of fire scale.
CODE
BF-390
BF-391
BF-392
BF-393
BF-394
BF-395
DIA. X T X H
3” X 3/4” X 1/4”
3” X 3/4” X 1/4”
3” X 3/4” X 1/4”
6” X 1” X 1/2”
6” X 1” X 1/2”
6” X 1” X 1/2”
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
28. Tapered Chuck for Brushes
Unmounted brushes with 1/8” hole can be directly fitted to shaft ends of bench polishers. Right and left
handed screw ends are offered to suit double end bench polishers.
CODE
MA-100
MA-102
MA-103
DESCRIPTION
WOODEN-RIGHT HAND
PLASTIC-RIGHT HAND
PLASTIC-LEFT HAND
29. Wheel Flanges
H
30
Ø
These are for fitment of wheels with larger holes to standard arbors. Select flanges according to wheel
hole and respective arbor diameter.
CODE
H
ARBOR Ø
1
/2”
BF-100
2”
5
BF-101
2”
/8”
3
BF-102
2”
/4”
BF-103
2”
1”
1
/2”
BF-105
1”
5
BF-106
1”
/8”
3
BF-107
1”
/4”
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BUFFS
1. Midget Felt Wheels
Miniature sizes of select quality compressed wool for general purpose polishing. Easy to shape for
different curvatures and profiles. All with pin hole centers.
CODE
BF-150
BF-150-01
BF-151
BF-151-01
BF-152
BF-152-01
BF-153
BF-153-01
DIA. X T
/2” X 1/8”
1
/2” X 1/8”
3
/4” X 1/8”
3
/4” X 1/8”
1” X 1/4”
1” X 1/4”
1” X 1/8”
1” X 1/8”
GRADE
SOFT
HARD
SOFT
HARD
SOFT
HARD
SOFT
HARD
1
2. Square Edge Felt Wheels
Pure felt. Designed for finishing a variety of materials including metal and glass. Guaranteed uniform density.
Use with tapered spindle polishers. All with pin hole centers.
MEDIUM
BF-155
BF-156
BF-157
BF-158
BF-159
BF-160
BF-161
HARD
BF-155-01
BF-156-01
BF-157-01
BF-158-01
BF-159-01
BF-160-01
BF-161-01
DIA. X T
11/2” X 1/2”
2” X 1/2”
21/2” X 1/2”
3” X 1/2”
4” X 1/4”
4” X 1/2”
6” X 1/2”
3. Knife Edge Felt Wheels
Knife edge felt wheels, perfectly formed and trued, for polishing joints and grooves. All with pin hole.
Use sizes up to 1” with screw taper mandrels, and sizes up to 6” on tapered spindle polishers.
MEDIUM
HARD
BF-163
BF-164
BF-165
BF-166
BF-167
BF-168
BF-169
BF-170
BF-172
BF-173
BF-174
ROCK
HARD
BF-163-01
BF-164-01
BF-165-01
BF-166-01
BF-167-01
BF-168-01
BF-169-01
BF-170-01
BF-172-01
BF-173-01
BF-174-01
FLINT
HARD
BF-163-02
BF-164-02
BF-165-02
BF-166-02
BF-168-02
BF-170-02
BF-172-02
BF-173-02
BF-174-02
DIAMOND
HARD
BF-163-03
BF-164-03
BF-165-03
BF-166-03
BF-168-03
BF-170-03
BF-172-03
BF-173-03
BF-174-03
DIA.
/2”
5
/8”
3
/4”
1”
11/4”
11/2”
13/4”
2”
3”
4”
6”
1
4. Satin Finish Wheels
Satin finish wheels produce different textures on all types of precious metals. These wheels are dense
and may be used to blend casting lines and sprue nibs.
CODE
BF-216
BF-217
BF-218
32
GRADE
X-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
DIA. X T
4” X 1”
4” X 1”
4” X 1”
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BUFFS
5. Paramount® Yellow Treated Muslin Buffs 86/80
Specially treated to enable fast cutting, these buffs have an inherent stiffness to withstand rugged use.
Additional stitching gives the added advantage of maintaining trueness. Available in leather or shellac
centers. Screws directly on taper of spindle polishers.
LEATHER
BF-175
BF-176
BF-177
BF-178
BF-179
BF-180
BF-181
BF-182
SHELLAC
BF-175-01
BF-176-01
BF-177-01
BF-178-01
BF-179-01
BF-180-01
BF-181-01
BF-182-01
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
5”
5”
6”
6”
6”
PLY
30
40
50
40
50
40
50
60
STITCH
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
6. Paramount® Muslin Buffs-Regular 60/60
The perfect companion to Paramount felt buffs, these state of the art buffs provide hours of excellent
performance. Available in leather or shellac centers and all popular styles.
LEATHER
BF-183
BF-184
BF-185
BF-186
BF-187
BF-188
BF-189
BF-190
BF-191
BF-192
BF-193
BF-194
BF-195
BF-196
BF-197
BF-198
SHELLAC
BF-183-01
BF-184-01
BF-185-01
BF-186-01
BF-187-01
BF-188-01
BF-189-01
BF-190-01
BF-191-01
BF-192-01
BF-193-01
BF-194-01
BF-195-01
BF-196-01
BF-197-01
BF-198-01
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
4”
4”
4”
5”
5”
5”
5”
6”
6”
6”
6”
6”
6”
PLY
30
40
50
30
40
50
40
50
40
50
40
50
60
40
50
60
STITCH
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
7. Paramount® Finest Muslin Buffs 80/80
These buffs have a denser weave that eliminates stringing. Far superior than the regular type, these
buffs give a more delicate sheen to the surface. A wide choice of styles, in leather or shellac centers.
LEATHER
BF-200
BF-201
BF-202
BF-203
BF-204
BF-205
BF-206
BF-207
BF-208
BF-209
BF-210
BF-211
BF-212
BF-213
BF-214
BF-215
SHELLAC
BF-200-01
BF-201-01
BF-202-01
BF-203-01
BF-204-01
BF-205-01
BF-206-01
BF-207-01
BF-208-01
BF-209-01
BF-210-01
BF-211-01
BF-212-01
BF-213-01
BF-214-01
BF-215-01
Safety Instructions
Page 40
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
4”
4”
4”
5”
5”
5”
5”
6”
6”
6”
6”
6”
6”
PLY
30
40
50
30
40
50
40
50
40
50
40
50
60
40
50
60
STITCH
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
33
™
BUFFS
8. Paramount®-Split & Beveled Felt Laps
Made of high quality felt, four slots provide clear visibility while polishing almost all items. Accurately
balanced and provided with pin hole centers.
CODE
BF-361
BF-362
BF-363
BF-364
BF-366
BF-367
BF-368
BF-369
BF-381
BF-382
BF-383
BF-384
DIA. X T
6” X 1/2”
6” X 1/2”
6” X 1/2”
6” X 1/2”
7” X 1/2”
7” X 1/2”
7” X 1/2”
7” X 1/2”
8” X 1/2”
8” X 1/2”
8” X 1/2”
8” X 1/2”
GRADE
MEDIUM
HARD
ROCK HARD
FLINT HARD
MEDIUM
HARD
ROCK HARD
FLINT HARD
MEDIUM
HARD
ROCK HARD
FLINT HARD
9. Paramount Felt Ply Buffs
Precision quality control guarantees the durability and superior polishing of these buffs.
Steamed and hammered to compactness, there is absolutely no porosity. Experience the brilliance
when polishing platinum, gold and other precious metals.
CODE
BF-385
BF-385-01
BF-385-02
BF-386
BF-386-01
BF-386-02
BF-387
BF-387-01
BF-387-02
BF-387-03
BF-387-04
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
5”
5”
5”
6”
6”
6”
6”
6”
PLY
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
STITCH
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
1 ROW (LOOSE)
1 ROW (LOOSE)
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
GRADE
SOFT
MED
HARD
SOFT
MED
HARD
SOFT
MED
SOFT
MED
HARD
10. Satin Finish Buffs
Graded abrasive finely dispersed into the fiber webs, these buffs generate a satin finish of different
intensities depending on individual choice of textures. Reinforced leather centers allow direct
mounting on tapered spindles.
CODE
AS-721
AS-721-01
AS-722
AS-722-01
AS-723
AS-723-01
DIA.
4”
4”
4”
4”
4”
4”
PLY
2
3
2
3
2
3
GRADE
FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
COARSE
COARSE
COLOR
PLUM
PLUM
BROWN
BROWN
TAN
TAN
11. Loose Buffs- Lead Center
Unsewn fine weave muslin buffs with combed edges are a suitable way for finishing with rouge.
These buffs have lead centers that screw on to the threads of tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-421
BF-422
BF-423
BF-424
BF-425
BF-426
34
DIA.
3”
3”
4”
5”
6”
6”
PLY
36
54
54
54
54
63
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BUFFS
12. Finex Muslin Buffs-Loose & Combed
Finest muslin loose buffs are soft with combed faces. They may be used with all polishing compounds for
finishing metals. Leather centers supplied to fit on tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-417
BF-418
BF-418-01
BF-419
BF-419-01
BF-420
DIA.
3”
4”
4”
5”
5”
6”
PLY
35
40
50
45
50
50
13. Finex Muslin Knife Edge Buffs
Leather centers and a firm point edge that is slightly softer, these buffs have the added advantage of
conforming to shapes that are impossible to polish with traditional buffs.
CODE
BF-469
BF-470
BF-471
BF-472
DIA.
3”
4”
5”
6”
PLY
12
12
12
12
14. Finex Muslin Buffs-Stitched & Combed
Made of the finest material available to the jewelry industry. Stitched buffs are firm with combed faces and
are used with compounds such as Tripoli, 4 x White Diamond, Grey Star, etc. Available in leather or shellac
centers. Fit on tapered spindles.
LEATHER
BF-413
BF-414
BF-414-01
BF-414-02
BF-415
BF-415-01
BF-415-02
BF-416
BF-416-01
BF-416-02
SHELLAC
BF-402
BF-403
BF-404
BF-404-01
BF-404-02
BF-405
BF-405-01
BF-405-02
BF-406
BF-407
BF-406-01
BF-406-02
DIA.
2”
3”
4”
4”
5”
5”
6”
6”
6”
6”
7”
7”
PLY
30
35
40
50
45
50
30
50
50
70
50
70
STITCH
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
4 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
15. Red Treated Muslin Buffs for Platinum
An IKOHE product made in a fine weave of specially treated muslin. Ideal for finishing all materials.
Very effective with rouge and most other polishing compounds. Available in leather or shellac centers.
Mount on tapered spindle polishers.
LEATHER
BF-431
BF-432
BF-433
BF-434
BF-435
BF-436
BF-437
BF-438
BF-439
BF-440
SHELLAC
BF-431-01
BF-432-01
BF-433-01
BF-434-01
BF-435-01
BF-436-01
BF-437-01
BF-438-01
BF-439-01
BF-440-01
Safety Instructions
Page 40
DIA.
3”
4”
4”
5”
5”
6”
6”
6”
7”
7”
PLY
35
40
50
45
50
30
50
60
50
70
STITCH
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
4 ROWS
35
™
BUFFS
16. Yellow Treated Knife Edge Buffs
Differently shaped edges with leather centers, these buffs have been chemically treated to maintain
stiffness and retain polishing compounds. The profile allows the polishing of narrow valleys and
grooves. Mount on tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-473
BF-474
BF-475
BF-476
DIA.
3”
4”
5”
6”
PLY
12
12
12
12
17. Yellow Treated Muslin Buffs
IKOHE muslin buffs specially treated for extra stiffness. This factor reduces polishing time and
produces a better surface abrasion. Use with Tripoli or other compounds. Available in leather or
shellac centers. Mount on tapered spindle polishers.
LEATHER
BF-453
BF-454
BF-455
BF-456
BF-457
-
SHELLAC
BF-463
BF-464
BF-465
BF-466
BF-467
DIA.
3”
4”
5”
6”
7”
6”
PLY
35
40
50
50
60
70
STITCH
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
4 ROWS
18. Midget Muslin Buffs-Unmounted
Small diameter fine muslin buffs, stitched to ensure firmness at high speeds. Convenient to use on
handpieces. Use with tapered mandrels -page 16.
CODE
BF-490-01
BF-490-02
BF-490-03
BF-490-04
BF-491
BF-492
BF-493
BF-494
BF-495
DIA.
/8”
7
/8”
1”
1”
1”
1”
11/2”
11/4”
11/2”
PLY
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
7
STITCH
1 ROW
1 ROW
1 ROW
1 ROW
2 ROWS
2 ROWS
2 ROWS
3 ROWS
3 ROWS
COLOR
WHITE
YELLOW
WHITE
YELLOW
WHITE
YELLOW
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE
19. Midget Buff-Mounted
Small diameter buffs in different types of materials all mounted on 3/32” mandrels. A flexible way to
achieve polishing with various polishing media. High speeds are recommended for a fine finish.
CODE
BF-510
BF-511
BF-512
AS-701
AS-702
36
DIA.
1”
1”
3
/4”
1”
1”
THICKNESS
/16”
3
/8”
3
/8”
1
/4”
1
/4”
3
TYPE
CHAMOIS
MUSLIN
COTTON STRING
SATIN FINE
SATIN MEDIUM
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BUFFS
20. Mounted Felt Bobs
Felt in various styles, mounted on 3/32” shanks, are a necessity for finishing and polishing intricate designs. Easily interchangeable, they are very practical to
use with handpieces or flexible shafts.
STYLE
SIZE
CODE
SIZE
CODE
SIZE
CODE
FLAME
/8” X 3/4”
BF-520
-
3
ROUND
/16” X 3/8”
BF-521
5
CONE
/4” X 3/4”
BF-522
1
BULLET
/16” X 5/8”
BF-523
-
CYLINDER
/8” X 5/8”
BF-524
-
5
3
INV.CONE
11/16” X 3/16”
BF-525
7
/8” X 3/16”
BF-526
-
K/EDGE
/4”
BF-527
7
/8”
BF-528
3
SQ/EDGE
11/16” X 1/4”
BF-529
7
/8” X 1/4”
BF-530
7
/8” X 7/16”
BF-531
21. Unmounted Felt Cones
These hard density felt cones polish the inner
surfaces of work pieces and other hard to reach
areas. All with pin holes, ready to mount on
tapered mandrels. -page 16
CODE
BF-483
BF-484
BF-485
BF-486
DIA. X T
/4” X 3/8”
1
/4” X 1/2”
1
/2” X 1”
3
/4” X 11/2”
1
22. Tapered Muslin Buffs
Small diameter cone shaped buffs, very adaptable
for finishing the insides of work pieces.
Performs well with all polishing compounds.
Will fit on tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-441
BF-441-01
BF-441-02
DIA.
2”
3”
31/2”
CODE
BF-442
BF-442-01
BF-442-02
DIA. X T
2” X 2”
3” X 3”
31/2” X 31/2”
CODE
BF-443
BF-443-01
BF-443-02
DIA.
2”
3”
4”
CODE
BF-477
BF-477-01
DIA. X T
4” X 2”
5” X 2”
CODE
BF-444
BF-444-01
DIA.
3”
4”
23. Cylinder Buffs
Tube shaped, in different diameters, these buffs
make the ideal method for polishing the insides of
parts. Works efficiently with all types of finishing
compounds. Will fit on tapered spindle polishers.
24. Goblet Buffs
Fine muslin stitched and spherically shaped, a
most convenient method for polishing the insides
of goblets and other similar objects. Will fit on
tapered spindle polishers.
25. Cotton String Buffs
Extremely soft with individual strings, firmly
crimped to a central hub. This product provides an
ultra fine finish to gold and other precious metals.
26. Chamois Buffs
Durable, long lasting, soft leather, these buffs are
the obvious choice for finishing and polishing
platinum. They may also be used for all other
metals. Will fit on tapered spindle polishers.
Safety Instructions
Page 40
PLY
12
12
37
™
BUFFS
27. Solid Felt Ring Buffs
Unmounted high quality felt shaped to a shallow taper to use with different inside diameters of rings.
One end pin drilled to screw on the end of tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-501
BF-501-01
BF-502
BF-502-01
TAPER
/4”-9/16”
3
/4”-9/16”
7
/8”-5/8”
7
/8”-5/8”
LENGTH
3”
3”
4”
4”
3
GRADE
REGULAR
HARD
REGULAR
HARD
28. Inside Felt Ring Buffs
A compressed layer of felt, pre-formed to a taper is fitted snugly on a hardwood core. This gives the
buff additional stiffness. Pin drilled to fit on tapered spindle polishers.
REGULAR
BF-502-98
BF-503
BF-504
BF-504-04
BF-504-07
HARD
BF-502-99
BF-503-01
BF-504-01
BF-504-05
BF-504-08
TAPER
/16”-5/16”
3
/4”-9/16”
7
/8”-5/8”
11/16”-1”
11/16”-3/4”
LENGTH
3”
3”
4”
5”
6”
9
29. Uniflex Inside Ring-Cone Buffs
A unique type of abrasive, shaped to a reduced diameter over its length, on a wooden core. Ideal for
pre-finishing the inside of rings. Pin drilled to mount on tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-508
TAPER
/8”-5/8”
LENGTH
21/2”
7
30. Felt Combination Buffs
Combined wheel and inside ring buff of felt in medium density. One piece construction. A real time
saver when polishing the outside and inside of rings. Fits directly on tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-505
BF-506
TAPER
/4”-9/16”
7
/8”-5/16”
LENGTH
3”
4”
3
DIA. X T
2” X 1/2”
2” X 9/16”
31. Artifex Inside Ring Polishers
Unmatched in quality, these ring polishers outlast regular conventional polishers. Polishing can be
controlled to the finest degree. Size 65mm long and diameter tapered from 22-15mm.
CODE
BF-500
BF-500-01
GRIT
150
250
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
32. Rubberized Abrasive Inside Ring Buffs
Fine abrasives, different grades in a rubber bond, used for the initial cutting of inside of rings.
The mounted type is on a wooden mandrel. Both have center pin holes for easy mounting.
Size 27/8” long and diameter tapered from 3/4”-5/8”.
UNMOUNTED
BF-532
BF-533
BF-534
BF-535
38
COLOR
LT-GREEN
RED
BROWN
DK-GREEN
GRADE
X-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
MOUNTED
BF-536
BF-537
BF-538
BF-539
COLOR
LT-GREEN
RED
BROWN
DK-GREEN
GRADE
X-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BUFFS
33. Felt Bangle Buffs
High grade, pure solid felt, these medium density buffs are mounted on a hardwood core. Shaped to fit
the larger diameters of bangles and bracelets. Use on tapered spindle polishers.
CODE
BF-540
TAPER
2”-17/8”
LENGTH
2”
GRADE
REGULAR
34. Artifex Elastic Bond Wheels
Silicon carbide abrasive bonded on a non-clogging spongy base resists snagging during fine
de-burring. The extra flexibility can create different decorative surface effects on precious metals.
CODE
BF-550
BF-551
BF-552
BF-553
BF-554
DIA. X T X H
GRIT
100 X 20 X 6MM 150
100 X 20 X 6MM 250
100 X 20 X 6MM 80
150 X 20 X 6MM 150
150 X 20 X 6MM 250
GRADE
MEDIUM
FINE
COARSE
MEDIUM
FINE
35. 3M ® XK Wheels
These new 3M ® XK wheels are fast cutting and provide long life on the job. Ideal for heavy duty or
large part de-burring and cleaning where non-woven wheels do not perform satisfactorily.
CODE
BF-070
BF-071
BF-072
BF-073
DIA. X T X H
6” X 1/2” X 11/4”
6” X 1/2” X 11/4”
6” X 1” X 11/4”
6” X 1” X 11/4”
GRADE
1208 HA
2410 HA
1208 HA
2410 HA
36. 3M ® Sanding Sponges
These sponges may be shaped or trimmed to fit any type of surface or contour. Ideal for finishing and
polishing engravings and filigree.
CODE
BF-004
BF-005
BF-006
BF-007
BF-008
SIZE
41/2” X 51/2”
41/2” X 51/2”
41/2” X 51/2”
41/2” X 51/2”
41/2” X 51/2”
GRADE
MEDIUM
FINE
X-FINE
ULTRA FINE
MICRO FINE
37. 3M ® Scotchbrite Pads
Uniform fast cutting action, excellent for satin and matte finishes. Create your own flap wheels to get
an even finish on rings, bracelets and other articles of jewelry. Size 6” X 9”.
CODE
BF-001
BF-002
BF-003
3MCODE
7448
7447
7440
Safety Instructions
Page 40
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
39
™
BUFFS
38. Leather Wheel
39. Leather Strap
Constructed of high quality birch plywood cores, these wheels are covered
with rich leather. Wheels have cone shaped centers to fit both right and left
side of double ended bench polishers. Performs well for final polishing on
metal or stone. May be used wet or dry. Speed max 4,000 rpm.
Genuine cowhide leather strap is used for holding jewelry and rings while
polishing, buffing or grinding. Protects fingers from heat. Sold by foot
length. Available in 50 yards rolls.
CODE
BF-300
DIA. X T X H
6” X 1” X 1/4”
CODE
BF-301
un
po
om -164
C
g 63
hin 1
lis ge
Po Pa
DESCRIPTION
LEATHER STRAP
ds
• To achieve a high luster on articles of jewelry, select the correct
type of buff for the application.
• Buffing compounds are available in different grades it is necessary
to use separate buffs with each grade.
• Always protect your finger tips with finger guards.
THIS ICON IS INTENDED TO DRAW YOUR ATTENTION TO SPECIFIC SAFETY PRACTICES
WHEN WORKING WITH TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT LISTED IN THE CATALOG.
Type of Operations
Bench Work
Dapping
Flex Shaft
Engraving
Drilling
Grinding
Buffing
Carving
Finishing
Melting
Cleaning
Surface Finishing
Polishing
Plating
Soldering
Brazing
40
Use the proper
gloves for the work
application.
Select the correct
safety goggles for
the type of work.
Check input voltage
and wiring before
start up.
Do not exceed safe
operating speeds.
Protect yourself
against toxic fumes
and flames.
Avoid breathing airborne dust particles.
For Proper use of
equipment read
instructions manual.
™
BURS
1. Jewelers Burs- Hardened Tool Steel- Swiss
FIG-1 / 23
ROUND
FIG-77B / S
90°
Burs made from the finest tool steel and hardened
to exacting standards. All burs have 3/32” shanks.
Available in packs of six.
CUP
FIG-156C / HD
HART 90°
ISO
009
MM
0.90
CODE
BR-095
010
1.00
BR-096
011
1.10
BR-097
012
1.20
BR-098
013
1.30
BR-099
ISO
008
MM
0.80
CODE
BR-054-99
009
0.90
BR-055
010
1.00
BR-056
011
1.10
BR-057
012
1.20
BR-058
013
1.30
BR-059
014
1.40
BR-061
015
1.50
BR-062
016
1.60
BR-063
017
1.70
BR-064
018
1.80
BR-071
019
1.90
BR-072
020
2.00
BR-073
021
2.10
BR-074
022
2.20
BR-092
023
2.30
BR-075
025
2.50
BR-076
027
2.70
BR-077
029
2.90
BR-078
030
3.00
BR-079
035
3.50
BR-080
040
4.00
BR-081
045
4.50
BR-082
050
5.00
BR-083
055
5.50
BR-084
060
6.00
BR-085
065
6.50
BR-086
070
7.00
BR-087
075
7.50
BR-088
080
8.00
BR-089
085
8.50
BR-090
090
9.00
BR-091
095
9.50
BR-093
100
10.00
BR-094
ISO
005
MM
0.50
CODE
BR-020
014
1.40
BR-100
015
1.50
BR-101
006
0.60
BR-021
016
1.60
BR-102
007
0.70
BR-022
017
1.70
BR-103
008
0.80
BR-023
018
1.80
BR-104
009
0.90
BR-024
019
1.90
BR-105
010
1.00
BR-025
020
2.00
BR-106
011
1.10
BR-026
021
2.10
BR-107
012
1.20
BR-027
022
2.20
BR-108
013
1.30
BR-028
023
2.30
BR-109
014
1.40
BR-029
024
2.40
BR-110
015
1.50
BR-030
025
2.50
BR-111
016
1.60
BR-031
026
2.60
BR-125
017
1.70
BR-032
027
2.70
BR-112
018
1.80
BR-033
028
2.80
BR-124
019
1.90
BR-034
029
2.90
BR-113
020
2.00
BR-035
030
3.00
BR-114
021
2.10
BR-036
031
3.10
BR-115
022
2.20
BR-037
033
3.30
BR-116
023
2.30
BR-038
035
3.50
BR-117
024
2.40
BR-039
037
3.70
BR-118
025
2.50
BR-040
040
4.00
BR-119
026
2.60
BR-041
042
4.20
BR-120
027
2.70
BR-042
045
4.50
BR-121
028
2.80
BR-043
047
4.70
BR-122
029
2.90
BR-044
050
5.00
BR-123
030
3.00
BR-044-01
031
3.10
BR-045
033
3.30
BR-046
035
3.50
BR-047
037
3.70
BR-048
040
4.00
BR-049
042
4.20
BR-050
045
4.50
BR-051
047
4.70
BR-052
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-160
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-262
050
5.00
BR-053
008
0.80
BR-161
008
0.80
BR-263
055
5.50
BR-054
009
0.90
BR-162
009
0.90
BR-264
060
6.00
BR-054-01
010
1.00
BR-163
010
1.00
BR-265
065
6.50
BR-054-02
012
1.20
BR-164
012
1.20
BR-266
070
7.00
BR-054-03
014
1.40
BR-165
014
1.40
BR-267
075
7.50
BR-054-04
016
1.60
BR-166
016
1.60
BR-268
080
8.00
BR-054-05
018
1.80
BR-168
018
1.80
BR-269
085
8.50
BR-054-06
021
2.10
BR-169
021
2.10
BR-269-01
090
9.00
BR-054-07
023
2.30
BR-170
023
2.30
BR-269-02
095
9.50
BR-054-08
025
2.50
BR-171
025
2.50
BR-269-03
100
10.00
BR-054-09
027
2.70
BR-172
027
2.70
BR-269-04
42
FIG-21 / 34
FIG-15 / 29
CYL SQU. C.C
CYL. TWIST
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BURS
Jewelers Burs- Hardened Tool Steel- Swiss
FIG-3 / 24
INV. CONE
FIG-5 / 5NN(r)
FIG-413 / Q(F)
CONE
SETTING
ISO
008
MM
0.80
CODE
BR-194
ISO
006
MM
0.60
CODE
BR-135
009
0.90
BR-195
010
1.00
BR-196
007
0.70
BR-136
011
1.10
BR-196-01
008
0.80
BR-137
012
1.20
BR-197
009
0.90
BR-138
013
1.30
BR-197-01
010
1.00
BR-139
014
1.40
BR-198
012
1.20
BR-140
015
1.50
BR-199
014
1.40
BR-141
016
1.60
BR-200
016
1.60
BR-142
017
1.70
BR-200-01
018
1.80
BR-143
018
1.80
BR-201
021
2.10
BR-144
019
1.90
BR-202
023
2.30
BR-145
020
2.00
BR-203
025
2.50
BR-132
021
2.10
BR-204
027
2.70
BR-133
022
2.20
BR-205
029
2.90
BR-134
023
2.30
BR-206
025
2.50
BR-207
027
2.70
BR-208
029
2.90
BR-209
030
3.00
BR-210
031
3.10
BR-211
033
3.30
BR-212
FIG-23/38
CONE SQ. CC
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-146
008
0.80
BR-147
035
3.50
BR-212-01
009
0.90
BR-148
037
3.70
BR-213
010
1.00
BR-149
040
4.00
BR-213-01
011
1.10
BR-150
042
4.20
BR-213-02
012
1.20
BR-151
045
4.50
BR-214
013
1.30
BR-152
047
4.70
BR-214-01
014
1.40
BR-153
050
5.00
BR-215
015
1.50
BR-154
016
1.60
BR-155
018
1.80
BR-157
021
2.10
BR-158
023
2.30
BR-159
025
2.50
BR-156
30
CONE SQ.
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-365
008
0.80
BR-366
FIG-2 / 25
009
0.90
BR-367
010
1.00
BR-368
WHEEL
011
1.10
BR-368-01
012
1.20
BR-369
BR-369-01
ISO
MM
CODE
008
0.80
BR-216-01
009
0.90
BR-216-02
010
1.00
BR-217
011
1.10
BR-217-01
012
1.20
BR-218
013
1.30
BR-218-01
014
1.40
BR-218-02
015
1.50
BR-219
016
1.60
BR-220
017
1.70
BR-221
018
1.80
BR-221-01
019
1.90
BR-221-02
020
2.00
BR-222
021
2.10
BR-222-01
022
2.20
BR-223
023
2.30
BR-223-01
024
2.40
BR-223-02
025
2.50
BR-224
027
2.70
BR-225
029
2.90
BR-225-01
030
3.00
BR-226
031
3.10
BR-226-01
033
3.30
BR-227
035
3.50
BR-228
037
3.70
BR-229
040
4.00
BR-230
042
4.20
BR-231
045
4.50
BR-232
047
4.70
BR-232-01
050
5.00
BR-233
055
5.50
BR-234
060
6.00
BR-235
065
6.50
BR-236
070
7.00
BR-237
075
7.50
BR-238
080
8.00
BR-239
085
8.50
BR-240
090
9.00
BR-241
100
10.00
BR-216
ISO
006
MM
0.60
CODE
BR-180
013
1.30
007
0.70
BR-181
014
1.40
BR-370
008
0.80
BR-182
015
1.50
BR-370-01
009
0.90
BR-183
016
1.60
BR-371
010
1.00
BR-184
017
1.70
BR-371-01
012
1.20
BR-185
018
1.80
BR-372
CODE
BR-242
BR-186
BR-373
MM
2.30
1.40
2.10
ISO
023
014
021
BR-374
BR-244
BR-187
2.30
2.90
1.60
023
029
016
BR-248
BR-188
BR-375
3.50
1.80
2.50
035
018
025
040
4.00
BR-243
021
2.10
BR-189
070
7.00
BR-249
023
2.30
BR-190
080
8.00
BR-250
025
2.50
BR-191
090
9.00
BR-251
027
2.70
100
10.00
BR-252
029
2.90
KRAUSE
FIG-256 / 194
BR-192
ISO
010
MM
1.00
CODE
BR-175
BR-193
012
1.20
BR-176
FIG-231S/ 45
MTD. SAW
43
™
BURS
Jewelers Burs- Hardened Tool Steel- Swiss
BUD
FIG-234 / 161KE
FIG-17 / 31
CONE TWIST
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-269-97
K/EDGE CUTTER
ISO
009
MM
0.90
CODE
BR-380
010
1.00
BR-381
1.10
BR-382
008
0.80
BR-269-98
011
009
0.90
BR-269-99
012
1.20
BR-382-01
1.30
BR-383
010
1.00
BR-270
013
012
1.20
BR-271
014
1.40
BR-384
BR-272
015
1.50
BR-326
1.60
BR-385
014
1.40
016
1.60
BR-273
016
018
1.80
BR-274
017
1.70
BR-386
1.80
BR-387
021
2.10
BR-275
018
023
2.30
BR-276
019
1.90
BR-388
BR-277
020
2.00
BR-327
BR-278
021
2.10
BR-389
022
2.20
BR-390
023
2.30
BR-391
28
024
2.40
BR-328
025
2.50
BR-330
CYL. ROUND
027
2.70
BR-331
029
2.90
BR-325
030
3.00
BR-332
031
3.10
BR-333
033
3.30
BR-334
035
3.50
BR-335
037
3.70
BR-336
040
4.00
BR-337
042
4.20
BR-338
045
4.50
BR-339
047
4.70
BR-340
050
5.00
BR-341
060
6.00
BR-342
070
7.00
BR-343
080
8.00
BR-345
090
9.00
BR-346
100
10.00
BR-347
025
027
2.50
2.70
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-392
008
0.80
BR-393
009
0.90
BR-394
010
1.00
BR-395
012
1.20
BR-396
014
1.40
BR-397
016
1.60
BR-398
018
1.80
BR-399
021
2.10
BR-399-01
023
2.30
BR-399-02
025
2.50
BR-399-03
027
2.70
BR-399-04
029
2.90
BR-399-05
ISO
006
MM
0.60
CODE
BR-282
007
0.70
BR-283
008
0.80
BR-284
009
0.90
BR-285
010
1.00
BR-286
012
1.20
BR-288
014
1.40
BR-290
015
1.50
BR-291
016
1.60
BR-292
018
1.80
BR-294
021
2.10
BR-296
023
2.30
BR-297
025
2.50
BR-298
027
2.70
BR-299
029
2.90
BR-300
031
3.10
BR-301
033
3.30
BR-301-01
035
3.50
BR-301-02
037
3.70
BR-301-03
040
4.00
BR-301-04
042
4.20
BR-301-05
045
4.50
BR-301-06
047
4.70
BR-301-07
050
5.00
BR-301-08
HART 70°
FIG-446 / HB
ISO
009
MM
0.90
CODE
BR-310
010
1.00
BR-312
011
1.10
BR-311
012
1.20
BR-314
013
1.30
BR-315
014
1.40
BR-316
015
1.50
BR-317
016
1.60
BR-318
017
1.70
BR-319
018
1.80
BR-320
36
26
019
1.90
BR-321
020
2.00
BR-322
CYL. ROUND C.C
CYL. SQUARE
021
2.10
BR-323
022
2.20
BR-323-01
023
2.30
BR-324
025
2.50
BR-302
027
2.70
BR-303
029
2.90
BR-304
031
3.10
BR-305
033
3.30
BR-306
035
3.50
BR-307
037
3.70
BR-308
040
3.80
BR-308-01
042
4.20
BR-308-02
045
4.50
BR-309
047
4.70
BR-309-01
050
5.00
BR-309-02
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-399-10
ISO
007
MM
0.70
CODE
BR-350
008
0.80
BR-399-11
008
0.80
BR-351
009
0.90
BR-399-12
009
0.90
BR-352
010
1.00
BR-399-13
010
1.00
BR-353
012
1.20
BR-399-14
012
1.20
BR-354
014
1.40
BR-399-15
014
1.40
BR-355
016
1.60
BR-399-16
016
1.60
BR-356
018
1.80
BR-399-17
018
1.80
BR-357
021
2.10
BR-399-18
021
2.10
BR-358
023
2.30
BR-399-19
023
2.30
BR-359
025
2.50
BR-399-20
025
2.50
BR-360
027
2.70
BR-399-21
027
2.70
BR-361
44
FIG-6 / 33
™
BURS
Jumbo Bur Kits- Swiss
5. Bur Kit - Hart
If you're focused on a full range of burs in different shapes,
make these your choice. Made from graded tool steel,
manufactured to close tolerances and precisely tempered,
these burs have a keen cutting edge. Experience a fast
smooth chip flow leading to superior surface finishes.
Set of hart burs. Shank size 3/32”. Organized on a
plastic stand with a clear cover.
2. Bur Kit - Round
Set of round burs. Shank size 3/32”.
Organized on a plastic stand with
a clear cover.
CODE
BR-513
DESCRIPTION
HART-19 PCS (0.9-4.6MM)
6. Bur Kit Assorted
CODE
BR-510
DESCRIPTION
ROUND- 20 PCS (2.9-9.6MM)
Set of bur shapes: round, bud, hart, setting, cone,
finishing, flame, cup, oval and cylinder.
Shank size 3/32”. Organized on a plastic stand with
a clear cover.
3. Bur Kit - Bud
Set of bud burs. Shank size 3/32”. Organized
on a plastic stand with a clear cover.
CODE
BR-500
DESCRIPTION
ASSORTED BURS
24 PCS- (1.0-7.2MM)
7. Bur Set - Finishing
Set of finishing burs in shapes- round, cone, oval,
flame, pearl, inlay and bud. Shank size 3/32”.
Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover.
CODE
BR-511
DESCRIPTION
BUD-20 PCS (0.7-4.7MM)
4. Bur Kit - Wheel
Set of wheel burs. Shank size 3/32”. Organized
on a plastic stand with a clear cover.
CODE
BR-514
DESCRIPTION
FINISHING-12 PCS
8. Bur Kit - Deluxe Carving
A speciality set of shapes for carving metal, wood
or wax. Shank size 1/8”. Organized on a plastic
stand with a clear cover.
CODE
BR-512
DESCRIPTION
WHEEL-16 PCS (1.4-16.0MM)
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
BR-515
DESCRIPTION
CARVING KIT
12 PCS ASSORTED
45
™
BURS
Bur Sets- Alloy Tool Steel
Burs with special points and styles in a range of smaller diameters. Carefully heat treated to
maximize sharpness over extended use. Multiple
flutes for better cutting capability.
9.
Setting Bur
Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
Sizes are 010, 012, 015, 016, 020, 022, 033, 035,
037, 040, 045, 050.
10.
CODE
BR-491
BR-495
DESCRIPTION
ROUND LARGE SET OF 12
ROUND SMALL SET OF 12
CODE
BR-496
DESCRIPTION
CONE SET OF 12
CODE
BR-497
DESCRIPTION
CUP SET OF 12
Cone Bur
Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
Sizes are 008, 009, 010, 012, 013, 016, 018, 019,
020, 021, 022, 023.
12.
DESCRIPTION
SETTING SET OF 12
Round Bur
Sets of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
Small set consists of sizes 006, 007, 009, 012,
013, 014, 015, 018, 019, 021, 022, 023.
Large set consists of sizes 024, 025, 026, 027,
028, 029, 030, 031, 033, 035, 037, 040.
11.
CODE
BR-494
Cup Bur
Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
Sizes are 009, 011, 012, 013, 015, 016, 017, 018,
020, 023, 027, 030.
13.
Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
Sizes are 009, 010, 012, 013, 014, 015, 018, 021,
023, 025, 030, 031.
14.
CODE
BR-498
DESCRIPTION
HART SET OF 12
CODE
BR-499
DESCRIPTION
CONE SQ/CC SET OF 12
Cone SQ/CC
Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
Sizes are 007, 008, 009, 011, 012, 013, 014, 015,
016, 018, 021, 023.
46
90°
Hart Bur
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BURS
19. Wooden Bur Boxes
Hardwood box with hinged cover to store burs with 3/32” shank.
Keeps burs neatly organized and protected.
15. Bur Lube
A carefully formulated compound that provides the
optimum balance of cooling and lubrication. Reduces
friction and heat build up thereby extending tool life.
Essential to use when drilling, cutting or grinding.
CODE
BR-700
BR-701
BR-702
CODE
BR-718
BR-719
BR-719-01
DESCRIPTION
BUR LUBE 2 oz PUSH UP DISPENSER
BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz
BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz
DESCRIPTION
36 HOLES
72 HOLES
100 HOLES
20. Wooden Bur Block
16. Rotating Bur Stand
Slanted, hardwood block stand, with non-slip rubber grip base.
Organizes drills, files, and brushes of either 3/32” or 1/8” shanks.
Tiered, heavy duty plastic stand. Accommodates
150 burs 3/32” shank. The revolving design makes it
easy to choose the right bur.
CODE
BR-715
DESCRIPTION
BUR STAND- FOUR TIERS
17. Plastic Bur Stands
Rectangular plastic stand to hold 3/32” shank size
burs. Keeps burs organized and protects the
cutting edges from damage.
CODE
BR-720
DESCRIPTION
88 HOLES
21. Wax Burs
These are special burs for carving wax models. Widely spaced flutes
provide smooth cutting and will not clog like standard burs.
Available individually or in a set of 6 shapes. Shank size 3/32”.
CODE
BR-714
BR-716
DESCRIPTION
BUR STAND- LARGE 53/4” X 31/2”
BUR STAND- SMALL 43/4” X 3”
18. Acrylic Bur Stand
Clear acrylic stand with 36 holes to store 3/32”
shank size burs.
CODE
BR-717
SIZE
41/2” X 3” X 3/4”
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
BR-484
BR-486
BR-485
BR-487
BR-488
BR-489
BR-490
DESCRIPTION
016-HELIX
018-HELIX
023-HELIX
023-ROUND
030-ROUND
050-ROUND
6 PCS- (2 HELIX, 4 ROUND)
47
™
BURS
22. Jewelers Burs- High Speed Steel -USA
Experience the superior cutting performance of burs made from high density, tough cobalt alloy steel. Significant reduction in cost due to long
lasting edge sharpness. Operate these burs at higher speeds to generate smoother surface finishes. Shank size 3/32”.
90°
Available individually or in sets.
BEARING 90°
ROUND
#
1
MM
0.90
CODE
BR-550
2
1.00
BR-551
3
1.30
BR-552
4
1.50
BR-553
5
1.70
BR-554
6
1.90
BR-555
7
2.10
BR-556
8
2.30
BR-557
9
2.50
BR-558
10
2.70
BR-559
11
2.90
BR-560
12
3.10
BR-561
13
3.30
BR-562
14
3.50
BR-563
15
3.80
BR-564
16
4.00
BR-565
17
4.30
BR-566
18
4.50
BR-567
19
4.70
BR-568
20
5.00
BR-569
22
5.20
BR-570
23
5.40
BR-571
24
5.60
BR-572
25
5.90
BR-573
26
6.30
BR-574
27
6.70
BR-575
28
7.20
BR-576
29
7.60
BR-577
30
8.00
BR-578
31
8.90
BR-579
32
9.60
BR-580
33
10.40
BR-581
34
11.10
BR-582
SETTING
#
1
MM
0.90
CODE
BR-583
SIZE
1
MM
0.90
CODE
BR-643
2
1.10
BR-584
2
1.10
BR-644
3
1.30
BR-585
3
1.30
BR-645
4
1.50
BR-586
4
1.50
BR-646
5
1.70
BR-587
5
1.70
BR-647
6
1.90
BR-588
6
1.90
BR-648
7
2.10
BR-589
7
2.10
BR-649
8
2.30
BR-590
8
2.30
BR-650
9
2.50
BR-591
9
2.50
BR-651
10
2.70
BR-592
10
2.70
BR-652
11
2.90
BR-593
11
2.90
BR-653
12
3.10
BR-594
12
3.10
BR-654
13
3.30
BR-595
13
3.30
BR-655
14
3.50
BR-596
14
3.50
BR-656
15
3.80
BR-597
15
3.80
BR-657
16
4.00
BR-598
16
4.00
BR-658
17
4.30
BR-599
17
4.30
BR-659
18
4.50
BR-600
18
4.50
BR-660
19
4.70
BR-601
19
4.70
BR-661
20
5.00
BR-602
20
5.00
BR-662
22
5.20
BR-603
22
5.20
BR-663
23
5.40
BR-604
23
5.40
BR-664
24
5.60
BR-605
24
5.60
BR-665
25
5.90
BR-606
25
5.90
BR-666
26
6.30
BR-607
26
6.30
BR-667
27
6.70
BR-608
27
6.70
BR-668
28
7.20
BR-609
28
7.20
BR-669
29
7.60
BR-610
29
7.60
BR-670
30
8.00
BR-611
30
8.00
BR-671
31
8.90
BR-612
31
8.90
BR-672
32
9.60
BR-613
32
9.60
BR-673
33
10.40
BR-614
33
10.40
BR-674
34
11.10
BR-615
34
11.10
BR-675
45°
45°
45°
HART 45°
HART 45°
SIZE
11
MM
2.90
CODE
BR-625
12
3.10
BR-626
13
3.30
BR-627
SIZE
22
MM
5.20
CODE
BR-635
BR-618
14
3.50
BR-628
24
5.60
BR-637
BR-619
15
3.80
BR-629
26
6.30
BR-639
1.90
BR-620
16
4.00
BR-630
28
7.20
BR-640
7
2.10
BR-621
17
4.30
BR-631
30
8.00
BR-641
8
2.30
BR-622
18
4.50
BR-632
34
11.10
BR-642
9
2.50
BR-623
19
4.70
BR-633
10
2.70
BR-624
20
5.00
BR-634
SIZE
2
MM
1.10
CODE
BR-616
3
1.30
BR-617
4
1.50
5
1.70
6
48
HART 45°
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BURS
Bur Kit- High Speed Steel- USA
26. Flame
Kit contains the most popular sizes in specific shapes. All have
3
/32” shanks which will fit most flexible shaft handpieces.
Set of 14 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
23. Hart 90°
Set of 33 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
90°
CODE
BR-686
SIZE
EVEN SIZES #2-26,
& #30
QTY
14
27. Round
CODE
BR-677
SIZE
#1-34 EXCEPT #21
QTY
33
Set of 33 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
24. Hart 45°
Set of 24 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
45°
CODE
BR-690
SIZE
#1-34 EXCEPT #21
QTY
33
28. Bud
Set of 23 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
CODE
BR-680
SIZE
#2-20 & EVEN SIZES #22-30
QTY
24
CODE
BR-692
25. Setting
Set of 33 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
SIZE
#2-14 & EVEN SIZES #16-34
QTY
23
29. Cone
Set of 23 burs. Shank size 3/32”.
All organized in a polished wooden box.
CODE
BR-685
SIZE
#1-34 EXCEPT #21
Safety Instructions
Page 40
QTY
33
CODE
BR-694
SIZE
#2-14 & EVEN SIZES #16-34
QTY
23
49
™
BURS
30. Black Top Burs - German
32. Carbide Burs
Made of tungsten vanadium alloy steel. These burs provide extra long life due to superior cutting tooth
geometry. Manufactured to close tolerances and precise forms, they are ideal for carving and finishing.
Shank size 3/32”. Available individually or in sets.
Designed to cut with confidence, these carbide burs
yield high productivity. Exceptional durability and
wear resistance enables you to cut and finish at the
same time. Burs have 1/16” shank size for use on
friction grip high speed - flex shaft handpieces.
SETTING
ROUND
ISO
010
MM
1.00
CODE
BR-430
012
1.20
BR-431
014
1.40
BR-432
015
1.50
BR-433
016
1.60
BR-434
018
1.80
BR-435
021
2.10
BR-436
023
2.30
BR-437
025
2.50
BR-438
030
3.00
BR-439
035
3.50
BR-440
040
4.00
BR-441
050
5.00
BR-442
060
6.00
BR-443
065
6.50
BR-444
070
7.00
BR-445
080
8.00
BR-446
085
8.50
BR-447
090
9.00
BR-448
095
9.50
BR-449
100
10.00
BR-450
CUP
ISO
010
MM
1.00
CODE
BR-001
012
1.20
BR-002
014
1.40
BR-003
015
1.50
BR-004
016
1.60
BR-005
018
1.80
BR-006
021
2.10
BR-007
023
2.30
BR-008
90°
HART 90°
ISO
010
MM
1.00
CODE
BR-009
012
1.20
BR-010
014
1.40
BR-011
015
1.50
BR-012
016
1.60
BR-013
018
1.80
BR-014
021
2.10
BR-015
023
2.30
BR-016
50
ISO
010
MM
1.00
CODE
BR-400
0125
1.25
BR-401
015
1.50
BR-402
0175
1.75
BR-403
020
2.00
BR-404
0225
2.25
BR-405
025
2.50
BR-406
0275
2.75
BR-407
030
3.00
BR-408
0325
3.25
BR-409
035
3.50
BR-410
0375
3.75
BR-411
040
4.00
BR-412
0425
4.25
BR-413
045
4.50
BR-414
0475
4.75
BR-415
050
5.00
BR-416
0525
5.25
BR-417
055
5.50
BR-418
0575
5.75
BR-419
060
6.00
BR-420
0625
6.25
BR-421
065
6.50
BR-422
0675
6.75
BR-423
070
7.00
BR-424
0725
7.25
BR-425
075
7.50
BR-426
0775
7.75
BR-427
080
8.00
BR-428
ROUND / 123
ISO
005
MM
0.50
CODE
BR-800
006
0.60
BR-801
007
0.70
BR-802
008
0.80
BR-803
009
0.90
BR-804
010
1.00
BR-805
011
1.10
BR-806
012
1.20
BR-807
013
1.30
BR-808
014
1.40
BR-809
016
1.60
BR-811
018
1.80
BR-813
021
2.10
BR-816
023
2.30
BR-818
027
2.70
BR-822
33. Stone Setting-Carbon Steel Bur Set
An indispensable bur set for cutting precise stone
seats. Made of carbon steel. Available in different
sets, neatly organized on an acrylic stand.
Shank size 3/32”.
31. Round for Pearl Setting
Accurately calibrated sizes, specifically
designed for cutting the seat and simultaneously forming a peg for securing the pearl.
Made in high speed steel. Shank size 3/32”.
Set contains 0.20, 0.25, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45,
0.50, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.90,
1.00mm sizes.
BR-492
BR-493
ROUND
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 15 PCS
CODE
BR-850
CODE
BR-492
BR-493
DESCRIPTION
SHOULDER LEVEL SET OF 22 PCS
STONE SETTING SET OF 30 PCS
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
BURS
Black Top Bur Kits - German
Made of tungsten vanadium alloy steel. These burs provide extra long life due to superior cutting tooth geometry. Manufactured to close tolerances and
precise forms, they are ideal for carving and finishing. Shank size 3/32”.
34. Black Top Bur-Round
36. Black Top Bur-Setting
Set of 17 burs in increments of 0.5 mm,
from 1 to 8 mm in a polished wooden box.
Shank size 3/32”.
Set of 29 burs in increments of 0.25 mm,
from 1 to 8 mm in a polished wooden box.
Shank size 3/32”.
CODE
BR-018
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 17
CODE
BR-501
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 29
35. Black Top Bur-Cup
37. Black Top Bur - Assorted
Set of 17 burs in increments of 0.5 mm,
from 1 to 8 mm in a polished wooden box.
Shank size 3/32”.
Set of 30 burs in increments of 1 mm,
from 2 to 7 mm in a polished wooden box.
Shank size 3/32”.
Contents- 6 each of round, setting, cone,
cup and cylinder shapes.
CODE
BR-019
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 17
CODE
BR-506
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 30
• Select Burs according to the shapes, material and shank diameter.
• Bur diameters are either in ISO No. or mm. The reference chart specifies the nominal diameters of the bur.
• High Speed Steel burs last longer than tungsten vanadium steel. Carbide burs have the longest life.
• Small diameter burs are generally run at higher speeds than large diameter burs.
• Use of a lubricant reduces friction and extends bur life.
Bur Conversion Reference Chart -Actual Size
Safety Instructions
Page 40
51
™
BURS
38. Carbide Florentine Tools
40. Florentine Cylinder Burs
Carbide burs easily surpass ordinary steel tools and are the logical
choice to produce the most brilliant finish by any rotary tool. Improved
penetration allows quick clean cutting at high speeds. Shank size 1/8”.
Made from high quality tungsten carbide, these tools are extremely efficient for
fine chip removal. Available in different diameters and grades.
CODE
BR-462
BR-463
BR-465
SHAPE
CYLINDER
POINTED
BARREL
HEAD Ø
/8”
1
/8”
5
/32”
1
HEAD LGTH.
/2”
1
/2”
5
/32”
1
CODE
BR-470
BR-471
BR-468
BR-469
HEAD DIA.
7mm
7mm
9.5mm
9.5mm
GRADE
FINE
COARSE
FINE
COARSE
39. Carbide Inside Ring Burs
41. Bur Setting Gauges
Long lasting and wear resistant carbide with fine teeth, designed for high
speed smoothing and finishing the inside of rings. Different finishes are
possible from coarse to extra fine.
Precision Swiss made, plate type gauge to check bur diameters in ISO sizes.
Black easy to read numbers on a silver background.
CODE
BR-508
CODE
BR-476
BR-477
BR-478
BR-482
BR-483
BR-479
BR-480
BR-481
HEAD Ø
/4”
1
/4”
1
/4”
3
/8”
3
/8”
1
/2”
1
/4”
1
/4”
1
Bur Lube
HEAD LGTH. SHANK
3
/2”
/32”
1
3
/2”
/32”
1
3
/2”
/32”
3
1
/4”
/8”
3
1
/4”
/8”
1
/8”
1”
3
1”
/32”
3
1”
/32”
1
FINISH
X-FINE
FINE
COARSE
FINE
STD
FINE
FINE
COARSE
DESCRIPTION
BUR GAUGES
42. Gem Setting Bur with Gauge
Set stones like a master jeweler with this indispensable new inovation. Achieve
precision without the guess work. Cut channels to a perfect size to match the
corresonding gauge. Drop the stone into seat and close the prongs or bezels.
Shank size 3/32”.
Makes easy!
Gem lube reduces friction and heat build up
thereby extending tool life. Essential to use
when drilling, cutting or grinding.
CODE
BR-507
52
DESCRIPTION
18 PCS. (1.0-5.0mm)
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
1. Kerr® Wax Injectomatic
An innovative wax injector with a convenient swing out cover and built-in pump to
manually apply pressure 0-30 PSI. Fast 20 minute warm up to 160°F/71°C. This one quart
injector produces dense, accurate wax patterns. The Injectomatic includes a thermometer
and a clean drip guard nozzle. Ambient to 230°F/110°C.
CODE
CW-196
CW-197
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CAPACITY
1 qt
1 qt
2. Kerr® Projector
A large four quart capacity wax injector that is sturdily constructed and designed for use
with an external air source. Ideal for professional use, this unit features a swing out cover
and an air pressure gauge 0-30 PSI with regulator to ensure consistent wax pressure.
Added features include positive sealing, drip guard nozzle, and a side drain for easy clean
out. Ambient to 250°F/120°C.
CODE
CW-198
CW-199
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CAPACITY
4 qt
4 qt
3. Wax Injector 23/4 Qt. / 4 Qt.
Achieve higher productivity using these heavy duty wax injectors with all the essential
features to guarantee consistent dense wax patterns. A swing out cover to fill wax and a
side drain for clean up. Uses an external air source, but has a built-in air pressure gauge
0-30 PSI, with a regulator and a safety valve. Non-drip injection nozzle is reliable and leak
proof. Ambient to 250°F/120°C.
CODE
CW-200
CW-202
CW-205
CW-206
CW-209
54
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
SPARE NOZZLE
CAPACITY
23/4 qt
23/4 qt
4 qt
4 qt
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
4. Kerr® Satin Cast-20
7. Kerr® Platinite
Formulated for investment casting. Provides a clean breakaway and
leaves a satin smooth finish that greatly reduces finishing time.
The material blends to a smooth consistency and includes wetting
agents that create a composite high strength mold. Suitable to cast
gold, silver and other metals that melt at less than 2000°F/1093°C.
High strength, high temperature, investment for casting platinum, stainless
steel and alloys that melt above 2200°F. Forms a strong mold with good
dimensional accuracy and caters to the exacting needs for excellence.
An exceptionally smooth surface is achieved without cracks and fissures
which drastically reduces finishing time.
CODE
CW-180
DESCRIPTION
SQ. DRUM
100 Lb / 45 Kg
CODE
CW-184
DESCRIPTION
SQ. DRUM
100 Lb / 45 Kg
8. Platinum Casting Powder
5. Kerr® Kerrcast-2000
This popular grade uses cristobolite, and is a general type of
investment, mixes homogeneously and has a clean burn out.
The surface finish is of good quality. Overall characteristics are a good
bond and resistance to thermal shock. Useful for custom orders that
you need immediately.
CODE
CW-182
DESCRIPTION
SQ. DRUM
100 Lb / 45 Kg
6. Investment Mixer
A quality blending system using elliptical motion to mix generous
quantities in minimum time. The mix is homogenous, does not entrap
air bubbles and is of consistent density. This eliminates mold gasses
and controls shrinkage. Bowl and whip are of
stainless steel.
CODE
CI-105
CI-106
CI-106-01
CI-106-02
Ikohe's special formulation for investment castings of platinum, palladium
and other alloys that melt at temperatures higher then 2000°F.
Molds exhibit a fine smooth surface that reduces polishing costs.
Mold strength is high and castings divest easily. These drums include the
binder and platinum investment powder. The binder is a special liquid which
provides additional strength to withstand the high temperature being used.
DESCRIPTION
110V/ 60Hz-K45
220V/ 50Hz-K45
REPLACEMENT BOWL 41/2 qt
REPLACEMENT WHIP
CODE
CW-186
CW-188
DESCRIPTION
DRUM 50 Lb / 22 Kg WITH 16 oz BINDER
SPARE BINDER- 16 oz
9. Investment Scale
A free standing scale, with capacity up to 20 lbs. in one ounce increments.
Easy to read dial. Large weighing bowl to facilitate transfer of the
investment powder to the mixer.
CODE
CI-075
DIMENSION
10” X 7” X 16” Ht.
55
™
CASTING
10. Investment Scoop
14. Rubber Table Pad
Made of heavy duty plastic, the scoop has high
supporting sides and scoops investment without
spilling and waste. A full scoop holds about 3 lbs.
A rubber mat for use in vacuum casting under the
bell jar. The silicone pad (red) is of premium quality
and lasts longer. Ideal hardness effectively seals
the jar on the investing table.
CODE
CI-075-01
DIMENSION
81/2” X 43/4” X 3”
CODE
CI-112
CI-113
DESCRIPTION
11” SQUARE- RUBBER
71/2” DIA. ROUND- SILICONE
11. Investment Spatula
15. Non-Asbestos Paper Rolls
A useful instrument for mixing, forming or shaping
wax or clay. Conveniently sized stainless steel
rounded blade with a wooden handle.
When flasks are lined with this sheet, investment
removal becomes easier. The paper liner withstands
high temperature and is useful when casting platinum.
CODE
CI-075-02
BLADE SIZE
51/2”
12. Rubber Mixing Bowls
Bowls in two sizes, made in flexible long lasting
rubber. Ideal to use for mixing investment powder.
CODE
CI-074
CI-074-01
DESCRIPTION
JUMBO- 1 gal 9” X 7”
MEDIUM- 11/2 quart 6” X 6”
CODE
CI-045-02
CI-045-03
CI-045-04
CI-045-05
WIDTH X T
71/2” X 1/16”
5” X 1/16”
4” X 1/16”
21/2” X 1/16”
LENGTH
50 ft
50 ft
50 ft
50 ft
16. Masking Tapes
This tape may be used to cover the holes on perforated
flasks during investing. Very easy to peel away after
burn out.
CODE
CI-043
CI-044
CI-044-01
CI-045
CI-045-01
WIDTH
4”
5”
6”
7”
8”
LENGTH
60 yds
60 yds
60 yds
60 yds
60 yds
17. Mold Release Sprays
13. Dial Thermometer
A dual scale F/C° thermometer. Use to accurately
measure the temperature of wax or to calibrate
vulcanizers. Dial diameter 11/2”.
CODE
CW-221
56
DESCRIPTION
8” STEM- 50°-400°F(10°-200°C)
Effective, non-stick silicone base releases spray
that may be used on rubber or metal molds. Spray
helps patterns to come off clean from the mold.
CODE
CR-820
CR-821
DESCRIPTION
CASTALDO® - 20 oz
SPRITS® - 20 oz
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
Castaldo® Rubber
21. Castaldo® Super High Strength™
Silicone/Econosil® Strips
Silicone strips are extremely strong, tough and flexible. When uncured,
it is easy to pack detailed areas. Works like clay or putty and produces
molds with good tear strength. Vulcanizes at 330°F - 15 minutes per
layer of rubber.
Econosil strips are harder, red in color, economical to use and easy to
pack or cut. Low temperature metals like pewter may be cast directly in
this rubber mold.
Strips:
Ready Cut:
Quadrotto:
CODE
CR-705
CR-708
Size
27/8” X 18”
17/8” X 27/8”
18” X 18”
22. Castaldo® Mold Lock Formers
18. Castaldo Gold Label
®
DESCRIPTION
SILICONE STRIPS- 5lb PK
ECONOSIL STRIPS -27/8” X 18”
Brass metal cones that have projections on one side to lock into the
base. Use one in each corner to locate the top half of the mold. Tapered
shape prevents the mold from displacement during injection. Pkg 3 oz.
®
This is a soft, natural, pliable rubber. It has the ideal characteristics
for difficult molds containing undercuts, filigree and settings.
Rubber is 1/8” thick and vulcanizes at 310°F- 15 minutes for 1/4” mold
frame thickness.
ROLL
STRIPS
READY CUT
QUADROTTO
1LB
CR-619
-
5LB
CR-700
CR-703
CR-704
-
10LB
CR-615
50LB
CR-701
CR-702
CR-611
19. Castaldo® White Label®
Firm and flexible. A good all purpose mold rubber that is suited for
thin molds. Rubber is 1/8” thick, vulcanizes at 310°F -15 minutes for
1
/4” mold frame thickness.
ROLL
STRIPS
READY CUT
QUADROTTO
1LB
CR-618
-
5LB
CR-605
CR-603
CR-604
-
10LB
CR-614
50LB
CR-601
CR-602
CR-610
CODE
CR-714
DESCRIPTION
MOLD LOCKS- 155 PCS. APPROX.
23. Castaldo® MoldMatic® Ready Made Molds
Quick, easy way to make molds. Use these ready made molds, with a
Moldmatic frame, for accurate alignment. Mold locks are pre-formed.
Simply remove the protective cloth at the mold center and insert your
model. After vulcanization, just pull the edges apart.
20. Castaldo® No-Shrink Pink®
Minimal shrinkage of less than 1%. High adherence for detail and
excellent memory. May be used alone or combined with Gold Label®
or White Label® on the outside of the mold to save costs.
STRIPS
READY CUT
QUADROTTO
1LB
CR-620
-
Safety Instructions
Page 40
5LB
CR-706
CR-707
-
10LB
CR-622
CR-616
50LB
CR-612
WHITE
LABEL
CR-650
CR-651
CR-652
GOLD
LEBEL
CR-653
CR-654
CR-655
SHRINK
PINK
CR-656
CR-657
CR-658
SIZE
L X WIDTH
SMALL
MEDIUM
LARGE
17/8” X 27/8”
23/8” X 3”
27/8” X 33/8”
57
™
CASTING
24. Castaldo® MoldMatic® Mold Frames
27. See-Thru Mold Frames
High precision frames for Ready Made Mold system.
Three different sizes are available. Will fit any standard vulcanizer.
Aluminum U- frame with a sprue former, available in different thicknesses.
Two glass panels, one on each side, are held together with a pair of spring clips.
Easy to assemble and ideal for use with LMR Rubber Set.
CODE
CM-500
CM-501
CM-502
SIZE
SMALL
MEDIUM
LARGE
L X W X HT.
17/8” X 27/8” X 3/4”
23/8” X 3” X 3/4”
27/8” X 33/8” X 3/4”
CODE
CM-450
CM-451
CM-452
CM-453
CM-454
CM-455
CM-457
HXWXT
3” X 2” X 5/8”
3” X 2” X 3/4”
3” X 2” X 1”
3” X 2” X 11/4”
3” X 2” X 11/2”
3” X 2” X 2”
SPARE GLASS
25. Castaldo® Quick-Sil® RTV Molding Rubber
28. LMR- Liquid Mold Rubber
A safe, non-toxic two part silicone rubber-mix that is pliable.
Cures in about 15 minutes at room temperature with heat, but with
pressure. The rubber must be pressed or clamped in order to provide good detail. Good tear resistance with minimal shrinkage.
Vulcanizing at room temperature, this liquid mold rubber consists of a base and a
white catalyst. Ideal for delicate items of wax, wood or plastic, that cannot
withstand heat or pressure. Molds have high tear strength with zero shrinkage.
CODE
CR-670
CODE
CR-660
DESCRIPTION
9 lb LMR KIT WITH CATALYST
DESCRIPTION
2 lb KIT
26. Castaldo® LiquaCast® Liquid Mold Rubber
29. Knife Handle & Spare Blades
A two part liquid rubber compound that vulcanizes overnight
without any heat or pressure. Contains no silicone, but makes a
strong durable mold for waxes and plastics.
Made of high impact plastic, and shaped for a comfortable grip, these handles
hold cutting blades securely when cutting molds open. Surgical steel hollow
ground blades are available as a replacement.
#10A
CM-904
#11
#12
CM-903
CODE
CR-710
CR-711
CR-712
58
DESCRIPTION
50 lb - TWO PART
10 lb - TWO PART
1 lb - TWO PART
CODE
CM-902
CM-900
CM-901
CM-903
CM-904
DESCRIPTION
BLADE #10A
BLADE #11
BLADE #12
KNIFE HANDLE #3
KNIFE HANDLE- PLASTIC
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
30. Mold Mate
33. Soft Grip Knife
This unit has a cutting board and two clamps to aid mold separation.
Permits all around access and helps to increase production.
Non-slip, soft grip handle knife has a knurled screw locking arrangement
for blades. Knife measures 5” in length without the blade. Spare blades are
available.
CR-600
CR-600-01
CODE
CM-905
CM-906
CODE
CR-600
CR-600-01
DESCRIPTION
MOLD MATE 6” X 14”
MOLD MATE JUNIOR
31. Base Mate
DESCRIPTION
SOFT GRIP KNIFE WITH SAFETY CAP
5 PCS. SET OF REPLACEMENT BLADES
34. Sprue Rod Former/Sprue Mandrel
Sprue tip with guide may be heated to form cone shaped entry hole for wax
injection.
Holds sprue bases for easy accessibility. Tilts up or down and rotates 360°
for working at any angle. Accepts 31/2” and 4” sprue bases.
CODE
CS-215
CS-216
CS-218
CODE
CR-590
DESCRIPTION
BASE MATE
32. Aluminum Multiple Frames
Frames of different thickness that can be assembled together to get a mold
of the desired height. This method builds mold frames to suit your models.
CODE
CM-432
CM-433
CM-434
CM-435
DESCRIPTION
3 IN 1 (17/8” X 27/8” X 7/8”)
4 IN 1 (17/8” X 27/8” X 3/4”)
4 IN 1 (17/8” X 27/8” X 1”)
4 IN 1 (17/8” X 27/8” X 11/2”)
7 in 1 Mold Frame
Consists of three frames that can be assembled together. Mold size
17/8” X 27/8”. Makes the following thicknesses: 1/2”, 5/8”, 3/4”,11/8”, 11/4”, 13/8” & 17/8”.
CODE
CM-436
DESCRIPTION
BURNING MANDREL
SPRUE FORMERS 3/16”
SPRUE FORMERS 1/8”
35. Steam Dewaxer
Steam dewaxers remove wax from invested casting before burn out.
Electrically heated steam eliminates 95% of wax thereby reducing porosity
and carbonization. Furnace life is increased because the heating element is
not exposed to harmful wax fumes. The unit is double wall stainless steel
and has a front access drain.
CODE
POWER
OUTSIDE DIMENSION
INSIDE DIMENSION
WATER CAPACITY
CI-118
110V/ 60 Hz
241/2” X 141/2” X 17”
20” X 121/2” X 101/2”
2 gal
DESCRIPTION
7 IN 1
Safety Instructions
Page 40
59
™
CASTING
36. Standard Vulcanizer
39. Dual Vulcanizer
Rigid box frame, cast iron construction, stainless steel
heated platens and a powerful one inch pressure screw.
Platen alignment is by twin guide bars of ample
dimensions. The base encloses the controls,
thermostat, pilot lamps and on/off switch.
Temperature range 500°F/ 260°C.
Sturdy, heavy duty construction, with twin guide posts and a centrally located
pressure screw. Large stainless steel platens, perfectly aligned and individually
heated by two separate thermostat controls. Heat transfer is identical to both
sides of the mold to guarantee perfectly cooked molds with Castaldo No-Shrink
Pink. Base houses controls, both thermostats, and on/off switch.
Temperature range 500°F/ 260°C.
CODE
CR-901
CR-900
CR-904
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
HEATING ELEMENTS
CODE
CR-898
CR-899
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
37. Deluxe Vulcanizer
40.
Heavy duty cast iron construction has larger platens of
stainless steel, twin guide rods, and a central pressure
screw with a thrust pad. Platens can accommodate
multiple molds of similar thickness. Base has built-in
controls, thermostat, pilot lamp, and on/off switch.
Temperature range 500°F/ 260°C.
Reliable, accurate temperature regulation, and uniform pressure produces molds
that are evenly vulcanized and have minimal shrinkage. Precise platen alignment
is assured by large diameter guides. Completely protected electronic circuitry is
designed for consistent repeatability.
CODE
CR-902
CR-903
CR-905
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
HEATING ELEMENTS
Digital Vulcanizer
CODE
CR-895
CR-896
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
38. Mold Frame Plates
41. Aluminum Mold Frames
Aluminum plates in different sizes to cover top and
bottom of the mold frames when vulcanizing. Smooth flat
surfaces prevent the rubber from sticking to the platens.
Sold in pairs.
One piece aluminum with a single or double cavity. Additional side holes form
escape channels for the excess rubber during vulcanization. Measurements
denote the mold sizes.
CODE
CM-440
CM-441
CM-442
CM-443
60
L X WIDTH
21/2” X 31/2”
37/8” X 53/8”
4” X 6”
5” X 71/8”
L X W X Ht.
17/8” X 21/2” X 1/2”
17/8” X 27/8” X 3/4”
17/8” X 27/8” X 5/8”
17/8” X 27/8” X 1”
17/8” X 27/8” X 11/4”
17/8” X 27/8” X 11/2”
21/2” X 33/4” X 1”
SINGLE
CM-059
CM-034
CM-058
CM-100
CM-125
CM-150
CM-129
DOUBLE
CM-203
CM-234
CM-202
CM-201
CM-301
CM-302
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
42. Perforated Flasks
Heavy gauge perforated flasks, in quality stainless steel, withstand thermal shock and corrosion.
Ideal for use on vacuum casting machines. Provides complete air withdrawal which results in a
denser casting. Available in all the standard sizes. Gauge size is 6.
HEIGHT
Ø 3”
Ø 33/8”
Ø 31/2”
Ø 4”
Ø 5”
4”
CI-047
CI-041
CI-084
CI-034
-
5”
CI-046
CI-035
-
6”
CI-083
CI-036
-
7”
CI-039
CI-037
CI-107
8”
CI-040
CI-056
CI-108
81/2”
CI-082
CI-048
CI-038
-
91/2”
CI-049
CI-042
-
43. Regular Flasks
Durable, stainless steel flasks are corrosion resistant and withstand thermal shock during quenching.
All surfaces of the flask have a smooth finish and edges are machined for optimum sealing.
Gauge size is 14.
HEIGHT
Ø 2”
Ø 21/2”
Ø 3”
Ø 31/2”
Ø 4”
21/2”
CI-120
CI-130
CI-140
CI-150
-
3”
CI-131
CI-141
CI-151
CI-161
4”
CI-132
CI-142
CI-152
CI-162
5”
CI-133
CI-143
CI-153
CI-163
6”
CI-144
CI-154
CI-164
44. Flask Sleeves
Reusable flexible rubber sleeves slide on to the outside of the perforated flasks while investing.
After the investment has set, the sleeves may be removed.
HEIGHT
Ø 33/8”
Ø 4”
4”
CI-064
-
6”
CI-065
7”
CI-066
8”
CI-067
45. Flask Extender
Mainly used on solid wall flasks to prevent overflow of investment while filling the flasks up to their
top level. Ideal to avoid waste.
CODE
CI-060
CI-057
DIA.
21/2”
23/4”
CODE
CI-061
CI-062
CI-063
46. High Temp Gaskets
Graphite impregnated gaskets used to seal flasks while vacuuming.
Sizes available to suit all standard flask sizes. All are 1/8” thick.
CODE
CI-050
CI-051
CI-052
CI-053
CI-054
CI-055
Safety Instructions
Page 40
DIA.
3”
33/8”
31/2”
4”
41/2”
5”
DIA.
3”
31/2”
4”
47. Silicone Gaskets
These gaskets come in different sizes and are used to seal the casting flask to
the vacuum table. More pliable, these gaskets conform to a greater variation
of uneven surfaces.
DIA.
3”
33/8”
31/2”
4”
41/2”
5”
51/2”
/8” T
CI-068
CI-069
CI-070
CI-071
CI-072
CI-073
CI-081
1
/4” T
CI-088
CI-087
CI-089
CI-090
1
61
™
CASTING
48. Inva-Cast Vacuum Machines
Bench top unit that allows investment of both standard and perforated flasks
using vacuum technology. Superior air bubble elimination for cleaner, denser
molds. Easy to operate, the machine produces consistent results, while
reducing the risk of casting defects. An additional feature is the low maintenance aspect of filters, lines and pump. The system includes all the essentials for vacuum casting.
CODE
CI-030
CI-032
DESCRIPTION
INVA-CASTING 110V/ 60Hz
INVA-CASTING 220V/ 50Hz
Spare parts for Inva-Cast
CODE
CI-028
CI-068
CI-069
CI-071
CI-112
CI-113
CI-033
DESCRIPTION
VACUUM PUMP OIL
RUBBER SEAL FOR 3” FLASK
RUBBER SEAL FOR 33/8” FLASK
RUBBER SEAL FOR 4” FLASK
RUBBER VACUUM SEAL 11” SQUARE
SILICONE VACUUM SEAL-71/2” ROUND
BELL JAR 9” X 8”
49. Sprue Bases
Long lasting rubber bases for spruing all types of trees.
Various shapes and different diameters are available with all
sizes of button holes. Flexible to fit flasks and provide a leak
proof seal.
Button Style -A
CODE
CB-251
CB-301
CB-351
CB-401
CB-501
Tree Style -C
CODE
CB-153
CB-203
CB-253
CB-303
CB-353
CB-403
CB-503
CB-603
FLASK Ø
11/2”
2”
21/2”
3”
31/2”
4”
5”
6”
FLASK Ø
21/2”
3”
31/2”
4”
5”
Donut Style -B
BUTTON ID.
7
/8”
11/2”
2”
23/16”
23/16”
BUTTON ID.
/8”
3
/8”
3
/8”
3
/8”
5
/16”
3
/8”
3
/8”
3
/8”
CODE
CB-252
CB-302
CB-352
CB-402
FLASK Ø
21/2”
3”
31/2”
4”
3
50. Sprue Base Holder
Very convenient for fast tree assembly. Holds sprue base
in a horizontal plane and permits rotation.
Cone Tree Center -CT
Universal Sprue Base
CODE
CB-610
62
DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL SPRUE BASE
CODE
CB-615
CB-616
CB-617
CB-618
FLASK Ø
21/2”
3”
31/2”
4”
CODE
CB-611
DESCRIPTION
SPRUE BASE HOLDER
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
51. Platinum Casting Machine
53. Neycraft® Fiber Furnace
A vertical casting system for platinum specifically designed with a high
starting torque to ensure quality castings before cool down occurs.
The machine is mechanically driven by a set of heavy duty springs
and enclosed with a shield for safety. Crucible capacity 5 oz.
The only bench-top electric burn out furnace with a one piece molded heating chamber. The outer cabinet is sturdy steel construction and the fiber
muffle has an embedded heating element for even heat distribution. Fast
start up time- 15 min. to reach 1000°F temperature. Features include a
temperature indicator in F/C°, top port for venting wax and water vapor.
Chamber accommodates a 6” flask. Outside dimensions 15” X 141/2” X 161/2”
Inside dimensions 9” X 9” X 7”.
CODE
CI-085
CI-086
CI-086-01
CI-086-02
CI-086-03
CI-086-04
SPECIFICATION
PLATINUM CASTING MACHINE WITH SHIELD
ARM ASSEMBLY- COMPLETE
BACKPLATE FOR FLASK
CRUCIBLE CARRIAGE WESGO
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY CRUCIBLE CARRIAGE
REPLACEMENT SET OF 4 SPRINGS
CODE
CI-230
CI-231
CI-232
CI-233
CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION
525 CU. INCH
110V/ 60Hz/ 1320W
525 CU. INCH
220V/ 50Hz/ 1320W
MUFFLE FOR FIBER FURNACE
REPLACEMENT ELEMENT 110V/220V
52. Ney Vulcan Furnaces
The Vulcan bench-top furnace has a high performance hybrid muffle consisting of
an outer fiber shell and inner individually replaceable ceramic heating element
plate. The benefits are a faster heat-up and cool-down with a more durable inner
chamber. A vertical lift, roll back door channels heat away from operator. The
programmable controller has features to expand the capabilities for a 6-stage
operation.
Model #A-550- Analog
CODE
CI-210
CI-211
CI-217
CI-218
CI-228
CI-229
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
HEATING ELEMENT FOR A-550 OR 3-550-110V
HEATING ELEMENT FOR A-550 OR 3-550-220V
STAND ALONE CONTROLLER 110V/ 60Hz
STAND ALONE CONTROLLER 220V/ 50Hz
Model #A-1750- Analog
CODE
CI-212
CI-219
SPECIFICATION
220V/ 50Hz
HEATING ELEMENT FOR A-1750 OR 3-1750-220V
Model #3-550- Programmable
CODE
CI-213
CI-214
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
Model #3-1750- Programmable
CODE
CI-215
SPECIFICATION
220V/ 50Hz
Safety Instructions
Page 40
Exterior Dimensions
MODEL
550
1750
A
630 mm/25”
815 mm/32”
B
C
D
410 mm/16” 400 mm/15.8” 430 mm/17”
545 mm/21.5” 610 mm/24”
535 mm/21”
Internal Muffle Dimensions
MODEL
550
1750
E
180 mm/7”
250 mm/10”
F
230 mm/9”
360 mm/14”
G
230 mm/9”
320 mm/12.5”
63
™
CASTING
54. Ceramic Fiber Furnaces
Energy efficient furnaces with fast heating and cooling 1000°F (538°C) in thirty
minutes. One piece firing chamber (13” L x 13” W x 9” Ht) for jewelry, ceramics and
enameling. The chamber is encased in heavy gauge steel, insulated with ceramic fiber
shell. Front door locks with a heavy spring latch and is provided with a peep hole for
viewing. Controls are reliable, powerful and located in the base. Two modes, single
segment for simplicity, a program review, temperature in °F or °C and other features.
Manual control models come with a built in thermocouple mounted at the rear of the
furnace. This allows for an easy hook up to a pyrometer.
CODE
CI-251
CI-252
CI-253
CI-254
CI-255
CI-256
CI-257
CI-255
CI-256
CI-258
SPECIFICATION
MANUAL 110V/60Hz
DIGITAL 110V/60Hz
MANUAL 220V/50Hz
DIGITAL 220V/50Hz
PYROMETER -ANOLOG
PYROMETER -DIGITAL
REPLACEMENT ELEMENT
110V/220V
S.S WAX TRAY 12” X 12” X 3/4”
CI-258
55. Furnace Repair Cement
Furnace warranty excludes damage due to overfiring
exceeding melting temperature, improper electrical
installation and use of furnaces for purposes other
than firing glass ceramic and heat treatment.
A high temperature cement for all types of firebrick kilns. Mix with water and
repair cracks or broken sections. May also be applied as a dust free coating
on the inner lid.
CI-259
1 Lb BAG
56. Satelite Furnaces
57. Italian Saturn® Melter
Heavy duty galvanized steel construction with double coated
protection in hammertone gray. Gradual temperature control from
0-500°F in 15 min. and 500-1100°F in 45 min., for quick and clean burn
out. Features include heavy duty element, side opening door, top venting for moisture and wax escape. Convenient front viewing of
control panel. Maximum operating temp. 2000°F.
Metal melting without the hassle. Two crucible sizes maintain temperature
accurately within the pre-set range 2050°F/1120°C, without overheating.
Designed for hand held pouring directly from the crucible. Built-in electronics
protect the element and provide a visual and acoustic alarm. Unit is complete
with crucibles, graphite stirring rod and instructions.
CODE
CI-097
CI-096
CI-092
CI-093
CI-094
CI-095
CI-098
CI-099
CI-099-01
64
INSIDE DIMENSION
MANUAL
81/2” X 9” X 61/4”
MANUAL
81/2” X 9” X 61/4”
MANUAL
12” X 12” X 81/2”
MANUAL
12” X 12” X 81/2”
AUTOMATIC 12” X 12” X 81/2”
AUTOMATIC 12” X 12” X 81/2”
REPLACEMENT ELEMENT 110V/220V
OVEN THERMOCOUPLE
MUFFLE
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CODE
CI-100
CI-102
CI-101
CI-103
CU-700
CU-702
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CRUCIBLES
CRUCIBLES
CAPACITY
1 Kg
1 Kg
2 Kg
2 Kg
1 Kg
2 Kg
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
58. Kerr® Electro-Melt Furnace -Digital
62. Neycraft® Centrifugal Casting Machine
Recommended when sustained high temperature use is required. Digitally
electronic controller regulates the temperature by providing full power input until
a pre-selected temperature is attained.
CE, UL & CUL certified
A reliable machine featuring easy wind, lock and release mechanism.
Accepts all flask sizes up to 4” x 4” with a fast set counter balance
system. Machine is complete with crucible, tongs, two flasks and two
sprue bases.
Standard Model
Features:
Melting Capacity: Gold-930g/ 30 troy oz
Silver-775g/ 25 troy oz
21 minutes to 982°C/ 1800°F
Maxi Model
Features:
Melting Capacity: Gold-3.1 kg/100 troy oz
Silver-2.6 kg/83 troy oz
31 minutes to 982°C/1800°F
CE, UL & CUL certified.
CODE
CI-240
CI-241
CI-242
CI-243
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CRUCIBLE CAP.
30 troy oz (1 Kg)
30 troy oz (1 Kg)
100 troy oz (2 Kg)
100 troy oz (2 Kg)
STANDARD
STANDARD
MAXI
MAXI
59. Heating Elements for Electro Melt Furnace
CODE
CI-245
CI-246
CI-247
CI-248
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD -110V
STANDARD -220V
MAXI- 110V
MAXI- 220V
CODE
CI-200
CI-201
CU-712
DESCRIPTION
CASTING MACHINE
MAIN SPRING
CRUCIBLE- 9 oz
63. Centrifugal Casting Machine Crucibles
These fused silica crucibles are available in various styles and are
designed with high side walls for extra safety when casting. Metals
may be torch melted in these crucibles as they sustain high
temperatures up to 2500°F/1370°C.
CU-712
60. Crucibles for Electromelt
CODE
CU-702-01
CU-702-02
CAPACITY
30 troy oz (1 Kg)
100 troy oz (2 Kg)
CU-718
61. Regular Melting Dish
Quality made dish, in fused silica with a clay bond.
Best suited for all high temperature melting of metal
alloys and precious metals.
CODE
CU-698
CU-699
DESCRIPTION
71/2 oz- STRAIGHT BACK
20 oz- HIGH BACK
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CU-719
CU-715
CODE
CU-718
CU-719
CU-715
CU-712
TYPE
WESGO LARGE A
LARGE D - SMALL ORIFICE
LARGE D - LARGE ORIFICE
NEY
CAPACITY
3 oz
10 oz
11 oz
9 oz
65
™
CASTING
64. Salamander Graphite Crucibles
67. Investment Remover
Natural graphite crucible with pouring spout, bonded with silicon
carbide and fire clay. Lined with mullite for long life. These
crucibles are resistant to high temperatures and thermal shock.
Non corrosive, non fuming solution formulated for complete
cleaning in minutes. No harmful effects to personnel during use.
Mix one part of solution with five parts of water. Not for use on
aluminum, pearls or calcified stones.
CODE
CW-190
CODE
CU-721
CU-722
CU-723
CU-724
CU-725
CU-726
STYLE#
A1
A2
A3
A4
A6
A10
H
37/8”
41/4”
54”
51/2”
63/8”
77/16”
AØ
31/8”
33/4”
41/8”
41/2”
51/8”
61/8”
BØ
21/8”
21/4”
23/4”
3”
33/4”
41/8”
CONTENTS
1 GALLON
68. Crucible with Handle
This melting dish has a removable heat resistant wooden
handle. The crucible is made of fused silica for efficient melting
and will not contaminate precious metals.
65. Fused Silica Melting Dishes
CODE
CS-220
CS-222
CU-698
Clay bonded fused silica melting dishes withstand temperatures
up to 2800°F/1538°C. They have good thermal conductivity and
will not contaminate metal alloys, chromium, gold or platinum.
DESCRIPTION
HANDLE ONLY
CRUCIBLE & HANDLE
CRUCIBLE - 71/2 OZ
69. Hydro Air Wash Gun
CODE
CU-707
CU-708
CU-709
CU-710
DIA.
13/4”
21/4”
3”
4”
DEPTH
/8”
3
/4”
1”
13/8”
5
DWT
20
40
100
175
GRAMS
48
96
155
420
Reduce cleaning time while removing investment from castings.
This wash gun uses water and compressed air at 75 -150 PSI.
Set includes trigger air valve, rubber nozzles and hand grips for
protection against hot water. Connects to a sink faucet with 3/4”
hose connection.
66. Wesgo® Platinum Melting Dish
A melting crucible specifically for platinum, made by Wesgo.
Designed to withstand the high temperatures that are needed for
platinum and precious alloys.
CODE
CI-080
CODE
CU-716
CU-717
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT BACK / 8 troy oz
HIGH BACK / 10 troy oz
70. Flask Tongs
Light weight spring steel tongs for holding small or large flasks.
Grip has extended length to provide a firm hold on flasks.
CODE
CU-604
66
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET
LENGTH
15”
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CASTING
71. Crucible Tongs
72. Stirring Rods
73. Heat Resistant Gloves
These tongs are made of steel, with curved or
straight ends to hold heated crucibles when
pouring molten metal into molds.
High heat resistant graphite or quartz stirring
rods to stir molten metal in crucibles or dishes.
Use to skim the surface of molten metal before
pouring.
Non-asbestos, fully inside lined with soft felt,
and available in different sizes. Useful when
briefly handling hot items.
CODE
CU-600
CU-601
DESCRIPTION
19” STRAIGHT
19” CURVED
CODE
CU-606
CU-607
DESCRIPTION
CARBON
QUARTZ
SIZE
12” X 3/8”
12” X 3/8”
CODE
CI-076
CI-077
CI-078
CI-079
DESCRIPTION
18” PAIR
18” RIGHT
14” PAIR
14” RIGHT
74. Adjustable Ingot Molds
Convert metal scrap into rolling stock. Made of high quality steel, the mold cavities are
smoothly finished. Each mold may be reduced in size by adjusting the sides in a horizontal direction.
CODE
IM-780
IM-790
IM-800
IM-802
LXWXT
50 X 45 X 3.5mm
70 X 45 X 4.5mm
100 X 45 X 4.5mm
135 X 70 X 5.5mm
DWT
80
150
200
500
T
L
W
75. Reversible Ingot Molds
You may convert metal scrap into convenient and usable shapes: round, half round or
flat. Simply melt metal and pour into the heated mold. To mold flat ingots one side is to
be reversed. The mold is in two parts for ease of extraction.
Ø mm
ØXW
TXW
2
3
4
5
2X1
3 X 1.5
4X2
5 X 2.5mm
4 X Adjustable from 15-45mm
Ø
CODE
IM-703
IM-704
DESCRIPTION
CLAMP ONLY
INGOT MOLDS
T
Ø
T
76. Open Ingot Molds
Used to make large ingots from molten scrap. One piece forged steel mold
with tapered sides for easy extraction of the ingot.
CODE
IM-806
IM-807
IM-808
LXWXT
35 X 90 X 35mm
30 X 120 X 45mm
40 X 155 X 65mm
Safety Instructions
Page 40
DWT
50
80
200
67
™
CASTING
77. Wire Ingot Mold
Cast molten scrap into wire shapes that may subsequently be
drawn into profiles. Easy to hold by the handle, each mold has
three different cavities and are available in two lengths.
CODE
IM-803
IM-804
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR
EXTRA LONG
LENGTH
6”
91/2”
78. Graphite Ingot Mold
Single or multiple cavity molds in graphite. These molds withstand high temperatures and
are useful to cast smaller ingots of metal or alloys.
C
CODE
IM-706
IM-705
IM-710
IM-720
IM-725
F
E
B
D
DESCRIPTION
1 oz- 6 CAVITIES
5 oz
10 oz
20 oz
1 Kg
AXBXC
6” X 5” X 3/4”
21/4” X 2” X 1”
3” X 21/4” X 1”
3” X 23/4” X11/4”
33/4” X 23/4” X 11/4”
DXEXF
2” X 11/4” X 1/2”
11/4” X 1” X 1/2”
21/4” X 11/4” X 1/2”
2” X 13/4” X 5/8”
23/4” X 13/4” X 3/4”
A
79. Casting Alloys
High purity alloys when added to 24k gold will create a lower carat and color of your
choice. Sold in troy ounzes.
CA-001
CODE
CA-001
CA-002
CA-009
DESCRIPTION
ALLOY #111 FOR YELLOW 10, 14K
ALLOY #121 FOR YELLOW 10, 14, 18K
ALLOY #129 FOR WHITE 10, 14, 18K
TEMP °F
1955
1965
2100
• Casting temperature should be approximately 100-150°F above melting temperature.
• Casting temperature will vary slightly depending upon the particular alloy used.
• Flask temperature will vary depending on the size of the casting.
GOLD CONTENT
CA-002
ALLOY
CA-009
68
Silver Fine
Silver Sterling
Gold 10k Y
Gold 14k Y
Gold 18k Y
Gold 10k W
Gold 14k W
Gold 18k W
Platinum
Aluminum
Pewter
10k = 0.4167
14k = 0.5840
18k = 0.750
24k = 1.000
CASTING TEMPERATURE CHART
MELTING TEMP.
°F
°C
1761
961
1640
893
1665
907
1615
879
1700
927
1925
1052
1825
996
1703
943
3224
1773
1200
649
585
307
METAL TO WAX
RATIO
10.5-1
10.5-1
13-1
14-1
16-1
13-1
14-1
16-1
22-1
2.7-1
8-1
FLASK CASTING TEMP.
°F
°C
800
427
800
427
950
510
900
482
900
482
1000
538
950
510
900
482
1600
871
400
204
Ambient
Ambient
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CLEANERS
1. Hoffman® Steam Cleaners
Steam cleaners are an efficient and cost effective way to clean jewelry and other articles prior to plating. This unit develops 70-90 PSI
steam in a short time. Constructed of a stainless steel outer cabinet. Essential features include: a sealed heating element,
adjustable thermostat, safety valve and a water level sight gauge.
UL and ASME approved.
CODE
CL-020
CL-022
CL-027
CL-028
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CAPACITY
JEL3- 2 gal
JEL3- 2 gal
JEL16- 3/4 gal
JEL16- 3/4 gal
2. Elma Ultrasonic Cleaners
Complete stainless steel construction, both inside and outside, makes this cleaner both durable and long lasting. Engineered to generate ultrasonic waves at
35 khz throughout the cycle, these powerful waves reach into fine recesses and hard to get areas. Includes an acid resistant tub and glass beakers.
CODE
UL-010
UL-011
UL-012
UL-013
UL-014
UL-015
UL-016
UL-019
3.
CAPACITY
1.75L / 1/2 gal
1.75L / 1/2 gal
2.75L / 3/4 gal
2.75L / 3/4 gal
5.75L / 11/2 gal
5.75L / 11/2 gal
12.75L / 31/4 gal
12.75L / 31/4 gal
TANK SIZE
6” X 51/3” X 4”
6” X 51/3” X 4”
91/2” X 51/3” X 4”
91/2” X 51/3” X 4”
12” X 6” X 6”
12” X 6” X 6”
12” X 91/2” X 8”
12” X 91/2” X 8”
HEATER
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
A table top model for small to medium volume ultrasonic cleaning.
Ideal for retail stores or home use. Efficient solid state circuitry with a
three minute auto off timer. Includes plastic basket and cover.
Capacity- 600ml.
70
Accessories for Elma
CODE
UL-001
UL-002
DESCRIPTION
ROUND BASKET
RECTANGULAR TRAY
4. Polishing Compound Remover
Mini Cleaner
CODE
UL-009
UL-008
SPECIFICATIONS
110V/ 60Hz
100W
220V/ 50Hz
100W
110V/ 60Hz
240W
220V/ 50Hz
240W
110V/ 60Hz
285W
220V/ 50Hz
285W
110V/ 60Hz
560W
220V/ 50Hz
560W
VOLTS/ WATTS
110V/ 60W
220V/ 50W
A specially developed alkaline liquid cleaner for removal of tripoli, rouge and
other buffing compounds. Eliminates hand wiping, streak marks and
discoloration on gold, silver and other metal alloys.
Use 2-4 ozs per gallon of water.
CODE
UL-080
UL-081
CONTENTS
1 gal
5 gal
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CLEANERS
5. Plastic Coated Steam Tweezers
9. Ring Cleaning Racks
Coating on tweezer tips provides a non-scratch surface for holding work
pieces during steam cleaning. Made of heat resistant stainless steel.
Wire formed and vinyl coated to protect rings from abrasion or
marring, when dipped into the tank for ultrasonic cleaning.
Select from different capacities and sizes.
CODE
TW-458
TW-460
TW-462
LENGTH
8”
10”
12”
6. Stainless Steel Baskets & Trays
Drop and lift off baskets make handling of small articles and jewelry
easy to immerse while ultrasonic cleaning.
UL-025
UL-024
UL-023
CODE
UL-023
UL-024
UL-025
UL-027
UL-034
UL-035
DESCRIPTION
51/4” X 43/4” X 2”- 1/2 gal.
53/8” X 5” X 33/8”- 3/4 gal.
9” X 5” X 33/8”- 11/2 gal.
MESH BASKET 2” DIA. X 2”
1
/2 gal. TANK CAPACITY
3
/4 gal. TANK CAPACITY
UL-027
CODE
UL-003
UL-003-01
UL-004
UL-004-01
DESCRIPTION
51/2” X 4” X 13/4”-SINGLE-16 RING
51/2” X 4” X 13/4”-DOUBLE-32 RING
10” X 4” X 21/2”-SINGLE-32 RING
10” X 4” X 21/2”-DOUBLE-72 RING
10. Umbrella Ring Rack
Stainless steel frame plastic coated rack. Hooks are adjustable and
evenly spaced to hold articles of jewelry for cleaning or plating.
7. Modular Ultrasonic Racks
Heavy duty vinyl coated racks for holding items of jewelry while
cleaning ultrasonically. These are provided with an adjustable
handle to suit different tank depths. To increase capacity, add-on
racks may be snap fitted to the handle. All racks are 8” L X 3” W.
CODE
UL-059
UL-061
UL-062
CODE
UL-028
UL-029
DESCRIPTION
4 HOOKS
8 HOOKS
10 HOOKS
11. Plastic Strainer
DESCRIPTION
RACK WITH 14” HANDLE
ADD ON RACK
Heavy gauge, in three different sizes. The rim is reinforced and provided with a handle.
8. Plating Racks
Heavy duty vinyl coated racks for hanging articles of jewelry,
rings and findings during plating. These racks are provided with
a hook that allows it to be immersed into the plating tank.
CODE
SO-364
SO-365
SO-366
SO-367
SO-368
SO-369
SO-370
SO-371
SO-372
DIA.
2”
2”
2”
3”
3”
3”
4”
4”
4”
ROWS
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
HOOKS
8
16
24
12
24
36
16
32
48
CODE
UL-005
UL-006
UL-007
DIA.
7”
6”
4”
71
™
CLEANERS
12. Portable Steam Cleaner
13. Quatro Air Purifier
A bench model, made of heavy gauge stainless steel. Efficient
steam generation at 90-130 PSI. Incorporates safety features
for pressure and temperature limits. No need for any plumbing
or boiler permit. Use only distilled or de-ionized water for
maintenance free performance. UL listed.
Dimensions 12” L X 9” W X10” Ht.
Most finishing operations like grinding, buffing and polishing generate a large amount
of airborne dust. The air purifier is essential to remove fine dust particles that are an
environmental hazard. These units are quiet, compact and efficiently eliminate dust.
Easy to install any where in the shop without the need of duct work.
CODE
UL-046
UL-047
DESCRIPTION
110V/ 60Hz- 1300W
220V/ 50Hz- 1300W
14. Speed Brite Ionic Cleaners
A fast cleaning process to clean jewelry and precious stones, without
ultrasonic waves, in less than a minute. This process, called ionic
cleaning, uses on electrolyte solution that imparts a brightness to jewelry and a sparkle to precious stones. Environmentally safe, it is a gentle
way to clean emeralds, opals, pearls and other soft stones.
CODE
DC-290
DC-291
DC-292
MODEL
AF-500
AF-1000
AF-2000
CODE
UL-070
UL-071
UL-072
UL-073
UL-074
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
110V/ 60Hz
110V/ 60Hz
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
9V BATT.
LXWXH
16” X 22” X 37”
16” X 22” X 52”
26” X 24” X 71”
CAPACITY
1 qt.-TURBO
1 qt.-TURBO
12 oz.-200SB
12 oz.-200SB
6 oz.-MINI
15. Speed Brite Ionic- Adapter
UL-074
Boost the power of your ultrasonic cleaner by the add-on
ionic adapter which comes complete with transformer and
metal hook for suspension. (UL approved)
CODE
UL-075
UL-076
UL-072 / UL-073
SPECIFICATION
#300SB 110V/ 60Hz
#300SB 220V/ 50Hz
16. Gem Sparkle- Cleaning Solution
Specifically formulated solution to remove dirt, grime and
oxidation. May be used to clean delicate stones with a soft
brush.
UL-075 / UL-076
GEM SPARKLE
UL-070 / UL-071
CODE
UL-037
UL-038
UL-039
GEM SPARKLE
16 oz- CONCENTRATE
32 oz- CONCENTRATE
1 gal- CONCENTRATE
17. Parts Holding Baskets
Basket may be used for keeping small parts together during
steam or ultrasonic cleaning. Quick acting spring device opens
or closes the basket while loading or unloading parts.
CODE
UL-030
UL-031
72
DESCRIPTION
SMALL BASKET 6” X 11/2”
LARGE BASKET 6” X 2”
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
CLEANERS
18. Selvyt® Cloths
High quality, long lasting, lint free cloth. Treat it with a little polishing rouge then use it to shine jewelry,
watches, silverware and crystal.
CODE
PC-715
PC-720
PC-724
SIZE
5” X 5”
10” X 10”
14” X 14”
CODE
PC-725
PC-730
PC-735
SIZE
14” X 17”
17” X 21”
20” X 21”
19. Rouge Cloth
A short nap cloth impregnated with rouge. Cloth feels like felt, but removes tarnish and fine scratch marks
to leave a bright attractive finish on jewelry.
CODE
PC-710
SIZE
9” X 11”
20. 3M ® Scotch Brite Cloths
An extraordinary cloth that has oil and water absorbing qualities. Lifts out liquids, greases and dirt particles, without leaving any smear or residue. Very durable wipes that can be machine washed in clod water
then air dried. (Do not bleach)
121/2” X 141/2”
PC-740
PC-741
PC-742
PC-743
PC-744
6” X 71/2”
PC-746
PC-747
PC-748
PC-749
PC-750
COLOR
WHITE
BLUE
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
21. Lint Free Cloths
Non-abrasive lint free cleaning cloths, restore luster and brilliance to articles
of jewelry and precious stones. Scratch proof cleaning action is gentle and
reliable. Size 9” X 11”
CODE
PC-754
PC-755
COLOR
WHITE- FOR PEARL
BLUE- FOR DIAMOND
23. Inspection Cotton Gloves
An absolute necessity that needs to be worn when handling precious metal
and stones. Made of special cotton fabric, it is invaluable for
protection of jewelry.
CODE
PC-800
PC-801
DESCRIPTION
COTTON GLOVE - GENTS
COTTON GLOVE -LADIES
22. Jewelry Wipes
24. Washout Brushes
A moist cloth that removes dirt and tarnish from gold, silver and all
non-ferrous metals. Will not scratch or mar the surfaces of fine articles of
jewelry. Each dispenser contains 25 dry wipes.
Durable nylon bristles, set in rows, mounted in wood or plastic, for cleansing of work parts.
BU-031
BU-032
CODE
PC-757
DESCRIPTION
JEWELRY WIPES
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
BU-031
BU-032
DESCRIPTION
BONE HANDLE
WOODEN HANDLE
73
™
CLEANERS
28. JAX® Master Metal Cleaning Solutions
JAX® Silver Cleaner & Polish
Chemically cleans and polishes the blackest silver in one application.
Does not strip surface to a raw, dull finish. Incorporates a special
polish that will not harm or streak the most delicate surfaces.
PE-020
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX Metal Cleaner Polish
Chemically cleans and polishes tarnished brass, bronze, copper,
pewter, nickel and steel. Removes oxidation, surface dirt, oil and
finger prints.
®
PE-021
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX Instant Brass, Copper & Marble Cleaner
A heavy duty cleaner that removes tarnish, surface dirt, old lacquer
and grease from brass, bronze, and copper. Safe for use on gold and
marble.
®
PE-030
25.
Steam Additive
A necessary additive for removing rust and mineral deposits in the boiler
chamber of steam cleaners. Regular use extends the life of the unit by
preventing calcium build up and reduces scaling.
CODE
CL-035
DESCRIPTION
STEAM ADDITIVE-16 oz
JAX Instant Brass, Copper & Gold Cleaner
A light duty cleaner for delicate metals. Removes tarnish and surface
contamination from fine gold finishes, bronzes, lamps, lighting fixtures,
jewelry, and antiques. Contains no abrasives. Leaves no residue.
PE-031
Non-toxic, non abrasive strips protect all precious metals from stains and
oxidation. Easy to use. Simply place in the carton or box. Effectively draws
away tarnish, keeping the articles of jewelry with original shine.
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Instant Brass & Copper Cleaner
A heavy duty cleaner that removes tarnish and oxidation from the
blackest copper, brass and bronze.
PE-032
26. 3M ® Anti-Tarnish Strip
1 PINT (473ml)
®
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Instant Silver Cleaner
A heavy duty cleaner that removes tarnish and oxidation from the
blackest silver.
PE-033
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX Aluminum Cleaner
Produces a bright clean finish on all aluminum surfaces.
®
CODE
PE-050
DESCRIPTION
2” X 7”- 8 PCS.
27. 3M Tarnish Shield
®
A thin film coat that protects silver, gold and other treasured articles.
Ideal for silver plate, gold plate and trophies. Does not effect solderability.
Helps avoid discoloration and oxidation for months.
PE-034
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Rust Remover
A rust remover and an effective pre-paint primer for iron and steel.
PE-035
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Rust Preventer
A water based solution that protects iron and steel from rust.
PE-036
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Lacquer Remover
A water based solution that removes lacquer and paint from metal
surfaces.
CODE
PE-055
PE-056
DESCRIPTION
COPPER & BRASS POLISHER-10 oz
SILVER POLISHER-10 oz
PE-037
JAX® Tarnish Remover
Prevents tarnish on clean brass, bronze, and copper.
PE-038
74
1 PINT (473ml)
1 PINT (473ml)
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DAPPING
Dapping.......Punches and
Blocks are used to form and dome sheet metal into different
curved shapes. Smaller sizes are used for thinner metal. Larger sizes for thicker metal. When
working with metal forming, the usual practice is to work from a shallow curve to a larger one.
Punches and blocks are matched so as to form perfect hemispheres.
1. Dapping Block-Brass
Highly polished, tempered brass, with numerous
depressions on all six sides. Useful to stretch soft
metal into shallow forms or perfect hemispheres.
Available in two sizes.
CODE
DB-055
DB-065
SIZE
2”
23/8”
CODE
DB-155
DB-165
SIZE
2”
21/2”
CODE
AN-395
SIZE
31/2” X 31/2” X 3/4”
CODE
DB-356
DB-357
SIZE
5” X 21/2” X 1”
5” X 21/2” X 2”
CODE
DB-359
SIZE
3” X 2” X 3/4”
CODE
DB-365
SIZE
4” X 4” X 1”
2. Dapping Block-Steel
Alloy steel cube with eighteen polished depressions
on all six sides. Useful to dome metal sheet or
strips into various forms. The 2" cube has its
largest hemisphere at 13/8” and the 21/2” cube has a
maximum hemisphere at 13/4”.
3. Dapping Block-Lead
This soft base block provides the ideal surface
when stamping, forming or chasing. Large surface
area is adaptable for rolling in designs.
4. Flat Dapping Block
Made of alloy steel, hardened and polished. The
smaller has 14 hemispheres: 25, 22, 20, 19, 17, 16,
14, 13, 11, 9, 7.5, 5.5, 4.5 and 3mm. The larger has
27 hemispheres:1.5, 2, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, 4.4, 4.8,
5.6, 6.4, 7.1, 7.9, 8.7, 9.5, 10.7, 11.1, 12.7, 14.3,
15.5, 15.9, 17.1, 17.5, 19.1, 20.6, 22.2, 23.8 and
25.4mm (1/8”-1”).
5. Shallow Dapping Block
Four large shallow depressions, two on each side,
in a hardened steel block. Ideal for pre-forms or
creation of hollow articles of jewelry.
6. Dapping Block- Rubber
A unique dapping block made in hard rubber with six
working sides. It is the ideal resilient surface that
easily conforms to all sizes or shapes of steel or
hardwood dapping punches. Useful in creating all
types of shallow forms or channels in thin and soft
sheets of precious metal, without scratch marks or
mars.
7. Dapping Die & Design Block
A versatile, hardened and polished steel dapping
block, having working surfaces on all six sides.
The block has fourteen different hemispherical
depressions from 1/8” to 1” and eight semi-circular
forms for working pre-cut strips.
Size 33/4” x 21/2” x 1”.
76
CODE
DESCRIPTION
DB-360
DB-363
DELUXE
ECONOMY
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DAPPING
8. Knuckling Block
Use all six sides of this hardened steel block. The
block has an assortment of half-round, triangular
and channel grooves for bending and shaping
creative forms.
CODE
DB-362
SIZE
21/2” X 21/2”
CODE
DB-361
DB-364
SIZE
4” X 2” X 1”
6” X 3” X 1”
9. Bending Block
High quality, hardened, polished steel block which
can be used on both sides. Ten different forms to
work large or small metal strips.
10. Dapping Punch Sets
Three different sets of punches made of hardened
steel with finely polished ball ends.
DELUXE
DB-218
DB-224
DB-236
ECONOMY
DB-018
DB-024
DB-036
QTY
18
24
36
SIZE
/64”-3/4”
7
/64”-1”
7
/64”-1
CODE
DB-197
DB-199
DB-166
DB-336
DB-340
DB-345
DB-350
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET
DAPPING PUNCH ON WOOD STAND
DAPPING BLOCK ONLY
13/8” (36mm) DAPPING PUNCH
19/16” (40mm) DAPPING PUNCH
13/4” (45mm) DAPPING PUNCH
2” (50mm) DAPPING PUNCH
7
11. Dapping Punches & Block
Hardened steel, mirror finished punches and die
block. Punches and die block are available individually. Compete set includes: Four dapping punches,
one die block and hardwood stand.
12. Deluxe Dapping Punch Set
Exceptional premium quality steel set of 24 pieces.
Each punch is precision made and highly polished.
A long support stem provides stability. All neatly
organized on a laminated hardwood stand with
clearly marked sizes(7/64”, 1/8”, 9/64”, 5/32”, 7/32”, 1/4”, 9/32”,
5
/16”, 3/8”, 13/32”, 7/16”, 15/32”, 1/2”, 9/16”, 19/32”, 5/8”, 11/16”, 23/32”, 3/4”,
25
/32”, 13/16”, 7/8”, 15/16”, 1”).
CODE
DESCRIPTION
DB-200
24 PCS. SET
13. Dapping Punches
Select the exact punch or punches for your needs. Made of hard tempered steel with smooth finished ball
ends. Full hemispherical head provides superior forming or chasing. May be used in dapping blocks or on
any soft base.
CODE
DC-110
DC-111
DC-112
DC-113
DC-114
DC-116
DC-117
DC-118
DC-122
DC-123
DC-124
DC-125
IN
/64”
1
/8”
9
/64”
5
/32”
7
/32”
1
/4”
9
/32”
5
/16”
3
/8”
13
/32”
7
/16”
15
/32”
7
Safety Instructions
Page 40
MM
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
5.6
6.4
7.1
7.9
9.5
10.3
11.1
11.9
CODE
DC-126
DC-127
DC-128
DC-129
DC-130
DC-131
DC-132
DC-133
DC-133-01
DC-134
DC-135
DC-136
IN
/2”
9
/16”
19
/32”
5
/8”
11
/16”
23
/32”
3
/4”
25
/32”
13
/16”
7
/8”
15
/16”
1”
1
MM
12.7
15.1
15.9
17.5
18.2
19.1
19.8
20.6
22.2
23.0
24.6
25.4
77
™
DAPPING
14. Riveting Stake
A universal riveting tool having fifty-two holes from
0.29 mm to 10 mm. Made in hard polished steel.
This high precision block is ideal for all riveting
applications.
CODE
AN-399
SIZE
40 X 40 X 40mm
15. Disc Cutters
Made of hardened tool steel to precision
tolerances. These cutters will cut perfect round
discs in gold, silver or soft metal sheets.
CODE
DC-271
DC-272
SIZE
/8” X 1/2”- 7 PCS. 1/16” INCR.
/2” X 1”- 5 PCS. 1/8” INCR.
1
1
16. Precision Disc Cutter
A larger size disc cutter, made in tool steel, hardened and tempered to pierce metal sheet of thicker
gauges. Achieve a clean cut by using a hand or
hydraulic press.
CODE
DC-270
DESCRIPTION
DISC CUTTER -11/4” X 11/2”
CODE
DC-275
DC-276
SIZE
18
8
CODE
DB-043
SIZE
21/2” X 21/2” X 21/2”
CODE
DB-044
SIZE
7 to 40mm
17. Deluxe Disc Cutters
Designed for cutting annealed metal sheets up to
18 gauge, these hardened punches will shear perfect circles. Two sets are available in different
range sizes and increments.
SET
3 to 14mm
15 to 21mm
18. Wood Dapping Block & Punches
Hardwood block, smoothly finished, has shallow
depressions on all six sides for repairs and
removing dents. Two wooden punches with convex
shaped ends to gently work thin soft metal.
19. Wood Dapping Punches
Very carefully handcrafted wood dapping punches
are ideal for forming shapes safely and quickly
without marring your metal. 7-20mm by 1mm
increment and 20-40 by 2mm increment.
Set of 24 pcs.
78
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DAPPING
20. Wood Dapping Punches & Die-Set
21. Large Dapping Block
This wood dapping block and punch set is carefully handcrafted
and clearly marked with the disc size. Eight punches and
matched concave hemispheres from 10mm-19mm.
Use for forming large domed or grooved shapes. Comes with
depressions on four sides.
CODE
DB-045
CODE
DB-046
SIZE
113/4” X 7” X 3”
SIZE
7” X 7” X 33/4”
22. Necklace Mandrel
Made of highly polished cast iron and chrome plated.
This mandrel may be used for shaping, forging, sizing and forming jewelry neck pieces.
CODE
DB-355
SIZE
8” X 73/4” X 51/2”
23. Bezel Blocks
Made of hardened polished steel, each bezel block in a different shape, all with matched
punches. Create the bezel forms you need in a range of calibrated sizes. Indispensable for
setting stones.
NOTE: Bezel blocks and punches of special shapes and sizes are available on order.
17°
CODE
PROFILE
SHAPE
RANGE
DB-501
EMERALD
4 to 14mm
17°
DB-502
ROUND
5 to 20mm
17°
DB-503
OCTAGON
4 to 14mm
17°
DB-504
TRIANGLE
4 to 14mm
17°
DB-505
OVAL
4 to 14mm
17°
DB-506
HALF ROUND
5 to 15mm
17°
DB-507
HEXAGON
4 to 14mm
17°
DB-508
PEAR
4 to 14mm
17°
DB-509
SQUARE
4 to 14mm
17°
Safety Instructions
Page 40
PUNCH ANGLE
79
™
WORKBENCHES
BE-009
MO-35
A well constructed hardwood workbench
with three side railing and skirted legs.
Three storage drawers and two large slide
out catch trays. Left and right arm supports,
with a replaceable bench pin slot.
32” W X 21” D X 36” Ht.
BE-011
MO-50
A quality laminated top workbench with skirted legs. Three
drawers and two slide out trays. Right and left arm rests with
bench pin slot.
351/2” W X 211/2” D X 36” Ht.
BE-008
MO-40
Laminated top hardwood workbench with
three side railing and skirted legs. Three
storage drawers and two large slide out
catch trays. Predrilled holes for mandrels.
Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot.
28” W X 20” D X 36” Ht.
BE-015
MO-10
BE-017
MO-20
A compliment to your workbench for easy
organized storage. Free standing, may be
placed conveniently anywhere in the shop.
3- drawer 111/4” W X 16 D X 221/2” Ht.
7- drawer 13” W X 16 D X 361/2” Ht.
BE-007
BN-250-100S
A top quality workbench of seasoned hardwood with side railings and full skirted sides and rear. Four drawers, a slide out
tray with shelf, and lockable. Right and left arm supports, a
replaceable bench pin slot and predrilled holes.
391/4” W X 191/2” D X 38” Ht.
BE-006
BN-250
A top quality workbench of seasoned hardwood with side railings and full skirted legs. Four drawers and a slide out tray
with shelf. Right and left arm supports, a replaceable bench
pin slot and predrilled holes.
391/4” W X 191/2” D X 38” Ht.
80
Fo
es
ch
en
B
rk
Wo e 24
ore ag
rM P
BE-014
Sturdy, swivel tubular steel chair on heavy
duty casters. Adjustable cushioned seat
with padded back support that reduces
fatigue and helps increase production.
Seat adjusts 16”- 22” in height.
Note: For work benches some assembly is required.
All Benches will be shipped via Master Craft.
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
1. Diamond Points
Premium quality diamond particles are electroplated on stainless steel shanks. Diamond points are excellent for carving, smoothing and performing numerous
tasks in stone, glass, ceramics and all non-ferrous metals. Use of a coolant, either water or a cutting oil, will maximize tool life. Recommended operating
speed is 30,000 rpm. Shank size 3/32”.
A
FIG.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
CODE
BR-516
BR-517
BR-518
BR-519
BR-520
BR-521
BR-522
BR-523
BR-524
BR-525
BR-526
BR-527
SIZE(MM)
1.5 X 12
2 X 10
1 X 10
4 X 10
6 X 12
2X9
1X8
1X5
1.5 X 5
3.5 X 1.5
1.5 X 2
2X1
M
FIG.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
X.
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
CODE
BR-528
BR-529
BR-530
BR-531
BR-532
BR-533
BR-534
BR-535
BR-536
BR-537
BR-538
BR-539
SIZE(MM)
4X7
1.5 X 6.5
1.5 X 9
1.5 X 5
5X8
1.5 X 6
2.5 X 7
1X1
1.5 X 1.5
2.5 X 2.5
3X3
3 X 0.8
X
Diamond Point Sets
as ls
ter too
wa ond
se m
s u dia
ay on
Alw cant
bri
Lu
Set of 12 points in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3/32”.
CODE
BR-502
BR-503
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 12 INCLUDES #A-L
SET OF 12 INCLUDES #M-X
2. Diamond Points in Set 20/30 pcs
A complete set of electroplated diamond points on stainless steel shanks, in various shapes.
Manufactured under the most stringent standards. Significantly outperforms all other tools to give a super
smooth finish on stone, glass, ceramic and all precious metals. Recommended operating speed is 30,000 rpm.
Shank size 3/32”.
CODE
BR-504
BR-505
DESCRIPTION
ASST. SHAPES 20PCS.
ASST. SHAPES 30PCS.
3. Diamond Texturing Tools-Pavé
4. Diamond Tip for Air Scriber
Achieve beautiful textures and artistic designs on gold and silver jewelry.
These single point diamond tools are for use on a Badeco hammer
handpiece or similar. Shanks are screw on type with tapered points to
extend into working intricate areas. Useful for freehand designing.
Diamond tip will mark all soft or hard materials. Use with an air scriber
for writing, designing and layout work. For air scriber page 116.
AW-030
CODE
AW-030
AW-031
82
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD
DELUXE LASER POINT
AW-031
CODE
MO-409
DESCRIPTION
DIAMOND TIP
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
5. Diamond Fly Wheels
Use these fly wheels on rotary handpieces to fashion brilliant patterns on jewelry. Tools have a natural
diamond point and are available in two widths and different degrees. Speed min.30,000 rpm.
CODE
AW-090
AW-120
AW-130
AW-140
AW-150
AW-160
AW-180
DEGREE
90°
120°
130°
140°
150°
160°
180°
SHANK SIZE
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
CODE
AW-319
AW-320
AW-323
AW-324
AW-325
AW-326
AW-327
DEGREE
90°
120°
130°
140°
150°
160°
180°
SHANK SIZE
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
6. Diamond Tools
Single point diamond cutting tools mounted in a steel shank for use in faceting machines.
Different styles and novel designs may be cut with these special styled tools.
CODE
AW-328
AW-329
AW-366
AW-330
AW-335
AW-340
AW-345
AW-350
AW-355
AW-360
AW-365
AW-380
DEGREE
110°
120°
125°
130°
135°
140°
145°
150°
155°
160°
165°
180°
SIZE
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
CODE
AW-410
AW-420
AW-425
AW-430
AW-435
AW-440
AW-445
AW-450
AW-455
AW-460
AW-465
AW-480
DEGREE
110°
120°
125°
130°
135°
140°
145°
150°
155°
160°
165°
180°
90°
SIZE
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
4mm
120°
130°
140°
150°
160°
180°
Diamond Tools -Special Styles
CODE
AW-605
AW-608
AW-609
AW-610
STYLE
CONVEX
CONCAVE
CONVEX
CONCAVE
SIZE
2mm
2mm
1mm
1mm
7. Diamond Coated Drills
9. Diamond Needle Files
These electroplated twist drills are excellent for drilling stones, pearls, glass or ceramics. Drills are all medium grit. Shank size 3/32”. Lubricate with water during use.
Quality diamond files in different shapes for very fine finishing.
Made of virgin diamond particles electroplated on high precision
steel blanks, with comfortable handles to provide maximum
strength, flexibility and durability. Overall length 51/2”.
CODE
DR-188
DR-189
DR-190
DR-191
DR-192
DR-193
DR-194
DR-195
DR-196
SIZE
1.0mm
1.1mm
1.2mm
1.3mm
1.4mm
1.5mm
1.6mm
1.8mm
2.0mm
8. Diamond Disc Set
These diamond discs are electroplated and ideal for cutting
or sanding stones and glass. Kit comes with 1/8” mandrel.
Disc will also fit standard mandrel with 3/32” shank.
CODE
DR-197
CODE
FL-080
FL-081
FL-082
FL-083
FL-084
DESCRIPTION
THREE-SQUARE
PILLAR
HALF-ROUND
ROUND
SQUARE
DESCRIPTION
5 PC SET WITH MANDREL
Diamond sharpening stones
See Page 2
Safety Instructions
Page 40
83
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
10. Diamond Tweezers
Absolutely the best and the finest made tweezers specifically for the
professional jeweler. Perfectly aligned hardened tips, in all point sizes.
Select from a wide range of stainless matt or black finish. Inside
grooved or serrated tips, with or without a locking mechanism.
Overall length 160mm.
R - style indicates locking Tweezers.
STYLE /SIZE
XF
MATT FINISH
REG. LOCK
STYLE/SIZE
TW-901 TW-918 TW-921
TW-928
TW-902 TW-917 TW-922
TW-927
MR
M1
MR1
L1
LR1
XL1
XLR1
TW-903 TW-916 TW-923
TW-926
XXL1
TW-904
-
XF
F
FR
M
MR
L
LR
XL
XLR
BLACK FINISH
REG.
LOCK
F
M
L
FR
MR
LR
TW-924
-
XF
F
M
L
FR
LR
MATT GROOVED
REGUL. LOCK
BLACK GROOVED
REGUL.
LOCK
TW-906
TW-910
TW-929
TW-931
TW-905
TW-911
TW-930
TW-932
TW-908
TW-912 TW-930-01
TW-909
M1
L1
XL1
MR1
LR1
M1
L1
XLR1
XL1
-
TW-930-02
XXL1
MR1
LR1
XXL1
-
TW-907 TW-919 TW-925 TW-926-01
XL
XLR
XL
XLR
11. Starlight- Diamond Tweezers
Starlight tweezers have a fine granulated coating which firmly holds
small or large stones at any angle. Starlight titanium tweezers are
lighter than Starlight diamond tweezers, yet twice as strong.
Overall length 160mm.
12. Titanium Diamond Tweezers
Super lightweight rust resistant Tweezers, excellent for sorting and
inspecting stones. 100% non-magnetic. Overall length 160mm.
R - style indicates locking Tweezers.
STYLE /SIZE
XF
F
FR
M
MR
L
LR
XL
STARLIGHT
DIAMOND
STARLIGHT
DIAMOND LOCK
STARLIGHT
TITANIUM
TW-935
-
TW-870
TW-936
TW-838
TW-871
TW-937
TW-839
TW-872
TW-938
TW-840
TW-873
XF
F
M
L
TW-837
XL
FR
MR
LR
XF
STYLE /SIZE
TITANIUM
DIAMOND
XF
TW-890
F
TW-891
F
M
TW-892
M
L
TW-893
L
13. Teflon Grip Tweezers- Swiss
Special tweezers to hold soft stones, pearls etc. Teflon bonded tip protects
the girdle of the stones.
CODE
TW-900
84
DESCRIPTION
TEFLON POINTS
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
14. Diamond Washing Cups
16. Prong Holder
Rinse and clean diamond and precious gem
stones. Stainless steel inner container easily
lifts out of external glass jar. A screw cap glass
jar prevents evaporation of cleansing liquid.
Ideal for holding precious and semi-precious stones
for inspection and valuation.
CODE
DI-103
DI-103-01
DESCRIPTION
SMALL 21/2” X 21/2”
LARGE 3” X 4”
CODE
DI-114
DI-115
15. Tray for Diamond Sieves
17. Diamond Sellers
An organizer to hold sieve plates for easy viewing.
Clearly marked locations store each sieve separately. Sieves not included.
CODE
DI-010
DI-011
LENGTH
43/4”
2”
Exhibit the brilliance of precious gemstones in an
eye catching display. Safe, secure and a more
efficient way to reveal the
shapes of emerald, oval,
pear, square, round and
marquise.
DESCRIPTION
SIEVE TRAY PLASTIC
SIEVE TRAY ACRYLIC
18. Diamond Scoops
CODE
DI-085
DI-089
Handle all stones in a time saving manner. Made of
non-magnetic stainless steel. Select from a range
of sizes to suit your convenience.
CODE
DI-090
DI-092
DI-093
DI-094
DI-095
DESCRIPTION
SCOOP W/HANDLE
S.S #2
S.S #3
S.S #4
S S #5
DESCRIPTION
7 DIAMOND ARMS
10 DIAMOND ARMS
SIZE
23/4” X 21/8”
2” X 11/4”
21/2” X 2”
3” X 2”
31/2” X 21/2”
19. Sorting Trays
Use this ideal tray, made of unbreakable plastic
and available in two colors. Four grooves on one
side, and specific hole sizes on the other, provides
a functional way to sort all loose gemstones.
20. Diamond Sieve Sets
Long lasting chrome plated brass sieves to sort
diamonds and other precious stones.
Calibrated sizes in a full range.
23 plates- 000-20 in full numbers- Econo
42 plates- 000-20 with half numbers.- Econo
40 plates- 0-20 with half numbers- Belgium.
CODE
DI-104
DI-105
DI-106
DI-107
DI-108
PLATES
23
42
40
DESCRIPTION
LEAD
WHITE
BLACK
WHITE-GROOVED
BLACK-GROOVED
47MM
DI-050
DI-052
DI-035
66MM
DI-070
DI-072
DI-036
SIZE
4” X 2 1/2”
4” X 2 1/2”
4” X 2 1/2”
71/8” X 33/4”
71/8” X 33/4”
80MM
DI-080
DI-082
DI-037
107MM
DI-083
DI-084
DI-038
21. Laser Drill Diamond Sieve Sets
These Sieves are made in Belgium. Holes are
drilled with laser technology to get highest tolerence. Stones are calibrated to almost perfect sizes,
longer lasting and seives will not wrap or change
size. 80mm dia. comes with Sieve plate numbers
and mm sizes.
PLATES
42
74
80MM
DI-040
DI-041
85
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
22. Diamond Sorting Pad
Extra firm sorting pad with a non-reflective flat surface. A practical method to sort large
quantities of gemstones. Saves time-consuming scooping and ensures broad based
viewing for selection. Deluxe contains 70 sheets per pad.
DESCRIPTION
ECONOMY
DELUXE
9” X 13”
DI-117
11” X 17”
DI-109
DI-116
12” X 20”
DI-110
DI-118
17” X 22”
DI-119
23. Leather Wallets and Case
DI-181
DI-176
DI-180
Use these slim style wallets made of durable
leather to carry precious gemstones. Wallets have
ample space to carry gemstones in parcel paper
and have a zipper.
CODE
DI-176
DI-180
DI-181
DESCRIPTION
7” X 31/2” X 2”
6” X 31/2” X 1/2”
8” X 33/4” X 1/2”
24. Diamond Wax Stick
Ideal for lifting loose stones, without smudge or
stain, and positioning them in the stone seats.
Cones are tapered to a point and mounted on a
handle.
CODE
DI-113
DESCRIPTION
WAX STICK- 1/2” WIDE
CODE
TS-300
DESCRIPTION
DIAMOND SCRIBE
25. Diamond Scribe
A slim finely pointed scriber for layout work.
Will mark glass, stone, ceramic and all precious
metals. Diamond tip is retractable for protection.
26. Parcel Papers
Choice selected papers, polished to perfection. Unmatched for protection. Created to enhance gems
with reflected light. Select from different flute colors for every situation. Available as 25 papers per pack
and 4 packs per box. Sizes from 1 to 4.
OUTSIDE
INSIDE
CODE
STONE
PAPER
FLUTES
SIZE
#
Color Gemstone Papers
DI-190
RUBY
WHITE
2-YELLOW
31/4” X 13/4”
1
DI-191
EMERALD
WHITE
2-TAN
31/4” X 13/4”
1
1
DI-192
OPAL
WHITE
2-BLACK
31/4” X 13/4”
1
DI-193
SAPPHIRE
WHITE
2 MATT WHITE
31/4” X 13/4”
Diamond Parcel Papers
DI-196
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-WHITE
33/4” X 2”
2
DI-197
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-WHITE
4” X 2”
3
4
DI-198
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-WHITE
41/2” X 23/4”
Economical Diamond Parcel Papers
DI-199
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-WHITE
31/4” X 13/4”
1
DI-200
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-DARK BLUE
31/4” X 13/4”
1
DI-211
DIAMOND
WHITE
1-BLUE 1-WHITE 31/4” X 13/4”
1
Belgium Diamond Parcel Papers
DI-201
DIAMOND
WHITE
1-BLUE 1-WHITE 31/4” X 13/4”
1
DI-202
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-DARK BLUE
31/4” X 13/4”
1
DI-203
DIAMOND
WHITE
2-WHITE
31/4” X 13/4”
1
27. Diamond Flutes
Made of the finest glassine paper, these flutes
provide the best protection for all loose gemstones.
Sold in packs of 100. Size 21/2” X 11/2”.
86
CODE
DI-299
DI-300
DI-301
DI-302
DESCRIPTION
BRIGHT WHITE
BRIGHT WHITE
BLUE
BLUE
SIZE
1”
3
/4”
3
/4”
1”
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
28. Leveridge Type Gauge
The most versatile measuring instrument for any jeweler appraiser or gem
cutter. Estimates weight of diamonds mounted or loose. May also be used
for other precious gems and pearls. Comes with high setting attachment
and weight estimator. Includes an inside measuring system for rings.
Precision crafted for years of service.
CODE
GM-602
GM-605
DESCRIPTION
LEVERIDGE TYPE GAUGE
BOOK & CASE
29. Presidium® Gauges
Presidium® Dial Gauge: Predictable accuracy. Read out measurement in
millimeters and weight in carats simultaneously. Measures stones up to 23
mm in divisions of 0.1mm. Hardened wear resistant measuring surfaces.
Includes a conversion booklet and a carrying case.
Presidium® Digital Gemstone Gauge: Hi-tech, solid state circuitry
eliminates miscalculation and gives direct digital read out up to one micron
accuracy. Features include long life battery, zero reset and auto-off.
Unsurpassed value for the discriminating jeweler.
CODE
GM-606
GM-603
DESCRIPTION
DIAL GAUGE
DIGITAL GEMSTONE GAUGE
30. Pocket Digital Gauge
Precision pocket digital caliper with LCD display and zero re-set button.
Maximum reading 25mm. Resolution 0.01mm.
CODE
GM-604
DESCRIPTION
POCKET DIGITAL GAUGE
31. Diamond and Pearl Gauges
An elegant, sensitive, precision engineered, dial gauge for accurate
measurements of pearls and other small stones. Parallel, ground measuring
faces for rounds and even baguettes, in 0.1mm increments up to a
maximum of 10mm. Dial rotates for absolute zero setting.
CODE
GM-501
GM-502
GM-503
GM-504
DESCRIPTION
10mm
20mm
ECONO-10mm
ECONO-20mm
32. Fan Type Diamond Gauges
Compact, fan type, pocket gauge in stainless steel. Overall 31/2” length.
Measures in carat weight all stone cuts in brilliant, marquise, pear, square,
emerald and oval.
CODE
GM-303
GM-304
GM-308
Safety Instructions
Page 40
FAN
3
4
7
GRADUATION
0.1 TO 4 CARAT
0.1 TO 6 CARAT
0.1 TO 7 CARAT
87
™
DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES
33. Presidium® Diamond Testers
TS-220
TS-240
Diamond Fact: Top of the line tester that performs like a pro. Instantly
separates simulant from the genuine. Small compact pocket model has
needle tip testing point for extremely small stones. Operates on two AAA
batteries (not included). Comes in a carrying case with a manufacturer’s
guarantee.
Diamond Mate: Professional, compact, sleek pen like instrument.
Advanced digital electronic circuitry consistently and reliably distinguishes
between diamonds and simulant. Operation is simple. LED display shows
green and gives audible beep when diamond is tested.
CODE
TS-220
TS-240
TS-241
TS-241
DESCRIPTION
DIAMOND FACT
DIAMOND MATE-A
DIAMOND MATE-C WITH BATTERY CHARGER
34. Presidium® Multi Testers
Utilize the combined principles of thermal and electrical conductivity from
our patented technology. The measuring probes, together with the electronics circuitriy, are designed to pick up and segregate data collected from the
stones via a customized micro-controller. Within a split second, the test
result will be displayed. Dimension 160 X 42 X 22mm.
CODE
TS-222
TS-223
DESCRIPTION
PRESIDIUM MULTI TESTER
ADAPTER FOR MULTI TESTER
35. Moissanite Tester
The revolutionary new tester that outsmarts and even detects moissanite,
which is a simulant for diamond. Ultra sensitive, can check stones of 0.01
carat or less. Readings displayed on both sides allowing use in either hand.
Backed by manufacturer’s warranty.
CODE
TS-211
DESCRIPTION
IKOHE MOISSANITE TESTER
36. Diamond Tester- Japan
Improved positive sensing distinguishes the look alike from the genuine.
A very reliable tester that identifies natural diamond from white corundum,
Y.A.G and other simulant. Advanced electronic display. Simultaneous
audible beep and light signal for instant recognition.
Supported by manufacturer’s warranty.
CODE
TS-210
DESCRIPTION
CULTI- JAPAN
37. Diamond Testers-USA
Fast, sensitive and reliable. Delivers result in seconds. Tests even the
smallest gem stones. Negligible warm up time, automatic shut off and
audible diamond signal. Supported by manufacturer’s warranty.
CODE
TS-200
88
DESCRIPTION
MIZAR- USA
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS
1. Cavallin Rolling Mills-Flat
High quality, sturdy, one piece frame construction. Alloy steel hardened and
tempered rolls run in lubricated bronze bearings. Rolls are gear driven, can be
aligned, raised and lowered. Calibrated dial indicates reduction in the sheet size.
Select from three models for flat forms up to a maximum of 120mm width.
Dimensions in mm
CODE
RM-104
RM-106
RM-108
MODEL
L80
L100
L120
L
80
100
120
Ø
44
52.5
65
2. Cavallin Rolling Mills Combination- Flat/Square Wire
Diversify your rolling needs with a choice of different models. All manual operated
models built to the high exacting standards of Cavallin for years of trouble free
performance. Select from various models to form shapes of flat, round, square and
half round. Special feature of an open end with side rollers to do bracelet patterns.
Dimensions in mm
CODE
RM-120
RM-110
RM-111
RM-112
MODEL
LF80
LF100
LF120
LF130
F
80
100
120
130
L
58
50
62
70
Ø
44
52.5
65
65
SQ.
1-3.5
1-4.5
1-6
1-5.1
3. Cavallin Rolling Mills-Combination-Square/ Half Round Wire
Dimensions in mm
CODE
RM-105
RM-107
RM-109
MODEL
F80
F100
F120
F
80
100
120
Ø
44
52.5
65
SQ.
5-1
6-1
7-1
HF/RND
3.6 X 1.2
3.6 X 1.2
3.6 X 1.2
4. Economy Rolling Mills
Compact, bench mounted rolling mills. Heavy duty frame, hardened and tempered
rolls, gear reduction for ease of operation. Select from three different models for a
variety of shapes according to your needs. Rolls are 1.67” dia. and 3” in length.
CODE
SHAPE
FLAT
SQUARE (4-1mm)
HF-ROUND (3-2mm)
TEXTURE (3 EX. ROLLS
90
RM-001
RM-002
RM-003
YES
-
YES
YES
YES
-
YES
YES
YES
YES
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS
5. Cavallin Rolling Mills-with Gear- Flat
Engineered with top quality material and machined to close
tolerances, these rolling mills make easy work of heavy
jobs. Features an additional gear reduction of 1:4 ratio for
effortless rolling. Three models with different capacities.
Dimensions in mm
CODE
RM-091
RM-092
RM-093
MODEL
LR80
LR100
LR120
L
80
100
120
Ø
44
52.5
65
6. Cavallin Rolling Mills-with Gear Combination-Flat/ Square
Dimensions in mm
CODE
RM-099
RM-103
RM-102
MODEL
LFR100
LFR120
LFR130
F
100
120
130
Ø
52.5
65
65
SQ.
1-4.5
1-6
1-6.5
L
50
62
60
SQ.
1-4.5
1-4.5
HF/RND
5 X 2 / 2 X 0.8
5 X 2 / 2 X 0.8
7. Cavallin Rolling Mills-London
These rolling mills are available with and without gear.
Model LF120 is without gear (illustration shown).
Model LFR120 is with gear. Reduction ratio 1:4
Dimensions in mm
CODE
RM-089
RM-090
MODEL
LF120
LFR120
F
120
120
Ø
65
65
L
36
36
8. Pedestal for Cavallin Rolling Mills
To free up bench working space all Cavallin Rolling Mills can be mounted on steel
pedestals. Positions mill at a convenient working height. Select from individual base
plates to suit the machine model.
CODE
RM-115
RM-113
RM-114
RM-116
RM-117
DESCRIPTION
STAND OR PEDESTAL
PLATE FOR 80mm PEDESTAL
PLATE FOR 100mm PEDESTAL
PLATE FOR 120mm PEDESTAL
PLATE FOR 130mm PEDESTAL
Safety Instructions
Page 40
91
™
DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS
9. Cavallin Motorized Rolling Mills
Single Side: This single side, heavy duty rolling mill is suitable for small to medium
sized jewelry workshops. Motors are intermittent duty and can work uninterrupted for
up to 15 mins. A forward/reverse switch contributes to operator safety. Speed is
variable from 0-16 fpm. Rolls are hardened and tempered alloy steel, to generate rolled
forms of flat, square and half-round. A calibrated dial ensures precise size control.
Double sided, heavy duty production mill guarantees steady pressure and uniform
rolled products. Expanded range gives a greater capacity for flat rolled and profile stock
for all jewelry workshops. Motors are intermittent duty and can work uninterrupted for
up to 15 mins. A forward/reverse switch contributes to operator safety. Speed is
variable from 0-16 fpm. Rolls are hardened and tempered steel. A calibrated dial
ensures precise size control.
RM-098
CODE
MODEL
POWER
ROLL(L X D)
FLAT
SQ. WIRE
HF-ROUND
DIMENSION
RM-098
LMF-120-1 SINGLE
1HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz
120 X 65mm
60 X 5.5mm
7.0-1mm
3.6-1.2mm
19 W X 16 D X 20 Ht cm
RM-097
LMF-120-1 DOUBLE
1HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz
120 X 65mm
120 X 5.5mm
7.0-1 mm
29 W X 16 D X 20 Ht cm
RM-097
10. Cavallin Floor Model Motorized Rolling Mills
Heavy duty production mills for continuous operation suitable for jewelry and industrial
manufacturing. Main transmission is by gear reducer immersed in oil bath.
Hardened and tempered alloy steel rolls rotate in ample dimensioned bronze bearings
that are continuously lubricated through a programmable pump. Indicator dials ensure
precise positioning of rolls. Flat rolls are fully protected for operator safety.
Electrical system- Machine has an inverter which allows it to be connected to three
phase or single phase line.
CODE
MODEL
POWER
INVERTER
VARIABLE SPEED
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
LAMP
ROLL. (L X D)
SQ. WIRE
HF-ROUND
DIMENSION
RM-100
SRM-65
2HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz
THREE-PHASE MOTOR
WITH SINGLE CURRENT
0-7m/s
AUTOMATIC
YES
120 X 65mm
7.0-1mm
3.6-1.2mm
80W X 55D X 140Ht cm
RM-101
SRM-65E
1HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz
NO
NO
NO
NO
120 X 65mm
7.0-1mm
3.6-1.2mm
80W X 55D X 140Ht cm
Design Rollers: Available on special order for some Cavallin Mills only.
Cavallin Rolling Mills: Spares available on special order.
92
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS
11. Draw Plates Die Steel-Italy
Premium quality, hardened steel draw plates, with numerous highly
polished holes to draw wire down gradually. Always use Bur Lube, as a
lubricant to draw smoothly and protect the die plate from frictional heat.
CODE
DP-223
DP-235
DP-236
DP-241
DP-243
DP-246
DP-253
DP-256
DP-257
DP-258
DP-259
SHAPE
ROUND
ROUND
ROUND
1
/2 ROUND
1
/2 ROUND
1
/2 ROUND
SQUARE
SQUARE
OVAL
TRIANGLE
STAR
RANGE
2.00-0.30mm
3.00-0.50mm
6.00-3.00mm
4.00-1.00mm
3.00-1.00mm
6.00-3.00mm
3.00-1.00mm
6.00-3.00mm
3.00-1.65mm
3.00-1.00mm
3.00-1.00mm
HOLES
31
31
31
20
20
31
20
31
20
20
20
12. Draw Plates Tungsten Carbide- Deluxe
Draw plates have mirror finished carbide inserts for drawing extremely
bright, super smooth round wire. Wear resistant carbide is ten times
longer lasting than die steel. Use Bur Lube to draw with reduced friction.
CODE
DP-301
DP-310
DP-320
DP-330
SHAPE
ROUND
ROUND
ROUND
ROUND
RANGE
0.245-0.12mm
1.00-0.26mm
2.20-0.26mm
6.00-2.30mm
HOLES
24
24
36
24
13. Draw Plates Tungsten Carbide- Econo
Specialty draw plates with mirror finished wear resistant carbide inserts.
Different shapes - round, square, hexagonal and oval. All sizes clearly
marked on the plates. Use Bur Lube to draw with reduced friction.
CODE
DP-340
DP-341
DP-342
DP-345
DP-347
DP-348
DP-352
DP-353
DP-355
SHAPE
ROUND
ROUND
1
/2 ROUND
SQUARE
SQUARE
SQUARE
HEXAGON
HEXAGON
OVAL
RANGE
2.2-0.26mm
6-2.30mm
3-0.50mm
3.50-0.8mm
3.00-0.55mm
5.00-4.00mm
3.5-0.80mm
5.00-2.10mm
5.00-4.00mm
14. Bur Lube
A carefully formulated compound that provides the optimum
balance of cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up,
thereby extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting
grinding, or drawing.
CODE
BR-700
BR-701
BR-702
DESCRIPTION
BUR LUBE 2 oz
BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz
BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz
Bur Lube
Makes easy!
Bur lube liquid makes drawing wire easier.
Apply frequently to facilitate drawing and
protection of die bore.
93
™
DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS
15. Cavallin Wire Drawing Benches
Manually operated to draw wire forms. This heavy duty machine has a gear
reduction system that enables continuous traction on a guided rail.
Specific draw plates are needed for round, square, half round and other
profiles. Draw plates must be ordered separately.
CODE
RM-139
RM-140
RM-141
DRAW (L X D)
1350 X 10mm
600 X 10mm
SPARE DRAW CLAMP
16. Draw Tongs- Econo
Forged steel tongs have a “T” handle to enable pulling and exerting
leverage when drawing or twisting wire. Broad serrated jaws provide a
strong non-slip grip.
CODE
DT-308
DT-310
LENGTH
8” (200mm)
10” (254mm)
17. Draw Tongs-Deluxe
Superior forged steel tongs with a hole in the “T” handle. Facilitates initial
start of the draw operation. Extra broad serrated jaws grip metal firmly.
CODE
DT-368
DT-370
LENGTH
8” (200mm)
10” (254mm)
18. Draw Tongs with Ring
All steel forged, draw tongs with “U” handle and ring. Especially for use with
larger diameter wire forms for pulling, bending or twisting.
CODE
DT-311
LENGTH
8” (200mm)
19. Lowell Pattern Hand Vise
Hollow handle and grooved corrugated jaws that open and close by turning
the handle. Securely grips wire ends. Jaw width 1/2”.
CODE
PV-409
94
LENGTH
43/4” (120mm)
™
DRILLS
1. Jewelers Twist Drills
Superior quality twist drills ground to precision tolerances. All with 3/32” shanks so they can be used with standard flexshaft handpieces. Apply bur lube when
drilling for cool cutting and lubrication. Individual sizes available in 6 packs.
3. Jewelers Twist Drills-Set
CODE
DR-090
DR-091
DR-092
DR-093
DR-094
DR-095
DR-096
DR-097
DR-098
DR-099
DR-100
DR-101
DR-102
DR-103
DR-104
DR-105
DR-106
DR-107
DR-108
SIZE
5/0
4/0
3/0
2/0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
MM
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
1.60
1.70
1.80
1.90
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
ISO
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
INCH
0.0197
0.0236
0.0276
0.0315
0.0354
0.0393
0.0441
0.0472
0.0500
0.0512
0.5910
0.0630
0.0689
0.0709
0.0748
0.0787
0.0827
0.0866
0.0906
2. High Speed Twist Drills
Set of 12 of the most popular sizes, packaged in a durable
plastic pouch. Drills have 3/32” shanks.
Size ISO - 005 to 016 (0.05 to 1.60 mm)
CODE
DR-110
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 12 TWIST DRILLS
4. High Speed Twist Drill- Set 61-80
A complete set of 20 drills from size 61 to 80 (0.039” to 0.013”).
Made of the finest steel and hardened to Rc 63. Precision ground
sizes for drilling accurate holes. Choice of different storage cases
for easy access and protection.
All purpose jobbers drills with super sharp cutting edge to drill all
materials including industrial steel. Shank size is the same as the drill
size. Ideal for use on all bench and mini drills.
Individual sizes available in packs of ten.
DORMER
DR-050
DR-051
DR-052
DR-053
DR-054
DR-055
DR-056
DR-057
DR-058
DR-059
DR-060
DR-061
DR-062
DR-063
DR-064
DR-065
DR-066
DR-067
DR-068
DR-069
DR-070
DR-071
DR-072
DR-073
DR-074
DR-075
DR-076
DR-077
DR-078
DR-079
DR-080
96
IKOHE
DR-150
DR-151
DR-152
DR-153
DR-154
DR-155
DR-156
DR-157
DR-158
DR-159
DR-160
DR-161
DR-162
DR-163
DR-164
DR-165
DR-166
DR-167
DR-168
DR-169
DR-170
DR-171
DR-172
DR-173
DR-174
DR-175
DR-176
DR-177
DR-178
DR-179
DR-180
DRILL SIZE
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
(MM)
1.78
1.70
1.61
1.51
1.40
1.32
1.18
1.05
1.07
1.04
1.02
1.00
0.97
0.94
0.91
0.89
0.84
0.81
0.79
0.74
0.71
0.66
0.64
0.61
0.57
0.53
0.51
0.46
0.41
0.37
0.34
(IN)
0.0700
0.0670
0.0635
0.0595
0.0550
0.0520
0.0465
0.0430
0.0420
0.0410
0.0400
0.0390
0.0380
0.0370
0.0360
0.0350
0.0330
0.0320
0.0310
0.0293
0.0280
0.0260
0.0250
0.0240
0.0225
0.0210
0.0200
0.0180
0.0160
0.0145
0.0135
DR-019
DR-021
CODE
DR-019
DR-020
DR-021
DESCRIPTION
SET WITH DOME CASE
SET WITH METAL CASE
SET WITH PLASTIC CASE
5. Pearl Drill Set
Set of 11 high speed steel drills, all organized on a plastic stand
with a protective cover.
CODE
DR-082
SIZE
1.05 TO 3.0mm
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
DRILLS
6. Mini Drill Machine
A mini bench drill just the right size for all drilling
projects. Rugged aluminum housing with slotted
base to clamp fixtures. Sturdy vertical column with
quick release to adjust chuck to table distance.
Selectable speeds with calibrated depth control
and positive stop. Ball bearing spindle, 1/4” drill
chuck and key.
CODE
HO-019
HO-018
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CODE
HO-022
DESCRIPTION
DRILL PRESS
CODE
HO-007
DESCRIPTION
DRILLING VISE
7. Drill Press
Convert your Foredom flexshaft or any 1” diameter
handpiece into a precision drill press. Securely
holds the handpiece in a vertical position. Lever
operated with depth stop for precise drilling,
countersinking or reaming. Drill head and table are
adjustable for maximum flexibility.
8. Pearl Holding Vise
Center drill pearls accurately without any mar on
the surface. Quick clamp and release system.
Thirteen cavities accommodate pearls or beads
size 2-10mm.
9. Pearl Drilling Machine
Ultra high precision drill, specifically designed to drill pearls from 3 to 7mm
diameter without any chipping or cracking. Unit is compact with motor,
speed 6,000 rpm, a drill chuck and self centering vise to automatically hold
pearls for center line drilling. Includes collets to hold pearls from 3 to 7mm.
Pearl drills must be ordered separately.
Dimension 145 x 235 x 122mm. Wt. 4.2 kgs.
CODE
HO-001
HO-002
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
10. Pearl Drills
Special profile tungsten vanadium drills for perfect
micro-drilling of pearls. Drill points at both ends.
Sizes range from 0.6 to 1.5 mm.
CODE
HO-025
HO-026
HO-027
HO-028
HO-029
HO-030
HO-031
HO-032
Safety Instructions
Page 40
SIZE
0.60mm
0.70mm
0.80mm
0.90mm
1.00mm
1.10mm
1.20mm
1.50mm
97
™
DRILLS
11. Bur Lube
A carefully formulated compound that provides the optimum balance of
cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up, thereby
extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting
grinding, or drawing.
CODE
BR-700
BR-701
BR-702
12. Poseidon Lathe
This mini lathe is one of the finest machines manufactured to ISO 9002 standards.
Made in rigid all metal construction for high precision accuracy, the design is
streamlined for ease of operation. Features include calibrated hand wheels,
adjustable jibs for backlash, ground prismatic bed and a smooth power drive.
A high torque motor delivers different spindle speeds to machine most materials.
The machine is versatile for all types of work such as turning, milling, drilling, and
carving in various materials like metal, wood, plastics and wax. Additional accessories extend the capability for other special operations.
DESCRIPTION
BUR LUBE 2 oz
BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz
BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz
Specifications.
Center height
1.89”
Swing over bed
3.78”
Distance between centers
7.78”
Maximum dia. over cross slide
3.78”
Cross slide travel
2.05”
Spindle speeds
130-4,000 rpm.
Drive motor
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
Poseidon Lathe Accessories
Rolling Center:
CODE
HO-058
DESCRIPTION
ROLLING CENTER
Power Feed:
CODE
HO-059
CODE
HO-050
HO-051
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
Poseidon Lathe Accessories
Tool Bits:
CODE
HO-054
DESCRIPTION
TOOL BITS
DESCRIPTION
POWER FEED
Collet Holder:
CODE
HO-060
DESCRIPTION
COLLET HOLDER
Collet 10 Pcs Set:
CODE
HO-061
DESCRIPTION
COLLET SET
Top Slide:
CODE
HO-055
DESCRIPTION
TOP SLIDE
Set of O-Ring Belt:
Face Plate:
CODE
HO-056
DESCRIPTION
FACE PLATE
Drill Chuck & Adapter- 3 Pcs:
CODE
HO-057
98
DESCRIPTION
DRILL CHUCK
CODE
HO-062
DESCRIPTION
O-RING BELT
Set Of V-belt:
CODE
HO-063
DESCRIPTION
POWER FEED V BELT
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ENGRAVING
1. Presidium® Outside Engraver
A manual engraver so easy to operate anyone can get professional results in minutes.
Engrave on small objects of jewelry, in any precious metal or plastics. Pantograph ratio from
21/2: 1 to 6:1, a universal vise 360° rotation with 8 index positions, and height adjustment up
to 115mm. Slide accomodates 11/4” and 23/4” character blanks. Diamond tip has drag feature
to give a bright, highly readable appearance without removing any precious metal. Complete
instruction included.
EN-013
Note: Scripts of different fonts and zodiac
signs may be ordered separately.
EN-019
CODE
EN-012
EN-013
EN-014
EN-019
SPECIFICATION
ENGRAVER MACHINE
DIAMOND TIP
BOX FOR TEMPLATES
JEWELRY HOLDER SET OF 4 PCS
2. Engraving Character Sets
CODE
EN-015
Double Line Script- 5/8” LETTER
47 Capitals + 56 Lower case + 20 Numerals + 17 Special / Spacers= 140 pcs
Smallest
6:1
Largest
21/2:1
Engraving copy scripts are high accuracy characters made by a “V”
groove in bright coated brass. Made of standard 11/4” width blanks,
these fonts will fit the machine slides of most manufacturers. Sets of
different font styles come neatly organized in a polished wooden
box. Individual replacement letters and numbers are available.
Fancy Single Line ScriptLargest
21/2:1
Smallest
6:1
5
CODE
EN-018-01
/8” LETTER
46 Capitals + 56 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 18 Special / Spacers=140 pcs
Miniature Single Line Script - / ” LETTER
1
2
CODE
EN-011
Smallest
6:1
Largest
21/2:1
46 Capitals + 56 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 18 Special / Spacers=140 pcs
Single Line Script-
Pisces
Aries
Taurus
CODE
Double Line Block- 5/8” LETTER
104 Capitals + 20 Numerals + 16 Special / Spacers= 140 pcs
Gemini
Cancer
EN-016
Smallest
6:1
Aquarius
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 12
Largest
21/2:1
CODE
EN-009-01
Largest
21/2:1
3. Zodiac Signs
Smallest
6:1
5
CODE
EN-018
/8” LETTER
47 Capitals + 56 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 13 Special / Spacers=136 pcs
Single Line BlockScorpio
Sagittarius
Capricon
4. Chinese White
Apply lightly by brush on surfaces, prior to layout. Wipes
away easily. Available in block form and soluble in water.
CODE
EN-002
100
DESCRIPTION
BLOCK-0.35 oz
Smallest
6:1
Libra
Miniature Single Line Block-
1
CODE
/4” LETTER
104 Capitals + 20 Numerals + 16 Special / Spacers= 140 pcs
EN-010
Smallest
6:1
Virgo
Largest
21/2:1
Leo
Largest
21/2:1
5
CODE
EN-017
/8” LETTER
46 Capitals + 58 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 10 Special / Spacers = 134 pcs
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ENGRAVING
5. Inside Ring Engraver
Point-of-purchase engraving offers customers complete satisfaction. Bright
legible marking that makes every ring a memorable possession. Features include
automatic centering of rings, one engraving reversible dial, auto-indexing,
pressure and depth regulation. Operating instructions included.
CODE
EN-022
EN-022-01
EN-023
4mm / 7mm
DESCRIPTION
INSIDE RING ENGRAVER
DIAMOND TIP
Dial Templates for Ring Engraver
Dial templates with different letter heights and style are interchangeable on the
ring engraver. Dial diameter is 118mm and engraving ratio is 1/5.
CODE
EN-023
EN-024
EN-024-01
EN-024-02
EN-024
DESCRIPTION
LETTER HT.
BLOCK DIAL REVERSIBLE 7 & 4mm
SCRIPT DIAL ONE SIDE
7mm
SPECIAL BLOCK
4mm
STYLUS FOR SPECIAL BLOCK
EN-024-02
EN-024-01
6. Presidium® Inside Ring Engraver
The Presidium inside ring engraver is manufactured to the highest standards with
hardened powder-coated paintwork. The machine is compact, user friendly and
complete with an engraving diamond tip. Wide ring-holding capacity of sizes from
Ø 19 to Ø 30mm. One single template produces letters with height of 1 and 2mm
with automatic letter spacing. Includes practice rings and instructions.
CODE
EN-020
EN-086
EN-022-01
EN-021
EN-087
DESCRIPTION
LETTER HT.
INSIDE RING ENGRAVER
REVERSIBLE DIAL
9mm / 4mm
DIAMOND TIP
SCRIPT DIAL CAPS/LOWER CASE
REVERSIBLE DIAL SCRIPT 9mm / 4mm
EN-086
9mm / 4mm
7. Ringstar Engraver
Table-top inside ring manual engraver. Composed text from the copy slide is
engraved on the inside of all sizes of rings by a diamond tip. Automatic spacing
of characters. Micrometer screw control varies the pressure and the cutting depth
of the diamond tip. Character height continuously adjustable from 1-3mm.
Includes one script letter set and instructions.
CODE
EN-025
EN-035
EN-036
EN-037
DESCRIPTION
RINGSTAR WITH SCRIPT LETTER SET R5000
TEMPLATE RAIL FOR RING STAR
CLAMPING WIRE FOR RINGSTAR
DIAMOND TIP- RINGMATIC
EN-028
EN-029
EN-030
EN-031
Template for Elma
CODE
EN-026
EN-027
EN-043
EN-044
EN-045
DESCRIPTION
SCRIPT LETTER SET WITH R5000
RINGSTAR BLOCK LETTER SET
ELMA TEMPLATE LETTER NR 3C SCRIPT
ELMA TEMPLATE LETTER NR 4C BLOCK
ELMA TEMPLATE LETTER NR 6C SCRIPT
Safety Instructions
Page 40
EN-032
EN-033
EN-034
101
™
ENGRAVING
8. Elma Inside/Outside Engraver
EN-049
A top of the line engraver with limitless possibilities. It is the most complete
machine, dedicated for jewelry engraving. Engraves all articles of jewelry
gold, silver, platinum etc, on outside, inside and flat surfaces. Basic
machine includes main frame, work plate, copy slide, letter stretching
device, engraving mouse and diamond tip. Other features are predictable
pressure on diamond tip and cutter depth and variable letter height adjustment from 0.8 to 6.5mm. Operating instructions included.
EN-051
EN-052
CODE
EN-048
EN-049
EN-051
EN-052
DESCRIPTION
COMBINATION ENGRAVING MACHINE
INSIDE RING ENGRAVER MODEL
SHORT CLAMPING ATTACHMENT
LONG CLAMPING ATTACHMENT
9. GRS® Engraving Block
Heavy duty block with thrust bearing mounting for a smooth rotation without
any slack. Adjust the block to whichever way you need, to allow working
with reduced fatigue. Sliding jaws are operated by a steel screw in a close
fitting “T” slot. Jaws are hardened, extra deep, and accept a set of pins,
plates, and clamps to hold varied workpieces.
CODE
EN-007
EN-008
EN-009
DESCRIPTION
ENGRAVER BLOCK ONLY
ACCESSORIES ONLY
BLOCK WITH ACCESSORIES
10. JUN-AIR® Compressor
Sturdy rugged construction, low noise level 40db air compressor.
Powerful enough to supply air at 2 cfm/100 PSI to handle all air tools and
wax injectors. Features include: 4 gallon tank capacity, adjustable start/stop
pressure switch, pressure gauge, thermal overload protector and
drain/outlet cock. Dimension 15” L X 15” W X 171/2” Ht.
CODE
EN-077
EN-078
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz 0.5hp
220V/ 50Hz 0.5hp
Maintenance Kits Include: Intake filter, SJ-27 oil and O-ring.
CODE
EN-079
EN-080
102
DESCRIPTION
KIT
AIR COMPRESSOR OIL
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
ENGRAVING
11. GRS® System 3
An affordable impact tool system that uses compressed air. The System 3 is a comfortable,
light weight handpiece that machined from heat-treated stainless steel. There are no plastic
or cast metal parts. It allows you to engrave, texture, carve and set stones. Use the foot
control to start and precisely vary the impact power needed.
Deluxe Package
Includes handpiece, foot control, air filter-regulator, hand graver handle, 6 quick change tool
holders, 8 steel points, 2 gravers and operating instructions.
Standard Package
Includes handpiece, foot control, air filter-regulator, 3 quick change tool holders, 6 steel
points and instructions.
CODE
EN-071
EN-072
EN-073
EN-074
EN-075
DESCRIPTION
DELUXE PACKAGE
STANDARD PACKAGE
HANDPIECE ONLY
FOOT CONTROL
AIR FILTER REGULATOR
12. GRS® GraverMax
Experience the ability to perform consistent accurate decorative designs with quality and
speed. GraverMax has two different tool powers- IMPACT and ROTARY. The control unit
has one outlet connector for two impact handpieces, utilizing a selector switch to choice the
impact handpiece desired. Plus an outlet for a rotary handpiece. Includes foot control, four
tools and instructions. Requires compressed air 1.4 cfm at 45 psi. minimum. Order handpieces separately. Change tools in seconds witho QC- Quick Change Handpiece.
CODE
EN-060
EN-061
DESCRIPTION
GRAVERMAX,110V/ 60Hz- without handpiece
GRAVERMAX, 220V/ 50Hz- without handpiece
Handpieces for GraverMax
#710
Handpiece for stone setting, hammering and medium to deep engraving.
All stainless steel construction with a quiet rear exhaust. Includes 6-QC holders.
#801
Handpiece for all purpose work. Medium power with fine control for engraving and
stone setting. Small handy unit with rear exhaust. Includes 3-QC holders.
#610
Hammer handpiece of stainless steel, with a wide power range for bead raising,
stone setting and deep engraving. Accepts sq. tools max 2.5mm and round 3.3mm.
#609
Hammer handpiece uses only threaded hammer tips. Includes one tip.
#901
Heat treated stainless steel handpiece with huge power range and fine controls.
Ideal for relief work bead raising, setting and engraving. Includes 6-QC holders.
EN-067
EN-065
EN-068
EN-066
CODE
EN-065
EN-066
EN-067
EN-068
EN-069
EN-070
DESCRIPTION
#901 HAMMER HANDPIECE-66mm LONG 2.6 oz
#710 HAMMER HANDPIECE-107mm LONG 5.9 oz
#801 HAMMER HANDPIECE-71mm LONG 4.3 oz
#609 HAMMER HANDPIECE 114mm LONG 5.5 oz
#610 HAMMER HANDPIECE-114mm LONG 5.5 oz
#804 QC HOLDERS SET OF 3
Safety Instructions
Page 40
EN-069
EN-070
103
™
ENGRAVING
13. GRS® Diamond Power Hone
17. GRS® Diamond and Ceramic Wheels
A portable machine in a steel housing,
powered by a continuous duty motor and a double bearing spindle. The GRS® Power Hone uses
diamond wheels to sharpen hardened steels, high
speed steels and carbide. The wheels last for years and
stay flat for accuracy. Different grits are available
from coarse to fine for mirror polishing.
CODE
EN-100
EN-101
DESCRIPTION
1525 POWER HONE WITH 600 DIA. WHEEL-110V/ 60Hz
1543 POWER HONE WITH 600 DIA. WHEEL-220V/ 50Hz
14. GRS® Dual Angle Sharpening System
The complete system includes Power Hone, Quick Wheel Change Adapter,
260 and 600) grit Diamond Wheels, Ceramic Lap, Diamond spray 1/4 micron
Diamond Spary, Dual Angle Sharpening Fixture and Wheel Storage Rack.
CODE
EN-108
EN-109
EN-110
EN-111
EN-112
EN-113
DESCRIPTION
DIAMOND WHEEL 5” DIA. 260 GRIT C
DIAMOND WHEEL 5” DIA. 600 GRIT M
DIAMOND WHEEL 5” DIA. 1200 GRIT F
CERAMIC LAP 6” DIA.-USE WITH DIAMOND SPRAY
DIAMOND SPRAY 1/2 MICRON FINE
1838 QUICK WHEEL CHANGE ADAPTER
18. GRS® GlenSteel Gravers
Made of special High Speed Steel (cobalt free).
Fits all GRS impact handpieces and QC Holder.
CODE
EN-102
EN-103
DESCRIPTION
3577 COMPLETE DUAL ANGLE SYSTEM-110V/ 60Hz
3572 COMPLETE DUAL ANGLE SYSTEM-220V/ 50Hz
15. GRS Dual Angle Fixture Only
®
A fixture that holds a wider variety of tools and
adjusts to more angles than the standard fixture.
With two degree dials, you can set the elevation
angle and the rotation angle of each tool.
The fixture holds tools with or without handles and
even those in QC holders.
CODE
EN-104
EN-105
DESCRIPTION
3570 DUAL ANGLE FIXTURE WITH POST
3571 DUAL ANGLE FIXTURE HEAD ONLY
16. GRS® Q/Change Sharpening Fixture
Insert the tool with its QC holder into the
front of this fixture and sharpen. It has two
degree dials, plus a unique detent system
that makes sharpening faster and easier.
CODE
EN-114
EN-115
EN-116
DESCRIPTION
A1-SQUARE
A2-FLAT
A3-BLANK
19. GRS® Tungsten Carbide Gravers
These last ten times longer between sharpening,
when properly used. They are harder than any tool
steel, but more brittle. Always sharpen these tools
on a diamond wheel.
CODE
EN-117
EN-118
DESCRIPTION
B1-SQUARE
B2-BLANK
20. GRS® Hard Steel Points
Use to make punches, hammer tool, bead raises,
stipple points and more.
CODE
EN-119
EN-120
EN-121
DIA. X LEN
C1-1.8 X 38mm
C2-3.3 X 76mm
C3-3.1 X 38mm
21. Beading Tool Sets
Concave tip that puts beads on prongs to secure stones
in mountings. Set of 12 from #5-16 (0.5 to 1.05mm).
Set of 24 from #0-22 (0.5 to 1.35mm). All on plastic
stands with a handle.
CODE
EN-106
EN-107
104
DESCRIPTION
3580 QUICK CHANGE SHARPENING WITH POST
3581 QUICK CHANGE SHARPENING HEAD ONLY
CODE
BD-628
BD-629
BD-630
DESCRIPTION
12 PCS.
24 PCS.
BEADING TOOL HOLDER
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
FILES
1. Swiss Precision Files
High precision durable files, manufactured from chrome alloy steel and heat treated by a special process to guarantee sharper teeth for outstanding cutting
performance on all hard and soft metals, including platinum. File measurement is from the point to where the teeth end. All files are in 6” lengths.
DESCRIPTION
CUT
TEETH PER INCH
X-COARSE
#00
41
COARSE
#0
51
MEDIUM
#1
64
SMOOTH
#2
79
FINE
#3
97
X-FINE
#4
117
A
B
BARRETTE
A: / ” /16mm
B: / ” /4.0mm
CUT
CODE
#00
FL-199
#0
FL-200
#1
FL-201
#2
FL-202
#3
-
#4
FL-203
HALF ROUND
A: / ” /16mm
B: / ”/4.8mm
CUT
CODE
#00
FL-208
#0
FL-209
#1
FL-210
#2
FL-211
#3
FL-213
#4
FL-212
HALF ROUND RING
CUT
CODE
#00
FL-218
#0
FL-219
#1
FL-220
#2
FL-221
#3
-
#4
FL-224
CUT
CODE
#00
#0
FL-230
#1
-
#2
FL-231
#3
-
#4
FL-232
HAND
A: / ” /19mm
B: / ” /4.0mm
CUT
CODE
#00
FL-238
#0
FL-239
#1
FL-240
#2
FL-241
#3
-
#4
FL-242
ROUND TAPERED
Diameter:1/4” /6.0mm
CUT
CODE
#00
#0
FL-250
#1
-
#2
FL-251
#3
-
#4
FL-252
CUT
CODE
#00
#0
FL-254
#1
-
#2
FL-255
#3
-
#4
FL-256
CUT
CODE
#00
#0
FL-258
#1
-
#2
FL-259
#3
-
#4
FL-260
23
5
32
19
3
32
32
16
A: / ” /16mm
B: / ” /4.8mm
19
16
6”
3
32
THREE SQUARE
B: / ” / 8mm
5
3
5
16
4
32
SQUARE
A: 5/16” /8mm
KNIFE EDGE
A: / ” /18mm
B: / ” /4.0mm
23
5
106
32
32
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
FILES
2. Needle Files- with Round Knurled Handles-Swiss
Precision needle files for miniature work, made of the finest chrome steel, hardened and tempered to ensure efficient cutting. Knurled handle provides a firm grip.
BARRETTE
CUT
16CM(61/4”)
20CM(73/4”)
#00
FL-090
-
#0
FL-100
FL-169
#2
FL-101
FL-170
#4
FL-102
FL-171
#6
FL-103
FL-172
EQUALLING
CUT
16CM(61/4”)
20CM(73/4”)
#00
FL-116
-
#0
FL-117
FL-173
#2
FL-118
FL-174
#4
FL-119
FL-175
#6
FL-120
HALF ROUND
CUT
16cm(61/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
#00
FL-131
-
#0
FL-132
FL-177
#2
FL-133
FL-178
#4
FL-134
FL-179
#6
FL-135
-
#00
FL-148
-
#0
FL-149
FL-180
#2
FL-150
FL-181
#4
FL-151
FL-182
#6
FL-152
FL-183
16cm(61/4”)
CUT
16cm(61/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
ROUND
THREE SQUARE
CUT
16cm(61/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
#00
FL-152-01
-
#0
FL-153
FL-184
#2
FL-154
FL-186
#4
FL-155
FL-187
#6
FL-156
FL-188
SQUARE
CUT
16cm(61/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
#00
FL-156-01
-
#0
FL-157
FL-188
#2
FL-158
FL-189
#4
FL-159
FL-190
#6
FL-160
FL-191
CROSSING
CUT
16cm(61/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
#00
-
#0
FL-161
FL-192
#2
FL-162
FL-193
#4
FL-163
FL-194
#6
FL-164
FL-194-01
KNIFE
CUT
16cm(61/4”)
20cm(73/4”)
#00
FL-164-01
FL-194-02
Safety Instructions
Page 40
#0
FL-165
FL-195
#2
FL-166
FL-196
#4
FL-167
FL-197
107
™
FILES
3. Needle File Sets
6. Needle Files- German
Set of 12 needle files made of the finest chrome steel and heat treated to give
twice the cutting power. Indispensable for use in detailing delicate designs.
Precisely graded needle files in the most popular shapes of half
round, barrette, three square, equalling round and square files.
Set of 6 pcs in 160mm length.
CODE
FL-016
FL-020
CODE
FL-023
FL-024
FL-025
LENGTH
16cm
20cm
Diamond files can smooth finish all precious metal,
glass, ceramic and stone. Four different grit sizes.
Size 1/2” X 13/4”.
MICRON
125
74
40
20
COLOR
BLACK
RED
YELLOW
WHITE
COLOR
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
7. Diamond Needle Files
4. 3M ® Diamond Files
CODE
FL-300
FL-301
FL-302
FL-303
CUT
#2
#3
#4
GRIT
120
200
400
800
5. Wax File Set
Set of 6 most popular shapes. Teeth will not clog with
wax or plastic. Shapes include equaling, flat, half-round,
round, square and three square. Overall length 6”.
Made of virgin diamond particles electroplated on high precision
steel blanks. Comfortable handles provide maximum strength,
flexibility and durability. Overall length 51/2”.
CODE
FL-080
FL-081
FL-082
FL-083
FL-084
FL-085
DESCRIPTION
THREE-SQUARE
PILLAR
HALF-ROUND
ROUND
SQUARE
SET OF 5 PCS.
8. Wax Files Flat Hand
Truly the best file for every wax modeler. Special tooth form resists wax
loading into teeth.
CODE
FL-003
FL-004
DESCRIPTION
PLASTIC HANDLE-81/4”
WOOD HANDLE-10”
9. Double-End Vulcanite Files
CODE
FL-006
DESCRIPTION
WAX FILE SET OF 6 PCS.
Double end wax files have tooth forms specially designed for use on wax,
plastics and other soft materials. One file combines both coarse and fine cuts.
CODE
FL-001
FL-002
108
DESCRIPTION
8” VULCANITE FILE-DELUXE
8” VULCANITE FILE- ECONOMY
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
FILES
10. Escapement Files
Made of chrome alloy steel. These square handle files of different shapes from coarse
to fine grades, are suitable for every type of miniature sculpting. Also available in sets.
Overall length 51/2”-14cm.
HALF ROUND
BARRETTE
CODE
FL-030
FL-031
FL-032
FL-033
CUT
#0
#2
#3
#4
CODE
FL-041
FL-042
FL-043
FL-044
CUT
#0
#2
#3
#4
ROUND
CROSSING
CODE
FL-034
FL-035
CUT
#2
#4
PILLAR
CODE
FL-046
FL-047
FL-048
FL-049
CUT
#0
#2
#3
#4
THREE SQUARE
CODE
FL-037
FL-038
FL-039
CUT
#2
#3
#4
SQUARE
CODE
FL-054
FL-055
FL-056
CUT
#0
#2
#4
CODE
FL-059
FL-060
FL-061
FL-062
CUT
#0
#2
#3
#4
KNIFE
CODE
FL-051
FL-052
CUT
#2
#4
Assorted Escapement Files
Assorted shapes in three different cuts.
Pillar shape is not included in the sets.
CODE
FL-007
FL-008
FL-009
CUT
#2
#4
#6
SET
12 PCS
12 PCS
12 PCS
11. File Handles
Screw Head Handle: Holds files securely. Handle has a comfortable
non-slip grip for files from 6”-8”.
Needle File Handle: This file handle clamps tools with a vise-likegrip.
Suitable for holding needle files, scrapers, small drills and gravers.
Overall length 33/4”.
Wood Handle: Made of seasoned wood with a brass collar, these durable
file handles are round and smooth all over.
CODE
FL-010
FL-011
FL-012
FL-013
FL-014
DESCRIPTION
FILE HANDLE-ALUMINUM
FILE HANDLE- 31/2” PVC
PUSH GRIP HANDLE 3-4mm
PUSH GRIP HANDLE 2-3mm
WOOD HANDLE WITH BRASS COLLET
FL-010
FL-011
FL-012
FL-013
FL-014
12. File Cleaner
Steel bristle, mounted in a shaped wooden handle, used for cleaning debris
from clogged file teeth.
CODE
FC-001
DESCRIPTION
FILE CLEANER
Safety Instructions
Page 40
109
™
FILES
13. Valtitan Files- Swiss
The hardest files known Rc72, made from graded alloy steel, heat treated, tempered and corrosion resistant. Use on all metals, including platinum.
Unique tooth form eliminates clogging. All shapes and cuts are available. File length 6”/150mm and 7”/180mm.
Length 6”-150mm
CUT
HAND CHECKING
HALF RND RING
HALF RND
BARRETTE
THREE SQUARE
#00
FL-310
FL-311
-
#0
FL-312
FL-313
FL-314
FL-315
FL-316
#2
FL-317
FL-318
FL-319
FL-320
FL-321
#4
FL-322
FL-323
FL-324
FL-325
FL-326
#00
FL-330
FL-331
#0
FL-332
FL-333
FL-334
FL-335
FL-336
FL-337
#2
FL-338
FL-339
FL-340
FL-341
FL-342
FL-343
#4
FL-344
FL-345
FL-346
FL-347
FL-348
FL-349
Length 7”-180mm
CUT
ROUND
SQUARE
THREE SQUARE
HALF RND
PILLAR
BARRETTE
110
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
FLEXSHAFTS
1. CC® Series Foredom Motors
The most popular system. Complete and affordable by every jeweler. Allows extensive applications for
grinding, carving, drilling, deburring and engraving. A well balanced 1/10 hp ball bearing motor with a
variable speed range up to 18,000 rpm. A 39” flex shaft with Foredom #30 handpiece and Jacobs chuck
that accepts all tools with 0-5/32” shanks. Motor speed variation from low to high is by a solid state
electronic foot control.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MO-104
CC MODEL WITH CFL-15 110V
MO-106
CC MODEL WITH CFL-15 220V
MO-108
CC MODEL WITH CFL-15110V -#30 H/PIECE
MO-110
CC MODEL WITH CFL-15 220V -#30 H/PIECE
MO-112
CC MODEL WITH FCT-2 220V-#30 H/PIECE
2. S® Series Foredom Motors
Select this model for complete versatility and dependable power capability. Full torque by a 1/8 hp. ball
bearing motor that will not stall at any speed up to 18,000 rpm. A 39” flexshaft with a quick detach
feature accepts all Foredom handpieces, except “H” series. Handpiece #30 with Jacobs chuck holds all
accessories with 0-5/32” shanks. Use mounted points, bristle brushes, sanding drums and much more for
finishing all types of metals. Includes Foredom solid state foot control for speed regulation.
3. Red Wing Motors
CODE
MO-115
MO-116
MO-119
MO-120
DESCRIPTION
S MODEL WITH FCT-1 110V
S MODEL WITH SCT-1 110V
S MODEL WITH FCT-2 220V
S MODEL WITH SCT-2 220V
The Red Wing “Flex” 1/8 hp motor delivers more power at low rpms and high rpm’s than any other standard motor. The newly designed motor delivers more torque and power with less noise and runs cool
longer for better performance. The flexible shaft double wound construction runs smooth and cool without memory providing maximum performance and a much longer life than single wound flexible shafts
on the market today. The Red Wing is ideal for variety of applications: grinding, engraving, de-burring,
polishing and finishing. The flex shaft accepts most standard handpieces. Complete set includes motor
with shaft/sheath and foot control.
CODE
MO-201
MO-202
MO-203
MO-204
MO-205
MO-206
MO-207
MO-208
4.
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET -110V/ 60Hz
COMPLETE SET- 220V/ 50Hz
MOTOR WITH SHAFT/SHEATH 110V/ 60Hz
MOTOR WITH SHAFT/SHEATH 220V/ 50Hz
FOOT CONTROL 110V/ 60Hz
FOOT CONTROL 220V/ 50Hz
SHEATH
SHAFT
Flexible Shaft Motors
An all purpose, versatile, unit that is the key to all model making, die finishing, wood carving, engraving and
polishing. Hang up version, with 1/10 hp ball bearing motor, variable speed range 0-18,000 rpm.
Complete set includes motor, handpiece and foot control.
Spares for Gems Motor
CODE
MO-310
MO-311
MO-320
MO-321
112
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET -110V
COMPLETE SET -220V
MOTOR 110V -W/O H/PIECE
MOTOR 220V -W/O H/PIECE
CODE
MO-143
MO-147
DESCRIPTION
SHAFT- INNER
SHEATH- OUTER
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
FLEXSHAFTS
5. Micro-Motors
These two Micro-Motors, Microlab 350 and Gempower 45000 are very simple and
economical motor driven handpieces. One of the best engineered tools for freehand.
They are great for model makers, stone setters, cleaning, polishing of casting.
Both have forward and reverse control with dual voltage 110/220V.
Microlab 350 is more economical. It comes with Tech 2000 handpiece 0-35,000 rpm
heavy duty, precision machined and balanced drive shaft, cooling fan built into motor,
and quick release handpiece. Speed is controlled from the speed dial.
CODE
MO-008
MO-009
MO-010
MO-011
DESCRIPTION
MICROLAB 350 WITH CONTROL BOX
TECH 2000 HANDPIECE
COLLET CHUCK 1/8”
COLLET CHUCK 3mm
Gempower 45000 can be used especially with diamond flywheels for easy and fast
cutting. Comes with Gempower 45000 handpiece. The handpiece is vibration free
and has built-in ball bearings. Features superior torque and speed control. Speed can
be controlled by the speed dial in the hand operated mode or through a variable
speed foot pedal. Comes with 3mm chuck.
CODE
MO-012
MO-013
MO-010
MO-015
6.
DESCRIPTION
GEMPOWER 45000 WITH CONTROL BOX
GEMPOWER 45000 HANDPIECE
COLLET CHUCK 1/8”
COLLET CHUCK 3/32”
Z500 Motor
Compact lightweight table model designed for high productive performance and
overall excellence. A microcomputer integrated controller precisely sets the
speed for optimum cutting and polishing of a variety of materials. Motor handpiece delivers excellent torque with smooth, quiet vibration free operation. The
control panel has a digital display with variable speed from 1,000-50,000 rpm.
Standard Package Includes:
· Control Unit Z500SB · Motor Handpiece UM50T · Foot Pedal FC-40
· Collet Chucks (Ø 3 & Ø 2.35 mm)
CODE
MO-290
MO-291
MO-292
7.
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD PACKAGE
MOTOR HANDPIECE UM50T
FOOT PEDAL FC-40
Electer E-max
Multi-purpose ultra-precision micro-grinder includes higher user-friendliness.
Provides a digital display, a built in switch on the handle and innovative vertical
tower case which allows less footprint. This is the successor to the outstanding
performance of ELECTER-GX, a grinder that has gained a high reputation
among precision users over many years.
Specifications:
Rotation Speed: 1,000-35,000 rpm
Power Source: 100V/ 50-60Hz
Power Consumption: 30W
Output Power: 71W
Maximum Torque: 4.1N cm
Standard Package Includes:
· Control Unit · Motor · Attachment · Collet Chucks (Ø 3 & Ø 2.35 mm)
· Handpiece stand · Handpiece Holder · Spanner (7 X 5.1mm) · Pin spanner
CODE
MO-300
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD PACKAGE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
113
™
FLEXSHAFTS
8. No.30 & 330 Handpiece
General purpose, continuous duty handpiece. One piece, light weight metal body, with
permanently sealed ball bearings that requires no lubrication. Protected Jacobs 3 jaw
chuck to grip all tools with straight shanks up to 5/32”. Includes chuck key.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MO-162
FOREDOM HANDPIECE #30
MO-163
GEMS HANDPIECE #30
9. Foredom® No.35 Handpiece
The ideal handpiece for diamond fly tools and carbide points. Speed up to 35,000 rpm,
with a planetary drive, from a motor speed of maximum 12,000 rpm. Single piece
construction, with double shield, pre-lubricated ball bearings. Includes 1/8” collet with
wrench. Collets for other sizes are available.
CODE
MO-165
DESCRIPTION
#35 HANDPIECE
10. Foredom® Hammer Handpiece No 15 & 15D
A precision made affordable handpiece for stone setters. Create textures, florentine, set
stones in channels, close bezels and prongs. Adjustable 5,000 stroke per minute with an
impact hammer action. Uses screw style tools, diamond pave and carbide points.
CODE
MO-172
MO-173
DESCRIPTION
#15
#15D WITH DUPLEX SPRING
11. Foredom® Quick Change No 18 & 18D (Duplex)
Impressive handpiece for the stone setter that has applications involving numerous tool
changes. Quiet continuous operation, pre-loaded lubricated ball bearings and a rapid
lock/release lever for tools with 3/32” shanks.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MO-160
#18D WITH DUPLEX SPRING
MO-161
#18
12. Badeco® Rotary Handpiece
A high precision handpiece, ergonomically styled for long periods of hand carving,
grinding and finishing. Quiet, vibration free model, with three super precision bearings to
achieve a maximum speed up to 18,000 rpm. Ingenious clamping and unclamping of
tools by only a quarter turn of the body, eliminates the use of keys or spanners.
Unit is complete with 3/32” collet.
CODE
MO-158
MO-159
DESCRIPTION
MODEL -437
MODEL-437 WITH DUPLEX SPRING
13. Badeco® Hammer Handpiece
MO-435/MO-436
Dependable striking force makes this handpiece the #1 choice of the professional stone
setter. Close bezels and prongs, design pave, texture and florentine. The duplex spring
system offers complete maneuverability. Working speed 12,000 strokes per minute.
MO-437
AW-031
MO-438
MO-439
114
CODE
MO-170
MO-171
MO-435
MO-436
MO-437
MO-438
MO-439
AW-031
DESCRIPTION
NORMAL STROKE-217
STRONG STROKE-222
HAMMER TIP- 0.5mm ROUND
HAMMER TIP- 1mm ROUND
HAMMER TIP- 1mm SQUARE
HAMMER TIP- 0.5 X 1mm OVAL
SET OF 9 TIPS
DELUXE LASER POINT
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
FLEXSHAFTS
14. Faro® Handpieces
Light weight one piece body with permanently lubricated, double sealed ball bearings.
Quick tool change system provides real time savings. Comes with or without duplex connector
and one 3/32” collet.
CODE
MO-155
MO-156
MO-157
DESCRIPTION
HANDPIECE STANDARD MODEL
H/PIECE WITH DUPLEX SPRING
DUPLEX CONNECTION
15. Faro® Hammer Handpiece
Premium quality, custom engineered, this handpiece works with an impressive power and high
accuracy to perform all diamond pave, texturing and various stone setting operations.
Features a sealed ball bearing assembly with a quick tool change system for 3/32” shanks.
CODE
MO-175
DESCRIPTION
FARO HAMMER
16. #40 Handpieces-Italy- Quick Change
Precision machined, handpiece of superior quality and durability, for increased production.
Slim style, permanently sealed ball bearings, adapts to all grinding, cutting and polishing needs.
Flip type lever for a rapid tool change suitable for 3/32” shanks.
CODE
MO-166
MO-167
DESCRIPTION
HANDPIECE STANDARD MODEL Q40
HANDPIECE DUPLEX MODEL 40D
17. Rotary Air Grinder Handpiece
A vibration free air powered light weight tool, with a low noise level at the top speed
of 80,000 rpm. Handpiece has built-in rotary air vane motor and collet to hold 1/8” shank tools.
Slim design affords a comfortable finger tip control. Effective for aggressive roughing, light to
medium finishing and super finishing on all metals. Requires compressed air, filter, lubricator,
regulator and 1/8” NPT coupler with hose.
CODE
MO-350
MO-351
MO-352
MO-353
MO-354
DESCRIPTION
ROTARY AIR GRINDER
SPARE COLLET 1/8”
SPARE COLLET 3/32”
SPARE COLLET 3mm
REPLACEMENT HOSE 8’
18. Carbon Foot Control -CFL-15
20. Electronic Foot Control -FCT
A reliable carbon rheostat foot control housed in a
metal body. Continuous speed variation for
Foredom motors type “CC” & “S”
Solid state, foot operated control in a high impact
plastic housing, with skid resistant base. Positive
continuous range of speeds from low to high.
Suitable for all Foredom motors type “CC” & “S”.
CODE
MO-138
MO-139
DESCRIPTION
CFL /110V/ 60Hz
CFL /220V/ 50Hz
CODE
MO-134
MO-135
DESCRIPTION
FCT-1 /110V/ 60Hz
FCT-2 /220V/ 50Hz
19. Electronic Foot Control -SCT
21. Electronic Foot Control -FCR
Wide base design, non-slip floor grip, speed controller in a metal body. Dependable solid state
circuitry for continuous speed variation of
Foredom Motors type “CC” & “S”.
High impact plastic body with advanced solid state
circuitry, has an built-in feed back to provide full
torque at low speeds. Low profile, wide body with
non-slip base. May be used with “Gems” motors.
CODE
MO-136
MO-137
DESCRIPTION
SCT-1 /110V/ 60Hz
SCT-2 /220V/ 50Hz
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
MO-140
MO-141
DESCRIPTION
FCR-1 110V/ 60Hz
FCR-2 /220V/ 50Hz
115
™
FLEXSHAFTS
22. Pneumatic Air Scribe®
Combine air power (less than 1 cfm) with the Scribe and you have the flexibility to write on a variety of materials, even hardened steel. Super sharp carbide stylus will legibly mark all layouts,
designs, and details with flawless accuracy. All that is needed is the addition of a clean air
connection with a filter/lubricator/regulator. Comes with 8’ reinforced hose.
CODE
MO-408
MO-409
MO-411
MO-412
MO-413
MO-414
MO-415
MO-416
MO-417
23. Motor Brushes
DESCRIPTION
AIR SCRIBE TOOL COMPLETE
SPARE DIAMOND TIP
HOSE ASSEMBLY
STYLUS ASSEMBLY
AIR FOOT CONTROL
REPAIR O-RING KIT
CHISEL ASSEMBLY
REPAIR TOOLS DRIFT & HOLDER
AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY FOR MO-408
28. Motor Hangers
Sturdy, steel arm motor stand that attaches firmly
to your bench top with three screws. Adjustable
height to suit all working positions.
26. Foredom® Spares
CODE
MO-593
MO-594
DESCRIPTION
BRUSHES FOR “CC”
BRUSHES FOR “S”
24. Chuck Adapters
An accessory for holding small diameter tools.
Adapter shank fits 3/32” quick release handpieces.
Do not use with speeds higher than 10,000 rpm.
Foredom kit, inner shafts and outer sheaths.
Use for motors type “CC”, “S” & “EE”.
CODE
MO-143
MO-144
MO-147
MO-148
MO-150
MO-595
MO-598
DESCRIPTION
INNER SHAFT-CC & S #93
INNER SHAFT-EE #96A
OUTER SHEATH-CC & S #77
OUTER SHEATH-EE #80
FOREDOM REPAIR KIT
HANDPIECE GRIP
ARMATURE CC 220V
CODE
MS-100
MS-101
MS-102
DESCRIPTION
FIXED TYPE
SINGLE-ADJUSTABLE 26”-41”
DOUBLE-ADJUSTABLE 24”-43”
29. Chuck Keys
Two different types of chuck keys to fits Jacobs
chuck 0-5/32”.
27. Duplex Connections
CODE
MO-401
MO-402
MO-403
25. Connector
Metal body accessory that screws on to the end of
Foredom motors and secures the flexshaft with a
positive lock.
CODE
MO-200
116
CODE
MO-405
MO-406
DESCRIPTION
0-1.15mm- SMALL
0-2.50mm- MEDIUM
0-2.90mm- LARGE
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR
DESCRIPTION
CHUCK KEY WITH HANDLE
CHUCK KEY
30. Lubricants
CODE
MO-157
MO-157-01
MO-157-02
MO-157-03
MO-157-04
MO-157-05
MO-157-06
MO-157-07
DESCRIPTION
DUPLEX COMPLETE SET
DUPLEX AXLE
COLLAR SCREW
SLOTTED SHAFT
QD SLEEVES
COLLAR
INNER SPRING
OUTER SPRING COVER
Specifically formulated oil and grease, ensures
hours of trouble free performance for motors and
flexshafts.
CODE
MO-596
MO-597
DESCRIPTION
OIL (HYPODERMIC)
GREASE (1 oz TUBE)
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
GAUGES
1. Sliding Gauges
6. Digimatic Caliper
Convenient pocket sized sliding gauges in alloy, brass and plastic. Clear
machine divided graduations. Useful for quick outside measurements in
in/mm of small parts or stones.
An innovation in electronic measuring, this caliper uses high efficiency
sensor technology. Engineered in hardened stainless steel for stability and
durability. Features a digital readout in both inch/metric, resolution
0.0005”/0.01mm, with hold and zero functions. Additional hold down screw
locks the jaw in position. Inside, outside and depth readings are possible.
CODE
GM-204
GM-205
GM-206
GM-208
DESCRIPTION
ALLOY 50mm- GERMAN
PLASTIC 80mm- SWISS
BRASS 60mm
BRASS 80mm
CODE
GM-211
GM-212
GM-213
GM-209
2. Steel Vernier Caliper
A general purpose stainless steel vernier, with smooth sliding jaws,
calibrated in both inch and metric measurements. Three way readings are
possible: inside, outside and depth. Resolution 0.01mm.
CODE
GM-214
7. Mitutoyo Plastic Caliper
An affordable digital vernier made in tough reinforced fiberglass. Exclusive
thumb grip sliding jaw for rapid reading digital display. For inside or outside
measurements in either inch or metric readings. Includes a zero reset
function. Resolution 0.1mm.
DESCRIPTION
STEEL VERNIER-6”
CODE
GM-215
3. Hi-Impact Dial Caliper
Made of high impact nylon, its lightweight elegant design makes it a real
convenience for a variety of general applications. Features an accurate dial
reading display in/mm.
CODE
GM-210
DESCRIPTION
DIGIMATIC 6”-MITUTOYO
DIGIMATIC 4”-MITUTOYO
DIGIMATIC 6”-ECONOMY
DIGIMATIC 4”-ECONOMY
DESCRIPTION
MITUTOYO CALIPER 6”
8. Micrometer
An outside micrometer of the finest quality with a measuring range in inch
and mm. Distinct figures and graduations on a non glare background
permits easy reading. Measuring faces are hardened and precision ground.
Friction thimble and positive lock lever ensures reliable measurements.
DESCRIPTION
HI-IMPACT NYLON
4. Presidium® Digital Caliper
Made of light weight carbon-fiber the Presidium Digital Caliper provides
strength, durability and precise measurement. Features direct digital readout with solid state electronics, automatic power off, instant conversion from
metric to inch, resolution 0.05mm or 0.002”.
CODE
GM-225
GM-230
DESCRIPTION
MICROMETER 0-25mm
MICROMETER 0-1”
9. Quick Mini Digital Gauge
An ingenious measuring device designed and crafted to the most exacting
standards. Lightweight, ergonomic body, with large measuring faces, useful
for both thin and thick parts. Clear digital readout with a maximum capacity
25mm/1” and a resolution of 0.01mm/ 0.0005”
CODE
GM-217
CAPACITY
0-150mm/ 0-6”
5. Digital Gauge
A high precision palm sized digital gauge, with a super smooth sliding anvil.
Gives a clear digital display in both inch or metric readings. Includes a zero
re-set button. Maximum reading 15mm
CODE
GM-520
118
DESCRIPTION
POCKET DIGITAL GAUGE
CODE
GM-521
DESCRIPTION
DIGITAL GAUGE 25mm
For Leveridge Gauges
see page 87
™
GAUGES
10. Flexible Ruler
14. Degree Gauges- French
Indispensable for general layout work, these flexible stainless steel rulers
have micro fine etched graduations that will not wear away. Markings in
inches and millimeters, by 1/64” and 0.5mm.
High precision degree gauges superbly constructed in extra fine quality
steel, with black etched graduations on a glare free surface ensure
accurate readings. The combination degree gauge measures in both
millimeters and lignes. Range 15mm and 6 lignes. 61/2” in length.
CODE
GM-701
DESCRIPTION
S.S RULER
11. Starrett® Dividers with Round Legs
Highly polished dividers made of spring steel with hardened, tempered and
well balanced round legs. Floating washer and thumb screw permit fast and
positive adjustment.
CODE
GM-239
DESCRIPTION
3” ROUND LEGS
CODE
GM-301
GM-302
DESCRIPTION
SINGLE-1/10mm
COMBINATION
15. Moe Type Degree Gauge
A convenient way for quick estimates of carat weight without the need to
remove stones from their settings. Measurement of the girdle diameter with
a cross reference chart indicates weight.
12. Dividers with Square Legs
Heavy duty hardened and tempered steel with square legs that will not flex
or bend. Sturdy spring pivot and a centrally located fine adjustment screw
ensures precise setting over the entire range.
CODE
GM-299
DESCRIPTION
DEGREE GAUGE
16. Degree Gauges -German
Precision degree gauges in stainless steel with contrasting brass indices to
enhance readability. Superior construction with return spring action ensures
perfect accuracy.
CODE
GM-236
GM-237
GM-238
GM-241
DESCRIPTION
4” SQUARE LEGS
3” SQUARE LEGS
3” WITH REPLACEABLE POINTS
SPARE POINTS FOR GM-238
13. Pocket Degree Gauges
Lightweight, sensitive, smaller than conventional gauge for measurements
up to 10mm. Made of stainless steel with easy to read indices. Wax gauge
comes with rounded points 4” in length.
CODE
GM-295
GM-296
DESCRIPTION
0-10mm / 0.1mm -SMALL 4”
0-15mm / 0.1mm -LARGE 61/2”
17. Bracelet Gauge
An economical strap type gauge that easily adjusts to measure bracelets or
other wrist jewelry. Clear legible markings in 1/4” increments.
Measures circumference in inches from 5” to 9”.
CODE
GM-297
GM-298
DESCRIPTION
DEGREE GAUGE FOR WAX
DEGREE GAUGE FOR STEEL
CODE
GM-307
DESCRIPTION
BRACELET GAUGE
119
™
GAUGES
18. Standard Flat Bands
22. Jumbo Finger Sizer
Convenient, easy to use, accurate US standard sizes # 1- 15 including half
sizes. Each band is clearly marked and colored for easy reading.
A set of five larger than ordinary ring sizers made in polished nickel plated
brass. Sizes include 14, 141/2, 15, 151/2 & 16.
CODE
GM-001
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD FLAT BANDS- USA
CODE
GM-006
DESCRIPTION
JUMBO FINGER SIZER
19. Deluxe Ring Sizer
23. Half Round Finger Sizer
A customer-friendly way to check ring sizes. All individually calibrated,
together with a universal ring stick, displayed in an attractive storage box.
Includes a conversion chart for American, English, and French sizes.
Extremely comfortable for measurements, the inside of these ring sizers
are half round to facilitate easy on and easy off. Includes US standard
sizes #1-13 with half sizes, clearly marked and colored for easy reading.
CODE
GM-002
GM-003
DESCRIPTION
WIDE BAND
REGULAR
CODE
GM-007
DESCRIPTION
HALF ROUND FINGER SIZER
20. Wide Band Finger Sizer
24. Steel Bracelet Mandrels with Tang
A complete set of wide band ring sizers in bright nickel plated brass, each
individually smooth finished. Sizes #1-15 including half sizes. Ideal for
wedding band ring measurements.
Shape, stretch or form bracelets using these tough polished cast iron
mandrels. Available in round or oval forms, stepped or tapered all with 11/2”
tangs for holding in a vise.
CODE
GM-004
DESCRIPTION
WIDE BAND FINGER SIZER
21. Plastic Finger Sizer
An economical version of ring sizers in plastic, # 1-13
with half sizes. Useful to give customers for
measurement at home.
Stepped
CODE
MD-015
MD-020
SHAPE
OVAL
ROUND
SIZE
SHAPE
OVAL
ROUND
SIZE
Tapered
CODE
GM-005
120
DESCRIPTION
PLASTIC FINGER SIZER
CODE
MD-021
MD-022
™
GAUGES
25. Jumbo Steel Ring Mandrel
29. Plastic Ring Stick
This extra large size mandrel accommodates sizes 16 to 24 in 1/4 size
increments. It is provided with a knurled hand grip and is practical for use
on custom designed jewelry. Overall length 8”.
Made of hard plastic, this ring stick provides precise and accurate measurements. Markings are legible and indicate sizes #1-15 in 1/4 size increments.
CODE
GM-099
DESCRIPTION
JUMBO STEEL MANDREL
CODE
GM-105
DESCRIPTION
GROOVED
26. Universal Ring Stick
30. Steel Ring Mandrels
A ring stick fashioned from lightweight aluminum with an integral handle.
Measures in US and European ring sizes and shows both diameter and
circumference in millimeters.
Calibrated in US sizes #2-15 in 1/4 size increments.
These hardened and polished steel mandrels are especially useful for
shaping and forming rings. Accommodates all ring sizes #1-15 in 1/4 size
increments.
CODE
GM-100
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR
27. Aluminum Ring Sticks
A durable, economical solid aluminum ring stick in two versions, regular or
grooved for stone set rings. Measures # 1-15 in 1/4 size increments.
CODE
GM-106
GM-107
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR
GROOVED
31. Ring Sticks Hollow
Elegantly finished, tubular nickel plated ring stick is extra lightweight and
provided with a shaped redwood handle for comfort. Ideal for wax working
as the hollow tube does not retain heat. The grooved style is for measuring
stone set rings. Measures sizes #1-15 in 1/4 size increments.
CODE
GM-101
GM-102
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR
GROOVED
28. Bezel Mandrels
Quite simply, the fast way to form bezels in different shapes. May also be
used to make decorative wire forms. These mandrels are made of case
hardened steel, precision finished and polished. Mandrel portion is approx.
8” long with a 1/2” to 1/8” taper.
CODE
GM-103
GM-104
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR
GROOVED
32. Wire Steel Gauge
Made of heavy gauge hardened and tempered steel and useful for
measuring all wire and sheets of ferrous or non-ferrous metal. Calibrated in
gauge numbers as well as decimals.
CODE
GM-108
GM-109
GM-110
GM-111
GM-112
GM-113
SHAPE
SQUARE
ROUND
TRIANGLE
OVAL
RECTANGLE
ROUND
LENGTH
11”
8”
11”
11”
11”
11”
CODE
GM-390
DESCRIPTION
WIRE STEEL GAUGE- USA
121
™
GAUGES
33. Jo-Di Gauge
37. Accurate Diamond Gauge
Unique international sizing system. Measures diameter and width of four
basic shapes: round, marquise, emerald and pear. High contrast black
anodized scale readings are to be compared with the reference booklet.
Comes in a handy wallet.
Pocket sized, aluminum gauge, provides the comparative size of
gemstones in carats. Size range is 1 point to 2.1 carats. Estimates round,
brilliant cuts and baguettes.
CODE
GM-402
CODE
GM-300
DESCRIPTION
JO-DI GAUGE
34. Diamond/Pearl Gauge
DESCRIPTION
ACCURATE DIAMOND GAUGE
38. K & B Diamond Gauge
Flat, tempered aluminum pocket gauge measures loose or mounted stones
ranging from three points to 4 carats. Handy birthstone chart is imprinted on
the reverse.
An efficient, accurate plastic gauge for determining the size of loose or
mounted stones when other methods are unavailable. Clearly marked
numbers provide instant estimates.
CODE
GM-601
CODE
GM-403
DESCRIPTION
DIAMOND/PEARL GAUGE
35. Baker Gauge
The holes in this gauge are used to measure stones and the extensions are
used to measure mountings. Gauge has millimeter and carat measurements.
CODE
GM-401
DESCRIPTION
BAKER GAUGE
DESCRIPTION
K & B DIAMOND GAUGE
39. Diamond Gauge
Polished steel gauge, in either oval or rectangular shape. Determines the
carat weight of loose or mounted stones, from 1 point to 4 carats.
Embossed marked sizes for easy reading.
CODE
GM-305
GM-306
SHAPE
OVAL
RECTANGLE
SIZE
5cm
9 X 2.5cm
36. Pearl & Stone Dial Gauges
40. Fan Type Diamond Gauges
An elegant, sensitive, precision engineered dial gauge for accurate
measurements of pearls and other small stones. Parallel ground measuring
faces for rounds and baguettes in 0.1mm increments up to a maximum
of 10mm. Dial rotates for absolute zero setting.
Compact, fan type, pocket gauge in stainless steel. Overall 31/2” length.
Measures in carat weight all stone cuts in brilliant, marquise, pear, square,
emerald and oval.
CODE
GM-501
GM-502
GM-503
GM-504
122
DESCRIPTION
0.1-10mm
0.1-20mm
0.1-10mm ECONOMY
0.1-20mm ECONOMY
CODE
GM-303
GM-304
GM-308
FAN
3
4
7
CARAT
0.1 TO 4
0.1 TO 6
0.1 TO 7
™
GRAVERS
1. Muller® Gravers
High Speed: These gravers hold an edge up to five times longer than
carbon steel gravers. Preferred for use on silver, gold, platinum and steel.
May be modified for use with power assisted engraving systems.
TAPER SQUARE
Carbon Steel: Made of high grade steel. Suitable for use on metals
KNIFE
such as copper, silver, gold and other alloys.
HIGH
SPEED
GH-132
1
GH-012
GH-133
2
GH-060
3
GH-061
2
GH-013
GH-134
3
GH-014
GH-135
HIGH
SPEED
GH-123
4
GH-015
GH-136
SIZE
3/0
CARBON
STEEL
GH-001
2/0
GH-002
GH-124
0
GH-003
GH-125
SIZE
1
CARBON
STEEL
GH-091
1
GH-004
GH-126
2
GH-092
2
GH-005
GH-127
3
GH-093
3
GH-006
GH-128
4
GH-007
GH-129
5
GH-008
GH-130
6
GH-009
-
TAPER LOZENGE
BEVEL
SIZE
0
CARBON
STEEL
GH-063
HIGH
SPEED
GH-170
1
GH-064
GH-171
2
GH-065
GH-172
3
GH-066
GH-173
SIZE
0
CARBON
STEEL
GH-070
4
GH-067
-
1
GH-071
5
GH-068
-
2
GH-072
3
GH-073
LOZENGE
SIZE
50
CARBON
STEEL
GH-017
HIGH
SPEED
GH-137
51
GH-018
GH-138
4
GH-074
52
GH-019
GH-139
5
GH-075
53
GH-020
GH-140
6
GH-076
54
GH-021
GH-141
7
GH-077
55
GH-022
GH-142
SQUARE
8
GH-078
56
GH-023
GH-143
9
GH-079
57
GH-024
GH-144
10
GH-080
58
GH-025
GH-145
SIZE
0
CARBON
STEEL
GH-045
11
GH-081
59
GH-026
GH-146
1
GH-046
12
GH-082
2
GH-047
13
GH-083
3
GH-048
14
GH-084
4
GH-049
15
GH-085
5
GH-050
16
GH-086
6
GH-051
17
GH-087
7
GH-052
18
GH-088
8
GH-053
19
GH-089
9
GH-054
20
GH-090
10
GH-055
11
GH-056
12
GH-057
13
GH-058
SIZE
63
CARBON
STEEL
GH-028
64
GH-029
65
GH-030
66
GH-031
67
GH-032
4”
FLAT
124
CARBON
STEEL
GH-011
CARBON
STEEL
GH-059
ONGLETTE
ROUND
3”
SIZE
0
SIZE
1
SIZE
36
CARBON
STEEL
GH-034
HIGH
SPEED
GH-151
37
GH-035
GH-152
38
GH-036
GH-153
39
GH-037
GH-154
40
GH-038
GH-155
41
GH-039
GH-156
42
GH-040
GH-157
43
GH-041
GH-158
44
GH-042
GH-159
45
GH-043
GH-160
46
GH-044
-
OVAL
ve
gra
nd uts.
e
t
ex c
to ten
be righ
r lu nd b
u
eb a
Us life
r
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
GRAVERS
2. Yellow Tang High Speed Gravers
These gravers are specially used by stone setters, die sinkers, jewelers
and watch makers. Excellent for use on all alloys and precious metals.
Made of High Speed Steel hardened and tempered. All gravers may be
re-sharpened when needed.
ONGLETTE
FLAT
ROUND
SIZE
5/0
HIGH
SPEED
GH-215
4/0
GH-216
3/0
GH-217
2/0
GH-218
0
GH-219
SIZE
36
HIGH
SPEED
GH-230
37
GH-231
1
GH-220
38
GH-232
2
GH-221
SIZE
50
HIGH
SPEED
GH-240
51
GH-241
39
GH-233
3
GH-222
52
GH-242
40
GH-234
4
GH-223
53
GH-243
41
GH-235
5
GH-224
54
GH-244
42
GH-236
6
GH-225
55
GH-245
43
GH-237
7
GH-226
56
GH-246
45
GH-238
8
GH-227
er
rav
d g ts.
n
e
xt cu
o e en
e t ht
lub brig
r
d
u
e b an
Us life
3. Straight & Bent Line Gravers
E.C. Muller® line gravers are essential for performing various engraving techniques.
The first number is the grade. For reference #6 is the smallest #32 is the largest.
The second number is the number of lines that can be engraved at a time.
STRAIGHT LINE
SIZE
6/4
6/6
6/8
6/10
6/18
8/4
8/6
8/10
12/8
12/10
12/12
12/16
14/10
16/4
16/8
HIGH CARBON
STEEL
GH-181
GH-182
GH-183
GH-184
GH-184-01
GH-185
GH-186
GH-187
GH-187-01
GH-188
GH-188-01
GH-188-02
GH-189
GH-189-01
GH-189-02
65mm
STRAIGHT LINE
SIZE
16/10
16/12
16/16
18/4
18/6
18/8
18/10
18/12
20/10
24/6
24/8
26/10
28/10
30/10
32/8
HIGH CARBON
STEEL
GH-189-03
GH-189-04
GH-189-05
GH-189-07
GH-189-08
GH-189-09
GH-189-10
GH-189-11
GH-189-13
GH-189-15
GH-189-16
GH-189-18
GH-189-20
GH-189-22
GH-189-24
BENT LINE
SIZE
6/4
6/6
6/8
6/10
HIGH CARBON
STEEL
GH-190
GH-190-01
GH-190-02
GH-190-03
4. Adjustable Graver Handle
Set the graver to the required length and lock in position by the set screw.
Useful for working with gravers of short lengths.
CODE
GH-263
GH-264
Safety Instructions
Page 40
LENGTH
21/2”
3”
125
™
GRAVERS
5. Graver Handles
Handles for gravers made in fine finished hardwood. Ends are reinforced with
metal sleeves to retain the tang firmly.
ROUND
HALF ROUND
PEAR
CODE
GH-253
GH-254
GH-256
GH-258
GH-259
GH-260
GH-261
GH-262
SHAPE
MUSHROOM
MUSHROOM
HALF HEAD
HALF HEAD
PEAR
PEAR
ROUND
GOURD
DIA. X LEN.
11/4” X 23/4”
11/4” X 13/4”
11/4” X 2”
13/8” X 15/8”
15/8” X 17/8”
11/4” X 13/4”
13/8” X 15/8”
15/16” X 21/2”
MUSHROOM
6. Graver Sharpener
GOURD
A precision tool that secures the graver in the required angle for sharpening.
CODE
GH-180
7. Crocker Pattern-Graver Sharpener
A useful fixture to assist sharpening of gravers on bench stones.
Any precise angle may be pre-set with the setting index.
DESCRIPTION
GRAVER SHARPENER
CODE
GH-179
DESCRIPTION
CROCKER GRAVER SHARPENER
8. Original Arkansas Stones
Natural Arkansas stones are excellent for sharpening and final honing of gravers. Available in hard and
ultra hard grades. Hard grades are dense-grained and ideal for pre-sharpening. Ultra hard are closegrained for final honing. Lubricate with a light oil for rapid cutting.
Imported Arkansas
CODE
SIZE
GRADE
AT-004
AT-006
AT-008
AT-014
AT-016
AT-018
4” X 2” X 1/2”
6” X 2” X 1/2”
8” X 2” X 1/2”
4” X 2” X 1/2”
6” X 2” X 1/2”
8” X 2” X 1/2”
HARD
HARD
HARD
EX-HARD
EX-HARD
EX-HARD
CODE
AT-020
AT-021
AT-021-01
AT-021-02
AT-021-03
AT-021-04
AT-021-05
SIZE
100 X 40 X 12mm
100 X 50 X 12mm
125 X 50 X 18mm
150 X 40 X 18mm
150 X 50 X 18mm
175 X 50 X 18mm
200 X 50 X 18mm
GRADE
HARD
HARD
HARD
HARD
HARD
HARD
HARD
9. Electric Engraver
10. Burgess Vibro Engraver
A very useful tool for engraving symbols, layout work and identification
marks. High speed reciprocation of a finely pointed carbide tip marks the
object. Controls may be set from slow to rapid. Replaceable carbide tips are
available. Diamond tips are optional.
Rugged industrial engraver that hammer marks permanently into hardened
steel, metal, stone, ceramic, glass or wood. Tungsten carbide tip vibrates at
7,200 strokes per minute. Calibrated dial controls impact from light to
heavy. Ergonomic design allows for extended periods of work.
CODE
GH-207
GH-208
GH-211
GH-212
126
DESCRIPTION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
ENGRAVER CARBIDE POINT
ENGRAVER DIAMOND POINT
CODE
GH-201
GH-202
GH-203
GH-204
DESCRIPTION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
DIAMOND SPARE TIP
TUNGSTEN CARBIDE TIP
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
HAMMERS
1. Chasing Hammers
Made of forged steel with a hardwood handle.
One large face to flatten and the other round to
form shapes.
CODE
DIA.
HM-304-01
1”
HM-305
11/8”
HM-306
11/4”
HM-310
11/8”
Handles for Chasing Hammers
HM-311
HM-312
NET WT.
4 oz -GERMAN
5 oz -GERMAN
6 oz -ECONO
4 oz -ECONO
PISTOL HANDLE
ROUND HANDLE
2. Riveting Hammers
Made of drop forged chrome plated steel with
hardwood handles. Head has one flat side for
spreading and the other for levelling.
HM-706
CODE
HM-700
HM-705
HM-706
DIA. X L
/8” X 3”
1
/2” X 35/8”
1
/2” X 4”
3
SHAPE
ROUND-FRENCH
ROUND-FRENCH
SQUARE-GERMAN
3. Goldsmith Hammer
Especially designed for the jeweler, this hammer is
made of gun metal with polished finished ends.
One end is flat and the other is chisel shaped.
Ideal for riveting, forming and shaping work.
CODE
Made in Germany.
HM-280
DESCRIPTION
GOLDSMITH HAMMER
4. Ball Pein Hammers
Made of drop forged polished hardened steel with a
hardwood handle for solid striking force .
One end flat and the other round.
CODE
HM-313
HM-314
HM-315
DIA. X L
/2” X 2”
3
/4” X 23/4”
7
/8” X 3”
1
NET WT.
2 oz
4 oz
8 oz
5. Brass Head Mallet
Solid brass head will not mar thin or soft metals.
Fitted with a hardwood handle, overall length 9”.
CODE
HM-283
NET WT.
2 oz
6. Mallets-Removable Faces
This mallet face ends may be changed to any
combination. Different ends of fiber, nylon or
brass are available.
CODE
HM-284
HM-285
HM-286
HM-287
HM-288
DESCRIPTION
BRASS & FIBER HAMMER 4 oz
BRASS & NYLON HAMMER 4 oz
EXTRA BRASS HEAD
EXTRA FIBER HEAD
EXTRA NYLON HEAD
7. Nylon Mallets-German
These soft nylon faced mallets will not mar or
dent work. Mallet is well balanced and provided
with hardwood handle.
128
CODE
HM-320
HM-321
DIA.
22mm
27mm
™
HAMMERS
8. Watch Maker Hammers
9. Egg Head Hammer
Swiss style hammers, with finely polished forged steel heads fitted on hardwood
handles. Use for miniature work.
The best tool for the jewelers with changeable heads, steel, aluminum
alloy or nylon. Manually turn the hammerhead for replacement.
CODE
HM-712
HM-713
HM-714
HM-715
HEAD LGTH.
50mm
60mm
70mm
80mm
CODE
RI-115
DESCRIPTION
HAMMER WITH 3 HEADS
HM-710
10. Toroid Hammer
Versatile well finished hammer. Quality made with a comfortable handle.
One head has three faces; brass, steel and nylon. Simple choice of face by easy
pull out and turn.
CODE
HM-710
AN-390
AN-390
DESCRIPTION
TOROID HAMMER
2” ANVIL
11. Plastic Mallets- USA
HM-318
Abrasion resistant plastic mallet fitted with a hardwood handle that has a bounce
similar to rawhide. Absorbs impact and leaves surfaces smooth.
CODE
HM-318
HM-319
HM-319
DIA.
11/2”
13/4”
HM-301
12. Rawhide Mallets
HM-300
Cured rawhide, shellac treated mallet will not impair or mar metal surfaces. All fitted
with durable hardwood handles.
CODE
HM-300
HM-301
HM-302
HM-303
HM-304
STYLE
0
1
2
3
4
DIA. X L
1” X 2”
11/4” X 21/2”
11/2” X 3”
13/4” X 31/2”
2” X 31/2”
NET WT.
2.5 oz
4.5 oz
6.0 oz
9.5 oz
12.0 oz
HM-302
HM-304
HM-720
HM-721
13. Planishing Hammers
Forged steel hammers, with hardened and polished ends. Cambered faces for
efficient work. All mounted on hardwood handles, perfectly balanced for good
striking power.
HM-722
Double Headed Hammers
CODE
HM-720
HM-721
HM-722
HM-723
HEAD LGTH.
95mm
105mm
130mm
140mm
ENDS SIZE
24mm X 21mm
28mm X 28mm
21mm X 22mm
24mm X 24mm
GRAMS
200
375
200
300
HM-723
129
™
HAMMERS
14. Hammers for Precious Metalsmithing
HM-724
Especially for metalsmithing on precious metals. Ground and polished ends with
hickory handles provide the right amount of balance.
HM-725
HM-734
HM-733
CODE
HM-724
HM-725
HM-733
HM-734
HEAD LGTH.
95mm
95mm
80mm
120mm
END SIZES
24mm X 24mm
24mm X 24mm
25mm X 27mm
18 X 35mm/22 X 35mm
GRAMS
250
250
170
375
HM-729
15. Grooving and Bordering Hammers
High grade steel hammer ends hardened and polished. Handles are made of
hardwood. Ideal for working in confined areas and edge finishing.
HM-730
HM-731
CODE
HM-729
HM-730
HM-731
HEAD LGTH.
115mm
110mm
115mm
END SIZES
31 X 10mm/33 X 12mm
27 X 7mm/27 X 6mm
20 X 4mm/20 X 6mm
GRAMS
250
250
200
16. Stretching Hammer
HM-726
Made of quality steel. Ends are hardened and fine polished. Fitted with hardwood
handles.
CODE
HM-726
HEAD LGTH.
100mm
END SIZES
25 X 25mm
GRAMS
250
HM-727
17. Forming Hammers
Hammers made of quality steel. Ends are hardened and fine polished. All fitted
with hardwood handles. Use to form metal to desired shapes.
HM-728
CODE
HM-727
HM-728
HEAD LGTH.
125mm
120mm
END SIZES
20 X 18mm/24 X 22mm
16 X 18mm
GRAMS
250
175
18. Combination Hammer
HM-732
A high quality steel, hardened and polished hammer, one end for planishing and
the other end for grooving. Used to spread, flatten and form metal.
CODE
HM-732
130
HEAD LGTH.
115mm
END SIZES
27mm
GRAMS
375
™
LAMPS & LOUPES
1. Dazor® Lamps
A metal enamel finished floating arm fluorescent lamp with 15W daylight
tubes to provide natural light. The mechanical construction is enclosed, with
no exposed springs or wires and its movement is easily positioned.
Available in different colors and styles. Tubes and bulbs are not covered by
warranty. UL listed.
CODE
CLAMP
CLAMP
DESK
DESK
CLAMP
CLAMP
DESK
DESK
GRAY
LM-101
LM-103
LM-105
LM-107
LM-110
LM-112
LM-114
LM-116
BLACK
LM-102
LM-104
LM-106
LM-108
LM-111
LM-113
LM-115
LM-117
VOLTS
110V
220V
110V
220V
110V
220V
110V
220V
TUBES
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Replacement Daylight Tube
LM-100
15W DAYLIGHT TUBE
2. Dazor® Circline Magnifying Lamps
A well designed shadow free light around a magnifying lens with a Circline
fluorescent tube. The swing arm has a 42” reach with adjustable
positioning. Magnification power of three diaopters (+75%) with 13” focal
distance. UL listed.
CODE
CLAMP
CLAMP
DESK
DESK
GRAY
LM-120
LM-122
LM-124
LM-126
BLACK
LM-121
LM-123
LM-125
LM-127
VOLTS
110V
220V
110V
220V
Replacement Tube
LM-128
22W CIRCLINE TUBE
3. Portable Flip Lamp- White Light
Especially for gems and jewelry, these lightweight, compact folding lamps
are excellent for stone grading and color matching. Adjustable positioning
and an auto shut off when closed. May be swiveled a full 360°. A 13W
fluorescent bulb is included.
CODE
LM-134
LM-135
DESCRIPTION
FLIP LAMP 110V
FLIP LAMP 220V
Replacement Fluorescent Bulb
LM-136
FOR LM-134 & LM-135
4. Assymetria Fluorescent Lamp
Energy saving lamp provides a soft diffused light for comfortable viewing.
The assymetric pattern of the light lowers the reflective glare and ensures
ample coverage of the viewing area. Adjustable arm with clamp on base
allows for easy positioning. Includes fluorescent double tube 13w, cord and
plug, with a separate table top base.
132
CODE
LM-140
LM-141
LM-142
DESCRIPTION
110V
220V
REPLACEMENT BULB
™
LAMPS & LOUPES
5. B & L® Hastings Triplet Loupes
8. H. Schneider® Jewelers Loupe
A Hastings lens has three lenses bonded
together to form a compound lens. View sharp
magnified images with no color distortion.
A world renowned professional jewelers loupe. Unsurpassed high quality
viewing through a three lens system. The aplanatic-achromatic design provides a view that is distortion free from every angle. Lens dia 21mm.
CODE
POWER
LD-210
LD-214
LD-220
10X
14X
20X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
1”
3
/4”
1
/2”
LENS
DIAMETER
15.8mm
12.5mm
8.25mm
6. B & L® Coddington Loupes
POWER
LD-230
LD-234
LD-240
10X
14X
20X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
1”
3
/4”
1
/2”
LENS
DIAMETER
19.75mm
15.75mm
12.45mm
Four models are available. Each has a large, clear, tintless round
glass lens. Working distance 1”. Comes with leather pouch.
CODE
LD-702
LD-703
LD-707
LD-708
COLOR
BLACK
CHROME
GOLD
RUBBER
COLOR
BLACK
CHROME
GOLD
RUBBER
LD-503
10X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
1”
Twice the magnification in a single lens. Screw off the front lens when not
needed. Attractive non-reflective black finish with precision ground and
polished lenses for maximum clarity.
7. Gems 10X Triplet Loupes
CODE
LD-662
LD-663
LD-667
LD-668
POWER
9. B & L® Watch Makers-Double Lens Eye Loupes
Single lens constructed loupe with an internal
diaphragm to provide a larger field of distortion
free viewing. Chrome plated swing type case
protects the loupe.
CODE
CODE
LENS DIA.
21mm
21mm
21mm
21mm
LENS DIA.
18mm
18mm
18mm
18mm
CODE
POWER
LW-212
4X & 7X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
11/2” X 21/2”
10. B & L® Single Lens Eye Loupes
Optical precision ground lightweight lens with soft black interior provides a
clear field of view. These magnifiers have a lens diameter of 1”.
CODE
POWER
LW-204
LW-205
LW-207
LW-210
4X
5X
7X
10X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
21/2”
2”
11/2”
1”
11. Economy Eye Loupes
An economical lightweight loupe with ground and polished lens set in black
plastic holder. Provides distortion free viewing. Available in different focal
distances.
CODE
POWER
LW-110
LW-115
LW-120
LW-125
LW-130
LW-135
LW-140
LW-145
10X
7X
5X
4X
3.3X
3X
2.5X
2X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
1”
11/2”
2”
21/2”
3”
31/2”
4”
5”
133
™
LAMPS & LOUPES
12. Zeiss Professional Loupe
15. Nikon Professional Loupe
Pocket magnifiers for the professional. The aplanatic and achromatic
design of the Zeiss lens system provides a field of view that is free of chromatic aberrations and distortion in the peripheral zone. The antireflective coating prevents glare. Protected in a leather pouch.
A rare combination of peerless clarity and unrivaled optical quality from the
world leader in optics. Compound lenses deliver a distinct magnified image
with no color distortion. Images are as sharp at the edges as at the center.
Comes in a leather pouch.
CODE
LD-501
CODE
LD-500
POWER
10X
DIST.
1”
DIA.
19.75mm
13. Gold Loupes-14Kt
POWER
10X
DIST.
1”
DIA.
19.75mm
16. Double Lens 10X Loupes
An economical combination of two lenses that provide distortion free
viewing.
An exquisite gift for jewelers who need nothing but the best clear color
corrected lens with a powerful 10X magnification, set in a finely crafted
basket weave case.
CODE
LD-713
LD-721
CODE
LD-510
LD-514
LD-520
POWER
10X
14X
20X
FOCAL
1”
3
/4”
1
/2”
LENS DIA.
14mm
23mm
17. B & L® Illuminated Coddington Loupe
A combined magnifier and light source. Illuminates the object being viewed
through the lens. Powered by two AA penlight batteries (not included).
Measures 53/4” overall length.
14. 10X Triplet Loupes
Color corrected triplet lens that ensures distortion free viewing.
10X- 20.5mm.
CODE
LD-762
LD-763
LD-765
LD-767
LD-768
COLOR
BLACK
CHROME
MARBLE
GOLD
RUBBER
134
LD-290
10X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
1”
LENS
DIAMETER
19.75mm
18. Illuminated Loupes
COLOR
BLACK
CHROME
GOLD
RUBBER
20X- 18mm
CODE
LD-901
POWER
Newly designed illuminated magnifying glass with a spotlight for night time
use. Color corrected lens helps for long periods of observation without eye
fatigue. Comes with a leather carrying case. Batteries not included.
10X- 18mm.
CODE
LD-902
LD-903
LD-907
LD-908
CODE
COLOR
CHROME
CODE
POWER
LD-291
LD-292
10X
14X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
1”
1”
LENS
DIAMETER
21mm
14mm
™
LOUPES & LAMPS
19. Telesight Magnifiers
Binocular eye loupe in full-frame, half-frame and clip-on type. May be used with prescription glasses including bifocals. Lenses are of optical quality acrylic
and are abrasion resistant. Light in weight with tension clamps for instant attachment and flip-up.
Full Frame
Half Frame
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-303
LS-304
LS-305
LS-306
LS-307
33
34
35
36
38
13/4X
2X
21/4X
21/2X
3X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
14”
11”
9”
7”
5”
Clip-on
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-323
LS-324
LS-325
LS-326
LS-327
43
44
45
46
48
13/4X
2X
21/4X
21/2X
3X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
14”
11”
9”
7”
5”
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-313
LS-314
LS-315
LS-316
LS-317
23
24
25
26
28
13/4X
2X
21/4X
21/2X
3X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
14”
11”
9”
7”
5”
20. Clips-on Opticaid® Magnifiers -USA
23. Spring Clip Opticaid® Magnifiers- USA
Magnifier has flexible wire clip for use with any eyeglass frame.
Scratch-proof optical quality acrylic, prismatic lens.
May be used with any metal or plastic eyeglass frames. Scratch proof
optical quality acrylic, prismatic lens.
CODE
LS-249
LS-250
LS-251
LS-252
LS-253
LS-254
POWER
11/2X
13/4X
2X
21/4X
23/4X
31/2X
FOCAL
20”
14”
10”
8”
6”
4”
CODE
LS-255
LS-256
LS-257
LS-258
LS-259
LS-260
POWER
11/2X
13/4X
2X
21/4X
23/4X
31/2X
FOCAL
20”
14”
10”
8”
6”
4”
21. Magnifying Specs-USA
24. B & L® Spectacle Loupes-Single/Double Lens
Can be worn alone or over eyeglasses. Scratch-proof optical quality
acrylic, prismatic lens.
Single lens spectacle loupe clips on to a frame and flips out when not in
use. Double lens is two separate lenses that may be used together or
singly.
CODE
LS-329
LS-330
LS-331
LS-332
LS-333
LS-334
STYLE
#2
#3
#4
#5
#7
#10
POWER FOCAL
11/2X
20”
14”
13/4X
2X
10”
21/4X
8”
6”
23/4X
4”
31/2X
CODE
LS-203
LS-204
LS-205
LS-207
LS-235
LS-247
POWER
3X
4X
5X
7X
3X, 5X
4X, 7X
FOCAL
31/2”
21/2”
2”
11/2”
31/2” & 2”
11/2” & 11/2”
22. Loupe Chains
25. Tripod Magnifier
Attaching these chains to the swivel end of your jewelers loupe will
keep it handy at all times.
A fixed distance focal length magnifier designed for viewing engraving
details. May also be used for assembly of delicate parts.
CODE
LD-204
LD-205
DESCRIPTION
GOLD
CHROME
CODE
LT-001
DESCRIPTION
MAGNIFIER 10X
135
™
LOUPES & LAMPS
26. Megaview Plastic Lenses- Japan
27. Rayner Emerald Filter
Ideal for viewing micro-fine details, without distortion. Light in weight, high quality
lenses have a scratch proof coating.
Identify emeralds professionally. The filter detects dyed green
and blue chalcedony when viewed in intense light.
Synthetic emeralds will appear red or pink, while green stones
will appear green.
CODE
LS-396
LS-397
LS-398
LS-400
DESCRIPTION
LENS-2X
LENS-21/2X
LENS-3X
MEGAVIEW- 3 LENSES
CODE
LD-909
DESCRIPTION
EMERALD FILTER
28. OptiSight™ -USA
OptiSight magnifying visor provides hands-free magnification for more accurate and efficient viewing. The visor
tilts up for normal viewing or down for magnification. OptiSight brings work closer into focus, reducing eye strain
and fatigue. Available in assorted colors.
Lens Plates
CODE
LS-450
LS-451
LS-452
LS-453
LS-454
LS-455
DESCRIPTION
W/3 LENS PLATE
W/3 LENS PLATE
W/3 LENS PLATE
W/3 LENS PLATE
W/3 LENS PLATE
W/3 LENS PLATE
COLOR
GREEN
BLUE
TAN
RED
PURPLE
GRAY
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-456
LS-457
LS-458
LS-459
#3
#4
#5
#7
13/4X
2X
21/2X
23/4X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
14”
10”
8”
6”
29. Optivisor®- USA
Optivisor lenses are manufactured from high quality optical glass prepared to ophthalmic standards. Frames are
light in weight, durable and impact resistant. The visor is pivot mounted to the head band so that it may be
adjusted to any position. Lens plates are interchangeable.
Lens Plates
Optivisor
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-402
LS-403
LS-404
LS-405
LS-407
LS-410
DA2
DA3
DA4
DA5
DA7
DA10
11/2X
13/4X
2X
21/2X
23/4X
31/2X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
20”
14”
10”
8”
6”
4”
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-422
LS-423
LS-424
LS-425
LS-427
LS-430
#2
#3
#4
#5
#7
#10
11/2X
13/4X
2X
21/2X
23/4X
31/2X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
20”
14”
10”
8”
6”
4”
Spares
Optiloupe
LS-411
ATTACHMENT
21/2X
LS-412
LS-460
LS-461
COMFORT LEATHER BAND
VISOR LIGHT W/BATTERY PACK
VISOR LIGHT REPLACEMENT BULB
30. AccurSITE™
A magnifier with dual lens prismatic system that allows eye focus on the object at a proper viewing distance.
May be worn over prescription eyeglasses or safety glasses. Visor tilts above when not needed. Comfortable
padded headband is adjustable to fit any person.
Lens Plates
136
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-432
LS-433
LS-434
LS-435
AL3
AL4
AL5
AL7
13/4X
2X
21/2X
23/4X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
14”
10”
8”
6”
CODE
STYLE
POWER
LS-440
LS-441
LS-442
LS-443
#3
#4
#5
#7
13/4X
2X
21/2X
23/4X
FOCAL
DISTANCE
14”
10”
8”
6”
™
PLATING
1. Picklers
4. Pyrex Beakers & Covers
This 14 oz. capacity pickler is safe and effective for removing oxides or fire
scale from the surfaces of gold, silver and non-ferrous alloys. Comes with
acid resistant retrieval baskets for easy immersion and removal. Constant
bath temperature at 140°F/60°C. Provided with polypropylene perforated
basket for easy immersion and retrieval of articles of jewelry, when working
with hot pickling solutions.
Useful for liquid measurement, these beakers are graduated and
provided with spouts for easy pouring. Covers are essential to store
and protect plating solutions from contamination.
CODE
PB-210
PB-211
PB-217
CODE
PE-527
PE-528
PE-529
PE-530
PE-532
DESCRIPTION
14 oz 110V
14 oz 220V
BASKET
2. Copper Tongs
These tongs are suitable to use when immersing articles in pickling or
acidic solutions. Will not contaminate, nor corrode the solutions.
CODE
TW-444
TW-445
DESCRIPTION
BEAKER-50ml
BEAKER- 600ml
BEAKER-1000ml
COVER FOR 600ml
COVER FOR 1000ml
5. Stainless Beakers
Two sizes of beakers are available. When a lead wire from the rectifier
is connected to the beaker, it acts as the anode for electro stripping,
electrocleaning or gold plating.
CODE
PE-534
PE-535
DESCRIPTION
BENT- 9”
FISH TAIL- 9”
DESCRIPTION
SS BEAKER-600ml
SS BEAKER-1200ml
3. Plating Racks
Well designed, in rows, with numerous hooks, these racks are made of
heavy gauge polycoated copper for protection when immersed in
plating baths.
CODE
SO-364
SO-365
SO-366
SO-367
SO-368
SO-369
SO-370
SO-371
SO-372
138
DIA.
2”
2”
2”
3”
3”
3”
4”
4”
4”
ROWS
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
HOOKS
8
16
24
12
24
36
16
32
48
6. Binding Wires- Copper and Iron
Pure Copper Wire, soft and pliable, for suspending articles of jewelry
in plating baths. Do not use for rhodium or electro stripping.
Iron Wire, for binding various items together. May be used to bind
articles while soldering.
CODE
PE-150
PE-151
PE-152
PE-153
PE-160
PE-161
PE-162
PE-163
GAUGE
18
20
22
24
20
22
24
26
INCH
0.040
0.032
0.025
0.020
0.032
0.025
0.020
0.016
TYPE
1 lb COPPER
1 lb COPPER
1 lb COPPER
1 lb COPPER
8 oz IRON
8 oz IRON
8 oz IRON
8 oz IRON
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
PLATING
7. Electric Hot Plates
10. Wieland Plating Anodes
High quality hot plate has an external controller for temperature. When
heating plating baths in glass beakers, always use a stainless wire mesh
screen to protect the beaker from direct contact with the element. Heating
elements are easily replaceable.
The correct anode is a must to ensure quality plating results. Wieland
plating anodes are of high purity and excellent for immersion in plating
solutions without causing contamination. Au-Gold, Rh-Rhodium, Ag-Silver.
CODE
PE-129
PE-130
DESCRIPTION
110V -SINGLE
110V -DOUBLE
8. Plating Thermometer
A glass plating thermometer resistant to chemicals.
Temperature range 20° -230°F.
STEEL
CODE
PE-135
PE-136
PE-137
PE-138
PE-139
TITANIUM
ANODE
SPECIAL STEEL
PLATINIZED TITANIUM 1.5µ
PLATINIZED TITANIUM 1.5µ
PURE SILVER
PURE SILVER
SILVER
SIZE
110 X 60mm
100 X 30mm
110 X 60mm
100 X 50mm
170 X 100mm
PLATING
Au
Rh
Rh
Ag
Ag
11. Sparex® Pickling Compound
CODE
PE-131
DESCRIPTION
GLASS THERMOMETER
Non-flammable, granular dry acid compound, for use in Picklers. Cleans
and removes surface oxidation and fire scale discoloration on gold,
silver and non-ferrous alloys. Works efficiently at a constant
temperature of 140°F/60°C.
9. JAX® Master Metal Plating Solutions
JAX® Silver Plating Solution
Plates pure silver on to copper, brass, bronze and silver without heat or
electricity.
PE-015
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Copper Plating Solution
Instantly plates copper on to iron, steel, brass
and solder articles without heat or electricity.
PE-016
CODE
SO-128
SO-129
SO-129-01
CONTENTS
COMPOUND 21/2 lb
COMPOUND 10 oz
COMPOUND 45 lb DRUM
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Blackener
JAX® Silver Black
Produces a dark, black antique finish on silver
and gold.
PE-001
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Pewter Black
Produces a dark, black antique finish on pewter,
lead, brass, bronze, copper, nickel, tin-lead
alloys and solders.
PE-002
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Iron, Steel, and Nickel Black
Produces an antique, metallic black finish on
iron, steel, and nickel.
PE-003
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Aluminum Blacker
Produces an antique black finish on aluminum
PE-004
1 PINT (473ml)
Safety Instructions
Page 40
12. Umbrella Ring Rack
Stainless steel frame plastic coated rack. Hooks are adjustable and
evenly spaced to hold articles of jewelry for cleaning or plating.
CODE
UL-059
UL-061
UL-062
DESCRIPTION
4 HOOKS
8 HOOKS
10 HOOKS
139
™
PLATING
13. Rectifier 30A with Micro Pen Plater
A remarkable system that features both a plating rectifier and a pen
plater. The plating rectifier is a source for direct current that is needed
for electroplating and electro stripping. A variable voltage and sufficient amperage determines the size of the bath and the surface area
that can be plated. Solid state circuitry, delivers filtered DC output.
The control panel has an amp/volt meter, regulator, on/off switch.
Maximum 4.5 gal. plating baths. The micro pen plater with a fiber
tipped pen is designed to plate small areas and hard to reach places.
Ideal to customize jewelry, detail designs and touch up repairs.
The variable voltage provides the optimum settings for different plating
solutions.
PE-128
PE-512
CODE
PE-127
PE-128
PE-512
DESCRIPTION
COMBO RECTIFIER SET
RED/BLACK LEAD WIRE
PLATING PEN (RED & BLACK)
14. Micro-Plating System
Compact, self-contained bench top unit for electro cleaning and
electroplating. Two beakers 600 cc. capacity, one for cleaning and the
other for plating. Automatic water heating system with sight gauge for
water level to ensure uniform plating. Comes complete with rectifier,
power switch, variable control 0-12V, 15A for plating of gold, silver,
rhodium, nickel and copper. Suitable for dual voltage 110/220V.
CODE
PE-123
DESCRIPTION
MICRO PLATING RECTIFIER
15. Liquid Electrocleaner
17. Activated Carbon
This ready-to-use heavy duty electrocleaning solution is primarily used to
clean castings and articles prior to being plated.
A solution to remove organic contamination from Rhodium and Gold
plating baths.
CODE
PE-526
CONTENTS
1 qt
CODE
PE-544
PE-545
DESCRIPTION
CARBON TREATMENT
FILTER PAPER 13”
16. Tivaclean
18. Tivabrite
An electro cleaning concentrate for both metals and plastic.When Tivaclean
is mixed with water changes from orange to fluorescent green to ensure
complete rinsing. It contains an anti-foaming agent for low sudsing and a
deodorant to suppress odor. It is biodegradable, easy to clean with a noncaustic pH of 9-10. Use at room temperature or, to enhance its performance, the solution may be heated to a temperature between 160°F-180°F.
An electro stripping powder used for polishing of yellow gold. Mix this
unique combination of chemicals with water and sodium cyanide, utilize
with a reverse current. In most cases, it can replace “bombing”, in a hydrogen peroxide/cyanide solution with better results.
CODE
PE-540
140
CONTENTS
1 lb
CODE
PE-541
CONTENTS
1 lb
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
PLATING
19. Rhodinette Pen Plater
Create designer effects, touch ups and repair work with the Rhodinette fiber electroplating pen. Unit is
compact, has a rectifier and arrangement to hold the pen. The cathode connects to the work piece with
an alligator clip. The fiber tip anode pen, which absorbs the plating solution, is used to create special
effects. A set includes pen plater, five fiber tips, lead wires and a glass container.
CODE
PE-505
PE-504
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
CODE
PE-509-01
PE-509-02
PE-509-03
Spares for Rhodinette
CODE
PE-506
PE-507
PE-508
PE-509
PE-509-04
PE-509-05
CONTAINER
GLASS -YELLOW
GLASS -RED
GLASS -BLACK
DESCRIPTION
RHODINETTE PLATING PEN
FIBER TIPS -5PCS
SUPER POINT TIPS -3PCS
YELLOW FIBER TIPS -5PCS
WIELAND STOP-OFF PEN
CLAMP WIRE FOR RHODINETTE
20. Wieland Fiber Electrode Plating Solutions
These are specially formulated solutions for partial electro plating articles of jewelry. Plating layers
applied by these solutions are relatively thin. Suitable for use with all pen platers for designer work.
CODE
PE-516
PE-515
PE-517
PE-517-01
COLOR
FINE GOLD
YELLOW GOLD
PALE GOLD
NICKEL
CONTENTS
2g/100ml
2g/100ml
2g/100ml
100ml
CODE
PE-517-02
PE-511
PE-511-01
PE-517-03
COLOR
CONTENTS
RED GOLD
2g/100ml
BRIGHT RHODIUM 2g/100ml
BLACK RHODIUM 2g/100ml
COPPER
100ml
21. Deluxe Pen Plater
A stainless steel enclosure with recesses to hold three jars of plating solution. Unit will support
four plating pens simultaneously. The fiber tips may be shaped to the needs of the user.
A variable voltage enables adjustment for artistic reproduction. Unit includes one black lead and a
plating pen with a replaceable fiber tip.
CODE
PE-500
PE-501
PE-512
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
PLATING PEN ONLY
PE-512
22. Stop-off Blue
23. Degussa Rhodium Solutions
A very effective solution that may be used to mask areas that do not need
to be plated. May be cleaned after use with acetone.
A new type of pen plating solution, carefully formulated to give consistent
results. Achieve a white reflective surface on gold to create artistic effects.
RH- Rhodium
CODE
PE-513
DESCRIPTION
8 oz JAR
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
PE-524
PE-524-01
PE-524-02
PE-524-03
DESCRIPTION
J2- 2g RH/100ml BATH
J1- 2g RH/100ml BATH
TD 2g RH/100ml
271 PEN PLATING 2g RH/100ml
141
™
PLATING
24. Uni Plater
An array of designer shades of rhodium, gold, silver, nickel and palladium can be plated by means of a
special fiber tip pen. The pen is slim and facilitates plating of intricate or specific areas. The article to be
plated is connected to the cathode by an alligator clip. The fiber tip is the anode and is immersed into
the plating solution. Unit is dual voltage 110/220V.
CODE
PE-502
PE-503
PE-510
PE-512
PE-512
DESCRIPTION
DUAL 110/220V
DELUXE PLATING PEN
JAR FOR PLATING SOLUTION
PLATING PEN (RED & BLACK)
25. Pen Plating Solutions
These plating solutions plate directly on all types of metals. Use a porous fiber tip pen with a pen
plating rectifier for creating artistic designs. RH- Rhodium
CODE
PE-100
PE-101
PE-102
PE-103
PE-520
PE-521
COLOR
14K GOLD 1/4g
14K GOLD 1g
18K GOLD 1/4g
18K GOLD 1g
RH 1g-CONC.
RH 2g-CONC.
CONTENTS
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
CODE
PE-104
PE-105
PE-106
PE-107
PE-108
COLOR
CONTENTS
24K GOLD 1/4g
2 oz
24K GOLD 1g
2 oz
ROSE GOLD 1g
2 oz
GREEN GOLD 1g
2 oz
BLACK RH 1g
2 oz
28. Krohn Rhodium Plating Solutions
26. Krohn Gold Plating Solutions
Specifically formulated for each grade of gold. These solutions are
pre-mixed and ready to use. Articles achieve a bright reflective finish.
May be used with stainless steel anodes. Contains one pennyweight of
pure gold per quart.
Prepared from virgin rhodium salts, under stringent quality control, and
guaranteed to give an exquisite appearance. Plates directly on platinum, gold or
pure nickel. To plate silver, copper or bronze alloys, articles must first have a
primary nickel plate. Use with platinized titanium or platinum anodes only.
Rhodium Replenisher
Use this solution to replenish the bath when the chemical balance is depleted
during rhodium plating.
CODE
PE-114
PE-118
PE-120
PE-121
PE-122
PE-123
DESCRIPTION
14K GOLD- 1 qt.
18K GOLD- 1 qt.
PINK- 1 qt.
18K GREEN- 1 qt.
24K GOLD- 1 qt.
HAMILTON- 1 qt.
CODE
PE-517-10
PE-518
PE-519
PE-522
PE-523
PE-523-01
PE-523-02
DESCRIPTION
RHODIUM 1/2g-8 fl. oz (READY TO USE)
RHODIUM 1g-1 pint (READY TO USE)
RHODIUM 2g-1 qt. (READY TO USE)
REPLENISHER 1g
REPLENISHER 2g
RHODIUM 1g (CONCENTRATE)
RHODIUM 2g (CONCENTRATE)
29. Wieland Gold & Rhodium Plating Baths
27. Electro Cleaner
A special formula of a combination of chemicals in powder form.
May be diluted by mixing with distilled water. Surface is cleaned
electrolytically leaving it bright for subsequent immersion in the
plating bath.
CODE
PE-525
142
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRO CLEANER- 12 oz
750 is an acidic elecrolyte for gold plating of non-ferrous metals and silver alloys.
The color of the surface may vary with different alloy materials. One step plating
procedure can produce the end color.
CODE
PE-517-05
PE-517-06
PE-517-07
PE-517-08
PE-517-09
DESCRIPTION
750 SCI 14K YELLOW/4 AU-1 lt.
750 FELN18K REDDISH/4 AU-1 lt.
750 SI 18K GREEN YEL./4 AU-1 lt.
750 SC 24K FINE GOLD/ 4 AU-1 lt.
BLACK RH CONC. 2G/RH 100ml
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
PLATING
30. Ceramitation
A remarkably versatile decorative enamel that is full of vibrant color when cured. Its hardness is virtually equivalent to hard fired enamel. For spraying, Ceramitation may be thinned
by a special thinner and applied to almost any surface, metal, porcelain, glass or rock.
Non-conductive. Surface enameled with Cermitation may be electroplated without affecting
the color or finish. This product is a two-part system. a) Color and b) Catalyst.
Only 30-45 minutes at 250°F (120°C) maximum curing temperature is required.
Set consists of 6 transparent colors (red, brown, blue, green, yellow, clear) and catalyst.
CODE
CT-001
CT-002
CT-003
CT-004
CT-007
CT-008
CT-009
DESCRIPTION
6 COLOR
CATALYST
CATALYST
CATALYST
WHITE
BLACK
CHINESE RED
CONTENTS
SET
16 oz
8 oz
4 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
CODE
CT-010
CT-011
CT-012
CT-013
CT-014
CT-015
CT-016
CT-017
DESCRIPTION
GREEN
ISRAELI BLUE
YELLOW
PEARL
CLEAR
RED
BLUE
THINNER
CONTENTS
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
16 oz
DESCRIPTION
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
CONTENTS
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
31. Enamels
A range of brilliant colors that can be effectively used to create artistic designs on jewelry.
After application on gold, silver and copper, the articles when fired will convert the enamel
into a hard glossy coating. Set consists of black, white, red, blue, yellow and green-2 oz ea.
CODE
CT-020
CT-025
CT-026
CT-027
DESCRIPTION
6 COLOR
BLACK
WHITE
RED
CONTENTS
SET
2 oz
2 oz
2 oz
CODE
CT-028
CT-029
CT-030
32. JAX® Colorants
An easy to use safe water base solution to produce different color shades on all metals, without
the use of heat or electricity.
JAX® Green Patina: Produces a permanent, antique green finish on copper, brass and bronze.
PE-005 1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Gold Finish: Produces a simulated 24K gold finish on brass.
PE-006 1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Antique Rust: Produces an antique rust finish on iron and steel.
PE-007
1 PINT (473ml)
JAX Darkeners
®
Environmentally safe, effective solutions to produce permanent colors on various metals with
consistent results without heat or electricity.
JAX® Brown:
Produces an antique brown finish on brass, bronze and copper.
PE-008 1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Brown Black: Produces an antique brown-black finish on brass, bronze and copper.
PE-009 1 PINT (473ml)
JAX® Black:
JAX® Flemish
Gray/Black:
Produces an antique black finish on brass, bronze and copper.
PE-010 1 PINT (473ml)
Produces an antique flemish gray-black finish on brass, bronze & copper.
PE-011 1 PINT (473ml)
Safety Instructions
Page 40
143
™
PLATED EAR STUDS
Bezel Birthstone Set-Regular
STONE
GARNET
AMETHYST
AQUAMARINE
CRYSTAL
EMERALD
ALEXANDRITE
RUBY
PERIDOT
SAPPHIRE
ROSE
TOPAZ
BLUE ZIRCON
ASSORTED
TITANIUM
PL001T
PL002T
PL003T
PL004T
PL005T
PL006T
PL007T
PL008T
PL009T
PL0010T
PL0011T
PL0012T
PL0013T
GOLD
PL001G
PL002G
PL003G
PL004G
PL005G
PL006G
PL007G
PL008G
PL009G
PL0010G
PL0011G
PL0012G
PL0013G
PL800
WHITE
PL001W
PL002W
PL003W
PL004W
PL005W
PL006W
PL007W
PL008W
PL009W
PL0010W
PL0011W
PL0012W
PL0013W
Painless ear piercing, without the danger of infection.
All studs are sterilized. The
stud is inserted in the gun
without touching with your
fingers. Unit contains fluid
to disinfect ear lobes
before and after piercing.
Clawset Birthstars Set
STONE
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGEST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
ASSORTED
TITANIUM
PL301T
PL302T
PL303T
PL304T
PL305T
PL306T
PL307T
PL308T
PL309T
PL310T
PL311T
PL312T
PL313T
GOLD
PL301G
PL302G
PL303G
PL304G
PL305G
PL306G
PL307G
PL308G
PL309G
PL310G
PL311G
PL312G
PL313G
WHITE
PL301W
PL302W
PL303W
PL304W
PL305W
PL306W
PL307W
PL308W
PL309W
PL310W
PL311W
PL312W
PL313W
TITANIUM
PL501T
PL502T
PL503T
PL504T
PL505T
PL506T
PL507T
PL508T
PL509T
GOLD
PL501G
PL502G
PL503G
PL504G
PL505G
PL506G
PL507G
PL508G
PL509G
WHITE
PL501W
PL502W
PL503W
PL504W
PL505W
PL506W
PL507W
PL508W
PL509W
Shapes Set
Bezel Birthstone Set-Mini
STONE
GARNET
AMETHYST
AQUAMARINE
CRYSTAL
EMERALD
ALEXANDRITE
RUBY
PERIDOT
SAPPHIRE
ROSE
TOPAZ
BLUE ZIRCON
ASSORTED
TITANIUM
PL201TM
PL202TM
PL203TM
PL204TM
PL205TM
PL206TM
PL207TM
PL208TM
PL209TM
PL210TM
PL211TM
PL212TM
PL213TM
GOLD
PL201GM
PL202GM
PL203GM
PL204GM
PL205GM
PL206GM
PL207GM
PL208GM
PL209GM
PL210GM
PL211GM
PL212GM
PL213GM
WHITE
PL201WM
PL202WM
PL203WM
PL204WM
PL205WM
PL206WM
PL207WM
PL208WM
PL209WM
PL210WM
PL211WM
PL212WM
PL213WM
TITANIUM
PL214TM
PL215TM
PL216TM
PL217TM
GOLD
PL214GM
PL215GM
PL216GM
PL217GM
WHITE
PL214WM
PL215WM
PL216WM
PL217WM
Mini Shapes
STONE
PEARLS
STAR
HEART
REGULAR
144
SHAPES
STAR
HEART
CROSS
TRIANGLE
SQUARE
FULLMOON
CRSNT. MOON
FLOWER
ASSORTED
Bezel Pearls Set- Shapes
STONE
PEARLS
RED CORAL
TURUOISE
BLACK ONYX
ASSORTED
TITANIUM
PL401T
PL402T
PL403T
PL404T
PL405T
GOLD
PL401G
PL402G
PL403G
PL404G
PL405G
WHITE
PL401W
PL402W
PL403W
PL404W
PL405W
TITANIUM
PL601T
PL602T
PL603T
PL604T
PL605T
GOLD
PL601G
PL602G
PL603G
PL604G
PL605G
WHITE
PL601W
PL602W
PL603W
PL604W
PL605W
TITANIUM
PL701T
PL702TM
GOLD
PL701G
PL702GM
WHITE
PL701W
PL702WM
Shape with Stone
STONE
STARLITE
HEARTLITE
CROSSLITE
FLOWERLITE
ASSORTED
Ball
SHAPES
REGULAR
MINI
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
1. Lindstrom® Diagonal Cutters (Yellow Handle)
Premium quality, Swedish diagonal cutters for use in jewelry and precision crafting. Black anodized, keen cutting edges have adjustable screw lap joints, for
accurate alignment. Cushion grip handle is proportional for the applied leverage. Double leaf springs keep the jaws apart.
MICRO BEVEL
CODE
DESCRIPTION
STYLE
PJ-140
PJ-141
PJ-142
PJ-145
PJ-150
PJ-151
PJ-155
PJ-160
MICRO BEVEL
FLUSH CUT
ULTRA
ULTRA
MICRO BEVEL
FLUSH CUT
ULTRA
MICRO BEVEL
8140
8141
8142
8145
8150
8151
8155
8160
FLUSH CUT
OVERALL
LENGTH(A)
41/3 ”/ 110mm
41/3 ”/ 110mm
41/3 ”/ 110mm
41/3 ”/ 110mm
47/16”/ 112.5mm
47/16”/ 112.5mm
47/16”/ 112.5mm
5”/ 125mm
JAW
LENGTH(B)
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 10mm
1
/2”/ 12.5mm
1
/2”/ 12.5mm
1
/2”/ 12.5mm
5
/8”/ 16mm
ULTRA
JAW
WIDTH(C)
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 10mm
1
/2”/ 12.5mm
1
/2”/ 12.5mm
1
/2”/ 12.5mm
5
/8”/ 16mm
2. Lindstrom® Pliers (White Handle)
Made of the finest Swedish steel, these high quality pliers are compact due to their close fitting box joints. All have double leaf springs and comfort styled handles for
ease of working over long periods.
STYLE
7490
STYLE
7892
CODE
DESCRIPTION
STYLE
PJ-189
PJ-190
PJ-191
PJ-193
PJ-195
PJ-198
MICRO CUTTER
FLAT NOSE
CURVE NOSE
SHORT CHAIN NOSE
ROUND NOSE
LONG CHAIN NOSE
7190
7490
7892
7893
7590
7890
146
STYLE
7893
OVERALL
LENGTH
41/3 ”/ 110mm
43/4 ”/ 120mm
51/4”/ 130mm
43/4”/ 120mm
43/4”/ 120mm
51/4”/ 130mm
STYLE
7590
JAW
LENGTH
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/4”/ 20mm
11/8”/ 28mm
3
/4”/ 20mm
3
/4”/ 20mm
11/4”/ 32mm
STYLE
7890
JAW
WIDTH
3
/8”/ 10mm
3
/8”/ 9mm
3
/8”/ 9mm
3
/8”/ 9mm
3
/8”/ 9mm
3
/8”/ 9mm
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
3. Lindstrom® Bio-Spring Pliers-Rx Series
A new concept in pliers, the bio-spring system adjusts to
give the correct feel when crafting jewelry. Precision box
joint, super smooth pivot movement, combined with an
ergonomic handle design make it the best plier for
professional jewelers.
4. Superlight Pliers-4 / ”
1
2
Made of good quality steel with forged handles for a
comfortable grip. Designed for delicate work, these
precision pliers have box joints to ensure perfect
alignment. All pliers have double leaf springs.
Use for forming and shaping thin gauge wire and
metal sheet.
CODE DESCRIPTION
PJ-301 CHAIN NOSE
CODE
PJ-200
STYLE
OVERALL
JAW LENGTH
JAW WIDTH
DESCRIPTION
FLAT NOSE
RX7490
53/4”/146.5mm
3
/4”/20mm
3
/8”/9mm
CODE
PJ-201
STYLE
OVERALL
JAW LENGTH
JAW WIDTH
DESCRIPTION
ROUND NOSE
RX7590
53/4”/146.5mm
3
/4”/20mm
3
/8”/9mm
CODE
PJ-202
STYLE
OVERALL
JAW LENGTH
JAW WIDTH
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN NOSE
RX7890
61/4”/158.5mm
11/4”/32mm
3
/8”/9mm
CODE
PJ-203
STYLE
OVERALL
JAW LENGTH
JAW WIDTH
DESCRIPTION
C/BENT NOSE
RX7892
61/8”/155.5mm
11/8”/28mm
3
/8”/9mm
CODE
PJ-204
STYLE
OVERALL
JAW LENGTH
JAW WIDTH
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN NOSE
RX7893
51/4”/132mm
11/4”/32mm
3
/8”/9mm
CODE DESCRIPTION
PJ-302 ROUND NOSE
CODE DESCRIPTION
PJ-303 FLAT NOSE
CODE DESCRIPTION
PJ-304 SIDE CUTTER
147
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
5. Y2K Series Pliers & Cutters -41/2”
These box joint, double leaf spring pliers are precision finished to ease
working in special applications. Pivots are close fitting to ensure accurate
nose alignment. Several different combinations of nose shapes allow the
user to form metal in custom designs.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
PJ-051
CHAIN NOSE
41/2”/115mm
PJ-054
SIDE CUTTER
41/2”/115mm
PJ-057
OBLIQ. CUTTER 41/2”/115mm
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
PJ-052
ROUND NOSE
41/2”/115mm
PJ-055
CH. NOSE BENT 41/2”/115mm
PJ-058
ROUND/FLAT
41/2”/115mm
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
PJ-053
FLAT NOSE
41/2”/115mm
PJ-056
END CUTTER
41/2”/115mm
PJ-059
HALF RND/FLAT 41/2”/115mm
148
LENGTH
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
6. Slim-Line Pliers- German
Slender box joint pliers, made of the finest steel, all
with double leaf springs. Features close fitting joints
and PVC coated handles for precision and durability.
Preferred for use in all types of bench work.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
PJ-703
FLAT NOSE
41/2”/115mm
PJ-706
END CUTTER
41/2”/115mm
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
PJ-701
CHAIN NOSE
41/2”/115mm
PJ-704
SEMI FLUSH CUT
41/2”/115mm
PJ-707
OBLIQUE CUTTER
41/2”/115mm
CODE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CODE
DESCRIPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
PJ-702
ROUND NOSE
41/2”/115mm
PJ-705
CH. NOSE BENT 41/2”/115mm
PJ-708
SIDE CUTTER FLUSH 41/2”/115mm
LENGTH
LENGTH
7. Nylon Pliers
CODE
PJ-310
PJ-313
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
FLAT NOSE
51/2”/140mm
2 NYLON JAWS
REPLACEMENT NYLON JAW
CODE DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
PJ-311 FLAT/ROUND
51/2”/140mm
1 NYLON JAW
PJ-314
REPLACEMENT NYLON JAW
CODE DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
PJ-312 1/2 ROUND/ FLAT
51/2”/140mm
1 NYLON JAW
PJ-315
REPLACEMENT NYLON JAW
149
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
8. Regular Pliers-5” German
Superior quality pliers with precision fit and accurate alignment. Specially
shaped nose forms, smooth and polish finished, all fitted with double leaf
spring. Handles are red PVC dipped for a comfortable non-slip grip.
Very useful for all types of bench work.
CODE
PJ-715
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN BENT NOSE
CODE
PJ-710
PJ-711
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN NOSE SERRATED
CHAIN NOSE
CODE
PJ-713
PJ-722
DESCRIPTION
FLAT NOSE
FLAT NOSE SERRATED
CODE
PJ-716
DESCRIPTION
END CUTTER
CODE
PJ-712
DESCRIPTION
ROUND NOSE
CODE
PJ-714
DESCRIPTION
SIDE CUTTER FLUSH
CODE
PJ-718
DESCRIPTION
S/FLUSH CUTTER RND
CODE
PJ-039
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN NOSE
CODE
PJ-041
DESCRIPTION
FLAT NOSE
CODE
PJ-040
DESCRIPTION
ROUND NOSE
CODE
PJ-042
DESCRIPTION
SIDE CUTTER
9. Economy Pliers & Cutters
Well crafted pliers in various nose shapes, all with box
joints, double leaf springs and PVC coated handles.
A perfect selection for the beginner in fabrication, repairing
and bench work.
150
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
10. Shape Forming Pliers
11. Chain Long Nose Plier
HALF ROUND AND HOLLOW NOSE
Jaws are concave and convex, ideal for use when forming shallow curves
in ring finishing.
CODE
PJ-837
PJ-826
DESCRIPTION
GERMAN
ECONO
LENGTH
5”/130mm
5”/130mm
A semi-circular and flat jaw to hold delicate parts with a firm grip, useful
while stretching.
DESCRIPTION
GERMAN
ECONO
CODE
PJ-717
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN NOSE
LENGTH
51/2”/140mm
12. Long Flat Nose Plier
HALF ROUND AND FLAT NOSE
CODE
PJ-839
PJ-825
Tapered long nose jaws, to form smooth curves and bends in all sizes.
LENGTH
5”/130mm
5”/130mm
Perfectly matched jaws, double action spring, provide a non-slip grip for
almost all bench tasks.
CODE
PJ-723
DESCRIPTION
FLAT NOSE
LENGTH
51/2”/140mm
13. Brass Line Flat Plier
Smooth jaw, precisely aligned to bend or hold rings while crafting and
fabricating .
CODE
PJ-836
DESCRIPTION
RING BENDING LARGE PLIER
LENGTH
6”/160mm
ROUND AND FLAT NOSE
Soft metal jaws that will not nick or mar. Very essential when working with
thin sheet gauge metal.
CODE
PJ-835
DESCRIPTION
BRASS LINE & FLAT
LENGTH
5”/130mm
14. Stone Setting Pliers
Round needle nose and flat anvil, with a double action spring, excellent for
fine detail designing.
CODE
PJ-838
PJ-827
DESCRIPTION
GERMAN
ECONO
Quality tool steel box joint pliers with double leaf spring and PVC dipped
handles. Grooved jaw locates prong accurately to secure the stone.
LENGTH
5”/130mm
5”/130mm
ROUND NOSE AND HOLLOW
PJ-037
PJ-737
Round needle nose and curved anvil, with a double action spring, for
special applications.
CODE
PJ-840
PJ-829
DESCRIPTION
GERMAN
ECONO
LENGTH
51/2”/140mm
51/2”/140mm
CODE
PJ-737
PJ-037
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
STONE SETTING PLIER- GERMAN 5”/130mm
STONE SETTING-ECONOMY
5”/130mm
151
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
15. Straight and Oblique Cutter
19. Prong Lifting Plier
Special pliers, lap joint, double leaf spring,
provides gentle pressure on the prong and
no pressure on the stone to avoid mar or
fracture. One jaw is grooved to hold the
prong and the other angled to support the
under side and raise prong gently.
CODE
PJ-736
DESCRIPTION
PRONG LIFTING PLIER 5”
20. Ring Holding Plier
CODE
PJ-740
PJ-741
DESCRIPTION
SWISS OBLIQUE CUTTER-67
SWISS STRAIGHT CUTTER-67B
16. Loop Closing Plier
Hollow, polished jaws, box joints and longer handles
provide effortless closing of rings and other oval forms.
Made of forged polished steel, with
lap joints and large grooved jaws,
these pliers are indispensable for
holding rings while working on the
insides.
CODE
PJ-738
PJ-739
DESCRIPTION
RING HOLDING PLIER-ECONO
RING HOLDING PLIER-GERMAN
21. Wire Bending Plier
An ingenious bending plier to create all types of round, undulating,
serpentine or special forms in wire or thin gauge metal. Fine screw
adjustment provides a convenient stop and assures consistent forms
with repeatability.
CODE
PJ-733
DESCRIPTION
LOOP CLOSING PLIER- GERMAN
17. Bow Closing Plier
Designed with a v- groove lower jaw and a curved
upper jaw with close fitting box joints. These pliers
form curves and v shapes to precise accuracies.
CODE
PJ-725
CODE
PJ-734
PJ-742
DESCRIPTION
BOW CLOSING PLIER - GERMAN
BOW CLOSING PLIER - ECONO
DESCRIPTION
WIRE BENDING PLIERS
22. Solder Cutting Plier
Ideal tool for cutting uniform pieces of solder. All steel construction,
lapped joints, and plastic coated handles for easy shearing.
18. Rosary Plier
This combination quality tool works both as a round nose
plier and a side cutter. Made in hardened steel, with a
double spring action, it reduces fatigue and increases
production.
CODE
PJ-735
152
DESCRIPTION
ROSARY ROUND NOSE PLIER WITH CUTTER
CODE
PJ-038
DESCRIPTION
SOLDER CUTTING PLIER
LENGTH
5”/130mm
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
23. Pastorino Sprue Cutter
27. Compound Cutter
Italian made 91/2” sprue cutter has chrome vanadium steel blades with a
locking device. Special shaped hand grips provide effortless cutting in small
areas.
Heavy duty diagonal cutter with compound leverage for cutting sprues with
minimal effort. Overall length is 71/2”, and cutting capacity is 3mm.
CODE
PJ-731
DESCRIPTION
SPRUE CUTTER
24. Bergeon Sprue Cutter
Top quality Swiss cutter, with a multiple linkage system, that gives
maximum pressure with minimum fatigue. Extra long handles and special
shaped jaws allow access to small areas.
CODE
PJ-841
PJ-848
PJ-849
DESCRIPTION
SPRUE CUTTER- 6599
REPLACEMENT JAW
SPRING
25. Bergeon Bracelet Cutter
One of the finest heavy duty cutters with a unique compound linkage
system to make repeated cuts with less effort. Very good overall fit and
finish, hardened cutting edges, with a built-in jaw setting screw. Provides
blade protection and increases cutting capability.
CODE
PJ-732
28. Swiss Sprue Cutter
Made of premium tool steel, these heavy duty cutters have hardened jaws,
precision compound joints and extra long handles to provide leverage.
Features angled jaws that align to facilitate the close cutting of sprues.
CODE
PJ-846
DESCRIPTION
BRACELET CUTTER-6496
26. Maun Type Cutter
DESCRIPTION
SWISS SPRUE CUTTER- 18055
29. Keiba Cutter with Handle Lock
An elegantly designed cutter, with polished hardened cutting edge, and
compound action jaws, combines maximum comfort with ease of cutting.
Fine setting screw guarantees a clean cut and protects the blade from
damage.
CODE
PJ-847
CODE
PJ-842
DESCRIPTION
COMPOUND SPRUE CUTTER- GERMAN
DESCRIPTION
KEIBA CUTTER WITH HANDLE LOCK
30. Keiba Cutter
Cuts sprues up to 3mm with ease, accuracy and repeatability. Compound
joint construction, fine finished sharp jaws nip off metal with a flush cut.
Medium capacity with spring jaws and lock. Use for cutting sprues of up to
3 mm. Overall length 61/2”, with smooth plastic grip handles.
CODE
PJ-843
DESCRIPTION
MAUN TYPE CUTTER WITH SPRING
CODE
PJ-844
PJ-845
DESCRIPTION
CUTTER
FLUSH-CUT
153
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
31. Parallel Pliers- Maun
Parallel action pliers provide vise like grip. Handles are anti-rust
nickel plated. Jaws remain parallel when in use.
PJ-727
PJ-729
PJ-730
CODE
PJ-727
PJ-729
PJ-730
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN NOSE-PLAIN JAW
FLAT WITH GROOVE- SERRATED
DIAGONAL CUTTER
LENGTH
5”
5”
51/2”
32. Marking Plier
Durable stainless steel ring marking plier to stamp the inside of rings
as well as other flat surfaces. Plier has adjustable screw to lock
different stamps. Individual stamps are available separately.
Overall length 51/2”.
CODE
PJ-910
PJ-911
PJ-912
PJ-913
DESCRIPTION
PLIER ONLY
MARKING PLIER BOX
FLAT AND CURVE ANVIL
PLIER WITH 3 STAMPS(10K, 14K, 18K)
33. Pneumatic Sprue Cutter
Eliminate manual cutting by using this foot operated, air powered
bench sprue cutter. Needs an external air compressor at 60-80 PSI.
Miniature blades access closely spaced sprues. May be hand
operated when not on the stand. Complete set includes: nile cutter,
point blade, stand, foot pedal and air hose with connections.
PJ-942
PJ-943
CODE
PJ-941
PJ-942
PJ-943
PJ-944
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET
BLUNT BLADE
POINT BLADE
HOSE GREEN
34. Plier Holding Rack
An attractive hardwood, polished stand, with pairs of
holes. Lets you keep your pliers handy and easily visible
on your work bench. Upright storage eliminates damage to
the jaw ends.
CODE
PJ-945
PJ-946
PJ-947
PJ-948
PJ-949
PJ-950
154
DESCRIPTION
6 HOLES- 3 PLIER HOLDER
8 HOLES- 4 PLIER HOLDER
10 HOLES- 5 PLIER HOLDER
12 HOLES- 6 PLIER HOLDER
16 HOLES- 8 PLIER HOLDER
20 HOLES- 10 PLIER HOLDER
35. Wooden Plier Rack
Improve your efficiency by increasing work bench space with the
addition of this shelf and drawer space saver. Convenient to store
small tools, parts and work articles.
CODE
PJ-936
DESCRIPTION
RACK WITH DRAWER
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
36. Shears with Spring
Use for cutting templates and patterns from medium heavy metal sheet up
to B & S #2 and soft sheet to B & S #1. Available with straight or curved
blades. Overall length 7”. -German
CODE
SH-700
SH-701
TYPE
STRAIGHT
CURVED
37. Shears without Spring
Made of ground and polished steel, with PVC coated handle, these light
duty shears with fine tips are very practical for cutting thin gauge metal.
Two blade shapes are available, straight and curved. The curved blade is
very useful for cutting smooth contours and circles. - German
CODE
SH-702
SH-703
TYPE
STRAIGHT
CURVED
38. Shears with Spring
Very efficient light duty shears for cutting patterns in thin gauge metal.
Curved handles with coil spring return allow you to work for long periods
without fatigue.- French
CODE
SH-710
SH-711
TYPE
STRAIGHT
CURVED
39. Shears without Spring
Similar to above but with a straight blade and without a spring return,
these shears let you cut continuously along the full blade length.
Perfect for snip or corner cuts.- French
CODE
SH-708
SH-709
TYPE
STRAIGHT
CURVED
40. Shears with Leaf Spring- Solingen
Shears with leaf spring and locking system, increases flexibility in cutting
chains, solder and thin sheets. Overall length 7”.
CODE
SH-704
DESCRIPTION
DELUXE STRAIGHT
155
™
PLIERS & SHEARS
41. Brown Shears
Heavy duty construction, use for making straight cuts. Available for right and left
hand operation. Overall length 6” with 11/2” cutting length.
CODE
SH-705
SH-705-01
DESCRIPTION
RIGHT HANDED
LEFT HANDED
42. Shears Scissor Type
Scissor shaped shears made from the finest European steel. The 11/2” blades
allow for precise control. Cuts tight patterns, circles and templates.
Overall length 7”.
CODE
SH-722
SH-723
DESCRIPTION
SHEAR BLADE-STRAIGHT
SHEAR BLADE-CURVED
43. Universal Shears with Spring
Easily cuts intricate in and out designs from sheet metal. Blade length 13/4”.
Overall length 71/2”.
CODE
SH-725
DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL SHEARS
44. Portable Ring Shears
Easy ring sizing by shearing the exact width that needs to be removed from the
ring shank. Install the correct size of cutter, then adjust the die to suit. Place the
ring on die and shear with a down stroke. Save the cut piece for future use.
Includes four cutters in quarter size increments.
CODE
SH-712
SH-713
DESCRIPTION
SHEAR WITH CUTTERS
SET OF 4 CUTTERS
45. Bench Shears with Long Handle
Used for cutting gold, silver, copper, brass and any other metals.
The long handle provides leverage for easy cutting. Comes in three sizes.
CODE
STYLE
FLAT BAR ROD
3
SH-735 4R
23/8” X 5/32”
/8”
7
SH-736 5R
23/8” X 3/16”
/16”
1
SH-737 6R
23/4” X 1/4”
/2”
REPLACEMENT BLADES
CODE
STYLE
BLADE LGTH.
SH-738 4R
43/4”
SH-739 5R
61/4”
SH-740 6R
8”
156
SHEET
/8”
5
/32”
3
/16”
1
BLADE LGTH.
43/4”
61/4”
8”
™
POLISHING
1. Double End Polisher 1/4 HP-Single/Double Speed
Totally enclosed, continuous rated motor, with pre-lubricated ball bearings and well balanced to
eliminate vibration. Right and left hand shaft extensions are 1/2” diameter. Supplied with tapered
spindles. On/off switch enclosed in the base.
CODE
DC-062
DC-063
DC-064
DC-065
DC-066
DC-067
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
SPEED
3,450/1,725 rpm
3,450/1,725 rpm
3,450/1,725 rpm
3,450/1,725 rpm
3,450 rpm
3,450 rpm
SHAFT HT.
6”
6”
41/2”
41/2”
6”
6”
2. Single End-Polisher 1/2HP & 3/4HP
Powerful, continuous duty motor with lubricated sealed bearings. Perfectly stable with vibration
free performance that is vital for grinding, polishing and buffing operations. Speed at 3,450 rpm.
CODE
DC-072
DC-073
DC-074
DC-075
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
POWER
/2HP
1
/2HP
3
/4HP
3
/4HP
1
3. Double End Polisher 1/2HP & 3/4HP
Rugged heavy duty motor, sealed ball bearings, continuous rated for use in production shops.
Single speed at 3,450 rpm. Shaft extensions are 1/2” diameter. Supplied with two threaded tapered
spindles. Shaft height 6”. Suitable for wheels or buffs up to 8” diameter.
CODE
DC-068
DC-069
DC-070
DC-071
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
POWER
/2 HP
1
/2 HP
3
/4 HP
3
/4 HP
1
4. Mini Bench Grinder/Polisher-1/6 HP
A versatile machine, ideal for small shops. May be used as a bench grinder, polisher, drill and
carver. Compact 1/6 HP motor, suitable for continuous operation. Solid state, high torque, variable
speed from 1,500 to 4,000 rpm.
CODE
DC-001
DC-002
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
5. Tapered Spindles for Straight Shaft
6. Tapered Spindle for Tapered Shaft
Converts straight shafts to tapered ends, that are needed to mount all types
of buff wheels. Select according to motor shaft diameter and right or left
taper. Locks on to the shaft by a set screw.
Especially for Baldor polishing motors. Designed with a shallow
internal taper, these spindles eliminate wobble and ensure very true
running of tapered spindles.
CODE
DC-054
DC-055
DC-056
DC-057
158
DESCRIPTION
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
DIA. /LG
/2” X 25/8”
1
/2” X 25/8”
5
/8” X 25/8”
5
/8” X 25/8”
1
CODE
DC-048
DC-053
DC-059
DC-060
DESCRIPTION
THREADED-RIGHT
THREADED-COMBO
BRASS LEFT
BRASS RIGHT
DIA.
/8”
5
/8”
3
/8”
3
/8”
5
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
POLISHING
7. Single Spindle Polisher/Dust Collector
This compact unit is useful in small shops with limited space, and features an all steel enclosure
with a 1/2HP single end polisher, speed 3,450 rpm and 1/2” tapered spindle. The dust collector has
a 1/2HP suction motor, and replaceable filters. Dimensions 15” X 17” X 10”.
CODE
DC-014
DC-015
DC-011
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
REPLACEMENT FILTER
8. Double Shaft Polisher/Dust Collector
Compact, medium sized double spindle polisher has 1/2HP totally enclosed motor, pre-lubricated
sealed ball bearings and 5/8” tapered spindles at both ends. Built into a steel enclosure it includes
a squirrel cage suction motor with replaceable fiberglass filters. Dimensions 22” X 19” X 12”.
CODE
DC-016
DC-017
DC-012
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
REPLACEMENT FILTER
9. Heavy Duty Double Shaft Polisher /Dust Collector
A wide body design, double spindle polisher has a totally enclosed 1/2HP motor, pre-lubricated
sealed ball bearings and 5/8” tapered spindles at both ends. Built into a steel enclosure it includes
a powerful squirrel cage suction motor, with replaceable fiberglass filters. Hood has a clear
plastic shield for eye protection. Dimensions 32” X 22” X 12”.
CODE
DC-018
DC-020
DC-013
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
REPLACEMENT FILTER
10. Dust Collectors
It is of prime importance to work in a clean air environment. Therefore all grinders and
polishers must be connected to a dust collector. Select the model suitable for your
shop. Features include a powerful motor blower system, maintenance friendly design,
filter cleaning in seconds, and a quick easy slide out tray for recovery of precious metals. CSA approved, CE Mark.
1
CODE
DC-280
DC-281
DC-286
DC-282
DC-283
DC-287
DC-284
DC-285
DC-288
* FREE AIR
MODEL
PORTS
DC2001-1
1
DC2001-1
1
AIR FILTER FOR DC2001-1
DC2001-2
1-2
DC2001-2
1-2
AIR FILTER FOR DC2001-2
DC2001-4
1-4
DC2001-4
1-4
AIR FILTER FOR DC2001-4
** SUCTION PER PORT
Safety Instructions
Page 40
AIR FLOW*
175CFM
175CFM
SUCTION**
5136FPM
5136FPM
POWER
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
DIMENSION
16” H X 14” W X 19.5 L
16” H X 14” W X 19.5 L
175CFM
175CFM
5136FPM
5136FPM
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 60Hz
17” H X 14” W X 20 L
17” H X 14” W X 20 L
580CFM
580CFM
4252FPM
4252FPM
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
23” H X 18” W X 25.5 L
23” H X 18” W X 25.5 L
159
™
POLISHING
11. Compact Dust Collector
13. Arbors
Single station unit designed to be mounted beneath the work bench.
Effective dust and precious metal retention. Brushless motor makes it
extremely quiet. Quick and easy pull-out tray captures large particles.
Maintenance friendly design. Filters easily replaceable.
Dimensions is 22” L X 11” W X 15” Ht.
Used for mounting on motor shafts, to fit grinding or buffing wheels.
Available as straight threaded (RH / LH). Select according to the
internal diameter to suit motor shaft.
CODE
DC-040
DC-041
DC-042
DC-043
DESCRIPTION
LEFT 1/2”
RIGHT 1/2”
LEFT 5/8”
RIGHT 5/8”
SIZE
1” X 41/4”
1” X 41/4”
11/2” X 6”
11/2” X 7”
14. Arbor with Bur Chuck
CODE
DC-081
DC-082
DC-083
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
FILTERS
Suitable to mount on motor shafts, either 1/2” or 5/8” diameter. This
arbor has a keyless Jacob 3-jaw chuck to hold shanks up to 1/4”
diameter. Available for right hand use only.
12. Double End Polisher/Dust Collector
A larger unit, all steel enclosure, floor model that has ample room for sit
down operation. Includes powerful polisher 1/2HP, speed 3,450 rpm, and
extended tapered shafts 5/8” diameter at both ends. Additionally provided
with a suction motor and replaceable cloth filter bags. Each end is protected
with a polishing hood to entrap dust particles.
CODE
DC-044
DESCRIPTION
ARBOR CHUCK-4” LONG
15. Mounted Screw Mandrel
Screw mandrel mounted on hardwood, makes it easy to mount on
bench polishers. Useful to hold wheels with 1/16” hole.
CODE
HO-205
DESCRIPTION
MTD SCREW MANDREL
16. Split Wood Mandrel
Hardwood mandrels, with internal taper, that fit on the tapered ends
of polishing spindles. Use with abrasive cloth rolls for internal
finishing operations.
AT-181
AT-183
CODE
DC-078
DC-079
DC-080
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
FILTER - 143/4” X 113/4”
CODE
AT-181
AT-183
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT
TAPERED
17. Dust Collector Hood
Made in fiberglass, these protection hoods are easy to install with
most bench polishers. Built in suction inlet needs to be connected to
an external dust collector.
CODE
DC-025
DC-026
DC-027
DC-039
DC-039
DC-026
160
DESCRIPTION
DUST COLLECTOR HOOD
LIGHT SOCKET
HOOD SHIELD
FILTER FOR HOOD
DC-025
DC-027
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
POLISHING
18. Rouge Cloths
A short nap cloth, treated with rouge. Cloth feels
like felt, but removes tarnish and fine scratch marks
to leave a bright attractive finish on jewelry.
CODE
PC-710
SIZE
9” X 11”
19. Super Fine Chamois Cloths
A medium density cloth with the texture of soft
leather. The surface is cushion-like and polishes
jewelry without leaving any residue.
CODE
PC-711
SIZE
7” X 43/4”
CODE
PC-715
PC-720
PC-724
PC-725
PC-730
PC-735
SIZE
5” X 5”
10” X 10”
14” X 14”
14” X 17”
17” X 21”
20” X 21”
121/2” X 141/2”
PC-740
PC-741
PC-742
PC-743
PC-744
6” X 71/2”
PC-746
PC-747
PC-748
PC-749
PC-750
CODE
PC-754
PC-755
COLOR
WHITE- FOR PEARL
BLUE- FOR DIAMOND
CODE
PC-757
DESCRIPTION
JEWELRY WIPES
CODE
LS-391
LS-393
DESCRIPTION
SILVER GLASS
CLEAR GLASS
20. Selvyt® Cloths
High quality, long lasting, lint free cloth, leaves a
shine on articles of jewelry, watches, silverware and
crystal.
21. 3M ® Scotch Brite Cloths
An extraordinary cloth that has oil or water
absorbing qualities. Lifts out liquids, greases and
dirt particles, without leaving any smear or residue.
Very durable wipes that can be machine washed in
clod water then air dried. (Do not bleach)
22. Lint Free Cloths
Non- abrasive, lint free cleaning cloths restore
luster and brilliance to articles of jewelry and
precious stones. Scratch proof cleaning action is
gentle and reliable. Size 9” X 11”
COLOR
WHITE
BLUE
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
23. Jewelry Wipes
A moist cloth that removes dirt and tarnish from
gold, silver and all non-ferrous metals. Will not
scratch or mar the surfaces of fine articles of
jewelry. Each dispenser contains 25 dry wipes.
24. 3M ® Safety Goggles
Impact resistant eye shields offer vital protection
during bench work, carving, grinding and buffing.
Large clear lenses allow a wide field of view.
161
™
POLISHING
25. Split Lapping Machine -Floor Model
A sturdy machine mounted on a steel table. Powered by a totally enclosed
ball bearing motor 1/2hp speed 3450 rpm with ports for connection to a dust
collector. This machine is ideal for finishing flat or contoured surfaces, and
provides the operator with a clear view. Includes a tapered mandrel and a
work light. Suitable for 6”, 7” and 8” felt split laps.
CODE
BF-353
BF-354
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
26. Split Lapping Machine- Benchtop Model
Similar to the above model but portable so as to be mounted on a bench.
Unit is complete with motor switch, grounded connecting cord and an
adjustable work light.
CODE
BF-350
BF-352
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
27. Finger Guard Safety Tape
30. Suede Finger Guard
An alternative to finger guards, protection tape readily
adheres and is easy to apply and remove. Made of
surgical grade gauze, it conforms to the contours of
the finger. Ideal protection from the hazards of sharp
edges and hot surfaces.
Size 3/4” wide X 9’ length. 16 pcs in a roll.
Made of soft leather, for comfort, it protects fingers
from burns or abrasion during grinding, polishing and
finishing operations.
CODE
PC-699
DESCRIPTION
SAFETY TAPE
28. 3M ® Vetrap™ Tapes
Natural rubber latex, light and durable, this new nonadhesive wrap sticks to itself, but not to the skin.
Protects fingers and wrists.
All are 2” wide X 5’ length.
CODE
PC-704
PC-705
PC-706
PC-707
PC-708
COLOR
WHITE
PINK
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CODE
PC-700
PC-701
PC-702
PC-703
DESCRIPTION
MEDIUM-OPEN END
LARGE--OPEN END
MEDIUM-CLOSED END
LARGE-CLOSED END
31. Rubber Finger Cots
Superior quality rubber, provides a comfortable grip and
protects finger tips during grinding and polishing.
29. Inspection Cotton Gloves
An absolute necessity that needs to be worn when
handling precious metal and stones. Made of special
cotton fabric, it is invaluable while inspecting jewelry.
CODE
PC-800
PC-801
162
DESCRIPTION
COTTON GLOVE-LARGE
COTTON GLOVE-SMALL
CODE
PC-676
PC-677
PC-678
PC-679
DESCRIPTION
111/2”- SMALL
12- MEDIUM
13- LARGE
14- EX- LARGE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
POLISHING
32. Initial Polishing Compounds
These compounds are used for the initial preparation of metal surfaces, as they have a blend of mild abrasive in a carrier of waxes. This graded abrasive may
be applied to any muslin or treated buff wheel. It improves the surface as cast, to a dull satin matt finish.
Bobbing Compounds
A fast cutting medium that smoothes gold, silver or
other non-ferrous alloys. Adheres well to buffs or laps.
CODE
PC-037
DESCRIPTION
1 lb
CODE
PC-035
DESCRIPTION
1 lb
CODE
PC-044
DESCRIPTION
1 lb
CODE
PC-039
PC-040
PC-041
DESCRIPTION
WATER SOLUBLE 1 lb
STANDARD 1 lb
PREMIUM 1 lb
Brown Tripoli
Standard brown colored compound that reduces
scratch or filing marks to a dull satin finish.
4X White Diamond
A medium cutting compound that is less aggressive
and is preferred for soft metal alloys, gold and silver.
Gray Star
A free cutting abrasive of fine particle size that leaves
a soft bright pre-finish on platinum and palladium.
33. Soft Polishing Compounds
After initial polishing, the next stage is to enhance the surface of materials from a dull satin to a medium bright finish. At this point, the surface of the metal
and alloys improves appreciably, as fine hair line scratches are virtually non-existent, and the surface exhibits a medium luster. These compounds may be
used on tight muslin wheels or buffs.
Zam®
A crocus compound that produces scratch free surfaces on all
precious metals. May also be used for polishing soft semiprecious stones. Leaves a bright mirror finish on the surface.
Fabuluster®
A soft polishing compound formulated for working on plastics,
fiberglass or soft metals. Very adaptable for use with flannel or
chamois wheels.
CODE
PC-045
DESCRIPTION
1 lb -GREEN
CODE
PC-038
DESCRIPTION
1 lb -WHITE
34. Rouge Polishing Compounds
Rouge polishing is the ultimate step to achieve maximum luster. A superfine polishing compound that is well accepted for use on muslin, flannel, or chamois
wheels. Has an extremely light cutting action to impart a mirror finish on all precious metals.
Red: High luster, final polish for gold,
silver and other soft non-ferrous metals.
CODE
PC-011
PC-012
PC-013
DESCRIPTION
1 lb BAR
1
/2 lb BAR
1
/4 lb BAR
Green: A special rouge polishing
compound for chrome, stainless steel,
white gold and platinum.
CODE
PC-015
PC-016
PC-017
DESCRIPTION
1 lb BAR
1
/2 lb BAR
1
/4 lb BAR
Black: Very effective rouge compound for silver
and silver alloys.
CODE
PC-020
DESCRIPTION
/4 lb ROUND
1
Yellow: A premium quality rouge that works
extremely well on yellow gold and other non-ferrous
metals, except silver.
CODE
PC-029
PC-030
DESCRIPTION
1 lb BAR
1
/2 lb BAR
White: Recommended as the best polishing rouge
for an ultra shine on white gold, platinum and
palladium.
CODE
PC-024
DESCRIPTION
/4 lb ROUND
1
163
™
POLISHING
35. Dialux Polishing Compounds
A select type of super soft abrasive, uniformly blended with a carrier wax. These compounds have special
features that allow good adhesion to the fibers of brushes, buffs or felts. Only minimal quantities need to
be used. Bar size 4” x 11/4” x 11/8”
Red Dialux: Produces a brilliant shine on yellow gold, but may also be used for silver.
Green Dialux: All purpose medium for hard alloys such as chromium, cobalt and stainless steel.
White Dialux: For reflective polishing of silver and silver alloys.
Blue Dialux: A general compound that may be used for all metals.
Orange Dialux: Produces a high luster on soft metals.
Yellow Dialux: Gives a bright finish to soft brass, bronze and copper.
Gray Dialux: Best for producing reflective surfaces
CODE
COLOR
on stainless steel.
PC-050
RED
PC-051
GREEN
PC-052
WHITE
PC-053
BLUE
CODE
PC-054
PC-055
PC-056
COLOR
ORANGE
YELLOW
GRAY
36. Menzerna® Rouge
A unique type of rouge formulated with a blend of soft abrasives and a bonding agent. Generates a
balanced cutting action and extends well, so that just a little compound is needed.
Green Rouge: For a bright finish on chrome, white gold and stainless steel.
Blue Rouge: A medium finish polishing compound for almost all metals.
Red Rouge: Achieves a brilliant shine on gold and silver.
Brown Rouge: Typical tripoli pre-polish. An aggressive compound which is best for removing scratches
from soft metals and alloys.
Yellow Rouge: More of a bobbing compound often used in place of the brown rouge.
Platinum Compound: Imparts a very high quality surface finish on platinum.
CODE
PC-070
PC-071
PC-072
PC-073
PC-074
PC-075
COLOR
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BROWN
YELLOW
CARROT PLATINUM
WT.
250g
250g
250g
250g
250g
100g
CODE
PC-063
PC-064
PC-065
PC-066
PC-067
PC-068
COLOR
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BROWN
YELLOW
CARROT PLATINUM
WT.
1.3Kg
1.2Kg
1.3Kg
1.2Kg
1.2Kg
200g
37. KOYO Premium Platinum Rouge
A finishing compound, manufactured from carefully graded abrasives, blended with additives to give high
reflective surfaces to non-ferrous metals and stainless steels.
K-1 Green Rouge: General purpose for preliminary
finishing applications.
K-2 Green Rouge: Intermediate stage finishing compound.
Alox-5 White:
For final finish, to achieve a distinctive
luster.
CODE
PC-059
PC-061
PC-060
PC-062
COLOR
K-1 GREEN
K-2 GREEN
ALOX 5-WHITE
ALOX 5-WHITE
WT.
1lb
1
/4lb
1
/4lb-355g
1lb-90g
38. Platinum Rouge- Japan
A selected grade of polishing compound formulated for ultra bright finishing of platinum. Uniformly
blended and manufactured under strict quality control. Exceptional adherence to buffs, brushes or felts.
Five different grades to achieve surfaces from matt to super shine.
First Cut Rouge- 800:
164
For initial smoothing of waviness
and roughness.
Medium Cut Rouge-1500: For removal of light scratch
marks.
Fine Cut Rouge- 4000: To further improve the surface
prior to final finishing.
Extra Shine Rouge- 6000: Enhances the surface to exhibit
a bright finish.
Super Shine Rouge- 8000: Provides a very high luster and
leaves a mirror bright finish.
Picca Blue:
Ultra bright finish for platinum
and gold.
CODE
PC-080
PC-081
PC-082
PC-083
PC-084
PC-085
COLOR
GRAY-800
WHITE-1500
WHITE-4000
WHITE-6000
WHITE-8000
PICCA-BLUE
WT.
1lb
1lb
1
/2lb
1
/2lb
1
/2lb
1
/4lb
™
RING TOOLS
1. Kagan Wedding Ring Sizer
4. Ring Stretcher with Reducer
Easy to use for all rings without stone settings.
This sturdy unit bolts to the work bench, is a
down stroke model that operates with minimal
effort. Enlarge or reduce rings with this
combination machine. Accepts all ring
sizes up to #14 and widths up to 12mm. The
reducing die is reversible and has 12 different
ring dies for reductions. Sizer is built horizontal
so that the user has more control while sizing
rings.
A heavy duty upright model that bolts to the work
bench. Very even expansion for reduction of ring
bands up to size #15 and widths up to 12 mm. Six
leaf expansion mandrel is calibrated for approximate
ring size. The reduction die is reversible. Not for use
on stone set rings.
CODE
RI-127
RI-128
DESCRIPTION
KAGAN RING SIZER
REPLACEMENT SPLINE
RI-131
RI-130
2. Bracelet Stretcher
The sturdy cast iron base encloses the gear mechanism that spreads the leaf springs on the down stroke
and retracts on the up stroke. Compact space saving
unit may be bolted to the work bench. A quick way to
enlarge bracelets up to 3” in diameter. Do not use for
stone set bracelets.
CODE
RI-125
RI-126
DESCRIPTION
BRACELET STRETCHER
REPLACEMENT SPLINE
CODE
RI-130
RI-129
RI-131
RI-132
DESCRIPTION
TWO CONES AND REDUCER
SPLINE FOR RI-130
STRETCHER WITH REDUCER
SPLINE FOR RI-131
5. Ergonomic Ring Stretcher
Premium quality, space saving design. Made in stainless steel. Comfortable non-slip grip. Smooth rotary
action controls gradual expansion of a four leaf
mandrel to enlarge rings. Calibrated for all sizes. Do
not use for stone set rings.
3. Electronic Ring Stretcher
An advanced design for sizing rings effortlessly.
Power operated stretching device smoothly expands
rings to the required size. Tapered sleeve is graduated for easy calibration of all ring sizes. Operates on 8
AAA batteries (not included). An adaptor is available
for operation on 110/220 V.
CODE
RI-135
DESCRIPTION
RING SIZE #(3-13)
6. Ring Shank Bender
CODE
RI-136
RI-137
DESCRIPTION
RING SIZE #(3-13)
ADAPTOR 110/ 220V
A robust tool with stepped eccentric bending die and
matched die blocks. A very useful tool to bend and
shape flat, oval or engraved strip material. Large
lever handle provides effortless working on even the
hardest materials.
CODE
RI-134
166
DESCRIPTION
RING SHANK BENDER
™
RING TOOLS
7. Kagan Ring Roller
10. Ring Setters
For enlarging stone set rings without disturbing the head. May
be used as miniature rolling mill for gold or copper wire when
furish with optional handle. This sizer is equipped with 8 rollers
for knife edge, oval, half-round and flat shanks.
A universal tool that allows all around accessibility for setting. Nine nylon inserts
cover the entire range of ring sizes from #2- 13. The head unscrews for alternative
mounting in a vise.
RI-150
RI-149
AN-417
CODE
RI-112
RI-113
DESCRIPTION
RING ROLLER
REPLACEMENT HANDLE
CODE
RI-149
RI-150
AN-417
DESCRIPTION
SETTERS CLAMP
INSERTS FOR RI-149
BENCH PIN FOR RI-149
8. Stone Ring Stretcher
11. Power Hand Ring Stretcher
A well made bench unit that is very necessary for enlarging all
stone set rings. It rolls out the shank, stretches the metal to
expand, without loosening prongs or stressing the stone
settings. A set of 17 polished rollers are included to accommodate all ring sizes.
An easy to operate gadget, that is compact yet powerful, for enlarging rings. The
ring sits on the tapered expander, and increase in size is effected by turning the
screw mechanism. Expansion is gradual and accurately controlled.
Do not use for stone set rings.
CODE
RI-119
RI-120
DESCRIPTION
STONE RING STRETCHER
REPLACEMENT ROLLS
9. Econo Ring Stretcher
CODE
RI-139
DESCRIPTION
POWER HANDER
12. Rathburn Ring Stretcher
Stretch rings economically with this easy to use fixture. Suitable for ring sizes #6
and larger. Ring is placed over the multi stepped collet and stretching is accomplished by gently tapping the tapered steel plug. Not for use with stone set rings.
A well made stretcher, used to enlarge rings of all sizes up to
#14. Unit has a stable base with smooth polished
splines to prevent marring. Effortless movement by a
lever contributes to gradual enlargement of rings to
calibrated sizes.
CODE
RI-133
DESCRIPTION
RING STRETCHER
CODE
RI-138
DESCRIPTION
RATHBURN RING STRETCHER
167
™
RING TOOLS
F4
13. MILLrite - Millgrain Machine
F6
This unique device has all the features needed to create professional decorative
designs on rings, sizes #2-13. A sturdy machine that includes a work holding
device, a tool clamp, and an ingenious tool feed mechanism. All moving parts are
ground for a precision fit. Easy to operate with minimal effort. Imprinted designs
exhibit a high degree of brilliance. Use with lathe millgrain tools.
F8
F9
F10
CODE
MG-345
MG-346
F12
F14
DESCRIPTION
MILLGRAIN MACHINE COMPLETE
SET OF 9 COLLETS
14. Lathe Millgrain
F16
Emboss decorative designs on the edges of rings and bracelets.
Embossing wheels are 6 mm in diameter mounted on square tool
shanks that fit on a millgrain machine or lathe. Wheels are hardened and tempered to ensure long tool life. Select from a variety of
patterns to suit individual creations.
M4
M6
M8
M9
M10
CODE
MG-350
MG-351
MG-352
MG-353
MG-354
MG-355
MG-356
MG-357
MG-358
MG-359
MG-360
MG-361
M12
M14
K1
Female
CM13
R1
R2
R3
CF7
Male
CF10
15. Ring Cutter
Sure grip handle, all nickel plated tool. Extremely safe to use,
while cutting rings on fingers. Safety guard slides between
ring and finger when saw blade cuts through shank.
CODE
PJ-900
PJ-901
DESCRIPTION
RING CUTTER DELUXE
SPARE BLADE
DESCRIPTION
M4 MALE
F4 FEMALE
M6 MALE
F6 FEMALE
M8 MALE
F8 FEMALE
M9 MALE
F9 FEMALE
M10 MALE
F10 FEMALE
M12 MALE
F12 FEMALE
CODE
MG-362
MG-363
MG-364
MG-365
MG-366
MG-367
MG-368
MG-369
MG-370
MG-371
MG-372
MG-373
DESCRIPTION
M14 MALE
F14 FEMALE
R1 ROPE
R2 ROPE
R3 ROPE
K1 COIN EDGE
CM13 DIAMOND
CM15 DIAMOND
HB DESIGN
F16 FEMALE
CF 7
CF 10
16. Mark A Size
17. Display Rings
Reducing ring size is simplified by Mark A
Size ring gauge. Has quarter size
increments from 1/4” to 3 full sizes.
Use for displaying precious color stones.
Squeeze shanks sides together and
prongs slide apart to hold the stone.
CODE
RI-109
DESCRIPTION
RING MARK A SIZE
18. Ring Guards
CODE
RD-171
RD-172
RD-173
RD-174
DESCRIPTION
CHROME SMALL
CHROME LARGE
GOLD SMALL
GOLD LARGE
Accurate marking eliminates guess work when rings are to be resized. A complete set of gauges in
tempered steel, with quarter size increments up to three full sizes.
CODE
RG-001
RG-002
RG-003
RG-004
168
DESCRIPTION
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
LADIES
GENTS
GIANT
JUMBO
CODE
RG-005
RG-006
RG-007
RG-008
DESCRIPTION
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE
LADIES
GENTS
GIANT
JUMBO
™
SAFETY
1. Lightweight Face Shield
6. 3M ® Vetrap™ Tapes
Provides complete face and neck protection from grits of grinding, polishing
and drilling. Made of impact resistant clear view material, it must be worn
over spectacles or goggles. Fits easily with an adjustable headband.
Natural rubber latex, light and durable, this new non-adhesive wrap sticks
to itself, but not to the skin. Protects fingers and wrists.
Size 2” wide X 5’ length.
CODE
PC-704
PC-705
PC-706
PC-707
PC-708
COLOR
WHITE
PINK
RED
GREEN
BLUE
7. 3M ® Dust Mask
CODE
LS-392
DESCRIPTION
FACE SHIELD
Complete protection from toxic dust and other harmful airborne particles.
The mask is comfortable, filters air and does not interfere with breathing.
A necessity when drilling, grinding and finishing.
2. Leather Finger Cots
SA-001
Soft leather guard necessary for use in protecting fingers from compounds,
heat and abrasion during grinding and finishing.
CODE
PC-680
PC-681
DESCRIPTION
SMALL- #2
LARGE- #6
3. Suede Finger Guard
Made of soft leather, for comfort, it protects fingers from burns or abrasion
during grinding, polishing and finishing operations.
CODE
PC-700
PC-701
PC-702
PC-703
DESCRIPTION
MEDIUM-OPEN END
LARGE-OPEN END
MEDIUM-CLOSED END
LARGE-CLOSED END
4. Rubber Finger Cots
Superior quality rubber provides a comfortable grip and protects finger tips
during grinding and polishing.
CODE
PC-676
PC-677
PC-678
PC-679
DESCRIPTION
111/2”- SMALL
12- MEDIUM
13- LARGE
14- EX- LARGE
5. Safety Apron
Durable tie-back denim apron protects clothing
at the work place from grime, molten metal and
sparks. Provided with easy accessible pockets
for small tools.
CODE
SA-004
170
DESCRIPTION
WORK APRON
SA-002
CODE
SA-001
SA-002
DESCRIPTION
DUST MASK
DUST MIST RESPIRATOR
8. Ventilated Safety Goggles
Inexpensive, impact resistant goggles, provide complete eye protection
from sparks and debris during grinding and polishing. Ventilated side
guards provide comfort and reduce fogging. Fits over spectacles.
One size suits all. Meets ANSI specifications.
CODE
LS-390
DESCRIPTION
SAFETY GOGGLES
9. Safety Goggles for Platinum
Light plastic wrap-around frames with safety colored lenses protect eyes
when melting metal, soldering or brazing.
CODE
LS-401
LS-401-01
SHADE
7
10
10. 3M ® Safety Goggles
Impact resistant eye shields offer vital protection during bench work,
carving, grinding and buffing. Large clear lenses allow a wide field of view.
LS-391
LS-393
CODE
LS-391
LS-393
DESCRIPTION
SILVER GLASS
CLEAR GLASS
™
SAW FRAMES & SAWBLADES
1. Adjustable Saw Frames-Econo
Made of the finest materials, this adjustable sawframe is well
balanced and has a comfortable hand grip.
SF-101
SF-201
CODE
SF-101
SF-201
DESCRIPTION
OSCAR
ECONO 3”
2. Saw Frame- Swiss
SF-788
This sawframe is adjustable, ultra-light, and perfectly balanced.
Ergonomic handle reduces fatigue. Made of quality steel with a
non-glare finish.
CODE
SIZE
SF-788
3”
3. Adjustable Saw Frame - France
Special rectangular profile 5 X 7mm contributes to extra rigidity of the
saw frame. Quick tension system by a quarter turn of the tightening
lever holds blade taut. Size 80 X 130mm
SF-600
CODE
SF-600
SF-601
SF-601
DESCRIPTION
THUMB LOCK
REGULAR
4. Adjustable Saw Frames- German
Forged and hardened tool steel with adjustable frame and serrated
clamps to hold the blade firmly. Even accommodates broken blades.
CODE
SF-725
SF-730
SF-740
SF-750
SF-760
SF-780
SF-761
SIZE
21/2”
3”
4”
5”
6”
8”
WING NUTS
5. Deluxe Saw Frames -France
An excellent saw with a stainless steel frame and black varnished
wooden handle. Perfect blade alignment is assured by smooth sliding
head. Jaws are case hardened tempered steel.
CODE
SF-762
SF-763
SF-764
SF-765
SF-766
SF-767
SIZE
60mm
70mm
85mm
95mm
125mm
150mm
NO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6. Saw Frames with Tension Screw
Forged hardened tool steel adjustable frame with a serrated clamp to
hold the blade firmly. Alignment is accurate and a tensioning screw is
provided to eliminate blade wobble.
CODE
SF-782
SF-783
SF-784
SF-785
172
SIZE
23/4”
33/4”
4”
5”
™
SAW FRAMES & SAWBLADES
7. Gems Sawblades
Swiss made, high quality, long lasting tempered steel resists breakage and drifting
when cutting. Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-100
SB-101
SB-102
SB-103
SB-104
SB-105
SIZE
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
CODE
SB-120
SB-130
SB-140
SB-150
SB-160
SIZE
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
8. Antilope® Sawblades
German made sawblades recognized and accepted by jewelers worldwide.
Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-161
SB-162
SB-163
SB-164
SB-165
SIZE
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
CODE
SB-220
SB-230
SB-240
SB-250
SB-251
SIZE
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
9. Herkules® Sawblades
Herkules sawblades are world renowned. Made of special alloy steel, uniformly
tempered. Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-260
SB-261
SB-262
SB-263
SB-264
SB-265
SIZE
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
CODE
SB-320
SB-330
SB-340
SB-350
SB-360
SIZE
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
10. Econo Sawblades
A good quality sawblade at a very affordable price. Made in India.
Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-400
SB-401
SB-402
SB-403
SB-404
SB-405
SIZE
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
CODE
SB-420
SB-430
SB-440
SB-450
SB-460
SIZE
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
11. Pike® Sawblades
Swiss made high quality sawblades useful for accurate and precise work.
Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-500
SB-501
SB-502
SB-503
SB-504
SB-505
SIZE
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
SB-520
SB-530
SB-540
SB-550
SB-560
SB-570
SIZE
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
#7/0
173
™
SAW FRAMES & SAWBLADES
12. Flash Sawblades
The finest Swiss sawblade. Known in the industry for its exceptional flexibility.
Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-600
SB-601
SB-602
SB-603
SB-604
SB-605
CODE
SB-620
SB-630
SB-640
SB-650
SB-660
SB-670
SB-680
SIZE
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
SIZE
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
#7/0
#8/0
13. Spiral Sawblades
Special form sawblades to cut rubber, plastic, wax, plaster and other hardened materials.
Allows cuts to be made in any direction. Packed in one gross (144 blades).
CODE
SB-800
SB-801
SB-802
SIZE
#0
#1
#2
CODE
SB-803
SB-820
SB-830
SIZE
#3
#2/0
#3/0
14. Bench Mounted Saw Table
Made of satin chrome brass, this saw table may be fastened to your work bench.
The device permits linear or multi-contoured cuts to be easily made as it allows free
movement in all directions. Even thin sheet can be sawed with almost no vibration.
CODE
SB-001
DESCRIPTION
SAW TABLE
15. Tube Cutter
Cut rods or tubing up to 1/8” diameter with precision. This jig is made of steel and is provided
with a wooden handle. An adjustable stop allows you to make repeated cuts to accurate
lengths.
CODE
SH-730
A carefully formulated compound that provides optimum balance of
cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up, thereby
extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting or grinding.
CODE
BR-700
BR-701
BR-702
174
TEETH PER INCH.
T
16. Bur Lube
DESCRIPTION
BUR LUBE 2 oz
BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz
BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz
DESCRIPTION
TUBE CUTTER
D
SIZE
T
D
T. P. I
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#1/0
#2/0
#3/0
#4/0
#5/0
#6/0
#7/0
#8/0
0.0120”
0.0134”
0.0140”
0.0150”
0.0158”
0.0110”
0.0103”
0.0095”
0.0086”
0.0080”
0.0070”
0.0067”
0.0063”
0.0240”
0.0276”
0.0290”
0.0307”
0.0331”
0.0220”
0.0204”
0.0190”
0.0175”
0.0157”
0.0140”
0.0130”
0.0126”
51
43
40.5
38
35.5
53.5
56
61
66
71
76
84
86
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
SCALES
Tanita Scales
1. Tanita Model 1210
Mini Scale weighs in carat, troy ounce, grain and gram.
Three-LR44 watch batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
Readability
Carat
0-50 ct.
0.01 ct.
Troy oz.
0-0.32 ozt.
0.0001 ozt.
Grain
0-154 gr
0.05 gr
Gram
0-10 g
0.002 g
1
Dimension
6” X 4 /2” X 1”
CODE
SC-481
SC-485
DESCRIPTION
50 CT
100 CT
CODE
SC-420
MODEL
#1220
CODE
SC-475
MODEL
#1475
CODE
SC-472
MODEL
#1212
CODE
SC-474
MODEL
#1475T
CODE
SC-477
MODEL
#1477
2. Model 1220-P
Gram and pennyweight scale. Two-5004LC batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
Readability
Gram
0-100 g
0.1 g
Pennyweight
64 dwt
0.1 dwt
Dimension
23/4” X 41/8” X 3/8”
3. Model 1475
Weighs in gram. Three-LR44 batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
1000g
Readability
1g- 0~500g, 2g-500~1000g
Dimension
31/2” X 53/4” X 3/4”
4. Model 1212
Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Four-AAA batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
Capacity
300g
Readability
0.1g-0~150, 0.2g-150~300g
Pennyweight
0.1 dwt-0~100 dwt, 0.2 dwt -100~193 dwt
Dimension
63/8” X 35/8” X 3/4”
5. Model 1475T
Weighs in gram. Three-LR44 batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
1200g
Readability
1g-0~600g , 2g-600~1200
Dimension
31/2” X 53/4” X 3/4”
6. Model 1477
Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Three-LR44 batteries
included.
Specifications
Capacity
100g
Readability
0.1g-0~50 g, 0.2g-50~100 g
Pennyweight
0.1 dwt-0~32 dwt, 0.2 dwt-32~64 dwt
Dimension
6” X 3” X 5/8”
176
™
SCALES
Tanita Scales
7. Model TPK-100
Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Solar powered.
Specifications
Capacity
100g
Accuracy
0.1g-0~50 g, 0.2 g-50~100 g
CODE
SC-451
MODEL
#TPK-100
CODE
SC-480
MODEL
#7020
CODE
SC-452
MODEL
#1140
8. Model 7020
Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Four-AAA batteries included.
Comes with calculator.
Specifications
Capacity
100g
Readability
0.1g-0~50 g, 0.2g-50~100 g
Troy oz.
0-1.6/0.005
1.6-3.2/0.01 ozt.
Ounce
0-1.6/0.005
1.6-3.5/0.01 oz.
Pennyweight
0-32 /0.1 dwt
32-64 /0.2 dwt
Dimension
61/8” X 33/4” X 3/4”
9. Model 1140 Scale
Weighs in grams and ounce only. Four-R03 or AAA batteries
included.
Specifications
Capacity
1000g
Readability
1g-0~500g, 2g-500~1000g
Dimension
8” X 53/4” X 11/2”
10. Model KP-Series Scale
Weighs in grams, ounce, troy ounce and pennyweight. 5004LC
batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
400g
Readability
0.1g-0~200g, 0.2g-200~400g
Ounce
0-7.05 oz
0.005 oz
7.05-14.1 oz
0.01 oz
Troy oz.
0-6.43 ozt
0.005
6.43-12.86 ozt
0.01
Pennyweight
0-128.6 dwt
0.1 dwt
128.6-257.2 dwt
0.2 dwt
Dimension
51/8” X 71/8” X 1/2”
CODE
SC-486
SC-488
DESCRIPTION
KP-200
KP-400
RANGE
0-200g
0-400g
11. Model 1479V Scale
Weighs in grams only. Alkaline batteries included.
Specifications
Capacity
Readability
Gram
0-120 g
0.1 g
1
5
Dimension
3” X 6 /8” X /8”
CODE
SC-473
MODEL
#1479V
177
™
SCALES
12. Ohaus® Compact Jewelry Scale
15. Ohaus® Scout II
Portable, and simple to set up, it is perfectly compatible for weighing jewelry. Highly accurate and reliable, it features an easy to read display, a large
weighing surface and an auto power shut off. Powered by 3 -AA Alkaline
batteries included.
An easy to operate balance for jewelry and laboratory weighing. The sealed
front panel has a molded spill ring. Features include high contrast LCD
display with weighing modes, parts counting and other applications.
Code
Capacity(g) X Readability
Weighing Unit
Pan Size
Dimensions
SC-007 / CS-200J
200g X 0.1g
7.05oz X 0.01 oz
128.6 dwt X 0.1 dwt
6.43 ozt X 0.01 ozt
g, oz, oz troy, and dwt
53/4” X 51/4”
8” X 51/2” X 11/2”
Code-110V/ 60 Hz
Code-220V/ 50 Hz
Model
Capacity(g)
Readability
Weighing Modes
Pan Size
Dimensions
SC-001
SC-003
SC-008
SC-002
SC-004
SC-009
SC2020
SC4010
SC4020
200g
400g
400g
0.01
0.1
0.01
g, oz, lb, oz troy, dwt and parts counting
4” DIA.
5” X 53/4”
5” X 53/4”
63/4” X 23/8” X 81/4”
SC-005
SC-006
SC6010
600g
0.1
16. Ohaus® Navigator Legal-for-Trade
™
Navigator offers 12 weighing modes and counting features. Sealed
front for protection from liquid spillage. LCD has large 6 digit, 7
segment display. A/C power or batteries.
™
13. Ohaus® Dial-O-Gram® Balance
The Dial-O-Gram provides the durability and versatility for weighing solids,
liquids and powders. Features a removable stainless steel platform, spring
loaded zero adjustor and dial operation for speed and convenience.
Code
Capacity(g) X Readability
Pan Size (Dia. X Depth)
Dimensions
SC-012 / 1610-00
610g / 2610g X 0.1g
6” X 0.8”
18” X 12” X 9”
14. Ohaus Triple Beam Balance
®
The triple beam balance is well equipped to handle any weighing job,
solids, liquids or powders. Features a stainless steel pan, three notched,
tiered beams with center reading and a spring loaded zero adjust
compensator.
Code
Capacity(g) X Readability
Pan Size (Dia. X Depth)
Dimensions
178
SC-013 / 750-SO
610g / 2610g X 0.1g
6” X 0.8”
18” X 12” X 9”
Code
Capacity(g) X Readability
Weighing Unit
Pan Size
Dimensions
SC-010 / 610g
610g X 0.1g
g, oz, lb, oz troy, and dwt
43/4” DIAMETER
71/4” X 101/2” X 21/4”
17. Ohaus® Diamond MCT500
A rugged dependable balance that combines unsurpassed value with solid
reliability. Features a die cast metal base, tare key and an ergonomic LCD
display. Easy access and total environmental protection by a three door
draft shield.
Code
Capacity(g) X Readability
Weighing Unit
Pan Size
Dimensions
SC-011 / MCT500
500 ct/ 0.001ct
ct, grains, dwt, oz troy, g, tacl(3)
31/2” DIA.
81/2” X 141/3” X 131/2”
™
SCALES
18. Mettler® Toledo Scales Legal-for-Trade
World renowned Mettler® scales manufactured and tested to ISO 9001 standards. Designed specifically
with advanced digital technology to guarantee accuracy and reliable performance. Simple switch over
for weighing in different units such as g, kg, lb, oz, ozt, dwt, ct, GN, tl and mommes. Clear key marking,
simple functions and wide angle back-lit LCD display for error free reading. All glass shield offers good
access and view. Weighing pan of a special chrome steel alloy for protection against scratches.
Optional features: Battery pack for 10 hours portable operation. Computer printer interface (RS232C).
Secondary displays for easy customer viewing.
Model CB203/ A
SC-020
210 ct / 610 ct
0.001 ct / 0.01 ct
0...210 ct/ 0...610 ct
0.001 ct / 0.005 ct
Ø 80mm
190 X 290 X 252mm
Code 110V/ 60Hz
Max. Capacity
Readability
Taring range
Repeatability
Pan Size
Dimensions (W X D X H)
Model CB603/ A
SC-021
610 ct
0.001 ct
0...610 ct
0.001 ct
Ø 80mm
190 X 290 X 252mm
Model CB1503/ DR-A
SC-022
500 ct / 1600 ct
0.001 ct / 0.01 ct
0...1600 ct
0.001 ct / 0.005 ct
Ø 80mm
190 X 290 X 339mm
High Performance Gold Scales Legal-for-Trade
A compact elegant balance specially developed for weighing of gold and jewelry. Error-free instant
results, LCD display with quick change from gram to pennyweight to troy ounce and more. Special
scratch resistant chrome alloy steel pan optimized for everyday use.
Model GB1501/ A
Model GB3001/ A
Code 110V/ 60Hz
SC-025
SC-026
Max. Capacity
1510g
3100g
Readability
0.1g
0.1g
Taring range
0...1510g
0...3100g
Repeatability
0.05g
0.05g
Pan Size
180 X 166mm
180 X 166mm
Dimensions (W X D X H)
190 X 290 X 62mm
190 X 290 X 62mm
Sturdily built, all metal housing balance with a state-of -the -art MonoBloc weighing cell that guarantees
permanent shock and overload protection. Touch key technology for easy change over from gram to
penny weight, troy ounce and more.
Model GB6001/ S-A
Model GB3002/ DR-A Model GB16001/A
Code 110V/ 60Hz
SC-027
SC-028
SC-029
Max. Capacity
6100g
600g / 3100g
16100g
Readability
0.1g
0.01g / 0.1g
0.1g
Taring range
0...6100g
0...3100g
0...16100g
Repeatability
0.05g
0.05g
0.5g
Pan Size
180 X 166mm
180 X 166mm
349 X 232mm
Dimensions (W X D X H)
190 X 290 X 62mm
190 X 290 X 62mm
381 X 321 X 92mm
19. Mettler® Toledo PL-S Scales
The PL-S precision balances are the ideal equipment for easy weighing tasks. A choice of applications for
versatile needs. An extremely compact design and the possibility of battery supply or internal battery charger
for convenient portability. Dimensions (W X D X H) 194 X 225 X 67mm
Code 110V/ 60Hz
Max. Capacity
Readability
Taring range
Repeatability
Pan Size
Model PL202-S
SC-040
210g
0.01g
0...210g
0.008g
Ø 120mm
Model PL601-S
SC-041
610g
0.01g
0...610g
0.08g
Ø 160mm
Model PL1501-S
SC-042
1510
0.1g
0...1510g
0.08g
Ø 160mm
Model PL6000-S
SC-043
6100g
1g
0...6100g
0.8g
Ø 160mm
Accessories for Mettler
CODE
SC-030
SC-031
SC-032
SC-033
SC-034
SC-035
DESCRIPTION
BATTERY PACK- FOR CB AND GB SERIES
INTERFACE CABLE-FOR CB AND GB SERIES
ANTI-THEFT DEVICE- FOR CB AND GB SERIES
CARRYING CASE- FOR GB SERIES
AUXILIARY DISPLAY LC/RS BLD
IMPACT CALCULATING PRINTER LC-P45
179
™
SCALES
20. Sartorius® Scales
Code
Readability
Capacity
Response time
Mass Units
Optional
Pan size
Dimensions (W X D X H)
Code
Readability
Capacity
Response time
Mass Units
Pan size
Dimensions (W X D X H)
Model GM312 / GM612
SC-230 / SC-231
0.01 g
310 g /610 g
1s
tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k,
MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt
9V battery
180 X 180 mm
204 X 297 X 80 mm
Model GM1502/GM1205
SC-232 / SC-233
0.01 g/0.05g
1,500 g /1,200 g
1s
tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k,
MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt
9V battery
174 X 143 mm
188 X 250 X 70 mm
Model GM3101
SC-235
0.1 g
3,100 g
1s
tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k,
MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt
9V battery
174 X 143 mm
188 X 250 X 70 mm
Model GC503
SC-210
0.001 ct
505 ct
1.5s
tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k,
MS, GN, mom, g, kg,lb, oz, ozt
80 mm
188 X 250 X 233mm
Model GC1503
SC-215
0.001/0.01 ct
600/1500 ct
1.5s
tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k,
MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt
80 mm
204 X 270 X 265 mm
Model GC2102
SC-217
0.01 ct (0.001 g)
2,100 ct (420 g)
1.5s
tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola,dwt, bat, k,
MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt
115 mm
204 X 270 X 265 mm
21. Pennyweight/Gram Scale
22. Mini Balance
A single pan precision scale that eliminates the need of individual weights.
Precision fulcrum ensures accurate weighing. A leveling screw is provided
for set up on uneven surfaces.
Sensitive (0.01ct) miniature pan balnce to weigh diamonds and presious
stones. Select from two different models. Includes twezeer and calibrated
weights.Come in a polished wooden box with a carrying case.
CODE
SC-410
SC-450
CODE
SC-399
180
DESCRIPTION
DWT/ GRAM SCALE
CAPACITY
10 ct
50 ct
Scales are warrantied by the manufacturer. Warranty coverage is voided if the product is
tampered with or subjected to misuse in any way. Returns within 5 days after receiving the
merchandise must be in the original packaging.
™
SCREWDRIVERS
1. Precision Screwdriver Sets
Premium quality precision chrome plated screwdrivers with replacement blades.
Anodized brass head freely rotates on ball bearings. Color coded for size.
CODE
SD-007
SD-007
SD-009
DESCRIPTION
9 PCS SET (0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5 AND 3.0mm)
WITH 19 BLADES AND 2 SCREWS
ROTATING STAND WITH 9 PCS SET
2. Precision Screwdrivers
These are chrome plated brass and knurled for a light but sure grip. The head
rotates on ball bearings. Color coded for size.
CODE
SD-011
SD-014
SD-015
SD-016
SD-017
SD-018
SD-019
SD-020
SD-021
SD-022
SD-023
SD-009
SIZE(MM)
0.5mm
0.6mm
0.8mm
1.0mm
1.2mm
1.4mm
1.6mm
1.8mm
2.0mm
2.5mm
3.0mm
COLOR
GREEN
PINK
YELLOW
BLACK
RED
GRAY
VIOLET
ORANGE
GREEN
BLUE
BROWN
3. Reversible Blade Screwdrivers
Precision screwdrivers in straight knurled chromium plated brass. A mini chuck
grips the blade at the lower end. Blades are ground on both sides and may be
reversed when needed. Overall length 80mm.
SCREWDRIVER
SD-310
SD-311
SD-312
SD-313
SD-314
SD-315
SD-316
SD-317
SD-318
SD-318
BLADES
SIZE(MM)
SD-302
0.5mm
SD-303
0.6mm
SD-304
0.7mm
SD-305
0.8mm
SD-306
1.0mm
SD-307
1.2mm
SD-308
1.3mm
SD-309
1.5mm
SET OF 6 (#3-#8)
COLOR
VIOLET
BLUE
WHITE
RED
BROWN
GREEN
BLACK
YELLOW
#
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
4. Screwdrivers with Fixed Blades
High precision screwdrivers in quality tool steel, heat treated for toughness to
withstand wear. Bodies are knurled for a non-slip grip.
SD-008
SD-006
SD-010
182
CODE
SD-060
SD-080
SD-100
SD-120
SD-140
SD-160
SD-200
SD-250
SD-300
SD-006
SD-008
SD-010
SIZE(MM)
COLOR
0.6mm
PINK
0.8mm
YELLOW
1.0mm
BLACK
1.2mm
RED
1.4mm
GRAY
1.6mm
VIOLET
2.0mm
GREEN
2.5mm
BLUE
3.0mm
BROWN
7 PCS SET WITH STAND (0.6 - 2.5mm)
STAND WITH SHARPENING STONE
6 PCS SET (0.8 - 2.0mm)
™
SETTING TOOLS
1. Burnishers-Steel
Polished, straight or curved steel blade, with comfortable hardwood handle. These tools
may be used to open or close bezel settings in hard to reach places. Overall length 6”
2. Adjustable Scraper
CODE
DI-100
DI-101
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT 13/4” BLADE
CURVED 2” BLADE
This adjustable scraper has a holder and a lock screw to permit the setting of the hollow tool
bit for depth of cut. Useful for fine detail scraping of excess solder.
CODE
BS-400
DESCRIPTION
SCRAPER 31/2” LONG
3. Agate Burnishers
Made of natural stone. Straight, knife edged or cone pointed, this super polished surface
smoothes all marks or other imperfections on jewelry.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
BR-725
STRAIGHT
BR-726
KNIFE EDGE
4. Setter’s Tube Holder
Comfortably shaped wooden handle has reinforced metal threaded spindle with chuck.
Accepts interchangeable collets to hold tubes during stone setting.
Can hold sizes from 1/32” to 1/8”.
CODE
HO-017
DESCRIPTION
WITH FOUR COLLETS
5. Setter’s Hold It
This metal vise grips any odd shaped object in specially formed jaws. Additional top clamps
may be aligned with a key to hold bracelets for stone mounting. Holds up to 12 settings and
measures 51/2” overall length.
CODE
HO-020
DESCRIPTION
SETTER’S HOLD IT
6. Prong Lifting Pliers
Special lap joint pliers with a double leaf spring. Provides gentle pressure on the prong and
no pressure on the stone to avoid mar or fracture. One jaw is grooved to hold the prong
and the other angled to support the under side to raise the prong gently.
CODE
PJ-736
DESCRIPTION
PRONG LIFTING PLIER 5”
7. Ring Repair Set
An ideal bench set for ring repair. The ring mandrel can be rotated and adjusted to any
angle for convenience of working. Set includes ring mandrel with base and a well balanced
hammer with changeable heads of steel, aluminum alloy or nylon.
CODE
RI-114
RI-115
184
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET
HAMMER WITH 3 HEADS
™
SETTING TOOLS
8. Prong Pusher
A quality tool having a comfortable wood shaped handle with a grooved
steel end. Use to push prong or crown points with unfailing accuracy.
CODE
DI-098
DESCRIPTION
PRONG PUSHER
9. Bezel Pusher
Square faced, hardened and polished steel pusher, mounted in a hardwood
handle. Use for the initial tightening of prongs and beads.
CODE
DI-099
DESCRIPTION
BEZEL PUSHER
10. Bezel Roller
Effortless method for rolling bezels around stones in rings. The semi
circular highly polished steel head gently folds the metal over the stone.
CODE
HO-035
DESCRIPTION
BEZEL ROLLER
11. Bezel Mandrel
Quite simply, the fastest way to form bezels in different shapes. May also
be used to make decorative wire forms. These mandrels are made of case
hardened steel, precision finished and polished. Mandrel portion is approx.
8” long with a 1/2” to 1/8” taper.
CODE
GM-108
GM-109
GM-110
GM-111
GM-112
GM-113
SHAPE
SQUARE
ROUND
TRIANGLE
OVAL
RECTANGLE
ROUND
LENGTH
11”
8”
11”
11”
11”
11”
12. Prong Lifter Plus with Bezel Pusher
This new design has the advantage for opening cabochon with the
additional feature of a prong pusher. Titanium coated is five times harder
than steel and has a long life. Comes with a comfortable plastic grip handle.
CODE
DI-091
DI-097
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR
TITANIUM COATED
d
oate
mC
iu
Titan
13. Prong Lifter- Economy
A hardened steel tool that includes precision ground slots to fit all sizes of
prongs. Virtually eliminates risk of damage to the stone while mounting,
setting or re-tipping.
CODE
DI-096
DESCRIPTION
PRONG LIFTER
185
™
SETTING TOOLS
14. Ring Setters
A universal tool that allows convenient positioning while setting.
Nine nylon inserts for ring sizes from #2-13. The head unscrews
for alternative mounting in a vise.
CODE
RI-149
RI-150
DESCRIPTION
SETTER’S CLAMP
INSERTS FOR RI-149
15. Special Bench Pin
Use this bench pin with the setters inside ring clamp. This fixture
provides access to all around workability, contributing to higher
productivity.
CODE
AN-417
DESCRIPTION
BENCH PIN FOR RI-149
16. Swiss Beading Tools
Hardened and polished concave tools for beading. Used to form beads to hold diamonds and other stones
in mountings. Overall length 60mm with 2.35mm shank.
60MM
Ø D(MM)
Ø 2.35MM
CODE
BD-700
BD-701
BD-702
BD-703
BD-704
BD-705
BD-706
BD-707
SIZE/ Ø D(MM)
#0/0.25
#1/0.30
#2/0.35
#3/0.40
#4/0.45
#5/0.50
#6/0.55
#7/0.60
CODE
BD-708
BD-709
BD-710
BD-711
BD-712
BD-713
BD-714
BD-715
SIZE/ Ø D(MM)
#8/0.65
#9/0.70
#10/0.75
#11/0.80
#12/0.85
#13/0.90
#14/0.95
#15/1.00
CODE
BD-716
BD-717
BD-718
BD-719
BD-720
BD-721
BD-722
SIZE/ Ø D(MM)
#16/1.05
#17/1.10
#18/1.15
#19/1.20
#20/1.25
#21/1.30
#22/1.35
17. Beading Tool Sets
Steel tool has concave tip that puts beads on prongs to secure
stones in mountings. Set of 12 from #5-16 (0.5 to 1.05mm).
Set of 23 from #0-22 (0.25 to 1.35mm). All on plastic
stands with a handle.
CODE
BD-628
BD-629
Brass Insert
BD-630
BD-631
DESCRIPTION
12 PCS
23 PCS
BEADING TOOL HOLDER
BEADING TOOL CASE
18. Beading Blocks
Precisely formed round or rectangular shapes in hardened polished tool steel. These blocks are essential
to re-shape the ends of the beading tools.
CODE
BD-622
BD-623
BD-621
BD-624
BD-625
186
DESCRIPTION
SUNK-ROUND-FRANCE
RAISED-ROUND-FRANCE
SUNK-RECTANGULAR-FRANCE
RAISED-RECTANGULAR-FRANCE
40 HOLES (0.60-1.75mm)-SWISS
™
SETTING TOOLS
19. Setting Burnisher Sets
Multiple uses as setting closers, burnishing or finishing tubes over stones.
All sets include a heavy duty handle to secure the respective tool, except
BR-733. Choice of five different sets.
Set of 12- French
BR-730
BR-730
Dia. 1.00- 1.50- 2.00- 2.50- 3.00- 3.50- 4.00- 5.00- 5.506.00- 7.00- 8.00mm.
Set of 18- French
BR-731
Dia. 1.00- 1.25- 1.50- 1.75- 2.00- 2.25- 2.50- 2.75- 3.003.25- 3.50- 4.00- 5.00- 5.50- 6.00- 7.00- 8.00mm.
Set of 24- French
BR-732
Dia. 1.50- 1.75- 2.00- 2.25- 2.50- 2.75- 3.00- 3.25- 3.504.00- 4.25- 4.50- 4.75- 5.00- 5.25- 5.50- 6.00- 6.50- 7.007.50- 8.00- 9.00- 10.00mm.
DIA.
1.00-5.50mm
6.00-8.00mm
9.00-10.00mm
BR-731
PROGRESSION
0.25mm
0.50mm
1.00mm
Set of 29- German
BR-732
BR-733
Dia. 2.00- 2.25- 2.50- 2.75- 3.00- 3.25- 3.50- 3.75- 4.004.25- 4.50- 4.75- 5.00- 5.25- 5.50- 5.75- 6.00- 6.25- 6.506.75- 7.00- 7.25- 7.50- 7.75- 8.00- 8.25- 8.50- 8.75- 9.00mm.
Set of 16- Economy
BR-734
Dia. 1.50- 2.00- 2.50- 3.00- 3.50- 4.00- 4.50- 5.00- 5.506.00- 6.50- 7.00- 7.50- 8.00- 8.50- 9.00mm.
BR-733
20. Final Touch
Extremely easy to use for setting stones. Snap in prongs with a single light
tap. The polyurethane base has numerous cavities to locate various stone
sizes during setting.
BR-734
21. Claw Setting Jig
A complete set for making four, six or eight large or small prongs. Filing or
sawing may be done while the setting is held in the jig.
CODE
DI-102
DESCRIPTION
FINAL TOUCH
22. Channel Setting Set- for Faro Handpiece #10
Incorporate this precise system to set stones professionally. A complete set
that fits to the handpiece and allows you to control the cutting depth for
channel set stones. This kit ensures stones are set straight, parallel and
firmly in place.
CODE
RI-166
DESCRIPTION
CLAW SETTING
23. Ring Setter’s Flanges
A set of brass flanges in pairs to clamp wide or narrow band ring
sizes #(1-15) in a vise without any mars. Useful for setting, engraving or
repair work.
CODE
HO-075
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
HO-074
DESCRIPTION
RING SETTER’S FLANGES
187
™
SETTING TOOLS
24. Hardwood Shellac Holders
Shellac holders are available in round, flat face and rotating types. This hand held accessory holds
the work piece while chasing, setting and engraving. Surfaces may be bonded with heated shellac to
retain the article. The rotating wheel type may be locked in any position by a wing nut to allow
viewing. To remove articles dissolve in denatured alcohol.
DI-321
DI-320
DI-322
HO-306
DI-323
CODE
DI-320
DI-321
DI-322
DI-323
HO-306
DESCRIPTION
ROUND 4”- COATED SHELLAC
ROUND 5”- COATED SHELLAC
FLAT FACE-11/2”
FLAT FACE-2”
ROTATING WHEEL
29. Opticon® Fracture Sealer
25. Shellac Flake & Stick
27. Stone Setter’s Cement
Very useful to secure odd shaped articles of jewelry
when stone setting. Shellac becomes soft with
application of heat, and hardens with cold water.
Remove articles by dissolving in denatured alcohol.
Forms an excellent bond for stones when melted
and applied to dops. Securely holds the stone for
polishing and finishing.
CODE
DI-318
CODE
DI-316
DI-319
DESCRIPTION
S/ STICK-1 lb BOX (4 PCS.)
FLAKES-1 lb
26. 3M Glue & Gel
®
A fast curing gel, bonds in a minute, and is very
easy to apply. Needle tip dispenser fills small voids
and forms a strong bond. Useful to bond jewelry,
glass, stone, plastic and wood.
CODE
EP-001
EP-002
188
DESCRIPTION
SUPER GLUE GEL-6001
SUPER STRENGTH-6004
A two part epoxy that penetrates hair line
cracks, and is very effective for sealing fractures
in stones. 8 fl oz sealer, 1 oz hardener.
SIZE
4” X 4” X 5/16”
28. Epoxy 330/220
Epoxy 330: A clear epoxy for invisible bonds on
glass, stone, or findings. Exhibits a high polish on
inlay work. Air curing time approx. 2 hours. Apply
light heat to reduce curing time.
Epoxy 220: A heat resistant epoxy for bonding
findings to stone. Has a higher tensile strength.
Air curing time approx. 8 hours. Low heat reduces
curing time.
CODE
EP-007
EP-008
DESCRIPTION
EPOXY 220
EPOXY 330
CODE
EP-009
DESCRIPTION
FRACTURE SEALER
30. Attack Epoxy Solvent
A solvent that works on stone, wood or glass
to remove excess cured epoxy.
CODE
EP-005
CAPACITY
8 fl oz
™
SOLDERING
1. Adjustable Scraper
4. Titanium Solder Pic
This adjustable scraper has a holder and a lock screw to set the hollow tool
bit for depth of cut. Useful for fine detail scraping of excess solder.
Solder will not adhere to this titanium rod fitted with a heat resistant handle.
Used to spread solder to the desired area when soldering gold or silver.
CODE
BS-400
DESCRIPTION
SCRAPER 31/2” LONG
2. Tungsten Solder Pic
Made of tungsten, this pick will withstand high temperatures. A good aid for
fine detail soldering. Ideal for use on platinum, but may also be used for
gold and silver.
CODE
SP-360
CODE
SP-361
DESCRIPTION
TITANINUM
5. Soldering Tweezers
Cross locking stainless steel tweezers with serrated tips and fiber handles,
to protect hands from heat when soldering. Overall length 63/4”.
DESCRIPTION
TUNGSTEN
3. Copper Tongs
These tongs are suitable to use when immersing articles in pickling or
acidic solutions. Will not contaminate nor corrode the solutions.
CODE
TW-473
TW-474
DESCRIPTION
BENT
STRAIGHT
6. Solder Cutting Plier
Ideal tool for cutting uniform pieces of solder. All steel construction, lapped
joints and plastic coated handles, for easy shearing.
Overall length 5”/130mm.
CODE
TW-444
TW-445
DESCRIPTION
BENT- 9”
FISH TAIL- 9”
CODE
PJ-038
DESCRIPTION
SOLDER CUTTING PLIER
7. Third Hand Round Base
Useful accessory that assists positioning of work pieces during soldering.
Unit has a stable base, with cross locking tweezers that can be adjusted to
the required angle for working.
CODE
HO-010
HO-011
TW-477
190
DESCRIPTION
THIRD HAND W/TWEEZERS
BASE ONLY
CROSS LOCK TWEEZERS
™
SOLDERING
8. GRS Third Hand Soldering Station
®
The ultimate work station for all your soldering applications. Mounted on a
metal base with a replaceable non-asbestos working platform. Chose from
two styles; one third hand or two third hands. Hands have spring action
grips. Tilts and rotates in any conceivable position.
CODE
HO-014
HO-015
HO-015-02
HO-015-03
HO-016
DESCRIPTION
THIRD HAND ON WEIGHTED BASE
DOUBLE STATION
SOLDERING BOARD-4”
SOLDERING BOARD-6”
TC JAWS
HO-015
HO-014
HO-015-02
HO-015-03
9. Platinum Soldering Station
This soldering station is designed to be used for soldering platinum as it
prevents contamination during the process. A complete work station
includes carbide tipped tweezers, carbide solder pick, and a replaceable
solder board.
CODE
HO-015-01
HO-015-04
SO-114
DESCRIPTION
GRS® PLATINUM SOLDERING STATION WITH SO-114
GRS® SOLDERING PLATFORM -6”
PLATINUM SOLDERING BOARD -6” X 6”
HO-015-01
HO-015-04
SO-114
11. Double Clamp Stand
Heavy work base with universal adjustment to two spring loaded clips.
This fixture increases flexibility and simplifies soldering of multiple pieces.
10. Third Hand Stainless Steel
This third hand is distinctly different as it is a stainless steel weighted base
unit. Available in two styles: one third hand or two third hand. Reduce soldering set up time with the all around flexibility these third hands supply.
They can twist, rotate and bend any desired position.
CODE
HO-012
DESCRIPTION
DOUBLE CLAMP STAND
12. Ceramic Ring Stand
Ceramic tapered rod on a heavy base to suit all ring sizes. Mounted in a
universal joint to position the work. Practical to use for all types of assembly
and repair.
CODE
HO-011-01
HO-011-02
DESCRIPTION
THIRD HAND S.S- SINGLE
THIRD HAND S.S-DOUBLE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CODE
HO-009
HO-013
DESCRIPTION
HOLDER WITH BASE
SPARE CERAMIC ROD
191
™
SOLDERING
13. Rotating Soldering Table
Allows convenient positioning in any angle as the
table revolves on ball bearings. Low height and
special honey comb design provides firm holding of
small parts. 51/2” diameter.
CODE
SO-100
SO-099
DESCRIPTION
SET WITH LAVA DISC
REPLACEMENT DISC
CODE
SO-104
SO-105
DESCRIPTION
OVAL 61/2” X 3” X 1”
ROUND 4” X 1”
CODE
SO-107
SO-108
SIZE
33/4” X 51/2” X 1/2”
51/2” X 73/4” X 1/2”
CODE
SO-109
SIZE
6” X 3” X 2”
CODE
SO-110
SIZE
6” X 6” X 1/2”
CODE
SO-111
SO-112
SO-113
SIZE
6” X 6” X 1/2”
6” X 12” X 1/2”
12” X 12” X 1/2”
CODE
SO-114-01
SO-114
SIZE
4” X 4” X 1/2”
6” X 6” X 1/2”
14. Ceramic Soldering Blocks
Non-asbestos blocks, suitable to withstand high
temperatures up to 2000°F/1093°C with little or no
thermal expansion. A flat working surface that
retains heat and cleans easily.
15. Honeycomb Soldering Blocks
Most commonly used ceramic block, that has fine
pores to accelerate the heat loss from parts being
soldered. Holes may be used to retain fine wire
articles or used as anchor points. Asbestos free,
these blocks withstand temperatures up to 2000°F.
16. Magnesia Block
An economical type block that is porous and fireproof. Lasts longer than charcoal blocks.
Soft enough to enable work to be pressed into the
surface and steadied while soldering.
17. Silica Soldering Board
A novel type of board that is soft and flexible, yet will
not break if dropped. Useful to hold articles of
different types. Withstands temperatures up to
2500°F.
18. Silquar Hi-Heat Boards
A non-asbestos soldering board. Withstands heat to
a maximum temperature 2000°F/1093°C.
Cleans easily with water.
19. Soldering Boards for Platinum
Made of super refractory material, these boards
meet the demand of high temperature soldering of
platinum. Extremely low thermal conductivity,
without loss of strength, these boards are free of
any metallic impurities.
192
™
SOLDERING
20. Solderite Boards
™
An entirely new material that is asbestos free, flame
resistant and non-combustible. These boards have
good heat reflection and insulating qualities.
In addition, they will not flake or crumble, making it
the best all purpose board for soldering.
CODE
SO-115
SO-116
SO-117
SIZE
6” X 6” X 1/2”
6” X 12” X 1/2”
12” X 12” X 1/2”
21. Charcoal Block
Made from selected soft wood. Easy to pin or press
work pieces while soldering. Creates a reducing
atmosphere and reflects heat back on the article
being soldered.
CODE
SO-118
SIZE
51/2” X 23/4” X 11/8”
22. Thermic Isolator Grain
Granular, irregular shaped grains used to support
work pieces during soldering. May be used wet or
dry. Indispensable when soldering unusual shapes
of jewelry items.
CODE
SO-121
DESCRIPTION
SOLDERING GRAINS-500g
23. Solder Station with Lighter
Handy solder station has a durable non-asbestos
solder board with a built-in lighter. Instant ignition,
saves gas. Operates on 4-AA batteries.
Size 4” X 2” X 10”.
CODE
SO-092
SO-093
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE UNIT
SOLDER BOARD FOR SO-092
24. Picklers
This 14 oz. capacity pickler is safe and effective for removing oxides or fire
scale from the surfaces of gold, silver and non-ferrous alloys. Comes with
acid resistant retrieval baskets for easy immersion and removal. Constant
bath temperature at 140°F/60°C. Provided with polypropylene perforated
basket for easy immersion and retrieval of articles of jewelry, while working
with hot pickling solutions.
CODE
PB-210
PB-211
PB-217
DESCRIPTION
14 oz 110V/ 60Hz
14 oz 220V/ 50Hz
BASKET
25. Sparex® Pickling Compound
Non-flammable, granular dry acid compound, for use in Picklers. Cleans
and removes surface oxidation and fire scale discoloration, on gold, silver
and non-ferrous alloys. Works efficiently at a constant temperature of
140°F/60°C.
CODE
SO-129
SO-128
SO-129-01
DESCRIPTION
COMPOUND 10 oz
COMPOUND 21/2 lb
COMPOUND 45 lb DRUM
193
™
SOLDERING
26. Needle Tip Flux Dispenser
Eliminate messy flux brushes by using this squeeze
bottle dispenser. Spot dispensing puts the flux
exactly where required. Keeps flux free of dust and
other contaminants.
CODE
SO-363
CAPACITY
2 oz
CODE
SO-362
CAPACITY
4 oz
CODE
SO-122
DESCRIPTION
TIX SOLDER
CODE
SO-126
DESCRIPTION
TIX FLUX- 1/2 oz
CODE
SO-127
DESCRIPTION
ANTI-TIX FLUX- 1/2 oz
CODE
SO-350
DESCRIPTION
STAY BRIGHT SET
CODE
SO-360
SO-361
CAPACITY
1 qt
1 gal
27. Pump Flux Dispenser
Durable plastic bottle. Easy to refill with flux.
Dispenses a limited amount of flux or other liquid
into a reservoir. Very useful for brush application.
28. Tix Solder
A specially prepared solder that adheres easily to
all solderable materials. Melts at 275°F. It has
extraordinary bonding strength, stays bright and will
not tarnish. Package of 20 rods 3” length.
29. Tix Flux®
A liquid non-corrosive flux, harmless to hands or
clothing. Compatible with most soft solders to
increase fluidity. Washes away with water, even
after drying.
30. Anti-Tix Flux®
A liquid mask that when brushed on will prevent
solder flow to unwanted areas. May be used for
hard or soft solders.
31. Stay Bright Soldering Set
Slightly higher temperature bearing solder, melts at
450°F. May be used with a soldering torch or gun.
Use Stay Clean flux to achieve good flow
characteristics. Includes 1/2 oz. of solder and 1/2 fl oz.
of Stay Clean flux.
32. Hard Soldering Flux
A different kind of flux that has self pickling and
adhesive qualities. Holds solder bits in place and
preserves the color and temper of the material.
Suitable for metals with high melting points.
194
™
SOLDERING
33. Dandix Paste Flux
A paste flux for low temperature soldering.
Contains no fluoride and prevents discoloration or
oxide buildup. Apply with a brush where needed to
assist solder flow.
CODE
SO-352
SO-353
SO-354
DESCRIPTION
11/2 oz. (44 ml) JAR
8 oz. (237 ml) JAR
16 oz. (473 ml) JAR
CODE
SO-138
SO-139
SO-140
DESCRIPTION
YELLOW EASY 10K/ 1240°F
YELLOW EASY 14K/ 1290°F
SILVER EASY/ 1205°F
CODE
SO-120
CAPACITY
4 oz
CODE
SO-119
SO-119-01
DESCRIPTION
16 oz JAR
32 oz JAR
CODE
SO-123
SO-124
SO-125
CAPACITY
8 oz
1 lb
5 lb
CODE
SO-102
SO-103
DESCRIPTION
2 lb JAR
POWDER CONE
CODE
SO-101
DESCRIPTION
11/2 lb JAR
34. Solder Paste
Ready to use, pre-mixed alloy and flux in a dispensable syringe. Eliminates waste by spot application.
Select from color matches with the base material to
give a professional appearance.
35. Cool Paste
Frequently used, non-toxic, non-asbestos, paste for
localized protection from heat damage during
soldering and brazing. Effective up to 2000°F.
Easily cleansed by water.
36. Cold Shield
A non-toxic, non-corrosive, paste that protects
stones, plastics, and precious metals from damage
by heat while soldering or brazing. Withstands heat
up to 3000°F. Cleans away easily with water.
37. Handy® Flux
An economical long lasting paste flux that sustains
prolonged heating. Contains fluoride, potassium
and hydroxides. Widely used by silversmiths for
soldering gold, silver, brass and non-ferrous metals.
38. Borax® Powder
Makes paste by the addition of water.
When applied, acts as a flux and allows solder to
flow. Best used to line the insides of crucibles, as it
helps extend crucible life.
39. Boric Acid Powder
Dissolve in denatured spirit, in a glass container, to
make a liquid flux. Recommended for general
soldering tasks. Keep covered as it evaporates
easily.
Safety Instructions
Page 40
195
™
SOLDERING
40. Binding Wire-Iron & Copper
Pure Copper wire, soft and pliable, for suspending articles of jewelry in plating baths. Do not use for
rhodium or electro stripping.
Iron Wire for binding various items together, may be used during soldering.
CODE
PE-150
PE-151
PE-152
PE-153
41. Sheet Repair Solders- Cadmium Free
Solder in sheet form for the identical color match to the
carat of the piece to be soldered. All free flowing to
provide a strong permanent joint. Available in three
grades. Sold one dwt (1.555g).
42. Plumb Solders- Cadmium Free
High quality solders manufactured to stringent standards for uniformity and color. Guaranteed flow temperature for each grade. Available in three grades.
Sold one dwt (1.555g).
GAUGE
18
20
22
24
TYPE
1 lb COPPER
1 lb COPPER
1 lb COPPER
1 lb COPPER
CODE
PE-160
PE-161
PE-162
PE-163
CODE
GRADE
SO-146
SO-150
SO-151
SO-152
SO-154
SO-155
SO-156
SO-158
SO-159
SO-160
6W EASY
10W EASY
10W MEDIUM
10W HARD
14W EASY
14W MEDIUM
14W HARD
18W EASY
18W MEDIUM
18W HARD
FLOW
TEMP °F
1390
1365
1425
1550
1380
1440
1570
1465
1495
1590
CODE
GRADE
SO-188
SO-190
SO-191
SO-192
SO-194
SO-195
SO-196
SO-198
SO-200
8K WP EASY
10K WP EASY
10K WP MEDIUM
10K WP HARD
14K WP EASY
14K WP MEDIUM
14K WP HARD
18K WP EASY
18K WP HARD
44. Silver Solders
Manufactured to exacting quality control standards with consistency
of melting and flow point. Available in sheet. Sold in dwt.
INCH
0.032
0.025
0.020
0.016
TYPE
8 oz IRON
8 oz IRON
8 oz IRON
8 oz IRON
CODE
GRADE
SO-166
SO-168
SO-170
SO-171
SO-172
SO-174
SO-175
SO-176
SO-178
SO-179
SO-180
6Y EASY
8Y EASY
10Y EASY
10Y MEDIUM
10Y HARD
14Y EASY
14Y MEDIUM
14Y HARD
18Y EASY
18Y MEDIUM
18Y HARD
FLOW
TEMP °F
1345
1350
1340
1395
1475
1395
1380
1471
1425
1495
1535
Yellow Gold Solder
White Gold Solder
A perfect solder for platinum to avoid problems of porosity and
color match. Available in three different grades. Sold one dwt
(1.555g).
GAUGE
20
22
24
26
Yellow Gold Solder
White Gold Solder
43. Platinum Solders- Cadmium Free
196
INCH
0.040
0.032
0.025
0.020
FLOW
TEMP °F
1420
1390
1435
1570
1390
1450
1570
1460
1610
CODE
GRADE
SO-206
SO-208
SO-210
SO-211
SO-212
SO-214
SO-215
SO-216
SO-218
SO-219
SO-220
6K YP EASY
8K YP EASY
10K YP EASY
10K YP MEDIUM
10K YP HARD
14K YP EASY
14K YP MEDIUM
14K YP HARD
18K YP EASY
18K YP MEDIUM
18K YP HARD
CODE
% PT.
SO-230
SO-231
SO-232
90% EASY
92.5% MEDIUM
95% HARD
CODE
GRADE
SO-235
SO-236
SO-237
EASY
MEDIUM
HARD
FLOW
POINT °F
1325
1360
1450
FLOW
TEMP °F
1350
1360
1375
1400
1475
1340
1390
1480
1430
1475
1550
MELT.
TEMP °F
1400
1475
1550
MELT.
POINT °F
1240
1275
1365
™
STAMPING
1. Precision Ring Stamps
Steel stamps, with precision cut, available in two height sizes. Stamps are square body. Size #2 =(1/32”, 0.8mm), Size#3=(1/45”, 0.6mm).
These stamps may be used on a stamping machine.
Bent
IMPRESSION
#2
18K
0.8mm
14K
0.6mm
#3
9K
10K
12K
14K
14KP
18K
21K
22K
24K
999
9999
©
Sterling
Platinum
PLAT
STER
417
585
750
875
916
921
925
950
SS
9CT
10CT
14CT
18CT
22CT
SIL
Straight
#2
#3
PU-209
PU-210
PU-212
PU-214
PU-220
PU-218
PU-221
PU-222
PU-224
PU-228
PU-229
PU-230
PU-240
PU-250
PU-249
PU-257
PU-317
PU-358
PU-375
PU-387
PU-391
PU-393
PU-392
PU-390
PU-225
PU-251
PU-252
PU-253
PU-254
PU-255
PU-256
PU-393-01
PU-395
PU-394
PU-396
PU-396-01
PU-397
PU-399
PU-400
PU-401
PU-408
PU-428
PU-402
PU-403
PU-404
PU-398
PU-398-01
PU-429
PU-405
PU-406
PU-425
PU-426
PU-426-01
PU-407
PU-427
PU-261
PU-262
PU-263
PU-264
PU-265
PU-266
PU-267
Deluxe Ring Stamp Set- Bent
CODE
PU-509
PU-510
PU-527
PU-530
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #3
SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #2
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #2
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #3
IMPRESSION
#2
18K
0.8mm
14K
0.6mm
#3
9K
10K
12K
14K
14KP
18K
21K
22K
24K
999
9999
©
Sterling
Platinum
PLAT
STER
417
585
750
875
916
921
925
950
SS
9CT
10CT
22CT
SIL
#2
#3
PU-109
PU-110
PU-112
PU-114
PU-115
PU-118
PU-121
PU-122
PU-124
PU-128
PU-129
PU-130
PU-140
PU-150
PU-149
PU-151
PU-141
PU-158
PU-175
PU-187
PU-191
PU-191-01
PU-192
PU-193
PU-194
PU-195
PU-196
PU-197
PU-198
PU-016
PU-017
PU-018
PU-019
PU-019-01
PU-020
PU-021
PU-022
PU-023
PU-028
PU-024
PU-025
PU-026
PU-032
PU-031
PU-031-01
PU-030
PU-033
PU-034
PU-035-01
PU-035-02
PU-035-03
PU-035
PU-029
PU-035-05
PU-035-06
PU-035-07
PU-035-08
PU-035-09
Deluxe Ring Stamp Set- Straight
CODE
PU-275
PU-276
PU-286
PU-287
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #2
SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #3
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #2
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #3
2. Ring Stamping Machine
A new cam operated stamping machine that lets you accomplish
precision marking on the inside of all ladies and gents rings. Rings
are positioned precisely in non marring jigs and impressions can be
controlled with a smooth acting hand lever. Additional jig converts for
flat surface marking as well. Clear top view technique allows you to
mark with ease and confidence.
CODE
PU-001
198
DESCRIPTION
RING STAMPING MACHINE
™
STAMPING
3. Marking Plier
Durable stainless steel ring marking plier to stamp the inside of rings as well as other flat
surfaces. Plier has adjustable screw to lock different stamps. Individual stamps are
available separately. Overall length 51/2” long.
CODE
PJ-910
PJ-911
PJ-912
PJ-913
DESCRIPTION
PLIER ONLY
MARKING PLIER BOX ONLY
FLAT AND RADIUS ANVIL FOR PLIER
PLIER WITH 3 STAMPS (10K, 14K, 18K)
7
3.9
4. Stamps for Marking Plier
11
Steel stamps of the finest quality, made in round shanks, and suitable for use in the marking plier.
Impressions are available in radius or flat. Impression height Size #2 =(1/32”, 0.8mm), Size#3=(1/45”, 0.6mm).
Radius
9K
10K
12K
14K
14KP
18K
20K
21K
22K
24K
999
9999
©
Sterling
Platinum
PLAT
STER
417
585
750
875
916
921
925
950
SS
9CT
10CT
22CT
SIL
Flat
#2
IMPRESSION
#2
#3
PU-409
PU-410
PU-412
PU-414
PU-415
PU-418
PU-420
PU-421
PU-422
PU-424
PU-499
PU-500
PU-430
PU-440
PU-450
PU-448
PU-449
PU-451
PU-458
PU-475
PU-455
PU-491
PU-491-01
PU-492
PU-495
PU-496
PU-497
PU-498
PU-501
PU-502
PU-535
PU-536
PU-537
PU-538
PU-539
PU-540
PU-541
PU-542
PU-543
PU-544
PU-545
PU-546
PU-547
PU-548
PU-549
PU-550
PU-551
PU-552
PU-553
PU-554
PU-555
PU-556
PU-557
PU-558
PU-559
PU-560
PU-561
PU-562
PU-563
18K
0.8mm
14K
0.6mm
IMPRESSION
#3
7
3.9
11
Marking Plier Set
CODE
PU-511
PU-512
PU-513
PU-514
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 10 PCS (0-9).#2
SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #3
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z).#2
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #3
9K
10K
12K
14K
14KP
18K
21K
22K
24K
999
9999
©
Sterling
Platinum
PLAT
STER
417
585
750
875
916
921
925
950
SS
9CT
10CT
22CT
SIL
#2
#3
PU-567
PU-568
PU-569
PU-570
PU-571
PU-572
PU-573
PU-574
PU-575
PU-576
PU-577
PU-578
PU-579
PU-580
PU-581
PU-582
PU-583
PU-584
PU-585
PU-586
PU-587
PU-588
PU-589
PU-590
PU-591
PU-592
PU-593
PU-594
PU-595
PU-600
PU-601
PU-602
PU-603
PU-604
PU-605
PU-606
PU-607
PU-608
PU-609
PU-610
PU-611
PU-612
PU-613
PU-614
PU-615
PU-616
PU-617
PU-618
PU-619
PU-620
PU-621
PU-622
PU-623
PU-624
PU-625
PU-626
PU-627
PU-628
5. Stamping Anvil
2. Ring Stamping Device
Standard square body stamps may be used on the
machine to eliminate holding of the ring by one hand
and stamping with the other. Ring may be positioned
in soft nylon anvil to eliminate mars on the surface.
Flat stamping can also be done by use of a flat anvil.
Stamps must be ordered separately.
CODE
PU-015
DESCRIPTION
RING STAMPING DEVICE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
This brass anvil secures ring bands in the cavity during stamping.
Grooves are designed for different ring size shanks. One side is for
ladies rings and the other side is for men’s rings.
CODE
PU-010
PU-012
PU-014
DESCRIPTION
MALE
FEMALE
COMBO
199
™
STAMPING
6. Ring Stamps- Imported
7. Stamp Sets- Imported
High quality steel square body stamps, used to stamp impression on
metal surfaces. Very clear and precise marking on the inside of rings.
Steel stamp set for manual marking of alphabet and numbers. Note, in the number set #6 is also used as #9.
18K
Bent
1mm
Letter Height
IMPRESSION
1MM
9K
10K
12K
14K
18K
22K
24K
99.99
©
STERLING
PLATINUM
PT
585
750
916
925
950
SS
PU-632
PU-633
PU-634
PU-635
PU-637
PU-639
PU-640
PU-642
PU-643
PU-644
PU-645
PU-646
PU-649
PU-650
PU-652
PU-654
PU-655
PU-656
PU-532
PU-531
PU-534
PU-533
CODE
PU-531
PU-532
PU-533
PU-534
Straight
IMPRESSION
1MM
9K
10K
12K
14K
18K
22K
24K
99.99
©
STERLING
PLATINUM
PT
585
750
916
925
950
SS
PU-692
PU-693
PU-694
PU-695
PU-697
PU-699
PU-700
PU-702
PU-703
PU-704
PU-705
PU-706
PU-709
PU-710
PU-712
PU-714
PU-715
PU-716
DESCRIPTION
SET OF 9 PCS (0-9)-STRAIGHT
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z)-STRAIGHT
SET OF 9 PCS (0-9)-BENT
SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z)-BENT
8. Economy Stamp Sets
Steel stamp set for marking impression on metal surfaces.
Character height 1/16”. Note, in the number set #6 is also used as #9.
Sets are organized on a hardwood stand. Letter set has A-Z and period.
PU-529
PU-528
CODE
PU-528
PU-529
DESCRIPTION
STAMP SET OF 9 PCS(0-9)
STAMP SET OF 27 PCS(A-Z)
9. Automatic Center Punch
PU-524
Mark on all metals without using a hammer. This compact tool delivers pin
point impressions with a simple depression of the hand. The impression
depth may be varied by adjusting the knurled screw head. Very useful for
layout work.
PU-525
PU-526
CODE
PU-524
PU-525
PU-526
DESCRIPTION
CENTER PUNCH & SCRIBER
GERMAN
STARRETT-USA
For custom orders of stamps and logos please specify the following:
• Type of stamp (straight, bent or plier) • Letter height and style • Art work of your logo
200
™
SURFACE FINISHING
1. Vibratory Tumbler -TV-5
4. Vibratory Tumbler TD-40
A light duty tumbler, with a pre-set amplitude, this machine is best suited for
small batches of up to 25 ladies average sized rings. Complete with bowl
and cover, it is just 9” in height. May be used with all types of media, plastic, shell or hardwood. Cannot be used with a flow through (FT) system.
These tumblers have eccentric weights, to adjust the amplitude of the
bowl from a gentle wave to an aggressive motion. Bowls are made of
cross linked polyethylene suitable for all general media. Shot bowl must
be used when changing media to steel shot. Bowls are hinged to swing
over for easy discharge of parts on to a separating screen.
CODE
TB-019
TB-024
TB-003
CODE
TB-022
TB-023
TB-027
DESCRIPTION
TV-5 110V/ 60Hz
TV-5 220V/ 50Hz
B-5 SPARE BOWL
DESCRIPTION
TD-40 110V/ 60Hz
TD-40 220V/ 50Hz
B-40 SPARE BOWL
5. Vibratory Tumbler TD-75
2. Vibratory Tumbler-TV-10
A medium duty tumbler, of fixed amplitude, but with a larger bowl capacity
of up to 50 average size ladies rings. Use with all types of media, except
steel shot. May be run wet or dry. A drain connection allows you to use the
flow through (FT) system. Overall height is 16” approx.
CODE
TB-001
TB-002
TB-002-01
Powerful robust machine for processing large quantities of parts, either
de-buring or finishing. Generates an identical surface finish in minimum
time. Holds up to 350 average sized ladies rings. Hinged bowl 21” dia.
facilitates easy removal of parts and media. Bowl must be replaced with
shot bowl to use steel shot media. Designed for flow through (FT)
system. Overall height 28”.
CODE
TB-016
TB-017
TB-015
DESCRIPTION
TV-10 110V/ 60Hz
TV-10 220V/ 50Hz
B-10 SPARE BOWL
DESCRIPTION
TD-75 110V/ 60Hz
TD-75 220V/ 50Hz
B-75 SPARE BOWL
3. Vibratory Tumbler- TV-18
6. Adjusta-Vibe 25SS
Large capacity, heavy duty tumbler, that will process up to 90 average size
ladies rings. Recommended for small to mid-level production. Tumble finish
with all types of media, except steel shot. May be run wet or dry. Use the
flow through (FT) method to keep parts bright and clean.
Overall height 17” approx.
Designed for vibratory finishing with steel shot media up to 50 lbs.
Large bowl on a suspension system with a heavy duty drive provides
the amplitude for tumbling of rough cast parts. Bowl is 14” dia. and has
a side drain to remove parts and media. Designed for flow through (FT)
system. Overall height is 17” approx.
CODE
TB-004
TB-005
TB-006
202
DESCRIPTION
TV-18 110V/ 60Hz
TV-18 220V/ 50Hz
B-18 SPARE BOWL/ DRAIN
CODE
TB-007
TB-008
TB-009
DESCRIPTION
25SS 110V/ 60Hz
25SS 220V/ 50Hz
BS-20 SPARE BOWL
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
SURFACE FINISHING
7. Adjusta-Vibe 40SS
10. Flow Thru System
Large capacity, for use with steel shot media up to 100 lbs. Engineered to
withstand the most aggressive vibratory amplitudes. Well supported
suspension with a direct drive system. This unit is ideal for mass production
and is recommended for finishing parts from rough castings in minimum
time. Side drain contributes to ease of removal of parts and media. Bowl is
16” dia. Designed for flow through (FT) system. Height is 20” approx.
Upgrade vibratory finishing by integrating this system for automatic flow of
fluid. Keeps the media and parts cool and lubricated, by a steady drip of
water and compound, to improve the quality of finish. Constructed of heavy
gauge steel, the base has a vertical support for the upper container, for
gravity feed of the fluid and a lower container for spent solution. System
includes two containers, adjustable flow valve, 0-5 hr. timer and an
electrical plug in for the tumbler.
Use Model FT-20 for TV-10 & TV-18
Use Model FT-25 for TD-75, AV-25SS, AV-40SS, AV-40 & AV-75.
CODE
TB-010
TB-011
TB-012
DESCRIPTION
40SS 110V/ 60Hz
40SS 220V/ 50Hz
BS-33 SPARE BOWL
CODE
TB-020
TB-021
DESCRIPTION
FT-20 W/TIMER 110V/ 60Hz
FT-25 W/TIMER 220V/ 50Hz
8. Adjusta-Vibe 40
Medium sized vibrator finisher with a capacity of 200 average ladies sized
rings. Variable amplitude to do de-burring or polishing. This model has a
17” diameter bowl, hinged for forward tilting. Accepts all types of ceramic,
plastic, shell or hardwood media, and may be run wet or dry. It is equipped
for use with the flow through (FT) system. Overall height is 24” approx.
11. Vibratory Tumblers
Designed for mass finishing with ceramic, plastic or synthetic media.
Achieve consistent finishes with minimum down time. Bowls are large
heavy polyethylene, reinforced for durability, and provided with easily
removable covers for in process inspection. All models have ball bearing
motors, with thermal overload protection, and valves with a strainer for
fitment to an optional flow through (FT) system.
CODE
TB-025
TB-026
TB-027
DESCRIPTION
AV40 110V/ 60Hz
AV40 220V/ 50Hz
B-40 SPARE BOWL
9. Adjusta-Vibe 75
This version is similar to the above model #40, but has a large 20” diameter
bowl that will tumble finish 375 ladies rings. Compatible with all types of
media, except steel shot. Designed for use with a flow through(FT) system
that delivers pieces with a consistent bright finish. Overall height is 28”
approx.
CODE
TB-013
TB-014
TB-015
DESCRIPTION
AV75 110V/ 60Hz
AV75 220V/ 50Hz
B-75 SPARE BOWL
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CAPACITY
3 qt
6 qt
43/4 gal
CODE
TB-202
TB-203
TB-204
TB-200
TB-201
TB-205
TB-206
TB-207
TB-208
TB-209
WORK PIECES
50 RINGS
100 RINGS
300 RINGS
CAPACITY
DIMENSION
3 qt FT
10” X 4”
3 qt
10’ X 4”
3 qt
10” X 4”
6 qt FT
111/2” X 12”
6 qt FT
111/2” X 12”
6 qt
111/2” X 12”
6 qt
111/2” X 12”
3
4 /4 gal FT
17” X 7”
43/4 gal FT
17” X 7”
ULTRA VIBER MOTOR
MAX. LOAD
10 lbs
10 lbs
10 lbs
18 lbs
18 lbs
18 lbs
18 lbs
57 lbs
57 lbs
POWER
110V/ 60Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
203
™
SURFACE FINISHING
12. Magnetic Finishers
An ingenious, new approach to the mass finishing of work pieces that have cuts, slots, recesses and filigree.
Achieve excellent results with freely moving micro stainless steel pins and balls, that create numerous
impacts by centrifugal motion. Features fixed or variable speeds, manual or programmable. All models have
see through bowls with a cover for easy loading. Complete instructions included.
All programmable finishers have a variable speed control and a forward/reverse switch selector.
CODE
TB-064
TB-065
TB-066
TB-067
TB-068
TB-069
TB-070
TB-071
PINS
CAPACITY
100g
100g
200g
200g
500g
500g
1 Kg
1 Kg
RING
CAPACITY
12
12
30
30
100
100
225
225
BOWL
DIA.
4”/100mm
4”/100mm
6”/150mm
6”/150mm
9”/230mm
9”/230mm
12”/300mm
12”/300mm
TIMER
MECHANICAL
MECHANICAL
PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE
VOLTS
HZ/HP
110V/ 60Hz 1/32
220V/ 50Hz 1/32
110V/ 60Hz 1/12
220V/ 50Hz 1/12
110V/ 60Hz 1/3
220V/ 50Hz 1/3
110V/ 60Hz 1/3
220V/ 50Hz 1/3
Spares for Magnetic Tumblers
MOTOR
TB-081
TB-082
TB-083
TB-084
TB-085
TB-086
TB-087
TB-088
ARMATURE
TB-102
TB-103
TB-104
TB-105
TB-106
TB-107
TB-108
TB-109
FOR
TB-064
TB-065
TB-066
TB-067
TB-068
TB-069
TB-070
TB-071
CODE
TB-075
TB-076
TB-077
TB-078
BOWL DIA.
4”/100mm
6”/150mm
9”/230mm
12”/300mm
CODE
TB-091
TB-092
CIRCUIT BOARD
115/ 60Hz
230/ 50Hz
CODE
TB-110
TB-111
TIMER
MECHANICAL
PROGRAMMABLE
CODE
TB-098
TB-099
TB-100
TB-101
CARBON BRUSHES
100mm
150mm
230mm
300mm
14. Magnetic Separators
13. S/Steel Magnetic Pins & Balls
Made of quality material, these micro pins and balls must
be used with a small amount of burnishing compound and
mild detergent in magnetic finishers. For finishing delicate
jewelry, use steel balls that rotate gently within the bowl.
CODE
TB-400
TB-401
TB-402
204
DESCRIPTION
0.5 X 5mm 250g - PIN
0.3 X 5mm 250g - PIN
1.2mm 200g - BALL
Separate media from parts with this trigger activated accessory. Fast,
simple hold and release action, easy to stir in the bowl and discharge the
media into the plastic container. Media can then be stored and reused.
CODE
TB-079
TB-080
DESCRIPTION
SMALL
LARGE
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
SURFACE FINISHING
15. Rotary Tumblers
Rotary tumblers are stable well balanced units that are capable of processing larger work pieces with
heavier media. Process times are longer than vibratory finishing, but a distinct advantage is that the
surface of work pieces get work hardened. Barrels are multi sided, made of tough polycarbonate, leak
proof and will not corrode or rust. Use with all types of media including steel shot. Addition of burnishing
compound and detergent, keeps parts cool and avoids drag during tumbling. Features include variable
speed, a programmable timer, forward/reverse and auto shut off with buzzer.
CODE
TB-049
TB-050
TB-051
TB-052
TB-053
TB-054
DESCRIPTION
ROTATING TUMBLER 1 kg
ROTATING TUMBLER 1 kg
ROTATING TUMBLER 2 kg
ROTATING TUMBLER 2 kg
ROTATING TUMBLER 7 kg
ROTATING TUMBLER 7 kg
BOWL DIMENSION
51/2” X 4”
51/2” X 4”
71/2” X 51/2”
71/2” X 51/2”
111/2” X 41/2”
111/2” X 41/2”
POWER
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
Spares for Rotary Tumbler
MOTOR
BELT FOR BARREL
MOTOR BELT
REPLACEMENT BARREL
CARBON BRUSH
1 KG
TB-043
TB-046
TB-056
TB-061
TB-062
2 KG
TB-044
TB-047
TB-057
TB-059
TB-063
7 KG
TB-045
TB-048
TB-058
TB-060
TB-063-01
TB-049/050
YES
YES
YES
YES
51/2” X 4”
1 kg
TB-051/052
YES
YES
YES
YES
71/2” X 51/2”
2 kg
TB-053/054
YES
YES
YES
YES
111/2” X 41/2”
7 kg
Selection Chart
MODEL
VARIABLE SPEED
PROGRAMMABLE TIMER
PROG. FORWARD/REVERSE
EASY LOAD/UNLOAD
BOWL DIMENSIONS
CAPACITY
Important: General rule of thumb is to fill chamber to 50%
of capacity (parts and media)
16. Gems Rotary Tumblers
Professional, more powerful, heavy duty tumbler. Belt driven by a continuous fan cooled motor. All steel construction, hexagonal rubber lined barrel with a
leak proof cover. All rotating parts have permanently lubricated non-metallic bearings for efficient and quiet operation. Machine is complete with motor overload protection. All types of media including steel shot may be used. Slight wetting of burnishing media with detergent is recommended.
Spares for Rotary Tumbler
CODE
TB-300
TB-303
CAPACITY
11/4 gal
11/4 gal
Safety Instructions
Page 40
POWER
110V/ 60 Hz
220V/ 50 Hz
CODE
TB-301
TB-304
TB-305
TB-306
TB-307
TB-310
DESCRIPTION
BARREL & LINER
BELT
DRIVE SHAFT
IDLER SHAFT
SPARE BARREL ONLY
MOTOR
205
™
SURFACE FINISHING
17. Steel Shot & Stainless Steel Shot
Steel Shot: Made of carbon steel in various shapes, but uniform in size. Fine shot is the ideal choice of media for burnishing. It is a proven fact that the addition of tumbling powder, moistened with burnishing compound, helps to prevent rust on the steel shot. The tempered steel shot will impart a uniform, scratch
free, work hardened surface on all metals. After use, carbon steel shot must be rinsed clean and stored in a rust preventive solution.
Stainless Steel Shot: Unlike carbon steel, this media needs no rust protection. Heavier in weight and corrosion resistant, these shot may be safely used with
acid soap solutions. Selection of the shape is determined by the form of the work pieces. Pins are the ideal choice for finishing intricate cavities and filigree.
This media must be cleansed in water, then dried and stored.
PINS
BALL CONES
BALLS
DIAGONALS
MIXED SHOT
SIZE/SHAPE
1
/8” ECLIPSE -NOT SHOWN
3
/16” ECLIPSE-NOT SHOWN
1
/8” BALLS
3
/16” BALLS
1
/8” BALL CONES
3
/16” BALL CONES
1
/16” X 9/32” PINS
1
/8” X 3/8” PINS
1
/8” DIAGONALS
MIXED SHOT
CARBON S/SHOT
TB-329
TB-330
TB-331
TB-332
TB-334
TB-335
TB-336
TB-337
TB-338
TB-350
S.S/SHOT
TB-339
TB-340
TB-341
TB-342
TB-344
TB-345
TB-346
TB-347
TB-348
TB-354
18. Ceramic Media
20. Porcelain Balls
Ceramic bonded aluminum oxide is the recommended break-in media for
initial rough finishing on raw casting or hard metals. The heavy or medium
cut is a reflection of the particle size of the abrasive. Triangular media
eliminates jamming and is designed to reach into grooves, corners or shallow contours. Cylinder shapes with their gentle rolling motion may be used
in a secondary operation to smooth the surface. Keep the media moist
during tumbling by addition of a burnishing or a light soapy compound.
This micro abrasive media will cut, clean and leave an extremely smooth
surface that is bright, but not reflective. Easier to maintain than steel shot,
the tumbling action of this media will reach into small cavities without
getting entrapped. Use with a soapy liquid detergent to generate improved
surfaces. A mix of ball sizes in a single charge will produce more refined
surface quality.
TRIANGLE
CODE
TB-311
TB-312
TB-313
TB-314
CYLINDER
AXBXCXD
3
/8” X 3/8” X 3/8” X 3/8”
3
/8” X 3/8” X 3/8” X 9/16”
1
/4” X 5/8”
POLYHEDRON
SHAPE
TRIANGLE-GRAY
TRIANGLE-GRAY
CYLINDER-GRAY
Plastic bonded abrasive pellets are an excellent choice for providing a
uniform finish on medium hard or soft metal. Improve surface finish
gradually from coarse to fine. Brown pyramids are best for the initial stage,
followed by green pyramids that leave a smooth matte finish.
White pyramids will impart an extra shine, prior to final polishing.
CODE
TB-317
TB-318
TB-319
TB-320
TB-321
SIZE
1mm
2mm
3mm
4mm
6mm
21. Screens
19. Plastic Media
206
CODE
TB-322
TB-323
TB-324
TB-325
TB-325-01
SIZE/SHAPE
/4” PYRAMIDS-BROWN
1
/4” PYRAMIDS-GREEN
1
/4” PYRAMIDS-WHITE
1
/2” V CUT CYLINDER
9
/16” CONES X-FINE
1
Made of high impact polymer, these screens are approx 14” in diameter,
one piece molded and stackable for storage. Various screen sizes are
available for manual separation of parts from media.
CODE
TB-038
TB-039
TB-040
TB-041
TB-042
TB-037
HOLE SIZE
1”
3
/4”
1
/2”
3
/8”
1
/4”
BUCKET WITH 5
SCREENS
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
SURFACE FINISHING
22. Steel Shot- Balls
25. Walnut Shell
Hardened polished balls may be used for very light de-buring. Due to their
minute size, a high degree of polish is achieved by a strong peening action.
Recommended for use in rotary tumblers with the addition of burnishing
compound. A complement of mixed sizes will generate excellent results on
almost all metals.
Granulated walnut shell is a natural carrier for dry tumbling or barrel
finishing operations. When charged with polishing oxides, either rouge or
chrome, a surface of high luster is achieved.
CODE
TB-403
TB-405
TB-404
TB-406
CODE
TB-365
TB-366
SIZE
1mm
1.4mm
1.2mm
1.6mm
26. Dry Shine
23. Corn Cob
Finely ground corn cob is an ideal absorbent for drying articles of jewelry.
Additionally, it removes water stains, finger prints, or residue left after
tumbling with dry media.
CODE
TB-363
TB-364
WEIGHT
5 lb
50 lb
Dry Shine I: A ready to use polishing agent made of pulverized walnut
shell charged with red rouge. This media leaves a mirror finish on gold and
other precious metals. Dry run in a vibrating tumbler at an intense amplitude for 10-12 hours.
WEIGHT
5 lb
50 lb
24. Tumbling Compounds
750- Compound: · Use for all metals.
· Cleans steel shot and is a rust inhibitor.
· Provides mild cutting action with ceramic, plastic or synthetic media.
· Mix 2-4 oz. of powder with 1 gallon of water.
910- Compound:
· Use for gold, brass, bronze and copper.
· Works with steel shot and porcelain media, to give a bright finish.
· Mix 1-3 oz. of powder with 1 gallon of water.
920- Compound:
· Use for platinum, white gold and silver burnishing.
· Works with steel shot or porcelain media.
· Mix 1-2 oz. of powder with 1 gallon of water.
Dry Shine III: Formulated from pulverized corn cob and blended with a fine
particle size of red rouge, this media will impart a tarnish free, superior
bright luster on gold and other metals. Normally run dry in a vibratory
tumbler for 12-14 hours, it gives a high brilliance to metal surfaces.
CODE
TB-315
TB-316
DESCRIPTION
DRY SHINE I
DRY SHINE III
27. Liquid Compounds
Detergent Compound:
· For cleaning and fast cutting in tumbling operation.
· Use for all metals including white metal.
· Works with ceramic, plastic and synthetic media.
· Mix 1 fluid oz. to 1 gallon of water.
Burnishing Compound:
· Use for vibratory and tumbling operation.
· Low level ph, best for use with steel shot .
· Cleans all precious metals, brass, bronze and copper.
· Mix 1 fluid oz. to 1 gallon of water.
CODE
TB-326-01
TB-326
TB-327-01
TB-327
TB-328-01
TB-328
COMPOUND
750
750
910
910
920
920
Safety Instructions
Page 40
CONTENTS
5 lb
50 lb
5 lb
50 lb
5 lb
50 lb
CODE
TB-358
TB-359
TB-360
TB-361
COMPOUND
DETERGENT
DETERGENT
BURNISHING
BURNISHING
CONTENTS
1 gallon
1 qt.
1 gallon
1 qt.
207
™
SURFACE FINISHING
28. Sand Blaster
Sturdy stainless steel bench model sand blaster with well sealed exterior to eliminate leakage.
Illuminated glass viewing area. Pencil style tungsten nozzle blasts a steady stream of media. Nozzle
may be used in a fixed mount or free hand. Large side openings with built-in heavy duty rubber gloves.
Media is recyclable and pressure is adjustable, high volume for aggressive blasting and low volume for
satin finishes. Unit has front loading and discharge port for media. Dust particles are removed by an
attached filter system for safe, efficient and clean working. Filters are replaceable. Control panel has
power switch, pressure regulator and gauge. Operates on 110V/220V with an air pressure 60-80 PSI.
Dimensions 18” L X 14” W X 16” Ht.
CODE
UL-044
UL-045
DESCRIPTION
SAND BLASTER
SAND BLASTER WITH COMPRESSOR
29. EZ Sand Blasters
The sand blaster is an air tight steel cabinet within which an air jet forces blasting media, either glass
beads or aluminum oxide, on to the article to remove hardened investment or to generate a smooth
surface. The cabinet is one piece molded and resistant to rust or leakage. Blasting media is
automatically recirculated. An air pressure regulator allows variation in the applied blasting force.
The blaster includes a convenient easy viewing glass with the additional benefit of an internal light.
A double filter system eliminates the dust particles from contaminating the environment. Operates on
60-80 PSI. (Compressor not included).
CODE
UL-020
UL-022
UL-040
UL-043
30. Mini Sand Blaster
A handy light weight unit that is ideal for preparing work for final polishing.
Use it for removing oxide heat marks and smoothing surfaces of casting.
A lighted interior and a clear viewing window helps visibility. Lever control
air gun provides a pin point jet. Includes tubing, air gun, neoprene glove,
light bulb, and 5 lb. blasting media. Operates on 60-80 PSI.
(Compressor not included).
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60 Hz
220V/ 50 Hz
110V/ 60 Hz
220V/ 50 Hz
ONE HAND
ONE HAND
TWO HANDS
TWO HANDS
31. Blasting Media
Surface preparation is of vital importance before polishing, burnishing and
plating. Surface roughness may be improved by blasting with media, either
abrasives or glass beads. Different surface finishes may be generated by
varying the parameters of the micron size of abrasives and air pressure.
The degree of matte to satin finish depends on the hardness of the material
being finished.
Glass Beads - 5 lb
CODE
UL-048
UL-049
UL-050
UL-051
GRADE
EX-FINE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
MICRON
20
60
100
240
Aluminum Oxide - 5 lb
CODE
UL-053
UL-054
UL-055
CODE
UL-017
UL-018
208
SPECIFICATION
110V/ 60 Hz
220V/ 50 Hz
ONE HAND
ONE HAND
GRADE
FINE
MEDIUM
COARSE
MICRON
80
100
180
GRADE
FINE
MICRON
60
Ruby - 5 lb
CODE
UL-060
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
TAGS
1. String Tags
A basic necessity for every jewelry business, these all purpose string tags are available in plastic or paper, and are ideal for use in organizing, labeling or
pricing. Plastic tags are tear resistant PVC, with rounded edges and strung with attractive gold string. Paper tags are made of heavyweight white quality paper
and strung with durable white string. Both types of tags will accept marking with an indelible pen. Box of 1000 approx.
CODE
TA-030
TA-031
TA-032
TA-033
TA-010
TA-011
TA-012
TA-013
SIZE
8 X 16mm
8 X 16mm
8 X 16mm
8 X 16mm
8 X 20mm
8 X 20mm
8 X 20mm
8 X 20mm
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
PAPER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
PAPER
CODE
TA-014
TA-015
TA-016
TA-017
TA-018
TA-019
TA-020
TA-021
SIZE
10 X 22mm
10 X 22mm
10 X 22mm
10 X 22mm
13 X 25mm
13 X 25mm
13 X 25mm
13 X 25mm
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
PAPER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
PAPER
CODE
TA-022
TA-023
TA-024
TA-025
TA-026
TA-027
TA-028
TA-029
SIZE
16 X 25mm
16 X 25mm
16 X 25mm
16 X 25mm
19 X 28mm
19 X 28mm
19 X 28mm
19 X 28mm
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
PAPER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
PAPER
2. Jewelry Tags
A complete range of elegant jewelry tags in different shapes to suit all applications. Made in ultrasonic compatible PVC, tags are available in frosted white,
gold and silver, with transparent press on buttons. Write or mark with an indelible pen. Box of 1000 approx.
CODE
TA-700
TA-702
TA-703
TA-705
TA-706
TA-707
SHAPE
SMALL ROUND
SMALL ROUND
SMALL ROUND
LARGE ROUND
LARGE ROUND
LARGE ROUND
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
CODE
TA-709
TA-710
TA-711
TA-713
TA-714
TA-715
SHAPE
SINGLE END RND
SINGLE END RND
SINGLE END RND
SINGLE END OVAL
SINGLE END OVAL
SINGLE END OVAL
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
CODE
TA-717
TA-718
TA-719
TA-721
TA-722
TA-723
SHAPE
SINGLE END RECT
SINGLE END RECT
SINGLE END RECT
SMALL LONG
SMALL LONG
SMALL LONG
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
3. Plastic Tags
4. Adjustable PVC Tags
Hard PVC, ultrasonic compatible, these tags will not tear or smudge.
Special sizes for various articles of jewelry. Identifying marks may be
written on with a permanent indelible pen. Box of 1000 approx.
This tag saves time. Simply slip the end thru and it locks around the
article. Made of soft PVC in three colors, these tags retain their shape
and color during ultrasonic or steam cleaning. Box of 1000 approx.
CODE
TA-730
TA-731
TA-732
TA-733
TA-734
210
DESCRIPTION
EARRING TAG
BRACELET TAG
MEDAL TAG
LARGE MEDAL TAG
EARRING AND BRACELET
SIZE
13 X 17mm
13 X 17mm
15 X 18mm
17 X 22mm
17 X 22mm
CODE
TA-746
TA-747
TA-748
TA-741
TA-742
TA-743
TA-736
TA-737
TA-738
SIZE
6 X 10mm
6 X 10mm
6 X 10mm
8 X 16mm
8 X 16mm
8 X 16mm
10 X 19mm
10 X 19mm
10 X 19mm
COLOR
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
WHITE
GOLD
SILVER
™
TAGS
5. Ring Tags
Attractive and functional, these ring tags are made in super strong Tyvek material. Solution resistant to withstand repeated ultrasonic or steam cleaning. Tags
have pressure sensitive backing with an adhesive free center for easy application. Choose from a wide selection of five colors and shapes. Comes in packs
with an indelible ink marker.
B
C
A
E
D
STYLE/ PKG.
A. PACK OF 1000
B. PACK OF 500
C. PACK OF 1000
D. PACK OF 500
E. PACK OF 500
WHITE
TA-101
TA-201
TA-301
TA-401
TA-411
GOLD
TA-102
-
SILVER
TA-103
-
BLUE
TA-104
TA-204
TA-304
TA-404
-
YELLOW
TA-105
TA-205
TA-305
TA-405
TA-413
6. Ring Tags for Dot Matrix Printer
Durable, rip proof tags in four colors that will withstand ultrasonic or steam cleaning. Print
professional quality details using indelible ink ribbon on your dot matrix printer or typewriter.
PACKAGE
PACK OF 1000
PACK OF 10,000
WHITE
TA-501
TA-515
GOLD
TA-502
TA-525
SILVER
TA-503
TA-535
YELLOW
TA-505
TA-555
7. String Tags for Dot Matrix Printer
Ready to use tear resistant tags, for instant identification. Ultrasonic and
steam cleaner safe. Available in white, gold or silver in case lots.
PACKAGE
PACK OF 500
PACK OF 5000
WHITE
TA-601
TA-615
GOLD
TA-602
TA-625
SILVER
TA-603
TA-635
8. Repair Envelopes with Lay Away
Neatly printed envelopes let you organize repair jobs
efficiently. Three detachable parts preprinted and
progressively numbered will give your company the
potential to gain customer confidence. Printed with
Lay Away for easy processing. Pkg 1000.
CODE
TA-050
TA-051
TA-052
TA-053
TA-054
DESCRIPTION
1-1000
1001-2000
2001-3000
3001-4000
4001-5000
CODE
TA-055
TA-056
TA-057
TA-058
TA-059
TA-060
DESCRIPTION
5001-6000
6001-7000
7001-8000
8001-9000
9001-10,000
REPAIR ENVELOPE HOLDER
211
™
TAGS
9. Brown Kraft Coin Envelopes
Small open end envelopes made to the quality standards of dependability and durability. Economical for
storing small parts, coins or jewelry. Easy to write on or affix labels. Box of 500.
CODE
TA-061
TA-062
TA-063
TA-064
TA-065
10. Zip Lock Bags
STYLE
#1
#3
#4
#5
#6
SIZE
31/2” X 21/4”
41/4” X 21/2”
41/2” X 3”
51/2” X 31/8”
6” X 31/2”
Clear, transparent, tough poly bags for instant identification of items in every shop or store. Long lasting
reinforced zip for added security and strength for use and reuse. In addition, the interlock seal protects
the contents from moisture and grime.
BLOCK
TA-066
TA-067
TA-068
TA-070
TA-071
TA-072
TA-073
PLAIN
TA-099
TA-098
TA-097
TA-079
TA-080
TA-081
TA-082
SIZE
11/2” X 2”
11/2” X 11/2”
11/4” X 11/4”
2” X 2”
2” X 3”
3” X 3”
3” X 4”
QTY/CASE
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
12,000
10,000
BLOCK
TA-074
TA-075
TA-076
TA-077
TA-078
TA-089
PLAIN
TA-083
TA-084
TA-085
TA-086
TA-087
TA-088
SIZE
3” X 5”
4” X 6”
5” X 6”
6” X 9”
8” X 10”
9” X 12”
QTY/CASE
10,000
4,000
4,000
2,000
2,000
2,000
11. PVC Recloseable Bags
15. Gift Bags
Completely clear, thick poly bags in popular sizes, for multiple uses around the store or
shop. Simple press to seal secures the contents. Very useful for storing customer parts,
samples, findings, and other items. Pkg 100.
Trendy gift bags, in an exquisite rose design, to gain your
clients admiration. Available in two background colors
silver or gold. Four different sizes in case lots.
CODE
TA-090
TA-091
TA-092
TA-093
SIZE
3” X 2”
4” X 3”
5” X 3”
6” X 4”
12. Anti-Tarnish Tissue
Made of the finest quality white bleached tissue. Available in rolls for wrapping of
silverware, jewelry and other gift articles. Provides excellent protection from tarnish.
SILVER
PA-021
PA-023
PA-025
PA-027
GOLD
PA-022
PA-024
PA-026
PA-028
SIZE
4” X 6”
5” X 7”
6” X 9”
81/2” X 11”
QTY/CASE
5,000
5,000
6,000
2,000
14. Turn Table
CODE
PA-002
DESCRIPTION
73/8” WIDTH X 1000’
An attractive, low level, platform top display table that
adds splendor to jewelry creations. Quiet smooth movement provides all around viewing. Comes in two colors,
silver or gold.
13. Paper Cutter
A practical stand for dispensing tissue paper rolls. Has
a drop leaf steel blade that allows clean tear away of
any required length without the use of scissors.
May be fitted on the table top for convenience.
CODE
PA-001
212
DESCRIPTION
FOR 73/8” ROLL
CODE
TA-650
TA-651
TA-654
TA-655
TA-659
TA-670
DESCRIPTION
5” X 21/2”- SILVER
5” X 21/2”- GOLD
7” X 21/2”- SILVER
7” X 21/2”- GOLD
12” X 21/2”- SILVER
12” X 21/2”- GOLD
™
TESTING
1. Test Stones
2. Gold Testing Acid
Best quality natural black hard Arkansas gold testing stone. Available with
or without durable cedar wood box.
This solution helps test silver and the carat value of gold. Come in plastic
bottles with secure color coded caps. Contents 1/2 oz.
CODE
TS-010
TS-014
TS-018
TS-022
TS-024
TS-029
CODE
TS-089
TS-090
TS-091
TS-093
TS-094
TS-095
DESCRIPTION
40 X 35 X 6mm
50 X 35 X 6mm
50 X 40 X 6mm
6” X 2” X 1/2” NATURAL
6” X 21/2” X 1/2” NATURAL
8” X 3” X 1/2” NATURAL
CODE
TS-096
TS-097
TS-098
TS-099
TS-100
TS-101
DESCRIPTION
3” X 11/2” X 1/2” BOXED
6” X 3” X 1/2” NATURAL
8” X 2” X 1/2” BOXED
2” X 11/2” X 1/2” BOXED
6” X 2” X 1/2” BOXED
3” X 11/2” X 1/2” BLACK
Traditional kits used worldwide for testing gold, silver and platinum.
COLOR
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
BLUE
WHITE
RED
3. Needle Tester
Each gold tipped needle point is marked with its carat value.
Available in five different sets.
CODE
TS-103
TS-104
TS-105
TS-109
TS-110
4. Gold Test Kits
TYPE
10K
14K
18K
22K
PLATINUM
SILVER
CODE
TS-030
TS-034
TS-035
TS-102
TS-111
TS-085
DESCRIPTION
3 POINTS
4 POINTS
5 POINTS
9 POINTS
H.K
CARAT
10, 14, 18
10, 14, 18, 0.999 (SILVER)
8, 10, 12, 14, 18
4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20
14, 18, 21, 22
DESCRIPTION
KIT: BOX, STONE, ACID WITH TS-103
KIT: BOX, STONE, ACID WITH TS-104
KIT: BOX, STONE, ACID WITH TS-105
5 COMPARTMENT WOODEN BOX
8 COMPARTMENT WOODEN BOX
GOLD TEST GLASS STONE 2” X 2” X 1/4”
6. Garrett Metal Detector
TS-085
5. Presidium® Gem Tester
A gem tester that identifies precious stones using thermal and electrical
conductivity. Tests all mounted and unmounted stones up to the
smallest size of 0.02 carat. Detects simulants from diamond.
CODE
TS-199
214
DESCRIPTION
GEM TESTER
GTAx: An affordable high performance mid range detector with microprocessor graphics target analyzer. Easy to operate by beginners and professionals. Has continuous instant display system. Target with pin point
accuracy to a 20% greater depth than most other detectors. Features different modes, search aids, and settings.
Scanner: A popular hand held detector to identify even the smallest metal
object. Operates an a low frequency range. Completely safe. Battery operated by standard 9v. or rechargeable battery 7.2V (Ni-Mh).
CODE
TS-127
TS-128
DESCRIPTION
GTAx-1250
BODY SCANNER
™
TORCHES
1.
with one Tip
A basic Little Torch Kit with precision flame. Includes a torch handpiece, one #4 tip, 6' of covered
hoses for fuel and oxygen, standard B (9/16”) hose fittings and complete instructions.
CODE
ST-104
2.
DESCRIPTION
ONE TIP TORCH WITH 6’ HOSE
with 5 Tips In a Box
This small multi purpose torch is engineered to braze, weld, or melt metals. Includes hand held
torch with five interchangeable tips, 6' of covered hoses, and complete instructions. Kit has standard
B(9/16”) hose fittings.
CODE
ST-105
ST-142
ST-107
ST-108
ST-109
3.
DESCRIPTION
L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(2-6) & 6’ HOSE- (ACTY)
L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(3-7) & 6’ HOSE- (PROPANE)
L.T WITH BRITISH HOSE CONNECTION WITH TIPS #(2-6)
(FUEL 3/8”-19, BSPF-LH, OXY 3/8”-19, BSPF-RH)
L.T WITH EUROPEAN HOSE CONNECTION WITH TIPS #(2-6)
(FUEL 3/8”-19, BSPF-LH, OXY 1/4”-19, BSPF-RH)
L.T WITH AUSTRALIAN HOSE CONNECTION WITH TIPS #(2-6)
(FUEL 5/8”-18LH, BSPF-LH, OXY 5/8”-18RH)
with 5 Tips Carded
Precision well balanced and light weight torch handpiece with five curved tips, 6’ & 12' of covered
hoses for fuel and oxygen, fittings and complete instructions.
CODE
ST-106
ST-140
ST-141
4.
DESCRIPTION
L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(2-6) & 6’ HOSE
L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(2-6) & 12’ HOSE
L.T WITH PROPANE KIT TIPS #(3-7) & 12’ HOSE
with Regulator for Disposable Tank
This kit is designed for use with 14 oz. propane and oxygen disposable tanks (not included).
Set includes torch handpiece, one #4 tip, 6' of covered hoses for fuel and oxygen, regulators and
complete instructions. May also be used with 16 oz. disposable Mapp® gas tank.
CODE
ST-110
216
DESCRIPTION
L.T WITH REGULATORS
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
TORCHES
5.
Oxy/Fuel Kit with Regulators
For all brazing, welding and melting applications. Set includes torch, 5 tips,
6' of covered hoses for fuel and oxygen, two precision regulators
and complete instructions.
CODE
ST-111
ST-112
ST-113
DESCRIPTION
KIT FOR B TANK- ACETYLENE/OXYGEN
KIT FOR PROPANE/OXYGEN
KIT FOR MC TANK- ACETYLENE/OXYGEN
6.
Acetylene/ Oxygen Caddy Kit
Equip your shop for any soldering, brazing and melting tasks. This compact
unit includes an empty MC acetylene tank and an empty oxygen tank in a
tough plastic carrier. Regulate the flame with fine controls for pressure and
flow. Includes Little Torch handpieces, tips #(2-6), 6' of covered hoses, and
regulators with safety reverse flow, check valves.
Complete with instructions.
CODE
ST-100
DESCRIPTION
ACETYLENE CADDY COMPLETE KIT
7.
Propane Oxygen Caddy Kit
It's a handy, self contained unit. Is a convenient and easy to use system.
Includes empty oxygen tank and 5 lb. propane tank, Little Torch handpiece,
tips #(3-7), 6' of covered hoses, propane regulator, oxygen regulator, and
instruction manual. Safety reverse flow check valves are included.
CODE
ST-101
DESCRIPTION
PROPANE/OXYGEN CADDY KIT COMPLETE
8. Cylinders
These tanks are standard for most jewelry manufacturers. All tanks are
tested, but sold empty due to federal regulations. Tanks may be filled by
your local gas or welding supply company
CODE
ST-417
ST-418
ST-419
ST-420
DESCRIPTION
OXYGEN
ACETYLENE- “MC”
PROPANE
ACETYLENE- “B”
CAPACITY
20 cu.ft
10 cu.ft
5 lb
40 cu.ft
HEIGHT/ DIA.
173/4”/ 51/4”
141/2”/ 41/8”
163/4”/ 61/8”
221/2”/ 61/4”
9. Caddy Carriers (not Shown)
CODE
ST-423
ST-424
DESCRIPTION
PLATED STEEL FOR ST-101
MOLDED PLASTIC FOR ST-100
Safety Instructions
Page 40
217
™
TORCHES
10. Regulators- USA
These high precision regulators are UL listed, 100% tested, made of solid brass for single torch use.
Available as single or dual stage, regulators offer a means of providing a dependable control of fuel and
oxygen. Units have corrosion resistant brass gauges and shatter proof polycarbonate lenses.
Single Stage Regulator
CODE
GASES
USED
CYLINDER
TYPE
OUTLET
PRESSURE
UL LISTED MAX
INLET PRESSURE
ST-115
ST-116
ST-117
ST-118
ST-119
OXYGEN
LP & ACETYLENE
ACETYLENE
ACETYLENE
HYDROGEN
ALL INDUSTRIAL
ALL LP & LRG ACET.
“B” TANK (40 cu ft)
“MC” TANK (10 cu ft)
INDUSTRIAL
0-20 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-15 PSI
3000 PSI
400 PSI
400 PSI
400 PSI
3000 PSI
“MC” TANK (10 cu ft)
ALL LP & LRG ACET.
“B” TANK (40 cu ft)
LINE REGULATOR
LINE REGULATOR
LINE REGULATOR
0-15 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-100 PSI
0-100 PSI
0-15 PSI
400 PSI
400 PSI
400 PSI
300 PSI
200 PSI
100 PSI
INDUSTRIAL
INDUSTRIAL
INDUSTRIAL
INDUSTRIAL
0-30 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-50 PSI
0-30 PSI
3000 PSI
400 PSI
400 PSI
3000 PSI
Single Cylinder & Line (Manifold) Regulators
ST-124
ST-125
ST-126
ST-127
ST-128
ST-129
ACETYLENE
LP & ACETYLENE
ACETYLENE
COMPRESSED AIR
OXYGEN
ACETYLENE/LP GAS
Heavy Duty Two Stage Regulator
ST-120
ST-121
ST-122
ST-123
OXYGEN
ACETYLENE
LP
HYDROGEN
11. Check Valves
14. Two Hose Manifolds
A device that primarily controls the flow direction of
fuel or oxygen. In line connection is recommended
for safety.
ST-135
ST-136
OXYGEN
FUEL
12. Regulators for Disposable Tank
These regulators may be used on disposable tanks
and are designed to provide dependable control for
fuel and oxygen delivery. Do not use these
regulators on full size tanks.
CODE
ST-130
ST-131
Allows you to operate one or two torches from a single tank. Separate manifolds must be used for fuel and oxygen. Gas flow is controlled by individual
needle valves.
CODE
ST-145
ST-146
DESCRIPTION
OXYGEN
FUEL/PROPANE
15. Torch Mate Electric Lighter
A convenient table top model widely used by professional jewelers. Battery
operated electronic circuitry provides instant ignition.
DESCRIPTION
OXYGEN
MAPP® /PROPANE
13. Flashback Arrestors
Work safely, do not neglect to use this protective device when working with
torches. Always place a flashback arrestor between a regulator and a torch.
This helps prevent the flame from reaching back into the tank and causing
an explosion. Flashback arrestors are UL listed.
CODE
ST-091
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRIC LIGHTER
16. Torch Lighter & Flint
A safe means to produce a quick spark, to ignite gas torches, without the
hazard of an open flame.
CODE
ST-132
ST-133
ST-134
218
DESCRIPTION
OXYGEN
FUEL
SET(OXYGEN & FUEL)
CODE
ST-092
DESCRIPTION
LIGHTER & FLINT
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
TORCHES
17.
Tips
Enjoy the extraordinary benefits of these curved or straight tips, that have #(2-3) sizes, with orifices in synthetic
sapphire. Guaranteed needle point flame to do intricate work. Available in tip sizes #(2-7).
SIZE
CURVED
CODE
STRAIGHT
CODE
TWIN FLAME
CODE
USE WITH
GAS PRESSURE
OXYGEN FUEL
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
ST-202
ST-203
ST-204
ST-205
ST-206
ST-207
ST-212
ST-213
ST-214
ST-215
ST-216
ST-217
ST-222
ST-223
ST-224
ST-225
ST-226
NA
OXY & HYDROGEN ONLY
OXY & ACETYLENE OR HYDROGEN
OXY & MAPP® OR PROPANE
OXY & PROPYLENE
OXY & PROPANE
OXY & OTHER GASES
2
4
4
6
6
8
2
4
4
6
6
8
ST-247
18. Tip Extensions- Flexible
These fittings attach to your Little Torch to give you an extended
reach to work in difficult areas.
ST-245
21. Heating Tips
CODE
ST-231
ST-232
These are special purpose multiple orifice tips designed to form a larger heating zone. May be used for melting up to 3 oz. of gold or silver. Maximum temperature 5400°F for propane and 6000°F for acetylene.
LENGTH
3”
6”
19.
Valve Assemblies
Replacement valve assemblies are available for the Little Torch.
The green is for the oxygen port and the red is for the fuel port.
Do not interchange these assemblies.
ST-510
DESCRIPTION
OXYGEN VALVE GREEN-7345
FUEL VALVE RED 7346
20.
Hoses
A wide range of hose types all with coupled B (9/16”) fittings. Color coded
green or red for easy identification. Complete with installation
instructions.
CODE
ST-266
ST-267
ST-268
ST-269
FUEL
GAS
OXYGEN
GAS
OXYGEN
Safety Instructions
Page 40
FUEL
ST-245
ST-246
ACETYLENE,
ST-247
HYDROGEN, MAPP®
PROPANE 5,000 BTU
NATURAL GAS 2,400 BTU
GAS PRESSURE(PSI)
FUEL
OXYGEN
14
10
14
10
14
10
7
5
LENGTH
3”
6”
6”
Important Note for Gas Safety
ST-511
CODE
ST-510
ST-511
CODE
LENGTH
6’-RED
6’-GREEN
12’-RED
12’-GREEN
• Consult your gas supplier before setting up the tank and torch system.
• Ensure that the installation conforms to state and local regulations.
• Secure fuel tanks to reduce risk of damage from falling or explosion.
• Take professional help for all gas fittings and maintenance.
• Purge fuel and oxygen lines and shut off main tanks daily after use.
• Always use eye protection and work in a well ventilated area.
22. Hose Connection
Solid, one piece brass connections with nozzle to fit
the respective hose size. Separate thread
connections for fuel and oxygen.
Hose inside dia. 1/8”.
CODE
ST-257
ST-258
DESCRIPTION
FOR OXYGEN
FOR FUEL
219
™
TORCHES
CODE
ST-399
ST-261
23. Acetylene Air Kit
24. Propane Air Kit
A mid sized kit for all jewelry soldering,
brazing, annealing and small melting jobs.
No oxygen needed. Kit includes torch
handpiece, super fine tip, 6’ of covered
hose and regulator with gauge. Produces
1500°C flame temperature. Tank is not
included, but is available separately.
A small portable kit for silversmiths and
craftsmen. This kit uses a 14 oz. disposable
propane cylinder (not included in kit).
Single knob on/off adjustment and control
provides an effective way for soft soldering
and annealing. Includes torch handpiece,
extra fine tip, 6’ of covered hose and preset
regulator. Produces 1300°C flame
temperature.
DESCRIPTION
ACETYLENE KIT
ACETYLENE/SINGLE HOSE10’ (B-B FITTING)
CODE
ST-398
ST-262
DESCRIPTION
PROPANE KIT
PROPANE/SINGLE “T” GRADE HOSE10’ (B-B FITTING)
25. Air Fuel Torch Tips- USA
Reliable, precision threaded, interchangeable tips for various applications. Different orifices for fine soldering or melting.
Tips are 100% flame tested and UL listed.
Propane
Acetylene
CODE
ST-406
ST-405
ST-401
ST-402
ST-403
ST-404
DESCRIPTION
0.066” FLAME OPENING
0.095” FLAME OPENING
0.147” FLAME OPENING
3
/16” FLAME OPENING
1
/4” FLAME OPENING
3
/8” FLAME OPENING
#
00
0
1
2
3
4
26. Silver Smith Torch Body
This Silver Smith torch body is for air/fuel use. Crafted in all metal
construction with long wearing precision brass parts that are nickel plated
for heat resistance and durability.
CODE
ST-400
DESCRIPTION
64,000 BTU
42,000 BTU
22,200 BTU
18,000 BTU
5,600 BTU
TYPE
GIANT
LARGE
SMALL
FINE
X-FINE
#
61
41
21
11
01
28. Bench Torch Holder
Two types of torch holders, one clamps and the other
screws on to the work bench.
CODE
HO-401
HO-402
DESCRIPTION
TORCH BODY
DESCRIPTION
CLAMP TYPE
SCREW TYPE
27. Magnetic Torch Stand
29. Safety Goggles for Platinum
A metal weighted base with holes to store
tips #(2-7) and a magnetic mount to
securely hold your Little Torch. Torch and
tips are not included.
Light plastic wrap-around frames safety colored lenses
protect eyes when melting metal, soldering or brazing.
CODE
ST-103
220
CODE
ST-410
ST-414
ST-413
ST-412
ST-411
DESCRIPTION
TIP ORGANIZER
CODE
LS-401
LS-401-01
POWER
7X
10X
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
TORCHES
30. HOKE-JEWEL Torch & Adapter Kits
A professional jewelers torch for all soldering, brazing, welding and melting tasks. Forged solid brass body with seamless tubing, all
nickel plated for long lasting service. Conveniently positioned finger tip control of valves for precision mixing of gases. Model with
pilot lamp allows continuous flow of gas for instant ignition.
Spare Adapter Tips: Tips are of special design to give a non-oxidizing flame for cleaner soldering and brazing. Excellent for intricate
work on chains, rings, pendants and delicate jewelry. Tips are not recommended for use with acetylene.
CODE
ST-302
ST-303
ST-304
ST-305
ST-306
DESCRIPTION
OXYGEN & ACETYLENE
OXYGEN & ARTIFICIAL GAS
OXYGEN & BUTANE OR PROPANE
OXYGEN & NATURAL GAS
SET OF SIX ADAPTER TIPS
PILOT
NO
YES
NO
NO
TIPS
4
4
4
3
31. Harris® Melting Torch
An ideal melting torch for large amounts of gold, silver and other alloys, but only small
quantities of platinum. Heavy duty, all brass body, has a check valve safety feature to
prevent reverse flow or mixing of gases. Leak proof valves for safety and durability.
Supplied with one large single orifice melting tip, 100% flame tested and inspected.
All torches are UL listed.
CODE
ST-520
ST-521
DESCRIPTION
HARRIS MELTING TORCH
REPLACEMENT TIP NO 30
34. Gasaver
32. Butane Torches
Solid state, trigger ignition melter uses clean burning fuel for
on-the-spot work. Adjustable flame temperature up to 2500°F.
Ideal for heating wax working tools and smoothing wax models.
Unit may be refilled.
Eliminates gas wastage during torch start up/shut down and
between flame applications. Ideal for brazing and welding
production applications. UL listed.
ST-089
ST-090
CODE
ST-089
ST-090
ST-093
CODE
ST-515
ST-516
CAPACITY
26 g FUEL
14 g FUEL
BUTANE REFILL 9 oz
ST-093
33. Leak Detector Solution
After every assembly, check connections for leaks. A simple test
will help ensure your safety. Just apply solution with the provided
applicator. Solution will bubble in 5 seconds if there is a leak.
Oxygen compatible.
CODE
ST-255
ST-256
DESCRIPTION
8 oz. BOX OF 12
8 oz
Safety Instructions
Page 40
MODEL
WDW101
WDW104
35. Combustible Gas Alarm
Small compact electronic sensor that needs to be placed near
the source of a potential gas leak. Detects combustible gases;
natural, LP, propane and butane. Audible alarm similar to smoke
buzzer. Size 41/2” X 31/4” X15/8”.
CODE
ST-259
POWER
110V
221
™
TORCHES
36. Smith Melting Torch
Powerful, heavy duty torch is designed to reach flame temperatures of 5400°F quickly. Prevents platinum becoming brittle when casting. Torch body is made
of nickel plated solid brass, with stainless steel ball valves for positive sealing and precision control. Tip is of heavy copper with a single orifice for platinum
melting. Multi flame rose bud tips are designed from heavy wall copper. Excellent for melting gold and silver. Includes one tip head and 12’ of covered dual
hose. It is highly recommended to use flashback arrestors for melting operations. These arrestors mount directly into the threaded ends of the torch body.
Torch handle MW5 is suitable for all flame tips.
ST-500
ST-501
ST-502
ST-503
ST-504
CODE
ST-504
ST-505
DESCRIPTION
TORCH HANDLE-MW5 (LIFE TIME WARRANTY)
FLASHBACK ARRESTOR FOR OXYGEN/ FUEL GAS
Spare Tips
ST-505
CODE
DESCRIPTION
ST-500
MULTI-FLAME ROSE BUD
MT603
LG, MULTI-FLAME ROSE BUD
MT605
SINGLE-FLAME TIP
MW210
SINGLE-FLAME TIP
MW411 RECESSED ORIFICE
ST-501
ST-502
ST-503
APPLICATION
MELTING CAPACITY
CASTING GOLD OR SILVER 8 oz
GASES
OXY/ ACETYLENE
PRESSURE
OXY/FUEL
10/10
CASTING GOLD OR SILVER 12 oz
OXY/ ACETYLENE
10/10
CASTING PLATINUM 3 oz
GOLD OR SILVER 5OZ
CASTING PLATINUM 3 oz
GOLD OR SILVER 5 oz
OXY/ HYDROGEN
OXY/ ACETYLENE
OXY/ PROPANE
OXY/ PROPANE
11/11
11/11
11/11
11/11
Dual Hose-121/2’ length, 3/16” Inside diameter
CODE
ST-262
ST-263
ST-264
ST-265
FUEL
“T” GRADE LP HOSE
ACETYLENE/ OXYGEN
ACETYLENE/ OXYGEN
PROPANE/ OXYGEN
FITTING
B-B
B-B
A-B
B-B
37. HydroGem
A state-of-the-art system. The HydroGem is a very safe machine, as there is no stored gas.
These machines use electricity to break down distilled water to create a clean fuel source.
HydroGem comes complete with one torch and tip set, flexible hose, atomizer and necessary gauges. The needle tip torch flame may be used for soldering, brazing, welding or
melting. Flame temperatures from 1500-3300°C. Working delivery pressure is low and the
built-in flashback arrestor is designed to help stop any accidental burning of the gas back
down the tube to the machine. Manufactured from the finest materials to stringent standards
for long lasting service. Operational instructions are included.
Meets all current CE requirements.
CODE
ST-525
222
DESCRIPTION
HYDROGEM COMPLETE SET
Safety Instructions
Page 40
™
TWEEZERS
1. General Purpose Tweezers
Stainless steel, non magnetic, satin finish tweezers for handling all miniature parts.
They have tapered shanks, beveled edges and matched points that have been honed.
CODE
STYLE
DESCRIPTION
TW-801
TW-101
#1
#1
SWISS
ECONO
S.S
S.S
TW-803
TW-103
#3
#3
SWISS
ECONO
S.S
S.S
TW-805
TW-105
#5
#5
SWISS
ECONO
S.S
S.S
TW-807
TW-107
#7
#7
SWISS
ECONO
S.S
S.S
TW-809
#3
SWISS
TI.
CODE
TYPE
FINISH
LOCK
TW-401
TW-402
TW-403
TW-404
FINE
MEDIUM
LARGE
EX-LONG
MATT
MATT
MATT
MATT
NO
NO
NO
NO
TW-421
TW-422
TW-423
FINE
MEDIUM
LARGE
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
NO
NO
NO
TW-400
TW-420
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
MATT
BLACK
YES
YES
TW-406
GROOVED
MATT
NO
TW-405
SHOVEL
MATT
NO
2. Economy Diamond Tweezers
Made of the finest materials. Very functional for sorting, inspecting, and handling of diamonds.
Features locking and non-locking, various types of points, fine to large, in attractive finishes of
matt or black.
224
™
TWEEZERS
3. Pearl Holding Tweezers
Made of carbon steel, nickel plated, with special shaped cup
ends coated with teflon for protection while handling precious
pearls.
CODE
DESCRIPTION
TW-960
TEFLON TIPS
4. Ceramic Tweezers
High quality, non-magnetic, anti-static, light weight aluminum
body tweezers. Indispensable when soldering or working with
platinum jewelry.
CODE
TW-820
TW-821
DESCRIPTION
CERAMIC TWEEZERS
CERAMIC TIP
5. Head & Shank Tweezers
Made of stainless steel with a serrated base and slide lock. Ideal
for holding shanks and settings in position when soldering.
CODE
TW-970
TW-472
DESCRIPTION
DELUXE-S.S
ECONO-S.S
6. Boley Style Tweezers
Premium quality tweezers. Made of stainless steel. Useful for handling very fine parts. AA and MM
are for general use. GG - pointed indented shank. RR -wide shank.
CODE
STYLE
DESCRIPTION
TW-810
TW-110
TW-811
TW-111
AA
AA
AA
AA
SWISS
ECONO
SWISS
ECONO
STAINLESS
STAINLESS
NICKEL PLATED
NICKEL PLATED
TW-814
TW-114
TW-815
TW-113
MM
MM
MM
MM
SWISS
ECONO
SWISS
ECONO
STAINLESS
STAINLESS
NICKEL PLATED
NICKEL PLATED
TW-116
TW-115
RR
RR
ECONO
ECONO
STAINLESS
NICKEL PLATED
TW-118
TW-117
GG
GG
ECONO
ECONO
STAINLESS
NICKEL PLATED
225
™
TWEEZERS
7. Diamond Tweezers
Absolutely the best and the finest made tweezers specifically
for the professional jeweler. Perfectly aligned hardened tips, in
all point sizes.
F
we
dT
on e 8 4
m
Dia Pag
or
rs
eze
11. Ring Holding Tweezers
Secures rings from the inside to enable soldering of the shank
ends. Also useful for holding two rings to solder.
8. Cyber-therm Tweezers
Unique tungsten steel alloy withstands temperature up to 3000°C for 5-10
minutes. Handles protected by insulating sleeves of heat resistant rubber.
CODE
TW-470
LENGTH
53/8”
12. Spring Grip Tweezers
CODE
TW-201
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT 145mm
Spring grip brass tweezers are useful for sand blasting, pen
plating and inspection. Made of solid brass with rubber coating.
Points are bent to secure work.
9. Solder Free Tweezers
Swiss made, anti-magnetic, acid resistant tweezers that can be dipped in
flux. Solder will not adhere to the ends.
CODE
TW-950
LENGTH
61/2”
10. Soldering Tweezers
CODE
TW-471
LENGTH
91/2”
13. Cross Lock Tweezers
Self locking tweezers that are ideal for use in the Third Hand for
soldering. Different types of jaws to suit special applications.
Cross locking stainless steel tweezers with serrated tips and fiber handles,
to protect hands from heat when soldering. Overall length 63/4”.
CODE
TW-473
TW-474
226
DESCRIPTION
STRAIGHT
BENT
CODE
TW-475
TW-476
TW-477
TW-478
DESCRIPTION
POINTED -43/4”
POINTED -61/2”
BLUNT -61/2”
FREE STANDING -61/4”
™
VISES
1. Swivel Head Pin Vise
7. Wood handle Pin Vise
Reversible collet in one pin vise with a screw chuck.
Economical steel pin vise chuck with hardwood fluted handle.
CODE
PV-402
DESCRIPTION
0-1/8” CAPACITY -31/2” LONG
CODE
PV-403
2. Sliding Pin Vise
Slide lock pin vise is easy to operate with one hand.
CODE
PV-406
CAPACITY
0 - 1.19mm
LENGTH
102mm
8. Steel Hand Vise
Spring action serrated jaws work by turning a wing screw.
DESCRIPTION
VISE OPENING- 0-1.5MM
3. Double-Ended Pin Vise
Hexagon head vise with reversible steel collets in each end.
CODE
PV-405
CAPACITY
0 - 0.125”
LENGTH
31/2”
4. Double-Ended Pin Vise with Four Collets
CODE
PV-401
LENGTH
100mm
JAW WIDTH
36mm
9. Wing Nut Hand Vise
Serrated, grooved, spring action jaws, with a wing nut and
hollow handle.
Pin vise with steel collets of different size mounted at both ends.
CODE
PV-404
CAPACITY
0-2.5mm
LENGTH
110mm
5. Square Chuck Pin Vise
Vise with two steel chucks and a spare chuck held in hollow
brass handle.
CODE
PV-407
PV-408
LENGTH
115mm
115mm
JAW WIDTH
16mm
8mm
10. Graver Holders with Chucks
Durable graver holder with fine finished hardwood handles
designed for comfort. Capacity 0-3mm.
HO-203
HO-201
HO-202
CODE
PV-410
PV-411
PV-412
PV-413
PV-414
LENGTH
70mm
80mm
90mm
100mm
110mm
JAW OPENS
0-2.00mm
0-2.00mm
0-2.50mm
0-2.90mm
0-3.00mm
CODE
HO-201
HO-202
HO-203
HO-204
HO-204
DESCRIPTION
ROUND
MUSHROOM
PEAR
TAPERED SPINDLE
6. Lowell Pattern Hand Vise
11. Hand Vise Plier
Hollow handle and grooved corrugated jaws that open and close
by turning the handle. Holds long wire pieces. Width of jaws 1/2”.
Hardened steel, serrated jaw vise with a quick lock system by
hand grip. Jaw size 1” X 5/8” Max. Opening 5/8”.
CODE
PV-409
228
LENGTH
43/4” (120mm)
CODE
PV-415
LENGTH
51/2”
™
WATCH TOOLS
1. Case Press with Nylon / Aluminum Dies
A lightweight, inexpensive case press made in a one
piece cast metal design. Easy location of watch cases
in a set of mar resistant nylon dies for all different
watch sizes. Complete die sets, hollow and flat, fit
CODE
easily by a simple snap on/off operation.
WA-011
Alignment is accurate and the operator has clear
WA-011-01
visibility of the case being closed.
DESCRIPTION
CASE PRESS WITH NYLON DIES
CASE PRESS WITH ALUM. DIES
2. Waterproof Case Wrench-Jaxa Type
A world famous wrench, of exceptional value, that
meets the highest standards of quality. Comes
complete with a full set of pins for positive location
of any shape of watch case back. Wrench and
spare pins are neatly packed in a hardwood box.
CODE
WA-001
WA-002
WA-005
DESCRIPTION
CASE WRENCH
CASE WRENCH WITH BOX
WOOD BOX
CODE
WA-008
WA-009
WA-009-01
WA-009-02
WA-009-03
WA-009-04
WA-009-05
WA-009-06
WA-009-10
DESCRIPTION
CASE WRENCH W/BASE
CASE WRENCH
REPLACEMENT RING 18.5mm
REPLACEMENT RING 20.2mm
REPLACEMENT RING 22.5mm
REPLACEMENT RING 26.5mm
REPLACEMENT RING 28.3mm
REPLACEMENT RING 29.5mm
BASE ONLY
3. L-G “OpenAll” Case Wrench
This sturdy cast frame press clamps in your bench
vise. Close fitting precision screw for fine
adjustment, with an additional torque bar that
provides the extra pressure to remove the more
difficult cases. The case opener may also be used
with an adjustable case wrench. The base
accommodates a set of six inserts sizes 18.5,
20.2, 22.5, 26.5, 28.3, and 29.5mm.
4. L-G Master Case Opener
Tool that enables opening and closing all sizes and
shapes of waterproof watches. Includes four sets
CODE
of pins for notches, holes, pins or polygons.
Comfortable knurled handle with fine adjustment
WA-006
to fit case backs for easy unscrewing without mar
WA-006-01
or damage.
DESCRIPTION
MASTER CASE OPENER
12 PCS PIN SET
5. Movement Holder with Four Pins
Unique metal holder with a delicate screw grip and
adjustable jaws. Four round shaped non mar nylon
pins located in spaced jaw holes to adjust all types
of movements.
CODE
WA-017
DESCRIPTION
MOVEMENT HOLDER
CODE
WA-015
DESCRIPTION
BENCH TYPE HOLDER
6. Movement Holder Bench Type
An attractive metal holder for every watch repairer
that easily clamps to the edge of your work bench.
Specially shaped non-mar sliding jaws move
smoothly on guides by means of a fine pitch screw
knob. Suitable for all sizes of movements.
7. Screw Link Bracelet Opener
Table top screw tool to unmount bracelets with
screw links. This tool comes with a set of six screwdriver blades for different bracelets.
A very practical tool for watchmakers.
CODE
WA-026
230
DESCRIPTION
BRACELET OPENER
™
WATCH TOOLS
8. Bracelet Holder
12. Rolex-Style Opener
An essential fixture for difficult to hold watch bracelets while
removing or fitting pins and screws. This stable base block has
slots of varying widths to handle different thickness of watch straps
or bracelets. Additionally, there are holes in the base to allow the
pins to pop out without damage. Comes with two punches.
A special case opener for oyster shaped cases of Rolex watches.
This tool includes a wrench type handle with a set of dies.
Six metal die sizes 18.5, 20.2, 22.5, 26.5, 28.3 and 29.5mm.
CODE
WA-028
DESCRIPTION
BRACELET HOLDER
CODE
WA-018
WA-029
DESCRIPTION
OPENER - ECONO
OPENER - BERGEON
9. Spring Bar Tools
13. Crystal Fitting Tool
This tool is ideal for changing spring bars of watches. A round point
and forked tip at either end suits most of the routine operations.
Plier style tool that comes with three mobile dies. Parallel plier jaws have
circular rubber padded hinged discs.
WA-007
WA-007-01
WA-007-02
CODE
WA-007
WA-007-01
WA-007-02
WA-007-05
WA-007-06
DESCRIPTION
ECONO SPRING BAR TOOL
STANDARD POINT BAR TOOL
FINE POINT BAR TOOL
STANDARD POINT TIP
FINE POINT TIP
CODE
WA-004
DESCRIPTION
CRYSTAL FITTING TOOL
14. Watch Opener and Pin Remover
Well constructed watch opening tool. Also removes pins from watchbracelets. Holds the watch securely. Tool ends are hardened for long life.
10. Link Pin Remover
A tool that has a two fold use: pin removal or insertion. This
compact tool has extra spacers to adjust to all bracelet sizes.
Made of non-mar material it will protect precious metals from
scratch marks. The pusher pin is hardened and moves by a fine
feed screw.
CODE
WA-024
DESCRIPTION
WATCH OPENER & PIN REMOVER
15. Lever Type Case Press
Easy lever operated hand press, to close watches with snap backs.
Comes with five nylon dies and two additional spindles for screw-on dies.
CODE
WA-025
DESCRIPTION
LINK PIN REMOVER
11. Link Pin Remover for Bracelet
Convenient tool for removing pins from different types of
bracelet link bands. High impact nylon pads will not scratch
or mar the metal. Pin is made of hardened tool steel.
CODE
WA-012
DESCRIPTION
LINK PIN REMOVER
CODE
WA-011-02
DESCRIPTION
CASE PRESS
231
™
WATCH TOOLS
16. Snap-Back Case Knife- Swiss
20. Universal Case Holder
A Swiss made, curved shaped tool to open all snap type watch
case backs. Gentle leverage removes even the most difficult cases.
A handy adjustable metal bar type case opener that has quadrant
locks to fit in case cover slots. Comfortable cushion hand grips
provide ample torque to open the most stubborn case backs.
CODE
WA-022
DESCRIPTION
CASE KNIFE
CODE
WA-016
DESCRIPTION
CASE HOLDER/ KEY
17. Crab Opener
21. Crystal Remover and Inserter
A compact and convenient wrench, this tool has a knurled screw to
adjust the pins to suit different watch case backs. Pins are
tempered and fine finished to grip the notches for easy removal
and replacement of screw case covers.
A safe and easy way to remove unbreakable watch crystals without
dismantling the watch. The jaws open from 12 to 37mm and are
designed for both ladies and men’s watches. Supplied complete
with baseplate.
CODE
WA-003
SIZE
25/8” X 11/8”
CODE
WA-014
DESCRIPTION
CRYSTAL REMOVER/ BASE
18. Hand Remover
Two different extraction tools for easy removal of delicate watch or
instrument hands. Simple push down on plunger will extract hands.
The center post acts as a guide and retains the hand.
22. Hand Jig with Dies
A bench styled jig that may be held in a vise. Gentle pressure
applied by a central fine pitch screw to properly close case backs.
Jig includes a set of nylon dies so that no mars may occur.
WA-019
WA-021
CODE
WA-019
WA-021
DESCRIPTION
PRESTO TYPE
PLUNGER TYPE
19. Moebius Oils
Specially formulated high purity oils that retain fluidity over a wide
temperature range. Time tested and proven to be the ideal lubricants
for all watch movements and delicate micro mechanisms.
CODE
WA-030
WA-031
WA-032
232
DESCRIPTION
SYNTHETIC OIL
QUARTZ OIL
NATURAL OIL
CODE
WA-020
DESCRIPTION
HAND JIG WITH DIES
23. Vise for Waterproof Watches
An ingenious hand held vise that has an instant locking system.
Plastic protected working surface to avoid scratch marks or mar.
CODE
WA-023
DESCRIPTION
VISE FOR WATCHES
™
WAXES
1. Castaldo® Supercera® Injection Wax
Specifically formulated waxes made from non-toxic natural ingredients. Positively clean burn
out is assured without any ash residue. Built-in release agent allows ease of extraction from
the mold. Select from various types to suit your application.
Available in block form packaging- 50 lb.
CODE
CW-016
CW-017
CW-018
CW-019
CW-020
COLOR
AQUA
ORANGE
RED
GOLD
GREEN
FEATURES
VERY FLEXIBLE
FLEXIBLE
GENERAL PURPOSE
HARD
MINIMAL SHRINKAGE
INJECT. TEMP
140°F/60°C
155°F/68°C
165°F/74°C
170°F/76°C
150°F/65°C
2. Ferris®-Pellet Injection Waxes
Waxes in pallets manufactured from high grade raw materials and formulated for exceptional and consistent quality. These fine injection waxes are suitable
for special applications according to their properties. All wax types have built-in relese agents that help for easy extraction.
Turquoise
Red
A general purpose, tough, medium hard wax suitable
for thin or thick sections. Self releasing from the mold.
Injection Temp. 155°F/68°C
CODE
CW-001
50 lb
A special feature of this medium hard wax is its
fluidity that contributes towards excellent memory and readability. Injection Temp. 160°F/71°C.
CODE
CW-002
50 lb
Blue
NYC-Blue
A tough, hard wax that is ideally suited for molds with
difficult draws. Easy clean extraction for intricate
patterns. Injection Temp. 155°F/68°C.
CODE
CW-003
50 lb
Similar characteristics as the turquoise, but the
brighter hue allows for more clear definition.
Tough with regular hardness. Injection Temp.
155°F/68°C.
CODE
CW-004
50 lb
Aqua
Magna Pink
An all purpose medium hard tough wax that is well suited for small to large molds. Inherent properties are
good for fine details. Injection Temp. 160°F/71°C.
CODE
CW-005
50 lb
A fast melting fluid specialty wax that combines
hardness and toughness. Minimal shrinkage
reproduces fine detail work. Injection Temp.
155°F/68°C.
CODE
CW-006
50 lb
3. Ferris® Platinum Injection Wax
4. Plast-O-Wax
Lavender
Dark Blue
A low temperature injection wax of outstanding
durability and strength. Good flow characteristics give
crisp details. Formulated for extended shelf life.
Minimal shrinkage with flexibility.
Injection Temp. 160°F/71°C.
A frequently used plastic wax in darker shades
for easy readability. Renders a good smooth
surface with minimal shrinkage. May be steam
de-waxed. Ideal for detail work.
CODE
CW-008
50 lb
Light Green
Good fluidity and excellent reproduction. Injection
Temp. 155°F/68°C.
CODE
234
CW-009
50 lb
Medium plasticity. Injection Temp. 155°F/68°C.
CODE
CW-010
50 lb
Purple
Higher Plasticity. Injection Temp.160°F/71°C.
CODE
CW-011
50 lb
™
WAXES
5. Ferris® File-A-Wax
This wax is most suited to produce a variety of finely detailed shapes. Very compatible for creating designs, as it can be sawn, carved and shaped either by
hand or machine. A clean burn out from the mold is guaranteed, however it cannot be injected or steam de-waxed. Identifiable colors indicate the
characteristics. Available as basic kit, in bar, block or slices.
CHARACTERISTICS
Most flexible with regular hardness
Medium hard, with limited flexibility
Hard, with no flexibility, good for fine detail work.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
File-A-Wax® Slices-BSL
Size 17/16” h X 35/8” w in assorted thickness 3/16” to 1”.
Pack contains 16 pcs. 1 pc. of 1”, 3 pcs. of 0.700”
and 4 pcs. each 0.280”, 0.190”, 0.140” thick.
File-A-Wax® Slices-ASL
Size 17/16” h X 35/8” w and assorted thickness 1/8” to 1/4”.
Pack contains 18 pieces. 6 pieces each 0.280”, 0.200”
and 0.135” thick.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
1 LB
CW-338
CW-339
CW-340
File-A-Wax Bar
Size 13/16” X 13/16” X 33/4”- 3 pieces of one color.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
/2 LB
CW-335
CW-336
CW-337
1
File-A-Wax Basic Kit
Size 13/16” X 13/16” X 33/4”- 3 pieces.
CODE
CW-381
COLOR
BLUE/PURPLE/GREEN- 1 EA
CODE
CW-383
CW-384
CW-382
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
File-A-Wax® Block
File-A-Wax® Assortment
Size 3 /2” X 3 /2” X 1 /8” - /2 lb
Size 35/8” X 6” X 11/2” -1 lb
Various shapes and blue, purple, green colors in all
three hardnesses.
1
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
1
1
1
/2 LB
CW-329
CW-330
CW-331
1
1 LB
CW-332
CW-333
CW-334
CODE
CW-410
CW-411
QTY
14 PCS -PROFESSIONAL
11 PCS -JUNIOR
235
™
WAXES
6. Ferris® File-A-Wax Designer Shape
Designer shapes offer a selection of basic pieces in individual shapes. Ideally suited for large
custom design work. Increases productivity while reducing both the carving time and waste. It is the
preferred choice when working on special creations as it may be worked both by hand or machine.
All shapes are available in three grades of hardness. Packaging 1 lb.
D
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
B
CHARACTERISTICS
Most flexible with regular hardness
Medium hard, with limited flexibility
Hard, with no flexibility, good for fine detail work
A. Round: CW-222, 223, 224 2 ea. all other round sizes are 1 ea.
SIZE (D X L)
15/16” X 111/4”
CW-222
CW-223
CW-224
A
C
B. Square- Assorted
SIZE (D X L)
13/4” X 121/8”
CW-225
CW-226
CW-227
SIZE
39/16” SQ X 23/8” H
CW-237
CW-238
CW-239
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE (D X L)
21/4” X 71/2”
CW-228
CW-229
CW-230
SIZE (D X L)
25/8” X 51/2”
CW-231
CW-232
CW-233
SIZE (D X L)
31/16” X 41/16”
CW-234
CW-235
CW-236
D. Oval
C. Square- Block
SIZE
39/16” SQ (22 PCS)
CW-240
CW-241
CW-242
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE(D X d X L)
31/8” X 25/8” X 45/8”
CW-243
CW-244
CW-245
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE(D X d X L)
35/8” X 23/4 ” X 35/8
CW-246
CW-247
CW-248
Pack contains 22 pcs. 5 pcs. each 7/8”, 5/8”, 3/8”, 1/4”
and 2 pcs. of 3/16” thick.
7. Ferris® Wax Ring Tubes
B-1062
T-1062
T-1062E
These preformed tubes and bars provide an intelligent approach when
designing rings, cuff links, small jewelry and other art pieces. They
respond quickly to creative inspirations. Ready to use, in three grades
of hardness, that may be either hand or machine worked. All ring tubes
and bars are 6” long.
B-875
T-150
T-100
T-250
T-200
T-875
Flat Sided Tube
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
236
SIZE
11/8” X 1”
5
/8” hole/ecc
T-100
15/16” X 13/16”
5
/8” hole/ecc
T-200
11/8” X 11/8”
5
/8” hole/ecc
T-250
1” X 1”
5
/8” hole
T-150
CODE
CW-250
CW-251
CW-252
CW-253
CW-254
CW-255
CW-256
CW-257
CW-258
CW-324
CW-325
CW-326
Tube with
Center Hole
Round Bar
Tube with
Hole / Ecc
Flat
Hole / Ecc
Round Tube
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE
7
/8” dia.
5
/8” hole
T-875
11/16” dia.
5
/8” hole/ecc
T-1062E
11/16” dia.
5
/8” hole
T-1062
CODE
CW-306
CW-307
CW-308
CW-309
CW-310
CW-311
CW-312
CW-313
CW-314
Round Bar
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE
7
/8” dia.
B-875
11/16” dia.
B-1062
CODE
CW-300
CW-301
CW-302
CW-303
CW-304
CW-305
™
WAXES
8. Red Utility Wax Sheet
12. Flexible Wax Sheet
An all purpose wax that may be used for filling small imperfections and
applying sprue to sprue bases. Melts at 173°F/78°C and has plastic quality
at room temperature. Pkg 1/2 lb.
These high grade sheets are used by designers for a wide variety of applications, drawing, layout, or tracings. Of even thickness and pliable at room
temperature, these sheets can be cut and formed as desired. Wax sheets
easily burn out from molds. Green- Firm. Pink- Soft.
Size 4” square 32 sheets in a pack.
CODE
CW-414
DESCRIPTION
REGULAR SHEET 3” X 6” X 1/8”
9. Yellow Sticky Wax
A fast sticky wax for joining different waxes together. Melting temperature at
250-275°F/122-135°C.
CODE
CW-415
CW-416
GAUGE
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
IN
0.064”
0.051”
0.040”
0.032”
0.025”
0.020”
0.015”
MM
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.5
0.4
GREEN
CW-363
CW-364
CW-365
CW-366
CW-367
CW-368
CW-369
PINK
CW-370
CW-371
CW-372
CW-373
CW-374
CW-375
CW-376
Wax Sheet Assortment
DESCRIPTION
STICK 1/4” D X 4” L 1 oz
BEADS 1 lb
A collection of wax sheets in all different gauge sizes. Size 4” sq. 32
sheets. Pack contains 4 sheets of 16 & 18G, and 6 sheets of 20, 22, 24,
26G each.
10. Inlay Wax
A wax for filling voids, building, and repairing wax patterns. Can be carved
without chipping or breaking. Melting temperature 163°F/73°C.
CODE
CW-377
CW-378
COLOR
PINK
GREEN
13. Mold-A-Wax®
A durable wax form that works like clay and blends with other waxes at
room temperature. Take advantage of this special feature to free form
sculptures, leaves and flowers. Black- Medium pliability. Red- Soft and
more pliable.Pkg. 1 lb.
CODE
CW-418
CW-419
CW-420
CW-421
DESCRIPTION
STICKS 1/4” D X 4” L 1 oz
STICKS 1/4” D X 4” L 1 oz
CHUNKS 1 lb
CHUNKS 1 lb
BLUE REGULAR
GREEN REGULAR
BLUE REGULAR
GREEN REGULAR
These rods are refined to eliminate impurities and guaranteed to
burn out quickly without expansion or residue. Perfect for use in
a sprue building system. Available in different diameters and
lengths to suit every demanding application.
Red- Flexible and in regular hardness.
Green- More pliable and medium hard.
GREEN
CW-024
CW-025
CW-026
COLOR
BLACK
RED
14. Disclosing Wax
11. Sprue Wax Rods
DIA. X L
1
/4” X 6”
3
/8” X 6”
3
/8” X 24”
CODE
CW-408
CW-409
RED
CW-027
CW-028
CW-029
A creamy type soft wax for repair of superficial imperfections in wax
patterns. This wax helps detect high spots or cavities. Easy to apply with
finger or a spatula. Softens at 98°F/37°C, and flows at 173°F/78°C.
CODE
CW-440
COLOR
DISCLOSING WAX 20 oz
237
™
WAXES
15. Wax Wire- Spool
Pliable wax wire in gauge sizes, strong enough to be twisted, bent or
formed to any shape without cracking or breaking. Suitable for applications
such as clasps, prongs, retention or sprues. Pkg. 1/4 lb
GAUGE
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
INCH
0.162”
0.129”
0.102”
0.081”
0.064”
0.051”
0.040”
0.032”
MM
4.1
3.3
2.6
2.1
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.8
ROUND
CW-341
CW-342
CW-343
CW-344
CW-345
CW-346
CW-347
CW-348
HALF ROUND
CW-355
CW-356
CW-357
-
Wax Wire Assortment
Wax wire in 4” lengths. Round- 10, 14 & 18G Half Round- 6, 8, 12 & 14G
Half Pear- 6G.
CODE
CW-360
DESCRIPTION
ASSORTED
16. Kerr®-Injection Waxes-Flakes
Injection waxes, in flakes, having exceptional flow and flexibility for molds of intricate details. Characteristics include a built-in release agent for clean extraction from the mold. Six grades to select from, depending on individual requirements.
NYC- Pink
Super Pink
Excellent flow and flexibility. Reproduces detail
designs and filigree with ease of extraction from mold.
Injection Temp. 155°F/68°C.
CODE
CW-170
50 lb
A free flowing rapid cooling wax that is easy to extract
from molds. Deep hue color contributes to increased
readability. Injection Temp. 150°F/65°C.
CODE
CW-173
50 lb
Accu Ruby Red
Aqua Green
Preferable for the injection of medium sized molds.
Less flexible, but has good readability with minimal
shrinkage. Injection Temp. 150°F/65°C.
CODE
CW-171
50 lb
General purpose wax for injection in medium to large
molds. Flow and flexibility adapted for detail design
work. Injection Temp. 150°F/65°C.
CODE
CW-174
50 lb
Tuffy Green
Flexplast
A very tough and flexible wax specifically suited to
large molds. Easy to work without fear of damage or
distortion. Injection Temp.165°F/73°C.
CODE
CW-172
50 lb
A deep blue, extremely flexible, free flowing wax that
reproduces sharp detail designs. Tough but easy to
extract from the mold. Injection Temp. 155°F/68°C.
CODE
CW-175
50 lb
17. Kerr® Pearl Injection Wax
Once liquefied at 155°F/68°C, a low injection pressure of 3-10 PSI minimizes pattern shrinkage. Features a uniform thickness, satin smooth surface, and
practically no distortion. Extracts from mold easily and burns out cleanly without any residual ash. Three colors for easy pattern reading.
Sapphire Pearls
CODE
238
CW-176
50 lb
Blue Zircon Pearls
Pink Tourmaline
Pearls
CODE
CODE
CW-177
50 lb
CW-178
50 lb
™
WAXES
18. Matt Wax Bars & Slices
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
Matt carving waxes are formulated for professional
carvers. Waxes are available in three grades with
varying degrees of flexiblity. Waxes are compounded
to avoid contamination, flaws or porosity. Select from
bars, blocks or slices.
Matt Bar Kit
Matt Wax Block
Contains three /6 lb bars of one color.
Size 17/16” X 11/8” X 31/8”. Pkg. 1/2 lb.
Size 17/16” X 31/8” X 33/8” 1/2 lb.
Size 17/16” X 31/8” X 61/2” 1 lb.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
MATT#
2750
CODE
CW-062
CW-061
CW-060
/2 LB
CW-065
CW-064
CW-063
MATT#
2753
2752
2751
Matt Wax Slices -Thin
Size 17/16” x 31/8” assorted thickness from 1/8” to 1”.
Pkg. 1 lb.
Size 1 /16” x 3 /8” assorted thickness from /8” to /2”.
Pkg. 1/2 lb.
CODE
CW-074
CW-073
CW-072
7
1
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
MATT#
2772
2771
2770
Matt Smooth Wax Tablets
These innovations provides jewelry designers and model makers
with large, flat, very smooth surfaces for designing jewelry directly
on to carving wax. Tablet size is 6” X 25/8”.
Set A 6PCS: 3 tablets 4.5mm, 1 tablet 6mm, 1 tablet 8mm & 1
tablet 10.5mm.
Set B 7PCS: 4 tablets 4.5mm & 3 tablets 6mm.
MATT#
2767
2766
2765
1 LB
CW-068
CW-067
CW-066
MATT#
2762
2761
2760
Matt Bracelet Wax Blank
1
CODE
CW-071
CW-070
CW-069
MATT#
2757
2756
2755
1
Matt Wax Slices -Thick
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
MELTING TEMP
200°F / 93°C
225°F / 104°C
230°F / 110°C
Matt Wax Bar
1
Contains three 1/6 lb bars; one each of blue, purple
and green. Size 17/8” X 11/8” X 31/8”. Pkg. 1/2 lb.
CODE
CW-076
CHARACTERISTICS
Flexible and easily bent to shapes
Medium hard, good for carving
Rigid, useful for milling and machining
1
Create your own designs in a variety of shapes.
Round, oval or square 6” long.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
CODE
CW-129
CW-128
CW-126
MATT#
2899
2898
2897
Matt Wax Routing Bur
A carbide bur for routing designs directly in matt
wax tablets. To be used on the matt trimmer.
Size 2.3mm diameter and 15mm cutting edge.
CODE
CW-085
DESCRIPTION
2885 CARBIDE BUR
19. Matt Miter Box Set
A fixture for sawing wax bars, tubes, and rods to
precise lengths. Set consists of aluminum miter
box, steel hand saw, and stop lock.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SET A
CW-077
CW-078
CW-079
MATT#
2773
2774
2775
SET B
CW-080
CW-081
CW-082
MATT#
2776
2777
2778
CODE
CW-101
DESCRIPTION
2920 MATT MITER BOX SET
239
™
WAXES
20. Matt Wax Ring Tubes
Pre-formed special profile wax tubes, in various sizes, get you started quickly on creations
with intricate designs. Available in solid round, tube, or flat side tube, these can be easily
cut to exact lengths using the Matt miter box. One per package.
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
Flat Sided with Hole
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE
1 X 11/8”
5
/8” hole
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
SIZE
11/16” DIA.
5
/8” hole/ecc
11/8” X 11/8”
5
/8” hole
11/4” X 11/4”
5
/8” hole
CODE
CW-030
CW-031
CW-032
CW-033
CW-034
CW-035
CW-036
CW-037
CW-038
MATT#
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
CHARACTERISTICS
Flexible and easily bent to shapes.
Medium hard, good for carving.
Rigid, useful for milling and machining.
Solid Round Bar
SIZE
7
/8” dia.
11/16” dia.
15/16” dia.
CODE
CW-042
CW-043
CW-044
CW-045
CW-046
CW-047
CW-048
CW-049
CW-050
Off Center Hole
CODE
CW-039
CW-040
CW-041
A unique precision controlled method to transform pellets into extrusions of
different profiles. Different design methods are possible; free form on mandrels, on water, and weaving. Kit contains, gun, two brass tips, wrench,
three colors of wax and an instruction book.
For designing on a mandrel or without a support.
For creating graceful models in water.
For producing flexible threads for weaving.
Gun, two brass tips, wrench, three colors of wax,
and 113 page book.
Round with Hole
SIZE
7
/8” dia.
5
/8” hole
MATT#
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
CODE
CW-051
CW-052
CW-053
CW-054
CW-055
CW-056
CW-057
CW-058
CW-059
11/16” dia.
5
/8” hole
15/16” dia.
5
/8” hole
MATT#
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
Matt® Wax Ring Tube Kit
MATT#
2699
2700
2701
21. Matt Wax Gun Kit
Blue Pellets:
Green Pellets:
Red Pellets:
Kit contains:
MELTING TEMP
200°F / 93°C
225°F / 104°C
230°F / 110°C
CODE
CW-075
DESCRIPTION
2720 ASSORTED WAX TUBE
TWO IN EACH COLOR
2 ROUND/4 FLAT SIDE-12PCS.
22. Matt Wax Pellets for Matt Gun
These wax pellets load directly into the Matt gun.
Blue: for mandrel work.
Green: for use on water.
Red: for weaving.
COLOR
BLUE
GREEN
RED
MATT# PACK OF 20
951/1
CW-136
951/2
CW-137
951/5
CW-140
MATT#
951/6
951/7
951/8
PACK OF 130
CW-141
CW-142
CW-143
23. Matt Ring Tube Sizer
Enlarge the finger size of wax models evenly and accurately. Slide this tool
through the hole in the wax ring tube and rotate clockwise. The embedded
steel blade will scrape the inner wall to enlarge the hole. Size 5-12.
CODE
CW-144
CW-145
CW-138
CW-139
240
DESCRIPTION
955 GUN KIT 110V
955/220 GUN KIT 220V
CA951/3 MATT EXTRA TIP-SMALL
CA951/4 MATT EXTRA TIP-LARGE
CODE
CW-122
CW-123
DESCRIPTION
2890-E EURO SCALE
2890 US SCALE
™
WAXES
24. Matt Creative Setting Kit
Jewelry designer Adolfo Mattielo in his book “How to create settings in Metal Wire and
Wax” illustrates a step by step guideline with drawings explaining the process. The 8” x 11”
plastic laminated book has 32 pages with 250 detailed illustrations. Additionally, the
templates provided enhance your stone setting and positioning ability.
CODE
CW-115
BK-422
CW-117
CW-118
DESCRIPTION
2852 CREATIVE SETTING KIT (INCLUDES BOOK AND TWO TEMPLATES)
2851 BOOK- HOW TO CREATE SETTINGS
2853 SPARE TEMPLATE FOR ROUND SETTING
2554 SPARE TEMPLATE FOR OVAL, PEAR AND MARQUISE SETTINGS
25. Techniques of Jewelry Design
A full color 152 page book presents a comprehensive resource for designers and model
makers. Each chapter explains projects with clear illustrations, color rendering and gem
stone setting by professional jewelers.
CODE
CW-160
BK-427
CW-163
DESCRIPTION
5100 BOOK AND SET OF FIVE TEMPLATES
1522 BOOK- TECHNIQUES OF JEWELRY
5110 SET OF FIVE TEMPLATES ONLY
26. Matt “ Wax Modeling ”- Video
A professional VHS Video, demonstrating the correct techniques when
working with modeling wax. Explicit details guide you each step of the way
to perfection. Time-16 min.
CODE
CW-151
DESCRIPTION
1422 VHS VIDEO
CW-153
27. Matt Designer Templates for Jewelry
Made in unbreakable light green plastic, these templates eliminate the time
consuming process of drawing. Different cut out shapes for ladies or gents
patterns have all sizes clearly calibrated. Suitable for brilliant, oval, pear
and marquise shapes, in both metric and carat equivalents.
CODE
CW-152
CW-153
CW-154
CW-155
CW-156
CW-155
CW-154
CW-152
CW-156
DESCRIPTION
#1-5102- STONES
#2-5103- SIGNET RING
#3-5104- BALLERINA RINGS
#4-5105- FANCY RING
#5-5106- RING SIDE VIEW
28. Matt Ring Templates
29. Matt Bracelet Templates
Easy to use when designing the outlines of ring sizes for ladies
or gents. Made in unbreakable plastic, it includes 18 of the most
popular to unusual designs. Includes instructions.
Enables layout with accuracy and symmetry. Made in durable
plastic with precise milled shapes, it is easy to trace round, oval
or square bracelets in all sizes. Includes instructions.
CODE
CW-119
DESCRIPTION
2855 RING TEMPLATE
CODE
CW-125
DESCRIPTION
2896 BRACELET TEMPLATE
241
™
WAXES
30. Matt® Mini Lathe with Gauge
32. Matt Shaper
A hand held versatile lathe. Assembles directly to your Foredom handpiece
#30 for all types of turning and milling. You can easily produce bands,
bezels, or settings with the tools provided. A stop gauge lets you achieve
exact measurements on thickness and diameters. Kit includes lathe, collets,
cutting tools, wax rods, wrench and 32 page booklet.
Made of aluminum, with a steel support table, this accessory fits directly on
to your handpiece.The table provides support for large or small workpieces
and is adjustable for cuts at all angles. A removeable fence regulates the
depth of cut ensuring a smooth safe operation. Kit contains accessory with
rotary files, template wrench, and instruction booklet.
CODE
CW-102
DESCRIPTION
2803 MATT MINI LATHE KIT
CODE
CW-124
CW-099
Spare Tools for Matt Mini Lathe
CODE
CW-098
CW-103
CW-113
CW-114
CW-149
CW-083
DESCRIPTION
2804 GAUGE ONLY
2801 S.S. BLADES SET OF 3
2830 HOLDING COLLET
2835 MILLING TABLE ONLY
CA2845 TOOL SQUARE END
2802 CENTERING TOOL
COLOR
BLUE
PURPLE
GREEN
31. Matt® Trimmer
Enables you to precisely file shapes, flat or curved at various angles.
Fits to your Foredom handpiece #30 with an adjustable work platform. This
feature is designed to simplify the operation while improving performance.
Ideal for creating channels. Kit includes rotary files, ring templates, color
waxes and an instruction manual.
33. Matt® Wax Rods
Matt wax rods for use in the Matt Mini lathe. All rods have 1/4” centering
holes for holding collet. Four pieces 11/2” long per color.
Ø 15/16”
CW-104
CW-106
CW-105
MATT#
2810
2812
2811
DESCRIPTION
2880 MATT TRIMMER-KIT
Ø 13/32”
CW-107
CW-109
CW-108
MATT#
2815
2817
2816
Ø 7/8”
CW-110
CW-112
CW-111
MATT#
2820
2822
2821
34. Matt Gold Collector
Made of high impact plastic, with a removable plexiglass shield, to provide a
convenient enclosure for working of precious metals. Collects particles of
gold and other precious metals for easy retrieval. Also protects eyes, skin
and clothing while drilling, grinding and brushing.
CODE
CW-147
CODE
CW-121
DESCRIPTION
2895 MATT SHAPER
2886 ROTARY FILE
DESCRIPTION
3200 MATT GOLD COLLECTOR
35. Mandrel Tapered/Stepped
Smooth polished mandrels, tapered and stepped are mounted on a
sturdy steel base. Mandrel rotates for easy creation of wax wire designs.
Suitable for ring sizes 4-13.
CW-100
CS-204
242
CODE
CW-100
CS-204
DESCRIPTION
TAPERED MANDREL
STEPPED MANDREL
™
WAXES
36. Precision Speedy Wax Tool
A high quality wax tool for wax modeling. This compact unit has a rheostat control for various
temperature settings. The pen type handpiece is designed to dissipate heat. It also contains a
slide switch for convenience. The tool tip is easily interchanged. Ideal for carving, shaping and
quick touch ups.
CODE
CI-012
CI-013
37. Wax Worker
SPECIFICATIONS
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
A versatile tool with excellent wax control for pattern making, repairing and spruing. Variable
temperature settings suitable for different wax types. Ergonomic handpiece has instant heat up.
Replaceable tips, with a single set screw. May also be used for carving, smoothing and texturing.
CODE
CI-001
CI-002
CI-002-01
CI-002-02
38. Precision Waxer
DESCRIPTION
110V USA W/ONE TIP
220V USA W/ONE TIP
EXTRA HANDPIECE
EXTRA TIP ONLY
Heavy duty industrial waxer for wax modeling, carving, shaping or sizing. Accurate temperature
control with nine different settings. Slim, lightweight handpiece with changeable tips for the most
challenging work. Features include pilot light, on/off switch, handpiece and three assorted tips.
Spare Tips for Precision Waxer
CODE
CI-005
CI-006
CI-007
DESCRIPTION
YELLOW WIDE GROOVE
BLUE NARROW BEND
ORANGE FLAT
CODE
CI-004
CI-003
CI-003-01
DESCRIPTION
100V USA
220V USA
EXTRA HANDPIECE
CODE
CI-008
CI-009
CI-010
CI-011
DESCRIPTION
GREEN NEEDLE
BLACK SPRUE BURNING
RED WIDE
CORD & HANDLE
39. Kerr® Ultra Waxer
40. Speedy Wax Pen
This premium quality electronic waxer includes a control unit and the ultra-spatula, one
heating tip, holder for the ultra-spatula and extra heating tips with a clear protective
cover and complete operating instructions. Features : Four programmable temperature
presets. Quick heat cycle for rapid heating of tips. Temperature range 100°F/60°C to
700°F/370°C. Selectable °F or °C temp. display. CE Marked.
Handy, cordless pocket tool for extra convenience. Finds
use in nearly every wax modeling task, carving, shaping
and quick touch ups. General wire form tip for all wax
applications. 1.5V, AA alkaline batteries (included). Two
different temperature pens high or low. Also available is a
three piece accessory tip set.
A
CODE
CI-260
CI-261
CI-272
B
DESCRIPTION
BUILT-IN /110V SM PKT
BUILT-IN /220V SM PKT
ULTRA SPATULA CODE
HANDLE
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
CODE
DESCRIPTION
CI-262
CI-263
CI-264
CI-265
CI-266
CI-267
CI-268
CI-269
CI-270
A. SM PKT
B LG PKT
C. BEAVERTAIL
D. SM #7
E. LG #7
F. NEEDLE
G. 1/2 HOLLENBACK
H. SM DENTURE
I. LG DENTURE
CI-271
J. DENTURE SPOON
CODE
CI-024
CI-026
CI-025
CI-027
DESCRIPTION
HIGH TEMP. WAX PEN
ONE TIP REGULATOR
LOW TEMP. WAX PEN
WAX PEN TIP- SET OF 3
243
™
WAXES
41. Wax Carvers Tools Set
The most complete set of carvers for the professional wax modeler. Seven well balanced, polished and
tempered steel tools for creative carving and design versatility. All tools are 6” long and organized on a
hardwood stand which has a sharpening stone. Carvers are also available individually.
#1
#2
#3
CODE
CS-156
#4
DESCRIPTION
SET #1-7 W/ STAND
Spare Carvers
#5
CODE
CS-111
CS-112
CS-113
CS-114
CS-115
CS-116
CS-117
CS-118
#6
#7
DESCRIPTION
CARVER #1
CARVER #2
CARVER #3
CARVER #4
CARVER #5
CARVER #6
CARVER #7
SPATULA
42. Wax Heating Tray
The wax tray keeps three different waxes melted in separate compartments, two small and one
large. Features include a hinged cover, thermostat dial control and pilot lamp. Temperature is
adjustable to a maximum of 280°F. Useful for the model maker while assembling trees.
CODE
CW-014
CW-015
43. Kerr® Jewelers Wax Kit
A wax assortment which includes round, half round, rectangular and square
ring tubes. In addition, it also includes build up wax, sprue wax and sticky
wax. This makes it a perfect set for wax modelers.
CODE
CW-441
SPECIFICATIONS
110V/ 60Hz
220V/ 50Hz
45. Deluxe Wax Mandrel
A versatile tool to make wax patterns for rings, bracelets and findings.
Includes a set of full sleeve sizes 4-13 that rotate 360° and are
easily mounted or removed.
DESCRIPTION
WAX KIT
CODE
CS-205
DESCRIPTION
COMPLETE SET
46. Smoothy Flameless-Wax Finisher
44. Alcohol Lamp
Glass bowl lamp with a wick and a safety cap. Bowl holds 4 oz. of fuel.
Faceted sides of the bowl allow it to be inclined to an angular position.
CODE
LM-130
LM-131
LM-132
244
DESCRIPTION
ADJUSTABLE WICK
LARGE WICK
REPLACEABLE WICK
Pencil point torch of heated air. Ideal for blending uneven surfaces without
actually touching the wax. Uses butane fuel. UL registered. When the tip is
removed it may be used as a mini torch for light soldering and repair work.
Temp. 2300°F/1260°C.
CODE
CW-442
DESCRIPTION
MINI TORCH
™
WAXES
47. Wax Burs
50. Double-End Vulcanite File
These are special burs for carving wax models. Widely spaced flutes
provide smooth cutting and will not clog like standard burs.
Available individually or in a set of 6 shapes. Shank size 3/32”.
Double end wax files have tooth forms especially designed for use on wax,
plastics and other soft materials. One file has both coarse and fine cuts.
CODE
BR-484
BR-486
BR-485
BR-487
BR-488
BR-489
BR-490
DESCRIPTION
016-HELIX
018-ROUND
023-HELIX
023-ROUND
030-ROUND
050-ROUND
6 PCS- (2 HELIX, 4 ROUND)
CODE
FL-001
FL-002
DESCRIPTION
8” WAX FILE- DELUXE
8” WAX FILE- ECONOMY
51. Kerr® Vacufilm
Reduces surface tension specifically for investing under vacuum.
48. Kerr® Debubblizer
A surface tension reducing agent that enables investment to flow uniformly
and fill all portions of the wax pattern.
CODE
CR-930
CR-931
CODE
CR-920
CR-921
CONTENTS
8 oz
32 oz
49. Kerr® Microfilm
An oily, but water soluble die lubricant, that aids release of wax patterns
from molds without distortion.
CONTENTS
8 oz
32 oz
52. Kerr® Solitine
A clean up and finishing solvent. Ideal to even out and smooth the surfaces
of wax patterns.
CODE
CR-940
CONTENTS
8 oz
53. Wax-o-Film
CODE
CR-910
CR-911
CONTENTS
8 oz
32 oz
To improve investment adhesion, wax patterns
may be dipped or coated with this solution to
avoid distortion and air bubbles in casting.
CODE
CW-165
CONTENTS
1 gallon
Comparitive Weights
Coin Silver
0.978 times as heavy as Fine Silver
0.995 times as heavy as Sterling
Gold 10k
1.113 times as heavy as Sterling Silver
0.885 times as heavy as 14k Yellow Gold
0.743 times as heavy as 18k Yellow Gold
Gold 14k
1.257 times as heavy as Sterling Silver
0.839 times as heavy as 18k Yellow Gold
1.130 times as heavy as 10k Yellow Gold
Gold 18k
1.498 times as heavy as Sterling Silver
1.192 times as heavy as 14k Yellow Gold
0.725 times as heavy as Platinum
54. Wax Kleen
An easy to rub on organic solution that gives
wax patterns a very smooth surface before
casting. Experience high quality finish on cast
products.
CODE
CW-168
CW-169
CONTENTS
8 oz
4 oz
245
™
BOOKS
1. Jewelry Making
For Schools, Tradesmen, Craftsmen
(Revised Edition)
by Murray Bovin; Revised by Peter M. Bovin
A comprehensive, well-illustrated, easyto-follow reference guide for the beginner and advanced craftsman. Covers
practical and contemporary methods of jewelry making such as casting, stone setting,
jewelry construction and decorative processes.
6. The Complete Metalsmith
by Tim McCreight
A handy bench reference that clearly explains shaping, forging, raising, mechanisms, casting and reticulation. This easy-to-use book describes everything from the use of tools to metals and their
properties.
BK-406 (Spiral bound – 150 pages)
BK-401 (Spiral bound – 288 pages)
2. Jewelry: Concepts and Technology
7. Professional Goldsmithing
by Oppi Untracht
A Contemporary Guide to Traditional Jewelry
Techniques by Alan Revere
The most thorough reference book available on
traditional and innovative jewelry-making
techniques. Features contemporary works
from over 300 jewelers. 900 photos, 377
illustrations, step-by-step instructions, comprehensive glossary and a detailed index. A
must-have book.
BK-402 (Hardcover – 840 pages)
An indispensable reference guide to the art of
handcrafting fine jewelry for both beginners
and professionals. Combines over 400 color
photos and 140 illustrations with charts, tables
and step-by-step projects. Learn how to make
rings, bracelets, chains, clasps, earrings and necklaces. BK-407 (Hardcover – 226 pages)
3. The Art of Jewelry Making
8. The Design and Creation of Jewelry
Classic & Original Designs
by Alan Revere
by Robert Von Neumann
Learn to craft a wide assortment of original
designer jewelry using projects from
many contemporary artisans. Contains
detailed instructions, an introduction to
tools, and techniques such as engraving,
forging, soldering, enameling and more.
BK-403 (Hardcover – 144 pages)
BK-408 (Softcover – 321 pages)
4. Jewelry: Contemporary Design and
9. Jewelry – Two Books in One
Technique
by Chuck Evans
by Madeline Coles
Solid introduction to creating handmade jewelry
and other metal objects. Clear demonstrations of over 65 metalworking techniques. 365 photos and illustrations.
Learn standard techniques, as well as specialized tasks including anodizing aluminum
and titanium.
246
A complete reference guide showing traditional and
contemporary methods and materials of jewelry
making. Learn basic and specialized metalworking, shaping and decorative techniques.
Covers cutting, stamping, pickling, coloring, polishing and design transfer methods.
A unique instructional book with die-cut pages
devoted to 23 outstanding projects. The top of each
page illustrates each project and the bottom of
each page discusses the appropriate techniques required to complete your work.
Explanations of 20 techniques including cutting,
sawing, drilling, filing, polishing, soldering, wire
twisting, mitering, stone setting and more.
BK-404 (Hardcover – 267 pages)
BK-409 (Hardcover–128 pages)
5. Practical Jewelry Making
10. Jeweler’s Resource
by Loosli/Merz/Schaffner
by Bruce G. Knuth
A comprehensive book providing practical, instructional knowledge for proficiency in the jewelry
trade. Extensive coverage of basic operations including filing, sawing, soldering
and drilling. Complex forming, assembling, setting and finishing operations are
also covered.
A practical tool for the bench jeweler, student and
retail jeweler. Easy-to-follow text and illustrations.
Contains an extensive list of gems and gem properties; diagrams of gem-cutting styles; legal
standards for diamond, gold and silver marketing; formulas and chemical preparations; and
measurement conversion and comparison tables.
BK-405 (Hardcover – 164 pages)
BK-410 (Spiralbound – 112 pages)
™
11. The Jeweler’s Bench Reference
by Harold O’Connor
A handy pocket-size reference guide that
explains all types of jewelry making techniques. Vital information on fabricating, soldering, stone-setting, plating and casting.
BK-411 (Spiral bound – 68 pages)
12. Practical Jewelry Repair
BOOKS
16. Jewelry: Fundamentals of
Metalsmithing
by Tim McCreight
Clear and insightful instruction on jewelry making methods for the beginner or intermediate metalsmith.
Features various techniques
including fabricating, surface treatments, joining, finishing, stone setting,
chain making, mechanisms and casting.
Color photos of finished pieces are used to
demonstrate each
technique.
BK-416 (Hardcover – 143 pages)
17. Ring Repair
by James Hickling
An excellent reference book about the methods
and techniques of the professional jewelry repairer and restorer. Demonstrates a wide range of
repair work using modest tools; the various processes and materials required; and stock holding of precious metals, solders and gemstones. Covers and
illustrates basic techniques of soldering, casting,
wire-drawing, polishing, sawing and filing.
BK-412 (Hardcover – 193 pages)
by Alan Revere
Documents the repair, alteration and
restoration of rings in gold, silver and
platinum. This book is full of trade
secrets and tips and is indispensible to anyone who works with rings. A
combination of text and photography
presents every step of each project in a
clear, concise manner. Includes 140 color photos and 90 sketches.
BK-417 (Soft cover – 128 pages)
13. The Art of Engraving
18. Silversmithing
by James B. Meek
A complete authoritative introduction to the art of
gun engraving. Contains step-by-step instructions,
technical information, designs and layouts to
complete each project. Over 1,400 photos, drawings and designs.
BK-413 (Hardcover – 196 pages)
14. Silversmithing and Art Metal
For Schools, Tradesmen, Craftsmen (Revised
Edition)
by Murray Bovin; Revised by Peter M. Bovin
An excellent project-oriented book for silversmiths. Contains the latest metal techniques
including forming, constructing and decorating.
Easy-to-follow instructions with over 300 illustrations.
BK-414 (Soft cover – 176 pages)
15. Practical Casting: A Studio Reference
by Tim McCreight
A handy reference for jewelers, metalsmiths and
sculptors. Covers many different techniques
including model-making, spruing, investing, as
well as vacuum, centrifugal and sand casting.
BK-415 (Spiral bound – 152 pages)
by Rupert Fine gold & William Seitz
An excellent instructional manual that
enables you to translate your jewelry designs into metal by raising,
sinking, forging, stretching, fabricating, or casting. Contains more than 700
photos and drawings.
BK-418 (Hardcover – 460 pages)
19. Centrifugal or Lost Wax Jewelry
Casting
(Revised Edition) by Murray Bovin; Revised
by Peter M. Bovin
This how-to book, detailing the elements of centrifugal casting (lost
wax method), is a must for
beginners and professionals.
Thorough explanations on waxes,
model making, investing, burnout and
casting. This revised edition covers the
latest techniques and equipment. Useful
information on white metal casting and gold
refining. Includes photos of work in progress.
BK-419 (Spiral bound – 143 pages)
20. Jewelry Wax Modeling
by Adolfo Mattiello
Learn how to effectively use carving wax
to express your ideas and create harmonious designs. Jewelry modeling
techniques are presented with progressive step-by-step instructions and
drawings of each model. Contains practical information on tools and stone setting,
as well as creating your own templates.
Provides answers to frequently asked questions.
BK-420 (Hardcover – 161 pages)
247
™
BOOKS
21. Basic Wax Modeling
by Hiroshi Tsuyuki
This book illustrates how practical wax modeling is
for designing jewelry. Presents 11 basic projects
designed to teach the use of tools and types
of waxes in the design and creation of wax
models. Step-by-step photos, descriptions, sketches and notes demonstrate the
processes of each project. Offers a number of
sketches suggesting design possibilities.
BK-421 (Hardcover – 164 pages)
22. How to Create Settings
in Metal Wire and Wax
by Adolfo Mattiello
Contains over 250 diagrams for creating settings in metal, wire and wax. Well-illustrated, detailed directions guide you
through the procedures of various settings including regular wire settings, slim-line
wire settings, wax settings, special wax settings
and joining settings to form a cluster.
26. Practical Wax Modeling
Advanced Techniques for Wax Modelers
by Hiroshi Tsuyuki and Yoko Ohba
The companion text to “Basic Wax Modeling” with
detailed instructions and photos of each technique.
Covers soft and hard wax modeling techniques,
combinations of waxes, mitsuro and its uses, a
variety of textures and methods of finishing castings. Helpful for experienced wax workers and as
an addition to “Basic Wax Modeling.”
BK-426 (Hardcover – 154 pages)
27. Techniques of Jewelry
Illustration and Color Rendering
by Adolfo Mattiello
Beautifully illustrated guide to jewelry rendering.
Some of the best jewelry designers in the field
explain and demonstrate the illustration
process.
BK-427 (Hardcover – 152 pages)
BK-422 (Softcover – 33 pages)
23. Classical Loop-in-Loop Chains
& Their Derivatives
by Jean Reist Stark & Josephine Reist Smith
Clearly presented procedures for making a variety of chains based on classic loop-in-loop
techniques. Details 34 projects with black
& white photos and drawings to guide
you through each step. Tools and equipment for each project are specified and
appropriate clasps for each chain type are suggested. This is the definitive book on the subject.
BK-423 (Hardcover–190 pages)
The Professional Approach
by Robert R. Wooding
A complete course in stone-setting, basic enough
for an apprentice, yet in-depth enough to benefit the
experienced setter. Explores various setting techniques and the preparation, use and care of
tools. Detailed explanations of pinpoint-and prongsetting (round and fancy-cut diamonds), bezel setting, channel setting and bead setting.
BK-428 (Hardcover – 178 pages)
24. Gemstones of the World
29. Gem Identification Made Easy
by Walter Schumann
by Antoinette L. Matlins & A. C. Bonanno
A comprehensive reference guide for gemstones
containing color photos of more than 1,400 specimens. Includes technical data on gemstone
properties, formation and structure of
gems and cutting. Recommended for
beginners and experts.
Easy-to-read book that explains how to use pocket,
portable and laboratory instruments to identify diamonds and colored gems. Learn how to recognize
real gems from imitations. Provides the latest
information on treatments to improve a gem’s
appearance.
BK-424 (Hardcover – 272 pages)
25. Gemstone Buying Guide
by Renée Newman
Fascinating, easy-to-read guide for choosing and
buying colored gems. Practical pointers for
judging gems by their color, transparency, flaws
and brilliance. Includes topics on gem treatments, cleaning and care, as well as
price comparisons, quality evaluations
and fake stones. A valuable resource for
consumers and professionals. Over 150 color
photos.
248
28. Diamond Setting:
BK-425 (Softcover – 148 pages)
BK-429 (Hardcover – 270 pages)
30. The Basics of Bead Stringing
by Genevieve Bourget
A complete illustrated approch for beginners and
advance designers. Specific procedures, to begin
designing and producing their own jewelry.
BK-400 (Soft cover – 62 pages)